B-64647EN - 02 FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL

< +HMI
SETUP MANUAL
B-64647EN/02
© FANUC CORPORATION, 2017

- No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
- The design and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's "Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law".
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from
where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations
of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact
FANUC for advice.
In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be performed, and if the
manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any operations that are not explicitly described as being possible
are "not possible".
Program and device names belonging to companies other than FANUC in this manual include registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
However, the ® and ™ marks may be omitted for some of those names.
B-64647EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
When using FANUC iHMI, you must comply with the instructions written in "SAFETY 2
PRECAUTIONS".
3
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION,
4
NOTE, AND MEMO
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing
5
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into " ! Warning" and " !
Caution" according to the degree of the risk or severity of damage. 6
Also, supplementary information is described as "Note" and "Memo".
Read these indications thoroughly before using this product.
7
! Used if a danger resulting in the death or serious injury of the user is
WARNING expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved procedure.
8
Used if a danger resulting in the minor injury of the user or equipment
! damage is expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved
CAUTION procedure. A1

NOTE
Used if points to keep in mind not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to
be indicated. A2
 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or additional information

not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to be indicated.
Z
MEMO
* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
B-64647EN/02
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following warnings and cautions provide information to be noted when
1 handing the CNC device for safer use of the machine with the CNC device.
2 • Carefully check that data you want to enter is correctly entered before
performing the next operation. Operation with incorrect data may
cause unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the
work or machine or injury.
3 • Carefully check that program command value, offset value, current
position, and external signal settings are correct before starting the
machine for operation, such as machining the work. Also, perform trial
4 operation, such as using the single block, feed speed override, or
machine lock function, or operating without a tool or work, to carefully
check that the machine operates correctly.
5 • Check that an appropriate feed speed value is specified for the

operation. The maximum feed speed is normally limited for each
! machine. Follow the manual of the machine as well because the
6 WARNING optimal speed is different depending on the operation. Operation with

an incorrect speed may cause unexpected load to the machine,
resulting in damage to the work or machine or injury.
7 • Before using the tool offset function, carefully check the offset
direction and value. Operation with incorrect data may cause
unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the work
8 or machine or injury.
• Optimal values are set to the CNC and PMC parameters, so they do
not normally need to be changed. If you change the parameter for
A1 some reason, fully understand its function before change. An incorrect

parameter setting may cause unexpected behavior of the machine
depending on the setting value, resulting in damage to the work or
A2 machine or injury.
s-2
B-64647EN/02
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
• After pressing the power on button, do not touch any key on the
keyboard until the screen appears. Some keys are used for
maintenance or special operation and may cause unexpected
behavior.
• NC programs, parameters, and variables are stored in the non-volatile
1
memory in the CNC device. These data are usually not lost by
!
CAUTION
powering on/off. However, precious data stored in the non-volatile
memory may be lost due to incorrect operation or may have to be
2
erased due to fault recovery. To recover fast from such an unexpected
situation, back up all kinds of data beforehand.
• There are some embedded machine operations and screen functions
3
installed by machine tool builders (MTB). For how to use them and
precautions, refer to the appropriate manual provided by each
machine tool builder.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
s-3
B-64647EN/02
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
0.1
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC

APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
1
2 Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or
more applications or use networks.
Failure to do so may cause an unexpected machine behavior, resulting
3 in damage to a tool, machine, or workpiece. In the worst-case scenario,

the death or serious injury of the user is expected to occur.
• Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC
4 data or a series of related data set by two or more above applications

including network functions. Because they are executed based on
each individual cycles (in other words, asynchronous cycles), there is
a possibility that the data will be written in an unexpected order.
5 Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.
- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
6 ! - Two or more network functions
WARNING Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below.
However, all may not be listed completely because new features will
7 be added in the future.
• Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same
byte from being written by the following two or more applications
8 including network functions. While an application reads and writes one
byte of PMC signals, other applications may write the same byte.
• Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a
A1 NC function by using the following two or more applications including
network functions. Because they are executed based on each
individual cycles (in other words, asynchronous cycles), there is a
A2 possibility that the NC may receive the PMC signal set in an
unexpected order.
s-4
B-64647EN/02
• Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the
following two or more applications including network functions, the
coherency of the read multi-byte data (in other words, reading all
latest data at once) is not guaranteed. To ensure the coherency of the
multi-byte data, prepare flags to notify the completion of reading or
1
writing process that is separated from the entity of the data and make
the handshaking process to access the data by using the flags.
2
Data List Table
Category Data
3
General data Parameter, Tool compensation value and related
for NC data, Work zero offset value and related data,
Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related
4
data, Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and
related data, Tool management function data, Tool
life management data, Error compensation related 5
data, Overtravel check (Interference check) related
data, Software operator’s panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter 6
Laser, punch Tool data for punch press and related data, Safety
!
press, or wire
cut data
zone data and related data, laser cutting condition
data, laser oscillator setting data, wire electrode
7
CAUTION consumption compensation data, guide support
compensation data, workpiece leveling data
Other data Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network
8
setting
List Table of Applications and Network Functions

A1
Category
Application
Function
PMC ladder, Macro executor, C language executor,
A2
FANUC PICTURE, FOCAS2
Network
functions
FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP,
PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, CC-Link
Z
• CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/
F address. Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and
network read or write PMC signals used by these functions. When
reading or writing the same PMC signal, applications or CNC functions
may work in an unexpected manner.
As for the CNC functions of interest, refer to “LIST OF FUNCTIONS
USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS” in “FANUC
Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)”
(B-64483EN-1) .
s-5
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
s-6
B-64647EN/02
PREFACE 
RELATED MANUALS
PREFACE 1
The iHMI consists of applications that support CNC operations and the "Home 2
screen" that starts each application. The iHMI allows you to customize each
application and add your custom applications to the Home screen. This manual
describes the customization method and specifications of the iHMI. 3
For details about the iHMI and iHMI applications, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN) and "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1). 4
0.1
1 RELATED MANUALS 5
The table below lists related manuals. 6
Table1 Related Manuals List
Manual name Specification
7
number
FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN 8
FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-1
FANUC iHMI Machining Cycle OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FANUC iHMI Set-up Guidance OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64644EN-2
B-64644EN-3
A1
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL
B-64490EN
A2
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B-64485EN
Z
FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-66284EN
B-64483EN
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
B-64483EN-1
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION)
p-1
B-64647EN/02
PREFACE 
RELATED MANUALS
Manual name Specification

number
B-64484EN
1 FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/
Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL
2 FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B

B-64513EN
FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i Common to Lathe System/Machining B-63874EN
3 Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN-1
4 OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FANUC iCAPT OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64654EN
CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63164EN
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
p-2
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1
2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 2
3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 3
4 MAINTENENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 4
5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 5
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 A
c-1
B-64647EN/02
1
2
A1
A2
c-2
B-64647EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO ...........s-1 3
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ..s-4
PREFACE ............................................................................................... p-1 4
1 RELATED MANUALS .......................................................................... p-1
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW ..............................................................2
1.1.1
1.1.2
Storage Locations of Applications and Data .................................... 2
Home Screen Settings ..................................................................... 3 6
1.1.3 Settings for When an Application Is Started/Running ...................... 4
1.1.4
1.1.5
CNC Operation Screen Settings ...................................................... 4
Machining/Measurement Cycle Settings .......................................... 9
7
1.1.6 Setup for iHMI Functions ................................................................ 10
1.2 ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED FOR iHMI SETUP ........................12 8
1.2.1 User application .............................................................................. 12
1.2.2 FANUC PICTURE .......................................................................... 14
1.2.3 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table ....................................... 14 A1
1.3 iHMI HARDWARE PERFORMANCE TABLE ..............................15
1.3.1 iHMI Hardware Performance Table ................................................ 15
1.4 iHMI AUTOMATIC STARTUP SETTING (PANEL iH PRO) ........16 A2
2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ...................................20 Z
2.1.1 Customizable Applications ............................................................. 20
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI ...22
2.2.1 Application Definition File ............................................................... 22
2.2.1.1 Starting an application with a screen specified ....................... 25
2.2.1.2 Setting a shortcut key ............................................................. 25
2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File ....................................................... 28
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS .............................................37
2.3.1 Customizing the Home Screen ....................................................... 37
2.3.1.1 Changing the background of the Home screen ...................... 37
2.3.1.2 Adding the shutdown button to the Home screen
(PANEL iH Pro only) ............................................................... 37
c-3
B-64647EN/02
2.3.2 Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status Display Area . 39

2.3.2.1 Adding status icons and character string display ................... 39
2.3.2.2 Changing the path icon ........................................................... 45
2.3.2.3 Changing the text weight in the message display .................. 47
2.3.3 Adding Failure Diagnosis Messages .............................................. 48
1 2.3.3.1 Alarm and operator message types that can be added .......... 48
2.3.3.2 Diagnosable numbers ............................................................. 48
2 2.3.3.3 Environments required to create failure diagnosis messages ... 49
2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table ............................... 50
2.3.3.5 Creating failure diagnosis messages ...................................... 54
3 2.3.3.6 Creating different language messages ................................... 62

2.3.4 Notes on Using the Japanese/Chinese Input Function .................. 65
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION .......................... 70
4 2.4.1 Setting Up Tool Manager ............................................................... 70
2.4.1.1 NC tool database management .............................................. 70
2.4.1.2 Tool management function customization .............................. 72
5 2.4.1.3 Limiting display items in the tool catalog data management
screen ..................................................................................... 73
2.4.1.4 Using the old format tool catalog database ............................ 75
6 2.4.1.5 Customizing display items on the table display screen .......... 76
2.4.1.6 Customizing the table column size in the table display
screen ..................................................................................... 81
7 2.4.1.7 Customizing the tool list (tree view) on the tool individual
settings screen ....................................................................... 85
2.4.1.8 Setting to hide the T codes ..................................................... 91
8 2.4.1.9 Setting the multi-edge tool management function .................. 92
2.4.2 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function ................................... 92
2.4.2.1 Application definition file ......................................................... 92
A1 2.4.2.2 Supported systems ................................................................. 93
2.4.2.3 Setting a multi-path system .................................................... 93
2.4.2.4 Auxiliary function time setting window .................................... 94
A2 2.4.2.5 Outputting the estimation result to an XML file ....................... 95
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION ........................ 97
Z 2.5.1 Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen .......................................... 97
2.5.1.1 Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function ....................... 97
2.5.1.2 Setting the multi-path edit paths and order ............................. 98
2.5.1.3 Enabling/disabling the multi-path display function .................. 99
2.5.1.4 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path
display .................................................................................. 100
2.5.1.5 Hiding the modal G codes .................................................... 101
2.5.1.6 Setting machine data to be displayed on the base screen ... 102
2.5.1.7 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon
display .................................................................................. 108
2.5.1.8 Changing the traveling direction guide ................................. 109
2.5.1.9 Setting the workpiece coordinates slide ............................... 111
2.5.1.10 Setting the displayed contents on the setting slide ............... 112
c-4
B-64647EN/02
2.5.1.11 Opening/closing the custom macro variable slide ................. 114

2.5.1.12 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and values ....... 115
2.5.1.13 Enabling/disabling the workpiece measurement function ..... 118
2.5.1.14 Updating the coordinate value on the Preset Relative Coordi-
nates window in synchronization with axis movement .......... 119
2.5.1.15 Showing/hiding the custom macro variable names ............... 119 1
2.5.1.16 Condition to use the machining simulation function .............. 121
2.5.1.17 Machining simulation function settings ................................. 125
2.5.1.18 Machining simulation screen ................................................. 136 2
2.5.1.19 Enabling/disabling the turning function and milling function . 144
2.5.1.20 Setting program guidance messages ................................... 145
2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function ........................................... 149
3
2.5.1.22 Setting the soft keys on the machining drawing screen ........ 153
2.5.1.23 Enabling/disabling the cutting condition calculation function 154
2.5.1.24 Setting the string search for programs on the data server .... 154
4
2.5.1.25 Setting the function to highlight a program that is being
edited .................................................................................... 156
2.5.1.26 Setting the misoperation prevention function ........................ 160
5
2.5.1.27 Setting up the fixed sentence function .................................. 161
2.5.1.28 Setting the reuse function and range selection function for 6
cycle free figure creation ....................................................... 166
2.5.1.29 Setting the tool slide ............................................................. 169
2.5.1.30 Setting the memory card slot used for DNC operation ......... 172 7
2.5.1.31 Copying/moving program folders .......................................... 173
2.5.2 Setting Up the Machining Cycle ................................................... 174
2.5.3 Setting Up the Measurement Cycle .............................................. 176 8
2.5.3.1 Manually setting in the P-CODE variable .............................. 182
2.5.3.2 Setting on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen .............................. 189
2.5.4 Setting Up the Cycle-related Window ........................................... 192 A1
2.5.4.1 Condition to use the machining cycle creation function ........ 192
2.5.4.2 Opening the cycle input screen on the cycle selection screen
by tapping ............................................................................. 193 A2
2.5.4.3 Setting the cycle input window not to close when opening
a slide ................................................................................... 194
2.5.4.4 Changing to display the first page of soft keys ..................... 195 Z
2.5.4.5 Customizing the character strings on the cycle creation
screen ................................................................................... 196
2.5.5 Comparison between Machine Collision Avoidance Function and
3D Interference Check Function ................................................... 201
2.5.6 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Function ................. 202
2.5.6.1 Creating a 3D machine model .............................................. 202
2.5.6.2 Setting various settings of the machine collision avoidance
function ................................................................................. 204
2.5.6.3 Setting the common items .................................................... 206
2.5.6.4 Setting the machine configuration ......................................... 209
2.5.6.5 Configuring the individual path settings ................................ 232
2.5.6.6 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance function .... 237
c-5
B-64647EN/02
2.5.6.7 Signals available during the execution of the machine collision

avoidance function ................................................................ 240
2.5.7 Setting Up the 3D Interference Check Function .......................... 242
2.5.7.1 Overview of the 3D interference check function ................... 242
2.5.7.2 Setting and operation flow of the 3D interference check
1 function ................................................................................. 245
2.5.7.3 Enabling the 3D interference check function ........................ 245
2 2.5.7.4 Setting the display items ....................................................... 247
2.5.7.5 Creating model figures ......................................................... 251
2.5.7.6 Setting the moving axis ........................................................ 283
2.5.7.7 Setting combinations of model figures as interference check
3 targets ................................................................................... 287
2.5.7.8 Importing/exporting setting data for 3D interference check .. 290
2.5.7.9 Reflecting setting data for 3D interference check ................. 293
4 2.5.7.10 Monitoring interference check .............................................. 293
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION ................ 298
5 2.6.1 Editing Data Items to Be Collected by the Data Logger Function 298
2.6.1.1 Log item configuration file ..................................................... 298
2.6.1.2 Log file .................................................................................. 302
6 2.6.2 Editing Parts Data to Be Managed by the Maintenance Manager
Function ....................................................................................... 304
2.6.2.1 Setting parts placement information ..................................... 305
7 2.6.2.2 Standard icons list ................................................................ 306
2.6.2.3 Switching maintenance items display ................................... 307
2.6.2.4 Outputting the display switch settings of the maintenance
8 items ..................................................................................... 308
2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch configuration file ............. 308
2.6.2.6 Protecting maintenance items .............................................. 310
A1 2.6.2.7 Maintenance items protection setting file ............................. 312
2.6.2.8 Setting the maintenance completion notification and
the maintenance completion control ..................................... 315
A2 2.6.2.9 Outputting the maintenance items protection setting ........... 319
2.6.2.10 Detecting maintenance items from an external application .. 320
2.6.2.11 External application integration file ....................................... 324
Z 2.6.2.12 PMC signals used in external application integration ........... 325
2.6.2.13 Generating the preset file to automatically detect maintenance
items ..................................................................................... 326
2.6.2.14 Guide sizes that can be registered in the Maintenance
Manager ............................................................................... 333
2.6.2.15 Setting the capacitor capacity again ..................................... 333
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ............................. 335
2.7.1 Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function ....................................... 335
2.7.1.1 Manual information configuration file .................................... 335
2.7.1.2 Manual viewer tag list ........................................................... 337
2.7.1.3 Folder configuration for import .............................................. 339
2.7.1.4 Naming rules to update a manual file ................................... 340
c-6
B-64647EN/02
2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function ......................................... 341

2.7.2.1 Description of the Web browser configuration file ................. 342
2.7.2.2 Setting the start page ............................................................ 342
2.7.3 Editing the Version Information .................................................... 343
2.7.4 Using the Conventional Screen Call Function .............................. 344
2.7.4.1 Application ............................................................................ 345 1
2.7.4.2 Disabling the arbitrary axis switch function
(MANUAL GUIDE i) .............................................................. 345
2.7.4.3 Setting the MTB setting file ................................................... 345 2
2.7.4.4 Enabling/disabling the conventional screen call function ...... 346
2.7.4.5 Displaying the soft key to call the machining drawing
screen ................................................................................... 347
3
2.7.4.6 Displaying the soft key to call the NC statement conversion
function screen ..................................................................... 347
2.7.4.7 Displaying the soft key to call the cycle input screen ............ 348
4
2.7.4.8 Displaying the soft key to call the machining simulation
screen ................................................................................... 349
2.7.4.9 Displaying the soft key to call the program restart screen .... 350
5
2.7.4.10 Setting the function to call the MANUAL GUIDE i screen ..... 351
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES ...............................355
2.8.1 Program Storage Files ................................................................. 355
6
2.8.2 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin) ............................. 355
2.8.3 Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll) ............................ 355 7
3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION ..............360
3.1.1 Adding an Application to the iHMI ................................................ 360
8
3.1.2 User Application ........................................................................... 361
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION .............................362 A1
3.2.1 Overview of Creating an Application ............................................ 362
3.2.2 Using the iHMI Library .................................................................. 362
3.2.2.1 Application Manager ............................................................. 363 A2
3.2.2.2 Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application .. 364
3.2.2.3 Starting a specific application from the user application ....... 366
3.2.2.4 Displaying a specific screen when starting the user Z
application ............................................................................. 368
3.2.2.5 Calling a specified manual from an external application ....... 369
3.2.2.6 Displaying the startup screen ................................................ 371
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE ..............376
3.3.1 Creating a New Customized Screen ............................................ 376
3.3.2 Changing a Customized Screen ................................................... 379
3.3.3 Simultaneous Display with Another Application ........................... 381
3.4 STARTING A USER APPLICATION FROM A VERTICAL SOFT
KEY ...........................................................................................385
3.4.1 Overview of Vertical Soft Key Customization ............................... 385
3.4.2 Vertical Soft Key Setting File ........................................................ 386
3.4.3 Description Example of the Vertical Soft Key Setting File ............ 389
c-7
B-64647EN/02
4 MAINTENENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ...................................................... 392
4.1.1 Starting the Backup Screen ......................................................... 393
4.1.2 Saving Data in a Batch ................................................................ 398
1 4.1.3
4.1.4
Restoring Data in a Batch ............................................................ 399
Saving Data Individually ............................................................... 399
2 4.1.5
4.1.6
Restoring Data Individually .......................................................... 400
Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results ......... 400
4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP .................................................. 402
4.2.1 Backing Up to External Memory .................................................. 403
3 4.2.1.1 List of output text data .......................................................... 404
4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE ...................................... 406
4.3.1 Preparation .................................................................................. 406
4 4.3.1.1 Checking the iHMI version ................................................... 406
4.3.1.2 Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled
(for PANEL iH Pro only) ....................................................... 407
5 4.3.2 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH .................. 408
4.3.2.1 Folder configuration .............................................................. 408
4.3.2.2 Backing up iHMI data ........................................................... 408
6 4.3.2.3 Installing the iHMI ................................................................. 409
4.3.2.4 Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............................................ 411
7 4.3.3 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH Pro ............ 412
4.3.3.1 Backing up iHMI data ........................................................... 412
4.3.3.2 Disabling the EWF ................................................................ 413
8 4.3.3.3 Uninstalling the iHMI ............................................................ 414
4.3.3.4 Installing the iHMI ................................................................. 414
4.3.3.5 Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............................................ 414
A1 4.3.3.6 Enabling the EWF ................................................................. 415
4.4 INCORPORATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC SYSTEM . 417
4.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 417
A2 4.4.2 Starting NCBOOT32 .................................................................... 417
4.4.3 Operating in Screens ................................................................... 418
Z 5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
5.1 HOW TO READ THE PARAMETER ILLUSTRATION .............. 426
5.2 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS ....... 427
5.3 PARAMETERS OF MULTI-PATH EDIT ................................... 432
5.4 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS .............................. 434
5.5 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS ............... 435
5.6 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP STATE ..................................................... 436
5.7 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR
PROGRAM NUMBERS ............................................................ 438
5.8 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE ..................................... 439
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 440
c-8
B-64647EN/02
5.10 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION

FUNCTION ................................................................................443
5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING
TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES ......................................447
5.11.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names .............................................. 447
5.11.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and Subscripts ..... 448 1
5.11.3 Parameters to Display Coordinate Values ................................... 450
5.11.4
5.11.5
Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm Display ........................ 453
Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius Switching .......... 454
2
5.11.6 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes ....................................... 456
5.11.7
5.11.8
Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top ............................... 457
Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Control Axes ...... 457
3
5.11.9 Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate System
(Absolute/Overall) ......................................................................... 458 4
5.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY ..............460
5.12.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names .............................................. 460
5.12.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and Subscripts ..... 460 5
5.12.3 Parameters of Axis Name Switching ............................................ 460
5.12.4 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes ....................................... 460
5.12.5 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top ............................... 460 6
5.12.6 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Control Axes ...... 461
5.13 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY ............462
5.13.1 Parameters of Modal G Codes ..................................................... 462 7
5.13.2 Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes ............................... 464
5.13.3 Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and SMAX ......................... 467
5.13.4 Parameters of Modal F Codes ..................................................... 468
8
5.13.5 Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes ..................................... 468
5.13.6 Parameters of Modal T Codes ..................................................... 469
5.13.7 Parameters of Modal S Codes ..................................................... 470
A1
5.13.8 Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M Codes) ............... 471
5.13.9 Parameters of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary Function) ........ 472 A2
5.13.10Parameters of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary Function) ........... 474
5.13.11Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary Function) ......... 475
5.13.12Parameters of General Modal Information .................................. 476 Z
5.13.13Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount ............................... 477
5.14 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY ....479
5.15 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION ........484
5.15.1 Parameter to Display Feedrate Information ................................. 484
5.15.2 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit ....................................... 484
5.15.3 Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate ................................... 486
5.15.4 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed Meter ......................... 486
5.16 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY .........488
5.16.1 Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and Subscripts ............ 488
5.16.2 Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed ..................................... 492
5.16.3 Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter ...................................... 493
c-9
B-64647EN/02
5.16.4 Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter ........................................ 494

5.16.5 Parameters of the Current Load Ratio ......................................... 494
5.16.6 Parameters of Spindle Speed Override ....................................... 495
5.17 PROGRAM-RELATED PARAMETERS .................................... 497
1 5.18 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY .......... 504

5.18.1 Parameters of Subprogram Calls ................................................. 504
2 5.18.2
5.18.3
Parameter of Program Content Display ....................................... 507
Parameters of Program Numbers ................................................ 507
5.18.4 Parameters of Display during Program Backward by Manual
Handle Retrace ............................................................................ 508
3 5.19 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING

PROGRAM ............................................................................... 510
5.19.1 Parameter of Sequence Numbers ............................................... 510
4 5.20 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP ................... 511
5.21 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST
SLIDE ........................................................................................ 512
5 5.22 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE
FUNCTION ............................................................................... 514
5.23 PARAMETERS OF THE 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK
6 FUNCTION ............................................................................... 519
5.23.1 General Parameters of the 3D Interference Check Function ....... 519
5.23.2 Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check between
7 Targets ......................................................................................... 520
5.23.3 Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check between Targets
(at Cutting Feed during Automatic Operation) ............................. 529
8 A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ................................................. 540
A1 A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID
(SUBJECT VALUE) .................................................................. 541
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID
A2 (SUBJECT VALUE) .................................................................. 542
A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI .............................................. 550
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST .......................... 559
Z A.6 CNCAPPCLIENT FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS .................... 565
A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications ......................................... 565
A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message ............................................. 570
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION ................ 572
A.7.1 PANEL iH ..................................................................................... 572
A.7.1.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions ........................... 572
A.7.1.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application .. 573
A.7.2 For PANEL iH Pro ........................................................................ 573
A.7.2.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions ........................... 574
A.7.2.2 Memory usage in optional functions ..................................... 575
A.7.2.3 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application .. 575
c-10
1
1
OVERVIEW 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes the overview of an environment required to set up the
iHMI and customization.
A
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW........................................................................ 2
1.2 ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED FOR iHMI SETUP .................................. 12
1.3 iHMI HARDWARE PERFORMANCE TABLE ......................................... 15
1.4 iHMI AUTOMATIC STARTUP SETTING (PANEL iH Pro) ...................... 16
1
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW
1.1

iHMI allows machine manufacturers to set up or customize various functions
1 according to the machine.

The following iHMI application setups are available:
2 • Home screen settings

• Settings for When an Application Is Started/Running
• CNC operation screen settings
3 • Machining/measurement cycle settings

• Setup for iHMI functions
4 In addition, machine manufacturers can create their own application and add it to
iHMI. For details on how to create and add an application, see "Chapter 3
5 CREATING A USER APPLICATION".

For details on how to back up/restore all settings or data created by the machine
manufacturer at once or update iHMI basic software, see "Chapter 4
6 MAINTENENCE".
7 1.1.1 Storage Locations of Applications and Data

1.1.1
 iHMI application folder

8 iHMI applications are stored in the following locations. (These folders may be
described as "%APPPATH%" in this manual.)
A1 For PANEL iH
\Storage Card\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro
A2 C:\Program Files (x86)\FANUC\iHMI
Z  iHMI data folder

iHMI data are stored in the following locations. (These folders may be described
as "%APPDATA%" in this manual.)
For PANEL iH
\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro
For PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI
2
B-64647EN/02
1.1.2 Home Screen Settings

1.1.2
 Adding an icon to the Home screen

Add an icon to the Home screen and set it to start a specific application when the
icon is tapped.
1
Work target: Application definition file (apps-general.xml)
Reference: "2.2.1 Application Definition File" - " Adding an icon to the Home
screen" 2
 Changing the application to be displayed at power-on
Change the application to be displayed at power-on (If the application is not
3
specified, the Home screen is set as the default screen).

4
Reference: "2.2.1 Application Definition File" - " Changing the application to be
displayed at power-on"
5
 Changing the application to be displayed as the Home screen
Change the application to be displayed as the Home screen. 6
The application set as the Home screen is displayed when the [MENU] key (icon)
is pressed.
7
Reference: "2.2.1 Application Definition File" - " Changing the application to be
displayed as the Home screen" 8
 Changing the background of the Home screen
Change the background image file (svg, png) of the Home screen.
A1
Work target: Add an image file (BG.svg, BG.png) to the %APPDATA%\MTB\Home
folder.
A2
Reference: "2.3.1.1 Changing the background of the Home screen"
Z
 Adding the shutdown button to the Home screen
Add the shutdown button to the Home screen.
Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings-general.xml)

Reference: "2.3.1.2 Adding the shutdown button to the Home screen (PANEL iH
Pro only)"
3
B-64647EN/02
1.1.3 Settings for When an Application Is Started/Running

1.1.3
 Setting a shortcut key

Set up so that a specific application is started when the <PROG> key, <OFFSET>
key, <MESSAGE> key, <SYSTEM>key, <GRAPH> key, or <CUSTOM> key is
1 pressed.
2 Work target: Application definition file (apps-general.xml)

Reference: "2.2.1.2 Setting a shortcut key"
 Settings for when an application is started

3 Set synchronization with NC time, timeout, and hiding of the task bar when an
application is displayed.
4 Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings.xml) (*1)

Reference: "2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File"
5  Setting the application display position and size

6 Set the application display position (XY coordinates) and size.
Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings-general.xml) (*2)

Reference: "2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File"
7
 Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status Display Area
The status display area common to all applications can include machine
8 manufacturer specific icons, such as coolant, interlock, and machine warnings.
Icons or character strings can be switched according to the PMC signal.
A1 Work target: Configuration file (status.xml)

Reference: "2.3.2 Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status Display
Area"
A2
(*1) settings.xml: iHMI whole configuration file
(*2) settings-general.xml: iHMI per-user configuration file
Z
1.1.4 CNC Operation Screen Settings

1.1.4
 Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function

Enable/disable the multi-path edit function. The multi-path edit function divides the
edit screen into as many edit areas as the number of paths (up to four) so that the
main program of each path can be edited simultaneously.
Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

Reference: "2.5.1.1 Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function"
4
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the multi-path edit paths and order

When the multi-path edit function is enabled, specify the number of divided areas
of the display. The multi-path edit function divides the edit screen into as many edit
areas as the number of paths (up to four) so that the main program of each path
can be edited simultaneously.
1
Reference: "2.5.1.2 Setting the multi-path edit paths and order"
2
 Enabling/disabling the multi-path display function
Enable/disable the multi-path display function. The multi-path display function
divides the MEM mode base screen into as many display areas as the number of
3
paths (up to three) so that the information of each path can be displayed
simultaneously.
4
Reference: "2.5.1.3 Enabling/disabling the multi-path display function"
5
 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path display
When the multi-path display function is enabled, specify the number of divided 6
areas of the display.
Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt) 7

Reference: "2.5.1.4 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path
display"
8
 Hiding the modal G codes
Hide the modal G codes of the selected group. The hidden modal G codes are
closely displayed.
A1
Work target: Parameter (Nos. 3124 to 3127, Nos. 11365 to 11367) setting
Reference: "2.5.1.5 Hiding the modal G codes"
A2
 Setting machine data to be displayed on the base screen Z
Set machine data (vertical/horizontal, maximum feedrate, maximum spindle
speed, spindle rotation direction) to be displayed on each mode base screen
according to the machine.

Reference: "2.5.1.6 Setting machine data to be displayed on the base screen"
 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon display

Set the spindle rotation direction (forward/reverse) icon to be displayed in the
spindle information display tile on the machining program execution screen.
5
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon display

Set the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon to be displayed in the spindle
information display tile on the machining program execution screen.

1 Reference: "2.5.1.7 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon
display"
2
 Changing the traveling direction guide
You can change the traveling direction guide displayed in the JOG, HND, INC, and
3 REF mode base screens.
Work target: Add an image file (png) to the
4 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥JOG_HND_REF¥GUIDANCE
folder.
Reference: "2.5.1.8 Changing the traveling direction guide"
5  Workpiece coordinates slide settings

6 You can change the minimum and maximum values of the XYZ axes and the input
operation prohibition setting during operation for 3D graphics in the workpiece
coordinates slide.
7 Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

Reference: "2.5.1.9 Setting the workpiece coordinates slide"
8  Setting the custom macro variable range and number of significant digits
Set the custom macro variable number range and number of significant digits.
A1 Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

Parameter (Nos. 11369 and 6008) setting
Reference: "2.5.1.12 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and values"
A2
 Showing/hiding the custom macro variable names
Z Show/hide the custom macro variable names.
Work target: Parameter VRN (No. 3207#5) setting

Reference: "2.5.1.15 Showing/hiding the custom macro variable names"
 Machining simulation function

Check the conditions to use the machining simulation function. The machining
simulation function allows you to check how machining will be performed by the
program through graphic drawings before you proceed to actual machining.

Reference: "2.5.1.16 Condition to use the machining simulation function"
6
B-64647EN/02
 Enabling/disabling single-path two-spindle machining in the machining

simulation function
Enable/disable single-path two-spindle machining in the machining simulation
function.
Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt) 1

Reference: "2.5.1.17 Machining simulation function settings"
 Workpiece coordinate system of single-path two-spindle machining in the

2
machining simulation function
Set the workpiece coordinate system of single-path two-spindle machining in the
machining simulation function.
3
Work target: Parameter (No. 14706) setting
4
 Setting the chamfering tool nose angle in the machining simulation 5
function
Set the chamfering tool nose angle in the machining simulation function.
6
7
 Enabling/disabling the turning function and milling function
Enable/disable the turning function and milling function.
8
Reference: "2.5.1.19 Enabling/disabling the turning function and milling function"
A1
 Setting data to display the MEM mode base screen
Set data (maximum actual spindle speed, maximum milling spindle speed, spindle A2
rotation direction signal inversion, maximum actual feedrate) required to display
the MEM mode base screen.
Z
 Editing program guidance messages

Edit a guidance message to be displayed at the cursor position in a program being
edited.
Work target files: guideMu.txt, guideTAu.txt, guideTBu.txt, guideTCu.txt,

guideCMu.txt
Reference: "2.5.1.20 Setting program guidance messages"
7
B-64647EN/02
 Enabling/disabling the insert M code screen

Enable/disable the insert M code screen.

Reference: "2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function"
1
2  Changing messages on the insert M code screen
Change a message to be displayed on the insert M code screen.
Work target: M code menu screen definition file (dlgmcdeu.txt)
3 M code message file (for each language)

Reference: "2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function"
4  Enabling/disabling the insert fixed sentence screen

Enable/disable the insert fixed sentence screen.
5 Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

Reference: "2.5.1.27 Setting up the fixed sentence function"
6
 Changing messages on the insert fixed sentence screen
Change a message to be displayed on the insert fixed sentence screen.
7 Work target: Insert fixed sentence screen definition file (fixdlgu.txt)

Fixed sentence registration definition file (for each language)
Selection screen message file (for each language)
8 Reference: "2.5.1.27 Setting up the fixed sentence function"
A1  Setting the tool slide

Set the following items in the tool slide:
• Showing/hiding the tool name
A2 • Filtering switch method (geometry and wear/geometry/wear)
• Default filtering display (geometry and wear/geometry/wear)
Z • Virtual tool tip direction display setting (number only/number and icon)
• Position of the [Tool Manager] soft key
Work target: MTB configuration file (Setting_data.txt)

Reference: "2.5.1.29 Setting the tool slide"
8
B-64647EN/02
1.1.5 Machining/Measurement Cycle Settings

1.1.5
 Setting Up the Machining Cycle

Set the machining cycle parameters according to the machine.
Work target: Parameter setting 1

Reference: "2.5.2 Setting Up the Machining Cycle"
 Setting Up the Measurement Cycle

2
Set the measurement cycle parameters according to the machine.
Work target: Parameter setting

3
Reference: "2.5.3 Setting Up the Measurement Cycle"
4
 Setting the cycle input window behavior when opening a slide
Set the cycle input window not to close when opening a slide.
5
Reference: "2.5.4.3 Setting the cycle input window not to close when opening a
slide" 6
 Setting a set of soft keys that is displayed after the cycle input screen is
closed
7
Set a set of soft keys displayed on the base screen after the cycle input window is
closed with the [OK] soft key.
8
Reference: "2.5.4.4 Changing to display the first page of soft keys"
A1
 Customizing the character strings on the cycle creation screen
Customize the character strings displayed on the cycle creation screen. A2
You can set region-specific cycle names and input items.
Work target: Language file (iHMI_cycle_vgamsgNu.txt, dlgmsgNu.txt, Z

errmsgNu.txt, iHMI_keymsgNu.txt)
Reference: "2.5.4.5 Customizing the character strings on the cycle creation
screen"
9
B-64647EN/02
1.1.6 Setup for iHMI Functions

1.1.6
 Setting up the program operation function using large-capacity memory

When a program storage file (Ncprog.bin) is created, automatic operation can be
performed with a program in the file.
1
Work target: Program storage file (Ncprog.bin)
2 Reference: "2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES"
 Adding Failure Diagnosis Messages
3 You can add machine specific alarms (external alarm and macro alarm) and
operator messages to failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the
Information Center.
4 Work target: Use the PC application "Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table".
Reference: "2.3.3 Adding Failure Diagnosis Messages"
5  Setting up the tool management function

6 Input data to the tool database and set up the tool management function.
Work target: iHMI operation

Reference: "2.4.1 Setting Up Tool Manager"
7
 Setting up the auxiliary function time
Set the auxiliary function time to estimate a more accurate cycle time with the
8 cycle time estimation function.
Work target: iHMI operation

A1 Reference: "2.4.2 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function"
A2  Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Function

To use the machine collision avoidance function, create a 3D machine model and
set data. In the machine collision avoidance function, the machine manufacturer
Z creates a 3D machine model, and the end user defines the blanks and jigs.
Work target: Create a 3D machine model and register it to PANEL iH Pro.

iHMI operation
Reference: "2.5.6 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Function"
 Setting up the 3D interference check function

Create an interference check target model figure, associate it with a moving axis,
and set an interference check target combination.
Work target: iHMI

Reference: "2.5.7 Setting Up the 3D Interference Check Function"
10
B-64647EN/02
 Editing Data Items to Be Collected by the Data Logger Function

Edit data items to be exported from the CNC by the data logger function. You can
import an edited data item configuration file from the memory card or USB flash
drive to the CNC.
Work target: Log item configuration file (DataLoggerInfo.xml) 1

Reference: "2.6.1 Editing Data Items to Be Collected by the Data Logger
Function"
2
 Editing Parts Data to Be Managed by the Maintenance Manager Function
Edit parts data to be managed by the Maintenance Manager function. Edited
contents are displayed as replacement parts information or maintenance target
3
according to the PMC signal status on the Information Center.
Work target: Maintenance items information file (MaintenanceInfo.xml)

4
Maintenance items display switch configuration file
(MainteShowSettings.xml)
Reference: "2.6.2 Editing Parts Data to Be Managed by the Maintenance
5
Manager Function"
6
 Setting up the manual viewer function
Import a manual (pdf, txt, html) to be displayed with the manual viewer function
and set the configuration and icon of the manual. 7
Work target: Manual information configuration file (ManualInfo.xml)
Reference: "2.7.1 Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function" 8
 Setting up the Web browser
Set the start page of the Web browser. You can add an icon for each start page to
A1
the Home screen.
Work target: Web browser configuration file (browserinfo.xml)

A2
Application definition file (apps-general.xml)
Reference: "2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function"
Z
11
B-64647EN/02
1.2 ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED FOR iHMI SETUP
1.2
1.2 ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED FOR iHMI

SETUP
1 This chapter describes an environment required at iHMI setup.
2
1.2.1 User application
3
1.2.1
The machine manufacturers can use the SDK and libraries when creating their
own iHMI application.
4  For PANEL iH Pro

To create an application that runs on the PANEL iH Pro, the following environment
is required.
5
Table 1.2.1 (a) Environment Required to Create an Application That Runs on the
6 PANEL iH Pro
Item Description
Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8
7 Professional
Memory 1 GB or more (2 GB or more is recommended)
Available hard disk capacity 4.7 GB or more
8 Display unit resolution 1024 x 768 or higher (1280 x 1024 or higher is
recommended)
A1 Required application • Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Professional or

Team Editions
• Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1
A2
You can create an application using the develop languages C/C++, C#, and Visual
Basic .NET.
Z You can use the following libraries included in "CNC Application Development Kit"
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) as necessary. The libraries can be used in Visual Studio
2008 or later.
• FOCAS2 library
• iHMI library
12
B-64647EN/02
 For PANEL iH
To create an application that runs on the PANEL iH, the following environment is
required.
Table 1.2.1 (b) Environment Required to Create an Application That Runs on the 1
PANEL iH
Item Description
2
Professional
Memory
Available hard disk capacity
1 GB or more (2 GB or more is recommended)
4.7 GB or more
3
Display unit resolution 1024 x 768 or higher (1280 x 1024 or higher is
recommended) 4
Required application • Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Professional or
Team Editions
• Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1 5
• Visual Studio 2008 update for Windows
Embedded Compact 7
• Windows Embedded Compact 7 ATL Update for
Visual Studio 2008 SP1
6
• FANUC SDK for Windows Embedded Compact 7
(*1)
7
*1: You can create an application using the develop languages C/C++, C#, and
Visual Basic .NET included in "iHMI Application SDK for PANEL iH" (A08B-
9110-J713#ZZ11). 8
You can use the following libraries included in "iHMI Application SDK for
PANEL iH" (A08B-9110-J713#ZZ11) as necessary. A1
• Standard library (FISLIB)
• FOCAS2 library A2
• iHMI library
13
B-64647EN/02
1.2.2 FANUC PICTURE

1.2.2
To create a screen using FANUC PICTURE, the following environment is required.
Table 1.2.2 Environment Required for FANUC PICTURE

1 Item Description
2 Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or

Microsoft Windows 10
Memory 4 GB or more
Available hard disk capacity 64MB or more
3 Display unit resolution 1280 x 960 or higher
Peripheral device CF card, USB flash drive
4 Required application Internet Explorer (version 9.0 or later)
For both PANEL iH Pro and PANEL iH, software included in "CNC Application
5 Development Kit" (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is used to create a screen.
6
1.2.3 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table
1.2.3
The machine alarm diagnosis guidance table allows you to create alarm diagnosis
7 function data in the iHMI Information Center. To use the machine alarm diagnosis
guidance table, the following environment is required.
8 Table 1.2.3 Environment Required for Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance

Table
A1 Item Description
A2 Memory 1GB or more

Available hard disk capacity 128MB or more
Peripheral device CF card, USB flash drive
Z Required application Microsoft Excel 2007 or Microsoft Excel 2010
The machine alarm diagnosis guidance table is included in both "CNC Application
Development Kit" (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) and "iHMI Application SDK for PANEL
iH" (A08B-9110-J713#ZZ11).
14
B-64647EN/02
1.3 iHMI HARDWARE PERFORMANCE TABLE
1.3
1.3 iHMI HARDWARE PERFORMANCE

TABLE
1
1.3.1 iHMI Hardware Performance Table
2
1.3.1
There are two types of hardware, FANUC PANEL iH and FANUC PANEL iH Pro.
The performance of each type is as follows:
Table 1.3.1 Performance of PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro 3

Item PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro
OS Windows Embedded Compact 7 Windows Embedded Standard 7 4
CPU ARM Core i
General
Windows
None Can be used after operation is
verified 5
application
Shutdown
Memory
Not required
Main memory: 1 GB
Required
SSD type
6
File memory: 2 to 16 GB compact C drive (13 GB)
flash card D drive (All areas after C drive)
HDD type
7
C drive (500GB)
D drive (None)
Display 10.4 inch color TFT LCD (800 x 600),
8
15.0 inch color TFT LCD (1024 x 768), or
19.0 inch color TFT LCD (1280 x 1024)
32-bit full color A1
MDI keys (QWERTY layout, ONGP layout)
Soft keys or touch panel
Ports PCMCIA x 1 (*1) PCMCIA x 1 A2
Ethernet (10BASE-TX) Ethernet (100BASE-TX)
USB2.0 x 2 USB2.0 x 4
Serial port (RS-232C) x 2 (*2) Serial port (RS-232C) x 2 Z
OS standard Internet Explorer 7 for Windows Internet Explorer 8.0
software Embedded Windows Media Player 12.0
.NET Compact Framework 3.5 .NET Framework 2.0/3.0/3.5/4.5
Software HSSB driver HSSB driver
provided by MDI key driver MDI key driver
FANUC FOCAS2 library Hardware monitoring driver
iHMI (including the CNC screen FOCAS1/2 library
display function) iHMI (including the CNC screen
display function)
*1 Only the PC card provided by FANUC can be used.

*2 For the display integrated unit, the ports are shared with the CNC. While they
are used by the CNC, applications cannot be used.
15
B-64647EN/02
1.4 iHMI AUTOMATIC STARTUP SETTING (PANEL iH Pro)
1.4
1.4 iHMI AUTOMATIC STARTUP SET-

TING (PANEL iH Pro)
1 To start iHMI automatically at power-on, you need to configure the following
setting in PANEL iH Pro.
2 (This setting is unnecessary for PANEL iH.)
<1> Right-click the icon shown in the red frame on the toolbar.
3
<2> Select "EWF" from the displayed menu.
4
5
6
<3> If [Current EWF protection] is set to "ENABLE" in the red frame, click [Disable
7 EWF protection] shown in the blue frame.
The [Next EWF protection] setting changes from "ENABLE" to "DISABLE".
8
A1
A2
Z
<4> If the EWF protection setting has been changed, restart PANEL iH Pro.
<5> Right-click the icon shown in the red frame on the toolbar.
<6> Select "Open" from the displayed menu.

NCBOOT32 starts.
16
B-64647EN/02
<7> Click [New].
1
2
3
4
5
<8> Set "CncApps.exe (C:¥Program Files (x86)¥FANUC¥iHMI¥)" and click [OK].
<9> If the EWF protection setting was changed to "DISABLE" in step <3>, change it 6
back to "ENABLE".
<10>Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
iHMI automatically starts up.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
17
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
18
2
SETTING UP iHMI 1
APPLICATIONS 2
3
4
5
This section describes how to set up each iHMI application.
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ............................................ 20

A
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI ............. 22
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 37
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION ...................................... 70
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION.................................... 97
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION............................ 298
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ......................................... 335
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES .......................................... 355
19
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS 
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW
2.1
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVER-

VIEW
1 You can customize the functions of iHMI applications, add applications to the
Home screen, and change the background.
2
2.1.1 Customizable Applications
3
2.1.1
The following shows customizable iHMI applications:
Table 2.1.1 Application List

4 Application name Customization overview Icon
Tool Manager Allows you to add a function to manage tool
5 information required at production sites.
6 Cycle Time Estimation Allows you to set an auxiliary function time to

(Option) estimate an accurate cycle time.
7 CNC operation screen Allows you to edit, change setups, and

execute programs in the CNC screen.
8 Machine Collision Allows you to set signals to be used while the

Avoidance (Option) machine collision avoidance function is being
executed.
A1
iCAP T (Option) Allows you to create an NC program only by
entering blank and part geometries and
A2 determining a machining process.
For details, see "FANUC iCAP T
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64654EN).
Z Data Logger Allows you to import/export logs collected with
the data logger function.
Maintenance Manager Allows you to switch the display of manage

maintenance information, such as consumable
life management and abnormality detection,
and to output switching settings.
Manual Viewer Allows you to import manual information.
20
B-64647EN/02
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW
Application name Customization overview Icon

WEB BROWSER Allows you to set the start page of the Web
browser.
Maintenance Display Displays the conventional NC screen. 1

For details, see "CNC Screen Display Function
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
21
B-64647EN/02
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI
2.2
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT

AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI
1 Configuration files that affect the entire iHMI are of three types such as:
• Application definition file (XML file)
2 • iHMI whole configuration file (XML file)
• File for individual settings common to the applications (INI format file)
3
4 2.2.1
2.2.1
Application Definition File
By editing the application definition file, you can perform the following
customization:
5
6 • Adding an icon to the Home screen
Add an icon to the Home screen and set it to start a specific application when
the icon is tapped.
7 • Changing the application to be displayed at power-on

Change the application to be displayed at power-on.
8 • Changing the application to be displayed as the Home screen

Change the application to be displayed as the Home screen.
A1
• Setting a shortcut key
A2 Set up so that a specific application is started when the <PROG>, <OFFSET>,

<MESSAGE>, <SYSTEM>, <GRAPH>, or <CUSTOM> key is pressed.
Z
 The application definition file (apps-general.xml) is stored in the iHMI
data folder (%APPDATA%folder).
MEMO
 Adding an icon to the Home screen

Add an icon to the Home screen and set it to start a specific application when the
icon is tapped.
An icon is added to the Home screen by adding the following <entry> tag
description to the XML file:
22
B-64647EN/02
<entry>
<name>CNC</name>
<category>Machining</category>
<caption>
<en>CNC</en>
<ja>CNC</ja> 1
</caption>
<file>%APPPATH%\NcOperation\NcOperation.exe</file>
</entry>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\NcOperation.svg</image>
2
The following are details of the descriptions between the <entry> and </entry>
tags. 3
Table 2.2.1 (a) Description in the <entry> Tag 4
XML tag Description
<name>
<category>
Identifier ID (Set not to be duplicated)
Category where the application belongs (select Planning, Machining,
5
Improvement, or Utility)
<caption> Application name displayed in the Home screen 6
<file> Absolute path of the application execution file (exe)
<image> Absolute path of the application icon file (png, bmp, svg)
<current> Current path of the application 7
<parameters> Parameters passed when the application is started
<subject> Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable) passed when the
application is called.
8
The following options can be set for the <entry> tag. A1

Table 2.2.1 (b) Description of Each Option
A2
Option Description
startup Starts the application when Application Manager is started.
nomenu Does not display the application on the Home screen menu.
Z
waitregister • When startup is set: Keeps displaying the splash screen until
the set application is started up.
• When startup is not set: Displays the application on top after
the application is started up.
alwaysvisible Specify this option when displaying multiple applications in
your combination.
By default, only the last selected application is displayed, and
other applications are hidden.
Adding this alwaysvisible option allows a simultaneous display
of multiple applications without displaying the last selected
application.
23
B-64647EN/02
Option Description
noinformation Disables the MDI Information Center key while the application
is displayed.
noinputlog Does not record the key operation/touch operation history
1 while the specified application is displayed.
2
 For details on the Application Manager, see "3.2.2.1 Application
Manager".
MEMO
3
The application name can be described in each language by adding the following
4 <[language]> tag to the <caption> tag.
5 Table 2.2.1 (c) Languages Used in the <[language]> Tag

<[language]> <[language]> <[language]>
Language name Language name Language name
6 Tag Tag Tag
<en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
<de> German <pl> Polish <sk> Slovak
7 <fr> French <hu> Hungarian <fi> Finnish
Traditional
<cht> <sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
8 <it>
Chinese
Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian
Simplified
A1 <ko> Korean <chs>
Chinese
<sl> Slovene
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian

<nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
A2
 Changing the application to be displayed at power-on
Z Change the application to be displayed at power-on.
Set the value of the <name> tag for an application you want to display as the initial
display screen to the "first" option of the <apps> tag.
Example:
<apps first=" CNCOPERA ">
 Changing the application to be displayed as the Home screen

Change the application to be displayed as the Home screen.
Set the value of the <name> tag for an application you want to display as the
Home screen to the "home" option of the <apps> tag.
24
B-64647EN/02
Example:
<apps home=" MainMenu ">
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.1
Starting an application with a screen specified
You can use the <subject> tag to launch a specific screen when starting the CNC
1
operation screen or maintenance display. For subject values that can be specified,
see "A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (subject VALUE)" and "A.3
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (subject VALUE)".
2
3
 You can add multiple <subject> tags with different values to one
application. In such a case, the <name> tags must have the same value.
MEMO
4
5
• To specify the FANUC PICTURE or C Language Executor application
screen on the maintenance display, you need to set the following NC
parameters: 6

NOTE
Bit 1 of No. 8654 = 1 (Start C Language Executer at CNC startup)
Bit 3 of No. 8656 = 1 (Not switch to the position display screen after
maintenance display startup) 7
• On the maintenance display, even if you specify a screen number, it is
ignored when the MANUAL GUIDE i loading screen is displayed or
the screen is not allowed to be switched by C Language Executor.
8
2.2.1.2 Setting a shortcut key A1
Set up so that a specific application is started when the <PROG> key, <OFFSET>
2.2.1.2
key, <MESSAGE> key, <SYSTEM>key, <GRAPH> key, or <CUSTOM> key is

pressed. A2
You can also set up to disable the shortcut key while the specified application is
displayed.
Z
 Screen transition
When you press a shortcut key, an application registered to the shortcut starts up.
Pressing the shortcut key again displays the last used application.
Example: Shortcut key: <CUSTOM> key, shortcut application: "Maintenance

Manager"
25
B-64647EN/02
Maintenance Manager
Display the last used

application
1
2
3
Start the shortcut application
4 Fig. 2.2.1.2 Screen transition
5
6 
NOTE
An application with the shortcut function disabled is not switched to
another as shown above.
7  How to define a shortcut key

You can define a shortcut key by adding a shortcut definition to the configuration
file (apps-general.xml).
8 Add the <shortcuts> tag below the <apps> tag in the configuration file. Put
shortcut key information between <shortcuts> and </shortcuts>. Shortcut key
A1 information needs to be provided in the <entry> tag for each shortcut key added.
The following is a list of tags included between <shortcuts> and </shortcuts>.
A2 Table 2.2.1.2 Description in the <shortcuts> tag

XML tag Required Child Description
Z <entry> ○
element
<key> Put shortcut information.
<name> You can add the invalidname attribute.
<subject> invalidname: Specify the identifier ID of an
application for which you want to disable the
shortcut. If you want to disable the shortcut
function for more than one application, separate
the IDs by ",".
26
B-64647EN/02

element
<key> ○ None Specify a shortcut key.
The following are the keys that can be specified
as a shortcut:
FUNCKEY1: <PROG> key 1
FUNCKEY2: <OFFSET> key
FUNCKEY3: <MESSAGE> key
FUNCKEY4: <GRAPH> key 2
FUNCKEY5: <SYSTEM> key
FUNCKEY7: <SYSTEM> key
3
• The <POS> key cannot be
 selected because it is used for

Information Center display.
NOTE • If you select keys other than the
4
above, the definition will be invalid.
<name> ○ None Application identifier ID.

5
Enter the identifier ID of an application you want
to display when pressing the shortcut key
specified in <key>. 6
<subject> × None Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed when the application is called.
7
 Description example of the configuration file
The following shows a description example of apps-general.xml for executing the
8
following operations.
• "App02" is displayed when the <PROG> function key is pressed. A1
• "App03" is displayed when the <CUSTOM> function key is pressed. While
"App01" is displayed, the shortcut is disabled.
A2
Z
27
B-64647EN/02
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>

<apps home="MainMenu" info="AppMgr">
<entry>
<name>App01</name>
1 </entry>
...
<entry>
<name>App02</name>
2 </entry>
...
<entry>
<name>App03</name>
3 </entry>
...
<shortcuts>
4 <entry>
<key>FUNCKEY1</key>
<name>App02</name> Add <PROG> to
<subject>open,Main</ subject > shortcut key
5 </entry>
<entry invalidname="App01">
<key>FUNCKEY5</key>
6 <name>App03</name>
</entry>
Add <CUSTOM> to
shortcut key
</shortcuts>
</apps>
7
8 2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File
2.2.2
You can change the settings for startup, and the display position and size of an
iHMI application by modifying the XML file (settings.xml (*1), settings-general.xml
A1 (*2)).
(*1) settings.xml: iHMI whole configuration file

A2 (*2) settings-general.xml: iHMI per-user configuration file
 Settings for when the application is started

Z Set synchronization with NC time, timeout, and hiding of the task bar when an
application is displayed.
Edit the XML file (settings.xml) stored in the application folder (%APPPATH%).
The XML file has the following description, and you can change the settings by
modifying the description.
28
B-64647EN/02
<settings>
...
<time>
<sync>yes</sync>
<timeout>0.0</timeout>
</time> 1
<display taskbar="hide"/>
</settings>
2
The following describes tag descriptions.
Table 2.2.2 (a) Description in the Tags 3

XML tag Description
<time> Time settings 4
<sync> If "yes" is set, the application is synchronized with the NC.
<timeout> Set the timeout time when the application is started.
<display> Display settings. If taskbar="hide" is set, the task bar is hidden.
5
 Setting the application display position and size

6
Set the application display position (XY coordinates) and size.
Edit the XML file (settings-general.xml) stored in the data folder (%APPDATA%).
7
The XML file has the following description, and you can change the settings of the
display position and size by modifying the description.
8
<settings>
...
<display> A1
<inchx10>150</inchx10>
<x>0</x>
<y>0</y>
</display>
A2
</settings>
The following describes tag descriptions. Z

Table 2.2.2 (b) Description in the Tags
XML tag Description
<display> Display settings.
<inchx10> Set the application display size. The value is ten times the display size
(select 104, 150, or 190).
<x> Set the application display position (x-coordinate on the upper left
corner).
<y> Set the application display position (y-coordinate on the upper left
corner).
29
B-64647EN/02
 Specifying a display unit that has no touch panel specifications

When the display unit has no touch panel specifications, modify the XML file
(settings.xml) as follows:
1 ...
<settings>
...
<control>
2 <touchpanel>no</touchpanel>
</control>
</settings>
...
3
4 
NOTE
• If the above description is not found in the XML file (settings.xml), the
touch operation is enabled for the model.
5  Setting to hide the live update-related items

You can hide items related to live update in the setting screen.
6 When you hide the live update-related items, even live update check is not
performed.
To hide the live update-related items, edit the XML file (settings-general.xml)
stored in the data folder (%APPDATA%) as follows:
7
<settings>
8 :
<control>
<liveupdate>hide</liveupdate>
</control>
A1 </settings>
A2 Table 2.2.2 (c) Description in the Tags

XML tag Description
<control> Set the iHMI behaviors.
Z <liveupdate> Set whether to show/hide items related to live update for the setting
screen.
hide: Hides the live update-related items.
show (or no <liveupdate> tag description): Shows the live update-
related items.

NOTE
• To apply the setting changes, you need to restart iHMI.
30
B-64647EN/02
 Setting to display the message when HSSB communication is

disconnected (PANEL iH Pro only)
When HSSB communication is disconnected due to HSSB cable breakage or
CNC power-off, the entire iHMI will end.
1
• This function does not guarantee that iHMI can be successfully
terminated. iHMI may end with an error according to the condition
2

NOTE
when HSSB communication is disconnected.
• When HSSB communication is disconnected, data transmitted to/from
the CNC device become inconsistent. After HSSB communication
disconnection, confirm that necessary data have been restored before 3
restarting the CNC device.
4
You can set to display the following message at a time of HSSB communication
disconnection:
5
6
Fig. 2.2.2 Message to Display When HSSB Communication Is Disconnected

7
To display this message, edit the XML file (settings-general.xml) stored in the data 8
folder (%APPDATA%) as follows:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?> A1

<settings>
:
<control>
<disconnectmessage>show</disconnectmessage>
A2
</control>
</settings>
Z
Table 2.2.2 (d) Description in the Tags
XML tag Description
<control> Set the iHMI behaviors.
<disconnectmessage> Specify whether or not to display the message when HSSB
communication is disconnected.
show: Displays the message when HSSB communication is
disconnected.
31
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• To apply the setting changes, you need to restart iHMI.
1
 Setting a shortcut key to a specific operation
2 When you describe the XML file (settings.xml) as shown below, you can set a
shortcut key to save a screen image or start the screen saver.
3 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>

<settings>
:
:
4 <keys>
<screenshot>keycode1,keycode2</screenshot>
<screensaver>keycode1,keycode2</screensaver>
</keys>
5 </settings>
6 Table 2.2.2 (e) Description in the Tags

XML tag Description
<keys> Define a key assigned to the operation.
7 <screenshot> Specify a shortcut key to save a screen image.
Specify a combination key, such as Ctrl and Prog, with a Windows
virtual key code (hexadecimal) for "keycode1" and "keycode2".
8 Example: For Ctrl and Prog, <screenshot>11,62</screenshot>
<screensaver> Specify a shortcut key to start the screen saver.
Specify a combination key, such as Ctrl + Graph, with a Windows
A1 virtual key code (hexadecimal) for "keycode1" and "keycode2".
Example: For Ctrl + Graph, <screenshot>11,66</screenshot>
A2
 • The settings are applied when iHMI is restarted.
Z MEMO
• For the details on the key codes for the MDI keyboard, see "A.4 MDI
KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI".
• The [MENU] key (icon) and Information Center key (Pos key) cannot

NOTE
be specified. If these keys are specified, a shortcut key to save a
screen image and a shortcut key to start the screen saver cannot be
set.
32
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the operation history

To display the operation history, edit the XML file (settings.xml) stored in the
application folder (%APPPATH%) as follows:

<settings> 1
:
:
<log>
<level>2</level> 2
<days>5</days>
</log>
</settings>
3
Table 2.2.2 (f) Description in the Tags
XML tag Description
4
<log> Define the operation history.
<level> Specify the operation history output level (Default: 2).
0: Not output the operation history. 5
1: Output the system operation history.
2: Output the application history and message history, as well as
the operation history in "1".
3: Output the input device (key operation/touch operation) history,
6
as well as the operation history in "2".
<days> Specify the number of days back from the current date to display
the operation history (Default: 5).
7
For details on the operation history, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen 8
Hiding the operation history on the settings screen A1

To hide the operation history on the settings screen, edit the XML file (settings-
general.xml) stored in the data folder (%APPDATA%) as follows:
A2
<settings>
:
:
Z
<log>
<display>hide</display>
</log>
</settings>
Table 2.2.2 (g) Description in the Tags

XML tag Description
<log> Define the operation history.
<display> Show or hide the operation history on the settings screen (Default:
show).
hide: Hides the operation history on the settings screen.
33
B-64647EN/02
 Memory usage notification settings

Set the memory usage notification.
To configure the settings, edit the XML file (settings.xml) stored in the application
folder (%APPPATH%) as follows:

<settings>
:
2 :
<memory>
<notify>no</notify>
<threshold>200</threshold>
3 </memory>
<interval>10</interval>
</settings>
4 The following describes tag descriptions.

Table 2.2.2 (h) Description in the Tags
5 XML tag Description
6 <memory>
<notify>
Define the memory usage notification behavior.
Specify whether or not to display the message about low on
memory (Default: Display the message).
no: Do not display the message.
7 <threshold> Specify the available memory threshold to display the message

with an integer in MB.
The default is as follows:
8 • PANEL iH: 100 MB

• PANEL iH Pro: 600 MB
<interval> Specify the interval to check the memory usage with an integer
A1 (Default: 30 minutes).
A2  Launcher and screen keyboard display settings

Set the launcher and screen keyboard display and operation.
Z This example shows the description to configure the following settings:

• Display the launcher at (Left side, top side) = (100, 100).
• Display the standard keyboard at iHMI startup.
• Set the PMC address when the reset key is pressed to "1:R1000".
• Set the display position and size of the standard keyboard as follows:
• Display position: (Left side, top side) = (100, 100)
• Display size: (Width, height) = (0, 0) (Default)
• Display the tool slide of the CNC operation screen by pressing the first
application button.
• Display the manual viewer by pressing the second application button.
34
B-64647EN/02
To configure the settings, edit the XML file (settings.xml) stored in the application
folder (%APPPATH%) as follows:
<screenkeyboards launcher="100,100" current="qwerty" signal="1:R1000" option="startup">

<entry>
<name>qwerty</name>
<x>100</x>
1
<y>100</y>
<width>0</width>
<height>0</height>
</entry>
2
<entry>
3
<name>auto_hmi_t</name>
...
</entry>
</screenkeyboards>
<screenkeyboardsapps> 4
<entry>
<name>CNCOPERA</name>
<subject>open,ToolOfsSld</subject>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\NcOperation.svg</image> 5
</entry>
<entry>
<name>Manual</name>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Manual.svg</image> 6
</entry>
</screenkeyboardsapps>
7
The following describes tag and attribute descriptions.
Table 2.2.2 (i) Description in the Tags

8
XML tag/attribute Description
<screenkeyboards> tag Define the screen keyboard setting items. A1
launcher attribute Specify the upper-left corner of the display position of the
launcher.
If omitted, the launcher is not shown. A2
current attribute Specify the screen keyboard type.
Value
qwerty
Type
Standard keyboard
Default size
Width: 522, height:
Z
245
auto_hmi-t Machine operator's Width: 485, height:
panel screen display 233
function keyboard
35
B-64647EN/02
XML tag/attribute Description

signal attribute Specify a PMC address used for reset input.
Example: 1:R1000, 3:R1000
When the reset key is pressed, bit 0 of the specified signal
1 is turned on.
Output this signal to the external reset signal with a ladder.
For details about external reset, see "RESET AND
REWIND" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
2 CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
Note: Bits 1 to 7 of the specified signal cannot be used
as they are reserved.
3 option attribute • startup: Displays the screen keyboard at iHMI startup.
• lockpos: Fixes the screen keyboard position. The
keyboard cannot be moved by dragging.
4 • autohide: Hides the launcher and screen keyboard
temporarily when a screen shot is taken.
5 Note: To specify multiple attributes, separate them with

"," (comma), like 'option="startup,autohide"'.
6 <entry> tag Set the tag for each screen keyboard type.
This setting can be omitted. If omitted, the upper-left corner
of the display position of the screen keyboard is (0, 0), and
the size is the default.
<name> tag Specify the value of the screen keyboard type.
7 <x> tag Specify the left side of the display position of the screen
keyboard.
8 <y> tag Specify the top side of the display position of the screen
keyboard.
<width> tag Specify the display width of the screen keyboard. (*1)
A1 <height> tag
If "0" is set, the default size is applied.
Specify the display height of the screen keyboard. (*1)
If "0" is set, the default size is applied.
A2 <screenkeyboardsapps> Register a specific application to an application button.
tag This setting can be omitted. If omitted, the application
button is not shown.
Z <entry> tag Set the tag for each application to be registered.
<name> tag Specify the identifier ID of an application to be called. (*2)
<subject> tag Specify a character string of up to 63 characters (case-
insensitive) to be passed when the application is called.
This setting can be omitted.
<image> tag Specify the absolute path of the application button icon file
(extension: png, bmp, svg).
*1 The keyboard is expanded or reduced to the specified width and height from the
default size of the specified keyboard type.
*2 For details on the application identifier ID, see "A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER
ID".
36
B-64647EN/02
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.3

You can: (1) change the background color of the Home screen; (2) add buttons to
application menus; and (3) add status icons to the iHMI status display area. Also,
you can additionally display failure diagnosis messages on the Information Center.
1
2
2.3.1 Customizing the Home Screen
3
2.3.1
You can:
- Change the background of the Home screen.
- Add a shutdown button on the Home screen.
4
2.3.1.1 Changing the background of the Home screen
2.3.1.1
To change the background of the Home screen, add an image file (svg, png) 5
called "BG" to the following location.
%APPDATA%\MTB\Home 6
7
8
A1
Fig. 2.3.1.1 Changing the Background of the Home Screen
If there are multiple image files called "BG" in the folder, the priority of a file to be A2
used as the background is in order of svg and png. If there is no image file, the
default background is used.
Z
2.3.1.2 Adding the shutdown button to the Home screen (PANEL iH Pro only)
In PANEL iH Pro, you can add the shutdown button to the Home screen.
2.3.1.2
Edit the XML file (settings-general.xml) stored in the data folder (%APPDATA%).
Add the following tag in the <settings> tag of settings-general.xml.
Table 2.3.1.2 (a) Tag to be included between <settings> and </settings>

XML tag Description
<home> Specify information related to the Home screen.
37
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.3.1.2 (b) Tag to be included between <home> and </home>

XML tag Description
<shutdown> Specify whether to display or hide the shutdown button. If "show"
is specified, the shutdown button will be displayed on the
1 application menu. By default setting, the shutdown button is not
displayed.
Setting example:
2 <settings>
...
<home>
3 <shutdown>show</shutdown>
</home>
</settings>
4
5
6
7 Shutdown
button
8 Fig. 2.3.1.2 Shutdown button
A1
 • For shutdown button operation, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen
A2 MEMO
38
B-64647EN/02
2.3.2 Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status

Display Area
2.3.2
The status display area common to all applications can include machine
manufacturer specific icons, such as coolant, interlock, and machine warnings. It
also can display machine specific information, such as temperature. Icons or 1
character strings can be switched according to the PMC signal.
2
2.3.2.1 Adding status icons and character string display
For the 10.4-inch display unit, the display items are left-aligned on the right side of
2.3.2.1
the standard status display. 3

Additional character
Standard status Additional icon display string display
4
5
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (a) Status display (top row)
6
For the 15- or 19-inch display unit, the display items are left-aligned on the bottom
row of the status display area.
7
Additional character string display
8
A1
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (b) Status display (bottom row)
To display icons or character strings, create an XML file (file name: status.xml)
A2
and define the PMC signal and display items in this file.
Store the created XML file in the following location. Z
%APPDATA%
 Maximum number of displayed items

The following table shows the width of the display area for each display unit size
and maximum number of displayed items per row (for display items of size 24 x 24
dots).
39
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.3.2.1 (a) Maximum number of displayed items

Display unit size Width of display Maximum number
area of displayed items
10.4" 449 dots 16
1 15" 640 dots 23
19" 896 dots 32
2
 Format of status.xml
The format of status.xml is as follows.
3
● </status/signals> tags
Define signal information used for the status bar display.
4 This signal information is displayed on the status bar when the name attribute in /
status/signals/pmc is specified for the data attribute in /status/symbols/entry.
5 Table 2.3.2.1 (b) Description between the <signals> and </ signals> tags
6 XML tag, attribute Description

<pmc> tag Specify the PMC address for the input data.
Examples: 1:R1000, 3:R1000
name attribute Specify the input data name with a character string.
7 Examples: toolno, spload, etc.
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "pmc".
type attribute Specify one of the following PMC data types.
8 bit: Bit string 32 points (4 bytes)
byte: 1-byte signed integer
unsigned byte: 1-byte unsigned integer
A1 word: 2-byte signed integer
unsigned word: 2-byte unsigned integer
dword: 4-byte signed integer
A2 unsigned dword: 4-byte unsigned integer

float: Single precision floating point number
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "bit".
40
B-64647EN/02
• The following character strings are reserved as data names. Do not

use these character strings for the name attribute.
mode, run, emergency, edit, colcheck, path, date, time
• You can specify up to 32 data. Any data specified over 32 will not be 1
reflected.
• For the icon display, "unsigned dword" and "float" can not be specified
in the data type. 2
 • Specifying too much data may cause performance drop of iHMI. Keep
the number of specified PMC data to a minimum.
NOTE • Data synchronization will not be ensured if you do not specify a PMC
address number that is in accordance with the data alignment. This
3
means that for 2-byte integers, the address number must be a multiple
of 2, and for 4-byte integers or single precision floating point numbers,
the address number must be a multiple of 4 in order to be in 4
accordance with the data alignment.
• When the value of the floating point number is NaN (Not a Number),
the value will be treated as 0. 5
 </status/symbols> tag 6
Define a symbol displayed on the status bar.
Specify the name attribute in /status/signals/pmc for the data attribute in /status/
symbols/entry. 7
The image tag allows the icon defined in the tag to be displayed when the signal
value matches the value of the value attribute.
The text tag allows the signal value to be displayed in the specified format. 8
A1
A2
Z
41
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.3.2.1 (c) Description between the < symbols> and </ symbols > tags
XML tag, attribute Description
<entry> tag Add one <entry> to add one display item.
The description order of <entry> tags is the display order of
1 items.
data attribute Specify the input data name you specified in the </status/
signals> tags.
2 To specify a bit signal, specify the bit position (0 to 31) after
".".
Examples: pmc.0, bitsignal.1
3 size attribute Specify the width and height of items in the format of "x.x".
The unit is pixel.
placement attribute If "lower" is specified, display items will be placed on the
4 bottom row of the status display area.
If this attribute is not specified, items will be placed on the
top row.
5 format attribute Specify one of the following data display formats.
image: Icon
6 formatted text: Format-specified character string

If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "image".
fontsize attribute Specify the font size in points.
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be 10 points.
7 <image> tag Specify the icon that corresponds to the signal value.
This must be specified when "image" is specified as the
format attribute for the <entry> tag.
8 value attribute Specify the status value.

Bit signal: 0 or 1
Other than bit signal: Signal value (in decimal notation)
A1 <language> tag
If this value is not specified, display will be blank.
Specify the icon file.
<en> tag: English icon file
A2 <text> tag
<ja> tag: Japanese icon file
Specify the format for the displayed character string for the
signal value.
Z This must be specified when "formatted text" is specified as

the format attribute for the <entry> tag.
forecolor Specify the character color in RGB.
attribute Format: #RRGGBB (RR: red, GG: green, BB: blue)
* RR, GG, and BB are 1-byte hex numbers (00 to FF).
Example: #FFFFFF (white)
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be black.
backcolor Specify the character background color in RGB.
attribute Format: #RRGGBB (RR: red, GG: green, BB: blue)
*RR, GG, and BB are 1-byte hex numbers (00 to FF).
Example: #0000FF (blue)
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be white.
42
B-64647EN/02

<language> tag Specify the format for the displayed character string. Specify
with the same format as the printf conversion in C language.
Signal values are displayed with the following format
specifications.
%d, %i, %o, %u, %x, %X, %f 1
<en> tag: English format
<ja> tag: Japanese format
2
• Be sure to create the <en> tag. If there are no other language tags,
the <en> tag is selected. 3

NOTE
• BMP, PNG, and SVG formats can be specified for the icon file.
• When the display items are placed on the bottom row of a 15" or 19"
display unit, the items will be hidden behind the alarm message
display. Make sure to place any high priority items on the top row.
4
 Setting example
5
To display the items as shown in the figure below, create an XML file as shown in
the description example.
6
7
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (c) Status display example
8
A1
A2
Z
43
B-64647EN/02
XML file (status.xml) description example

<status>
When omitted: name="pmc" type="bit"
<signals>
<pmc>1:R1000</pmc>
1 <pmc name="toolno" type="unsigned word">1:R1004</pmc>
<pmc name="spload" type="float">1:R1008</pmc>
<pmc name="counter" type="byte">1:R1012</pmc>
</signals>
2 <symbols>
<entry data="pmc.0" size="24,24">
<image value="0">
<en>%APPDATA%\Icon\lamp00.png</en>
3 </image>
<image value="1">
4
</image>
</entry>
<entry data="pmc.1" size="24,24">
<image value="0">
5 <en>%APPDATA%\Icon\lamp10.png</en>
</image>
<image value="1">
</image>
</entry>
<entry data="toolno" size="24,24">
<image value="1">
</image>
<image value="2">
8 </image>
<image value="3">
</image>
A1 </entry>
<entry data="spload" size="80,22" format="formatted text">
<text>
<en>Load:%3.1f%%</en>
A2 <ja> 負荷 :%3.1f%%</ja>
</text>
</entry>
<entry data="counter" size="80,22" format="formatted text">
Z <text forecolor="#ffffff" backcolor="#00a0ff">
<en>Count:%d</en>
<ja> 個数 :%d</ja>
</text>
</entry>
</symbols>
</status>
 "%APPDATA%" is the same folder as one storing status.xml.

MEMO
44
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.3.2.1 (d) PMC data definitions and values specified using the </status/
signals> tags
Input signal name Input signal Data length Signal value
pmc 1:R1000 32-bit Bit0=1, Bit1=0
toolno 1:R1004 2-byte unsigned 3 1
integer
spload 1:R1008 Single precision 23.5
floating point number 2
counter 1:R1014 1-byte signed integer 27
3
Table 2.3.2.1 (e) Display items specified using the </status/symbols> tags
Input signal
name
Input signal Value File name Icon
4
pmc 1:R1000.0 0 lamp00.png
5
1 lamp01.png
6
1:R1000.1 0 lamp10.png
7
1 lamp11.png
toolno 1:R1004 1 lamp21.png

8
2 lamp22.png A1
3 lamp23.png A2
spload 1:R1008 Load:%3.1f%% Z
counter 1:R1014 Count:%d
2.3.2.2 Changing the path icon

You can change the path icon in the iHMI common status display and CNC
2.3.2.2
operationscreen.
Path icon
Fig. 2.3.2.2 Path icon display
45
B-64647EN/02
To change the path icon, modify the common XML file (file name: status.xml) to
specify an image file name as follows:

<status>
1 <symbols>
<entry data="name">
<image value="pathno">
<(language ID)>...</(language ID)>
2 </image>
</entry>
:
:
3 </symbols>
</status>
4 Table 2.3.2.2 Description in the Tags

5 <symbols> tag Define display items in the common status display.
<entry> tag Define an icon for each display item.
6 data="name" Set the name of the display item. Specify "path" for the path icon.
<image> tag Define an icon.
value="pathno" Specify the path number (between 1 and the maximum path
7 <(language ID)> tag

number).
Specify a two-character language code (such as en or ja) defined
in ISO639-1.
8 However, use a three-character language code instead only for

Simplified Chinese (chs) and Traditional Chinese (cht).
A1
• The settings are applied when iHMI is restarted.
• Be sure to create the <en> tag (English). If a language has no
A2 settings, the <en> tag is selected.
• A path without the settings shows the default icon (path number).
Setting an invalid path number (other than 1 to maximum path
Z number) is ignored.

NOTE
• BMP, PNG, and SVG formats can be specified for the icon file.
• For the BMP or PNG format, specify an icon of size 24 x 24 dots. You
can specify any other size than the above, but if you do, the image
may be automatically zoomed in/out with the quality deteriorating.
• If you specify an icon with a transparent background, the background
color when displayed is as follows:
Selected path: RGB = 0, 180, 255 (Cyan)
Other than the selected path: RGB = 195, 195, 195 (Gray)
46
B-64647EN/02
2.3.2.3 Changing the text weight in the message display

You can change the text weight in the iHMI message display area.
2.3.2.3
Message display
1
Fig. 2.3.2.3 (a) Message display
To change the text weight in the message display area, modify the XML file
2
(status.xml) as follows:

3
<status>
:
: 4
<message fontweight="weight"/>
</status>
5
Table 2.3.2.3 Description in the <message> tag
<message> tag
attribute
Description When
omitted
6
fontweight="weight" Specify a value by 100 between 100 and 900 for 400
the text weight.
Example: 100, 200, ..., 900
7
 Display example
8
fontweight="400" (default)
A1
fontweight="700" A2
Fig. 2.3.2.3 (b) Message Display Example Z

NOTE
47
B-64647EN/02
2.3.3 Adding Failure Diagnosis Messages

2.3.3
You can add machine specific alarms (external alarm and macro alarm) and
operator messages to failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the
Information Center.
1 Using the PC application "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table", messages
are converted to data loadable to the NC. Also, images of diagnosis messages for
2 alarms and to assist solving them can be set.
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.3 Troubleshoot (diagnosis) window
7
2.3.3.1 Alarm and operator message types that can be added
8 The following machine alarms and operator messages can be added as failure
2.3.3.1
diagnosis messages.
A1 1. External alarms
2. Macro alarms
3. External operator messages
A2
2.3.3.2 Diagnosable numbers
Z Of machine alarms and operator messages, the following numbers can be
2.3.3.2
diagnosed on the Information Center.
1. External alarms
Table 2.3.3.2 (a) Diagnosable alarm numbers (external alarms)
Parameter EXA (No.6301#0)
=0 =1
Alarm number 1000 to 1999 0 to 4095
48
B-64647EN/02
2. Macro alarms
Table 2.3.3.2 (b) Diagnosable alarm numbers (macro alarms)

Parameter MCA (No.6008#1)
Alarm number
=0
3000 to 3200
=1
0 to 4095
1
3. External operator messages 2
Table 2.3.3.2 (c) Diagnosable message numbers (external operator messages)
3
Parameter EXM (No.6301#1)
Message number
=0
2000 to 2999
=1
0 to 4095
4
5
• Of external operator message numbers in the above table, as many
as specified in Parameter No.6310 can be diagnosed.
• Those diagnosable numbers are only the range of numbers displayed 6
on the CNC screen and different from ones set in each function.
• For numbers set in each function, see the manuals below.
External alarms/external operator messages 7
 "4.12 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS" in
"FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B PMC PROGRAMMING
MEMO MANUAL" (B-64513EN)
Macro alarm
8
"CUSTOM MACRO" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64484EN) A1
• For details about each parameter, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-
MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-64490EN).
A2
Z
2.3.3.3 Environments required to create failure diagnosis messages
To create failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the Information Center,
2.3.3.3
you need the PC tool "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table". For the
required environment, see "1.1.3 Settings for When an Application Is Started/
Running". Install the tool according to the installation procedure described in the
section "2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table".
49
B-64647EN/02
2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table

To create failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the Information Center,
2.3.3.4
you use PC tool "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table".

Use the following procedures to install this tool to the PC and create failure
diagnosis messages.
1
 Installation Procedure
2 The following describes how to install the tool.
<1> Start "SETUP.EXE" in the installation CD (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).

3 The [FANUC Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis Setup] dialog box
appears.
4
<2> Specify the installation destination folder and click the [Next] button.
5
6
7
8
The installation confirmation dialog box appears.
A1
A2  • You can change the installation destination folder by clicking the
[Browse] button.
MEMO
Z
<3> Click the [Next] button.
Installation starts.
When the tool is successfully installed, a message box appears to show the
installation completion, and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added to the Start
Menu.
 Uninstallation Procedure
The following describes how to uninstall the tool.
<1> Open [Uninstall a program] from the Control Panel.
50
B-64647EN/02
<2> Select [FANUC Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis] from programs
currently installed.
<3> Click the [Delete (or Uninstall)] button.

A message box appears to ask you to confirm the uninstallation. 1
<4> Click the [Yes] button.
The tool is uninstalled.
2
 Creating a Failure Diagnosis Message Input File 3
Create an Excel file where you enter failure diagnosis messages according to the
procedure below.
4
<1> Select [Start Menu] -> [Program] -> [FANUC Guidance Table] -> [Create New].
5
6
7
The [New File] dialog box appears.
<2> Enter the Excel file destination folder and the file name.
8
A1
A2
Z
<3> Click the [OK] button.
An Excel file is created with the specified name.
When you open the created file in Excel, you can enter failure diagnosis
messages.
51
B-64647EN/02
• The file extension is "xls" (Excel workbooks) only. Extensions other

than "xls" are ignored and converted to "xls".
• If a file fails to be created, a message box appears according to the
1 
NOTE
cause of the failure.
• Excel files or memory card format files for creating failure diagnosis
messages for old models cannot be used. When using data for old
models, select [Convert Old Model Data] in Step 1 to convert the Excel
2 file for old models and create a memory card format file again.
3  Failure diagnosis message Excel file

If you use "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table", enable the macro function
in the Trust Center Settings in Excel 2010. If the macro function is disabled, you
4 cannot create failure diagnosis messages. Also, in the Trust Center, set both the
failure diagnosis message input file folder and the machine alarm diagnosis
guidance table installation folder to "Trusted Locations".
5
 Failure Diagnosis Message Input File Layout
6 There are two sheets in an Excel file where you enter failure diagnosis messages.
[Overall] sheet: Sheet used to set overall operation and a display language.
7 [Guidance] sheet: Sheet used to enter message character strings.
8 Fig. 2.3.3.4 (a) Excel file layout
A1 ● [Overall] sheet layout

In the [Overall] sheet, you can create failure diagnosis messages using the
operation buttons A to C shown in the figure below. You can also change the
A2 display language (Japanese/English) in the sheet and configure the settings for
each language.
Z
A D
B E
C F
Fig. 2.3.3.4 (b) [Overall] sheet
52
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.3.3.4 (a) [Overall] sheet overview

Name Function
A Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet, where you input failure
diagnosis message data.
B Check Input Data Checks all data input in the [Guidance] sheet, such as the 1
numeric value range and unavailable characters.
C Make Memory Card Creates a memory card format file that can be loaded to the
File CNC, from data input in the [Guidance] sheet. 2
D Display Language Changes the display language in the sheet by selecting the
language from the list box and clicking the [Apply] button.
Japanese or English can be selected. 3
E Result of Check Displays the input data check result.
F Multi-Languages Configure the settings for inputting messages in multiple
languages. 4
● [Guidance] sheet layout
In the [Guidance] sheet, you can enter the number and message of each alarm or 5
operator message.
D
E
6
F
A B C 8
Fig. 2.3.3.4 (c) [Guidance] sheet

A1
Table 2.3.3.4 (b) [Guidance] sheet overview

A2
Name Function
A Guidance Table 1 Table where you input the numbers and titles of the alarms or Z
operator messages.
B Guidance Table 2 Table where you input questions or instructions to the alarms or
operator messages for the operator.
C Guidance Table 3 Table where you enter detailed descriptions of the alarms or
operator messages for the operator, and the file names of
images to be displayed.
D Page move Switches the display between Guidance Table 1 and 2.
E Check Input Data Checks input data in each Guidance Table.
53
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
F Row number Adds or removes as many rows as specified in the combo box
settings to/from the end of the table in Guidance Table 1 or 2.
The total row number of each Guidance Table is 30 at a
1 minimum and 2000 at a maximum.
2 2.3.3.5
2.3.3.5
Creating failure diagnosis messages
Create failure diagnosis messages using the operation buttons A to C in that order
in the [Overall] sheet in the figure below.
3
4 A
B
5
C
6
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (a) Operation buttons in the [Overall] sheet
7
A Input Guidance Data
8 Displays the [Guidance] sheet, where you input failure diagnosis message
data.
A1 B Check Input Data

Checks all data input in the [Guidance] sheet, such as the numeric value range
and unavailable characters.
A2 C Make Memory Card File

Creates a memory card format file that can be loaded to the CNC, from data
Z input in the [Guidance] sheet.
The following describes each operation.
 Entering Guidance Data

Click the [Input Guidance Data] button in the [Overall] sheet to display the
[Guidance] sheet.
Enter data in Guidance Table 1 to 3.
54
B-64647EN/02
Only characters that can be displayed on the CNC screen are selectable
for each display item.

NOTE
For details, see the following description.
"CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in "FANUC
1
Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN)
2
● Input contents in Guidance Table 1
3
A B C D E F G
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (b) Guidance Table 1

4
Table 2.3.3.5 (a) Input contents in Guidance Table 1

5
Name Input contents Number of
characters 6
A Type Input the type of the alarm or operator message. Two single-byte
The following characters can be used. English
EX: External alarm
MC: Macro alarm
characters 7
OP: External operator message
B Number Input the number of the external alarm, macro Four single-byte 8
alarm, or operator message. numeric
characters or less
C Classified Input two types of codes in "Code 1" and "Code 2". Code 1: A1
Code "Code 1 - Code 2" is displayed in the first line of the Two single-byte
Information Center. characters or less
Code 1: Input the category of the alarm or
operator message.
(or one double-
byte character)
A2
Code 2: Input the number of the alarm or operator Code 2:
message. 16 single-byte
characters or less Z
(or eight double-
byte characters
or less)
D Title Input the character string of the alarm or operator 32 single-byte
message. characters or less
(or 16 double-
byte characters
or less)
55
B-64647EN/02

characters
E Probable Input the possible cause of the alarm or operator 32 single-byte
Cause message. characters or less
This is not used in the iHMI.
1 (or 16 double-
byte characters
or less) x three
lines or less
2 F Message Input the message ID of the guidance message Eight single-byte
ID displayed first in the guidance area after the alarm alphanumeric
or operator message occurs. characters or less
3 Example: and uppercase
First message ID of external alarm 1000: EX1000A only for English
characters
4 G Additional Do not use this item.
Information
(Reserved)
5
6 • If you enter a type other than the above, an error occurs when input
data is checked.

NOTE
• Each category code does not need to match Type or Number.
• Do not use "NC" because it is used for the category code 1 of the
alarm displayed on the CNC system.
7 • For the message ID, see the description of "Input contents in
Guidance Table 2".
8
A1
A B C D
A2
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (c) Guidance Table 2
Z
Table 2.3.3.5 (b) Input contents in Guidance Table 2
characters
A Message Enter a character string to identify Guidance Eight single-byte
ID message (B). alphanumeric
Example 1: characters or less
First message ID of external alarm 1000: EX1000A and uppercase
Example 2: only for English
Second message ID of external alarm 1000: characters
EX1000B
56
B-64647EN/02

characters
B Guidance Enter a message displayed in the details or 128 single-byte
message diagnosis window on the Information Center. characters or less
Describe a question or solution for the operator. (or 64 double-
byte characters 1
or less)
C Next
Message
Enter the message ID of the jump target when the
[YES] or [NO] soft key is pressed responding to the
Eight single-byte
alphanumeric 2
ID question of each guidance message. characters or less
If you do not want anything to occur (no jump target), and uppercase
enter "-1". only for English 3
characters
D Note Enter a comment, etc.
4
• Do not use a character string starting with "M" + numeric value
because it is used for the message ID, which represents the jump 5
target from the NC alarm guidance table to Guidance Table 2 on the
machine.

NOTE
• The guidance message automatically starts a new line at every 32
single-byte characters (16 double-byte characters) when displayed on
6
the Information Center. If you want to break a line at a specific
position, insert "\n". "\n" is not counted as a character. The number of
message lines must be four or less including automatically broken 7
lines.
8
A1
A B C
A2
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (d) Guidance Table 3
Z
Table 2.3.3.5 (c) Input contents in Guidance Table 3
characters
A Message ID Enter message IDs that have been entered in Eight single-byte
Guidance message 2. Enter message IDs alphanumeric
corresponding to the guidance messages where characters or less
you want to add detailed descriptions and/or and uppercase
images. only for English
characters
57
B-64647EN/02

characters
B File name Set file names of the images for detailed description 50 single-byte
of guidance messages that have been entered in characters or less
1 Guidance message 2.
BMP, JPEG, and PNG formats are available.
(or 25 double-
byte characters
or less)
2 C Detailed Enter character strings for detailed description of

Explanation the guidance messages that have been entered in
512 single-byte
characters or less
Guidance message 2. (or 256 double-
byte characters
3 or less)
4 • For contents that can be entered as message IDs, use the description
method shown in Guidance message 2.
• Store the image file for detailed description in the same folder as the
5 Excel file.
 • If you want to break a line at a specific position in detailed description,

insert "\n". "\n" is not counted as a character.
6 NOTE
• You do not need to enter contents in Guidance Table 3. If you do not
need to display detailed description and/or images in the troubleshoot
(diagnosis) window and use this function as the conventional machine
alarm diagnosis, do not enter data.
7
 Checking Input Data
8 When you click the [Check Input Data] button in the [Overall] sheet, the numeric
value range, number of characters, unavailable characters, and number of
message lines are checked for all input data in the [Guidance] sheet.
A1
● Display upon check completion
When the data are checked, the character string in [Result of Check] in the
A2 [Overall] sheet changes from "Unchecked" to "OK".
Z
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (e) Display upon check completion

NOTE
• If you edit the [Guidance] sheet after the result becomes "Checked", it
returns to "OK".
58
B-64647EN/02
● Display at error occurrence

If an error occurs, the text in the check result changes to "NG", and the sheet and
guidance table names where the error occurred are displayed in the cell under the
check result as shown below.
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (f) Display at error occurrence 2

Click the guidance table name to display the guidance table where the error
occurred.
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (g) Guidance table display
7
In the guidance table, the cell where the error occurred turns green, and the error
message is added as a comment for the cell as shown above. Error messages to
be added are as follows:
8
• Input a numeric value.
• The value is out of range. (n to m) A1
• Input in n single-byte characters or less (or m double-byte characters or less).
• The number of lines exceeds n.
• No message ID is referred to. A2
• The type (s) cannot be used.
* "m" and "n" represent numbers. "s" represents a character string.
Z
59
B-64647EN/02
• By clicking the [CHECK] button displayed at the upper part of each

guidance table, you can check input data for the table. In this case, the
check result is displayed in the cell under the [CHECK] button as
1 shown in the figure

below.
2

NOTE
3
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (h) Check result display
• If an error occurs on multiple guidance tables, the name of a guidance
4 table where the first error occurred is displayed in [Result of Check] in
the [Overall] sheet. Check the check result of each guidance table
shown under the [CHECK] button.
5
6

NOTE
• If the message ID has a character string showing the jump target from
the NC alarm guidance table to Guidance Table 2 on the machine, the
cell turns light blue.
7
 Creating a Memory Card File
8 You can create a memory card format file that can be loaded to the CNC, from
data entered in the [Guidance] sheet, by clicking the [Make Memory Card File]
button in the [Overall] sheet.
A1 Use the following procedure to create a memory card format file that can be
loaded to the CNC.
A2 <1> Click the [Make Memory Card File] button.

The [Make Memory Card File] dialog box appears.
Z
<2> Specify the file destination folder name in [Destination folder].
<3> Specify the file name to create in [File name].

NOTE
• The default name is "GUI_USR.MEM".
• If no extension is used in the file name, the extension "MEM" is
automatically added to the file name.
60
B-64647EN/02
1
2
When a memory card format file is created, the message box "Memory card
format file created." appears.
3
In the destination folder, "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" is created as well as a file
with the extension "MEM".
4
• You can use only a single-byte alphanumeric short file name (MS-
DOS 8.3 format) for the file name. Other format file names cannot be
5
loaded to the CNC.
• If a file with the same name as one specified exists in the destination
6

NOTE
folder, the file is always overwritten.
• If a memory card format file fails to be created, a message box
appears according to the cause of the failure.
• If no data are entered in Guidance Table 3, 7
"MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" will not be created.
• If "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" exists in the destination folder, the file is
always overwritten. 8
● Loading using the BOOT function A1
By loading the created file to the CNC using the CNC BOOT function, you can
display failure diagnosis messages on the Information Center when an external
alarm, macro alarm, or operator message occurs. A2
Also, by storing "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" in the following folders, you can
display the detailed description and/or images entered in Guidance Table 3, in the
troubleshoot (diagnosis) window. Z
%APPDATA%\MTB\TroubleShooting
 • For the CNC BOOT function, see the following description.

"BOOT SYSTEM" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
MEMO MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-64485EN)
61
B-64647EN/02
 Moving from the CNC Alarm Guidance Table to the Machine Guidance
Table
If diagnosis using the NC alarm guidance table on the CNC concludes that
"diagnosis is required on the machine", call the message ID, a character string
starting with "M" + numeric value, to move to diagnosis using the guidance table
1 on the machine.
By creating guidance messages corresponding to the message IDs shown in the
table below, you can move to diagnosis using the created failure diagnosis
2 messages after diagnosis on the NC.
3 Table 2.3.3.5 (d) Reserved message IDs

No. Message Title Probable Cause
ID
4 1 M205 Rigid mode DI When G84 (G74, G88) was executed, the rigid mode
OFF DI signal (G061.0) was not 1.
2 M409 Abnormal load Load torque has increased more than during normal
5 operation due to mechanical collision or twisting.
3 M410 Excessive error The axis cannot reach the target position due to
6 when stopping mechanical collision or twisting.
4 M411 Excessive error The axis cannot move due to mechanical collision or
when moving twisting.
7 5 M420 Excessive
torque error
The torque error is getting larger due to a mechanical
synchronous gap between two axes moving in
synchronization.
8 6 M421 Excessive
semi-full error
There is a movement gap between the motor and the
separate type detector in the full-close machine
because the machine is twisted.
A1 7 M436 Soft thermal

(OVC)
The load is getting larger, and an excessive electric
current is flowing due to mechanical collision or
twisting.
A2
Z 
NOTE
• Message IDs starting with "M" + numeric value other than the above
cannot be used.
2.3.3.6 Creating different language messages

To change the language of messages displayed on the Information Center
2.3.3.6
according to the language displayed on the CNC, you need to enter messages for
each display language and create a memory card format file.
Enter messages for each display language in the corresponding language
message sheet.
62
B-64647EN/02
The language of messages entered in the [Guidance] sheet is regarded

NOTE
as "English".
When you need to use a language other than English, create a different
language message sheet.
1
 Creating a Different Language Message Sheet
Create a different language message sheet as follows.
2
<1> Click the [Multi-Languages] button in the [Overall] sheet. 3
The [Multi-Languages] dialog box appears.
<2> In the [Make sheet] list, select the check box for a language for which you want
4
to create a sheet.
Now you can change the check box for the corresponding language in the 5
[Output file] list.
 6
• You can select multiple check boxes.
MEMO
7
<3> In the [Output file] list, select the check box for a language for which you want
to output at the same time to a memory card format file loadable to the CNC. 8
A1

NOTE
• Up to five check boxes excluding English can be selected. You cannot
select six or more check boxes.
A2
Z
63
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
Language sheets selected in Step 2 are created.
7
8 Different Language Message Sheets
A1
• Only 24 languages displayed in the [Multi-Languages] dialog box
are supported.
A2 • Up to six languages (English + other five languages) can be output
to a memory card format file at the same time.
• When a different language message sheet is created, the language
Z for the [Guidance] sheet automatically changes to "English". The
check box for English in the [Create Sheet] and [Output to Memory

NOTE
Card File] lists in the [Multi-Languages] dialog box is selected by
default and cannot be changed.
• If you enter messages in the [Guidance] sheet using a language
other than English before creating the corresponding language
message sheet, move the contents in the [Guidance] sheet to the
appropriate language sheet by using cut-and-paste in Excel.
• To delete a created sheet, deselect the check box for the
corresponding language in the [Create Sheet] list in the [Multi-
Languages] dialog box.
64
B-64647EN/02
 Filling in the Different Language Message Sheet

In a different language message sheet, you can enter three items of [Title],
[Probable Cause], and [Guidance Message]. Other items are automatically copied
from the data entered in the [Guidance] sheet and displayed.
1
Fig. 2.3.3.6 (a) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 1 2
3
Fig. 2.3.3.6 (b) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 2 4

5
6
Fig. 2.3.3.6 (c) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 3
See "■ Entering Guidance Data" in "2.3.3.5 Creating failure diagnosis messages"
7
to enter data. After entering data, check input data and create a memory card file.
8
• The language messages output to the memory card file allow the

automatic switch of languages for messages displayed on the
Information Center according to the display language on the CNC.
A1
However, if the memory card file does not contain messages with the
MEMO
same display languages as ones specified in the CNC, messages
entered in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed. A2
Z
2.3.4 Notes on Using the Japanese/Chinese Input Func-

tion
2.3.4
This section describes the notes on using the Japanese/Chinese input function.
 Common to PANELiH/PANELiH Pro

Operation verification
Before using this function, verify the operation thoroughly including applications
created by the machine manufacturer.
65
B-64647EN/02
How to enable the Japanese/Chinese input function

You can also enable this function by specifying enabled in the ime attribute in the
iHMI configuration file (settings-general.xml) <languages> tag.

1 <settings>
:
<languages ime="enabled"/>
2 </settings>
In PANEL iH Pro, if this function is enabled, the Windows keyboard settings are
3 changed at iHMI startup, and you may be prompted to restart the machine.
To prohibit the Japanese/Chinese input, specify prohibited in the ime attribute in
the iHMI configuration file (settings-general.xml) <languages> tag.

<settings>
:
5 <languages ime="prohibited"/>
</settings>
6 The Japanese/Chinese input function is disabled, and the "Japanese And Chinese
Input" item is not displayed on the setting screen.
7 • To enable the setting, you need to restart the machine.
 • For details on the iHMI configuration file, see the document

"iHMIHomeScreen.pdf" in the CNC application development kit
8 NOTE
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).
A1 How the Japanese/Chinese input function is achieved

This function is achieved by using Windows standard IMEs. To input Japanese/
Chinese in applications, use Windows API IMM (Input Method Manager) functions
A2 or Text Service Framework (PANEL iH Pro only).
Trigger for the Japanese/Chinese input function

Z If Japanese/Chinese input is enabled, when an application is displayed on top, the
window message "WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST" is sent to the
application. The application can switch the input language by responding to this
message.
 • For details on Windows API IMM functions, Text Service Framework,

and WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST message, see MSDN
MEMO (https://msdn.microsoft.com/).
66
B-64647EN/02
 PANEL iH
Displaying the language bar
The language bar is hidden by default. You can show the language bar by setting
the following registries:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\IMEJP\3.1\Window] 1
"IsMinimized"=dword:0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\IMEJP\3.1\Window]
"IsMinimized"=dword:0
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\CHSIME03]
2
"ShowState"=dword:1
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ControlPanel\Chinese IME UI\Settings]
"ShowState"=dword:1 3
 PANEL iH Pro
Inputting alphabets from the MDI keyboard
4
When this function is enabled, the alphabet input operation from the MDI
keyboard changes.
For example, the operation when the <G> key is pressed on the MDI keyboard is
5
as follows:
When disabled: When the user presses the <G> key, the MDI keyboard driver
notifies the OS that the keys have been pressed in the order of 6
<Shift> On -> <g> -> <Shift> Off.
This results in inputting the upper-case letter "G" to the
application. 7
When enabled: The MDI keyboard driver sets <CapsLock> On at power-on, and
when the user presses the <G> key, the driver notifies the OS
that the <g> key has been pressed. 8
This results in inputting the upper-case letter "G" to the
application.
A1
• The above operation change does not affect an application that
obtains input characters using Windows message WM_CHAR.
Meanwhile, it may affect an application that monitors the keyboard
A2
operation using the Windows API GetKeyState function.

NOTE
Before using this function, be sure to verify the application operation.
• If this operation affects an application, prohibit Japanese/Chinese
input in the iHMI configuration file (see "How to enable the Japanese/
Z
Chinese input function") and set the following registry:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FANUC\MMCMDI]
"CapitalKey"=dword:0
• To enable the setting, you need to restart the machine.
67
B-64647EN/02
Changing the keyboard layout

When this function is enabled, the keyboard layout for Japanese input changes
from the Japanese 106 keyboard to the English 101 keyboard.
If this operation affects an application, prohibit Japanese/Chinese input in the
iHMI configuration file (see "How to enable the Japanese/Chinese input function")
1 and set the following registry:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\i8042prt\Parameters]
2 "LayerDriver JPN"="kbd106.dll"
"OverrideKeyboardIdentifier"="PCAT_106KEY"
3

NOTE
4
Displaying the language bar
5 The language bar is hidden by default. You can show the language bar by adding
the langbar attribute in the iHMI configuration file (settings-general.xml)
6 <languages> tag as follows:

<settings>
7 :
<languages langbar="511"/>
</settings>
8 A value specified in the langbar attribute is the same as the argument

(hexadecimal format) of the ITfLangBarMgr interface and ShowFloating method in
Text Service Framework.
A1
A2 • For details on the iHMI configuration file, see the document

NOTE
"iHMIHomeScreen.pdf" in the CNC application development kit
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).
Z • For details on the ITfLangBarMgr interface and ShowFloating method,

see MSDN (https://msdn.microsoft.com/).
68
B-64647EN/02
Learning result of text conversion

The learning result of text conversion is saved in the C drive by default. Therefore,
if the EWF (Enhanced Write Filter) is used, the learning result is lost when the
machine is turned off. To retain the learning result even after power-off when the
EMF is used, change the IME properties setting so that the user dictionary file is
saved in the D drive. 1
2
3
4
5
6
• Saving the learning result is supported for Japanese IME only.
• For details on the EWF, see "PROTECTING THE OS USING THE 7
 ENHANCED WRITE FILTER (EWF) FUNCTION" in "FANUC Panel i
CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-64223EN-1).
NOTE • For details on the IME properties, see the Windows Help.
<https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/products/windows?os=windows-
8
7>
A1
A2
Z
69
B-64647EN/02
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION
2.4
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLI-

CATION
1 You can set up the planning application functions such as tool management
function, Cycle Time Estimation, etc.
2 The tool management function uses two databases to manage tool information.
For details on the database information, see "Tool database" in "iHMI Home
Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
3
2.4.1 Setting Up Tool Manager
4 2.4.1
Set up Tool Manager.

Tool Manager supports the tool management function and tool life management
5 function and displays tool information related to each function according to the
option or parameter.
6
• The tool management function and tool life management function
cannot be specified at the same time.
7 
NOTE
• For details about various settings and parameters of the tool
management function and the tool life management function, see
"FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
8
2.4.1.1 NC tool database management
A1 2.4.1.1
The NC tool database treats data in Tool Manager, which are related to tools
mounted in the machine. In this database, displayable or settable items are
changed according to the NC option and/or parameter settings as shown in the
A2 table below.
Z Table 2.4.1.1 Displayable and Settable Items List

Display condition
No. Item Tool life Tool

Standard management management
function function
1 Group Number ○
2 No. (Tool Management Number/ ○
Inner Group Number)
3 Tool Name ○
4 Tool Number (T Code) ○
5 Option Group Number ○ (*1)
6 Magazine Number ○
70
B-64647EN/02
Display condition

function function
7
8
Pot Number
Origin Magazine
○
○ (*2)
1
9 Origin Pot ○ (*2)
10 Tool Management ○ 2
11 Tool Size ○ (*2)
12
13
Data Access
Data Search
○
○
3
14 Spindle Speed (S) ○
15 Feedrate (F) ○ 4
16 Oversize Tool Geometry Number ○ (*2)
17
18
Tool Image
Tool Model Number
5
19 Comment
20 Operation Memo 6
21 Flutes
22
23
Catalog No.
Conditions ○
7
24 Tool Life Count Type ○ ○
25 Tool Life Count Period ○ (*3) 8
26 Tool Life Counter ○ ○
27
28
Maximum Tool Life Value
Forenoticed Tool Life
○
○ (*1)
○
○
A1
29 Tool Life State ○ ○
30 Tool Life (Tool Life Consumption) ○ ○ A2
31 Path ○ (*9) (*9)
32
33
Tool Compensation Number (H) (*4)
Tool Compensation Number (D) (*4)
○
○
○
○
Z
34 Tool Compensation Number (TG) ○
(*4)
35 Tool Compensation Number (TW) ○
(*4)
36 Tool Compensation Number (OFS) ○ (*9) (*9)
(*4)
37 Offset Data 1 to 13 (*5) ○
38 Virtual Tool Tip Direction ○
39 Tool Type (*6) (*7) ○
40 Tool Setting Position (*6) ○
71
B-64647EN/02
Display condition

function function
1 41
42
Size 1 to 8 (*6) (*8)
Tool parts image
○
○
43 Customize 0 to 40 ○ (*10)
2 44 Holder Model Number ○
45 Holder Image ○
3 46 Holder Geom. (*6) ○

*1: You need to set the tool life management B function (parameter LFB
(No.6805#4) = 1).
4 *2: The tool management expansion B function option is required.
*3: The tool management expansion function or tool management expansion B
function option is required.
5 *4: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.
For detail, see "Offset Number Set for Each Tool" in "FANUC iHMI Home
6 Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*5: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.
For details, see "Managing offset data for each tool" in "FANUC iHMI Home
Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
7 *6: To set data for 32 pairs or more, the tool geometry dimension data option is
required.
*7: The tool geometry dimension data tool type addition option is required for
8 some tool types.
*8: The display items vary depending on the tool type.
For details, see "Tool geometry dimension data that can be set" in "FANUC
A1 iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*9: This item is hidden because the settings are not necessary. Or, it is hidden
depending on the system configuration.
A2 *10: The tool management function customized data expansion (5 to 20 or 5 to 40)

is required for Customized Data 5 to 40.
Z 2.4.1.2 Tool management function customization

The following data customizations, which are performed in the tool management
2.4.1.2
function, can also be performed in tool management function. A customization

command can be specified by entering G10 data.
• Name data of customized data
• Decimal point data of customized data
• Removal reason data of customized data
72
B-64647EN/02
• To use this function, the tool management expansion function or tool

management expansion B function option is required.
• In Tool Manager, the following customizations cannot be applied.
1

NOTE
Name data of the tool life state
Name data of the spindle and waiting positions
Tool management data display (changing the display position,
selecting Display/Hide)
Display name (tool number (T code) and soft key name of tool type
2
number search)
3
2.4.1.3 Limiting display items in the tool catalog data management screen
2.4.1.3
Some catalog data are not contained in the NC tool database. You can set to 4
display catalog data only contained in the NC tool database on the catalog data
management screen.
To enable this setting, add the definition shown in the frame to the customization 5
setting file (custom.txt) stored in the following location:
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥ToolManager¥custom.txt 6
7
CATALOG_DISPLAY_ONLY_NC_DATA=YES
8
A1
A2
Z
73
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.4.1.3 List of Correspondence between Catalog Data Item Names and NC
Data Item Names
No. Tool Type Item name of tool catalog data Item name of tool
(reference source) NC data
1 (reflection
destination)
1 - Tool Catalog No. Catalog No.
2 2 Tool Tool Name Tool Name

3 Tool Tool Type Tool Type
4 Tool Tool Image Tool Image
3 5 Tool Comment Comment
6 Tool Flutes Flutes
4 7 Tool Part Tool Model Number Tool Model

Number
8 Tool Part Tool parts image Tool parts image
5 9 Tool Part Insert Geometry Type –
(*2)
6 10 Holder Part Holder Model Number Holder Model
Number
11 Holder Part Holder Image Holder Image
12 Holder Part Holder Geometry Type –
7 (*2)
13 General Tool Holder Part Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
8 14
15
Tool Part
Tool Part
Nose Angle
Cut Edge Length (*1)
Nose Angle
Tip Width
16 Tool Part Tip Thickness Tip Thickness
A1 17 Threading Tool Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
18 Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*1) Tip Width
A2 19
20 Grooving Tool
Tool Part
Tool Part
Tip Thickness
Tip Thickness
Tip Width
21 Tool Part Cut Edge Length Tip Length
Z 22 Tool Part Tip Thickness Tip Thickness
23 Button Turning Tool Tool Part Inscribed Circle Tip Length
Diameter
24 Tool Part Inscribed Circle Tip Width
Diameter
26 Point Corner Straight Holder Part Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
27 Tool Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
28 Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*1) Tip Width
74
B-64647EN/02
No. Tool Type Item name of tool catalog data Item name of tool
(reference source) NC data
(reflection
destination)
30 Versatile Tool
31
Tool Part
Tool Part
Cut Edge Length
Tip Width
Tip Length
1
33 Drilling Tool Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle 2
34 Tool Part Available Length Tip Length
35
36 Chamfering Tool
Tool Part
Tool Part
Machining Diameter
Machining Diameter
Radius
Cutter Diameter
3
37 Tool Part Max. Cut Depth/ Cutter Length
38 Flat End Mill Tool Tool Part

Available Length
Max. Cut Depth/Min. Tip Length
4
Cut Width
39 Tool Part Machining Diameter Radius 5
40 Ball End Mill Tool Tool Part Max. Cut Depth/Min. Tip Length
Cut Width
41 Tool Part Machining Diameter Radius 6
42 Tap Tool Tool Part Screw Part Length Tip Length
43 Tool Part Screw Part Diameter Radius
7
44 Reamer Tool Tool Part Function Length Tip Length
45 Tool Part Machining Diameter Radius
46 Boring Tool Holder Part Total Length Tip Length 8
47 Holder Part Function Width Radius
48 Face Mill Tool Holder Part Max. Cut Depth/Max.
Cutting Width/Min.
Tip Length
A1
Cutting Width/Cutting
49 Holder Part
Width/Function Length
Machining Diameter Radius
A2
*1: When Insert Geometry Type is a parallelogram or rectangle, the display item
"Tip Width" is to be referenced. Z
*2: This is not a referenced item when reflecting data but is displayed as a mark
when displaying dimension data items.
This may not be displayed depending on the tool type.
2.4.1.4 Using the old format tool catalog database

To import tool data on the Machining Cloud as tool catalog data, you need to
2.4.1.4
change the format of catalog data in the tool catalog database to the new one.
Catalog data are automatically changed to the new format. However, if catalog
data are changed to the new format, catalog data in the old format tool catalog
database are not passed over to the new format database.
75
B-64647EN/02
To use catalog data in the old format tool catalog database after changing to the
new format, modify the description in the customization setting file (custom.txt)
stored in the following location and then restart iHMI:
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥ToolManager¥custom.txt
1
 Setting to be modified in the customization setting file
2 Change "OLD_CATALOG" to "Yes". (The default is "No".)
3 #Old catalog database format : YES or NO

OLD_CATALOG=YES
:
4
2.4.1.5 Customizing display items on the table display screen
You can customize items to be displayed on the table display screen.
2.4.1.5
5 Modify the description in the customization setting file (custom.txt) stored in the
following location:
6
To apply the setting changes, you need to restart iHMI.

7
 Customization setting file definitions
8 There are the following three definitions available for the customization setting file:
Table 2.4.1.5 (a) Customization setting file definition types

A1 Function Definition type Details
Customization CUSTOMIZE Describe it in upper case from the beginning.
A2 enable/disable YES Enables customization and displays

display items specified in the display item
symbol on the table display screen.
Z NO or Disables customization and displays the

undefined default items on the table display screen.
See "Table 2.4.1.4 (b) Default display
items when customization is disabled".
Display item See "Table Describe the symbol name in upper case from the
symbol 2.4.1.4 (c) beginning.
Display items Describe one symbol name corresponding to an item
and symbol you want to display in each line.
names". Items are displayed in the order that the symbol
names are described in the customization setting file.
76
B-64647EN/02
Function Definition type Details

Comment # Putting # at the beginning treats the line as a
comment line. A comment line does not affect the
customization setting behavior.
Use a comment line to leave a note in the
customization setting file. 1
Table 2.4.1.5 (b) Default display items when customization is disabled 2
Valid option Display item
Tool Manager
function
No., Tool Name, Tool Type, T Code, Magazine, Pot, Tool
Management, Catalog No., Conditions
3
Tool life management Group, No., Tool Name, Tool Type, T Code, Optional Group,
function Catalog No.
4
Both disabled No., Tool Name, Tool Type, T Code, Path, Offset No. OFS,
Catalog No.
5
Customization setting file description example
#Perform table customize: YES or NO

6
CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Display item list
T_CODE
T_MANAGE
7
MAG
8
:
Each item is displayed on the table display screen as follows:

T_MANAGE
T_CODE MAG
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.4.1.5 Display items on the table display screen
77
B-64647EN/02
 Definable display item symbols

The following display item symbols can be defined in the customization setting file:
Table 2.4.1.5 (c) Display items and symbol names

1 No. Item Symbol name
1 Tool Type T_TYPE
2 2 Tool Number (T Code)

3 Option Group Number
T_CODE
O_GROUP
4 Magazine Number MAG
3 5 Pot Number POT
6 Origin Magazine O_MAG
4 7 Origin Pot
8 Tool Management
O_POT
T_MANAGE
9 Tool Life Count Type L_TYPE
5 10 Tool Size T_SIZE
11 Data Access DATA_ACCS
6 12 Data Search DATA_SRCH
13 Tool Life Count Period L_PERIOD
14 Spindle Speed (S) SPEED
7 15 Feedrate (F) FEEDRATE

16 Tool Life Counter L_COUNT
17 Maximum Tool Life Value L_MAX
8 18 Forenoticed Tool Life L_NOTICE
19 Tool Life State L_STATUS
A1 20 Tool Life Consumption L_CONSUM

21 Path PATH
22 Tool Compensation Number (H) OFS_NUMBER (*1)
A2 23 Tool Compensation Number (D)
24 Tool Compensation Number (TG)
Z 25 Tool Compensation Number (TW)

26 Tool Compensation Number (OFS)
27 Offset Data 1 to 13 OFS_DATA (*2)
28 Virtual Tool Tip Direction TIP
29 Oversize Tool Geometry Number T_GEONUM
30 Flutes FLUTES
31 Holder Shape HOLDER
32 Tool Mount Position SETTING
33 Size Data 1 to 8 T_SIZEDAT (*3)
34 Customize 0 to 40 CUSTOM (*4)
35 Coord. System COORDINATE
78
B-64647EN/02
No. Item Symbol name

36 Catalog No. CATALOG (*5)
37 Conditions
*1: When OFS_NUMBER is defined, all of Nos. 22 to 26 that are viewable are
displayed. 1
*2: When OFS_DATA is defined, all of Offset Data 1 to 13 that are viewable are
displayed. You can select them individually by defining OFS_DATA1 to 13.
*3: When T_SIZEDAT is defined, all of Size Data 1 to 8 that are viewable are 2
displayed. You can select them individually by defining T_SIZEDAT1 to 8.
*4: When CUSTOM is defined, all of Customize 0 to 40 that are viewable are
displayed. You can select them individually by defining CUSTOM0 to 40. 3
*5: When CATALOG is defined, Catalog No. and Conditions are displayed.
4

NOTE
• When you specify multiple items with the same name in the
customization setting file, only the definition described last is enabled,
and the definitions before that are ignored.
5
 Customizable items
The items that can be customized with this function are as follows:
6
Table 2.4.1.5 (d) Customizable items 7
Tool life Tool
Customizable
No. Item Standard management management
function function
(*1) 8
1 Tool Type ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Tool Number (T Code) ○ ○ ○ ○ A1
3 Option Group Number ○ ○
4 Magazine Number ○ ○
5 Pot Number ○ ○ A2
6 Origin Magazine ○ ○
7 Origin Pot ○ ○ Z
8 Tool Management ○ ○
9 Tool Life Count Type ○ ○ ○
10 Tool Size ○ ○
11 Data Access ○ ○
12 Data Search ○ ○
13 Tool Life Count Period ○ ○
14 Spindle Speed (S) ○ ○
15 Feedrate (F) ○ ○
16 Tool Life Counter ○ ○ ○
17 Maximum Tool Life ○ ○ ○
Value
79
B-64647EN/02
Tool life Tool

Customizable
(*1)
function function
18 Forenoticed Tool Life ○ ○ ○
1 19 Tool Life State

20 Tool Life Consumption
○
○
○
○
○
○
21 Path ○ ○
2 22 Tool Compensation ○ ○ ○
Number (H) (*2)
3 23 Tool Compensation
Number (D) (*2)
○ ○ ○
24 Tool Compensation ○ ○
4 Number (TG) (*2)

25 Tool Compensation ○ ○
Number (TW) (*2)
5 26 Tool Compensation
Number (OFS) (*2)
○ ○ ○
6 27 Offset 1 (*2)
28 Offset 2 (*2)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
29 Offset 3 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
30 Offset 4 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
7 31 Offset 5 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
32 Offset 6 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
8 33 Offset 7 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
34 Offset 8 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
35 Offset 9 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
A1 36 Offset 10 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
37 Offset 11 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
A2 38 Offset 12 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
39 Offset 13 (*2) ○ ○ ○ ○
40 Virtual Tool Tip Direction ○ ○ ○ ○
Z 41 Oversize Tool Geometry ○ ○
Number
42 Flutes ○ ○ ○ ○
43 Holder Shape ○ ○ ○ ○
44 Tool Mount Position ○ ○ ○ ○
45 Dimension 1 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
46 Dimension 2 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
47 Dimension 3 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
48 Dimension 4 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
49 Dimension 5 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
50 Dimension 6 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
80
B-64647EN/02
Tool life Tool

Customizable
(*1)
function function
51 Dimension 7 (*3) ○ ○ ○ ○
52 Dimension 8 (*3)
53 Comment
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
54 Customize 0 to 40 ○ ○
55 Coord. System ○ ○ 2
56 Catalog No. ○ ○ ○ ○
57 Conditions ○ ○
3
*1: An item with ○ can be customized. An item with × cannot be customized and is
always displayed.
*2: Viewable items vary depending on the system configuration. 4
*3: Displayed items vary depending on the tool type.
5

NOTE
• Items selected in the customization setting file may not be displayed
depending on the option or parameter setting.
6
2.4.1.6 Customizing the table column size in the table display screen
2.4.1.6
7
 Overview
In the table display screen, you can customize the table column size.
The column size can be specified in the MTB customization setting file 8
(custom.txt).
Description example of the MTB customization definition file A1

#Perform table customize: YES or NO
CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Display item list
A2
TABLE_ITEM={
T_TYPE
L_CONSUM,70
TIP,70
Z
SETTING
・
・
・
#Column Size
T_NAME,100
}
81
B-64647EN/02
 Customization setting file

Define the following item in the customization setting file:
• Column size
1 In the Tool Manager, the customization setting file is loaded to determine items to
be displayed on the table display screen when an application is started.
2 Description rules for column size customization

Describe the definition of the customization setting file in the following setting for
table display item customization:
3 TABLE_ITEM={}
Column size customization is disabled, and only display item customization is

4 enabled under the following condition:
• CUSTOMIZE=YES is defined, but there is no description in TABLE_ITEM={}.
5 The following shows the definition types of the customization setting file:
6 Table 2.4.1.6 (a) Customization setting file definition types

Item TABLE_ITEM={ Describe it in upper case from the beginning.
7 definition It indicates the definition start of table display item
customization.
} Describe it from the beginning.
8 It indicates the definition end of customization.
Column size Positive integer Describe the column size, following the display item
(Unit: px) symbol for a tool data item for which you want to set
A1 the column size, separated by a comma.
The maximum size is the default value, and the
minimum size is 50. If a specified number is out of
A2 range, the default value is used.
A tool data item without the column size is displayed
at the default size.
Z For details on display item symbols for which the
column width can be set, see "Table 2.4.1.6 (b)
Correspondence Table for Display Symbols".
• The definition described first is enabled, and the definitions after that

NOTE
are ignored under the following condition:
Multiple display item customization definitions were described in the
customization setting file.
82
B-64647EN/02
 Customizable display items

Table 2.4.1.6 (b) Correspondence Table for Display Symbols
No. Item Symbol name Maximum
Column size setting

Show/hide setting
column size (px)
10.4" 15.0" 19.0" 1
2
1 Tool Name (Tool management T_NAME × ○ 138 220 240
function) 3
Tool Name (Other than tool 198 280 330
management function)
2 Group Number GROUP × ○ 80 80 100 4
3 Number in Group GROUPNUM × ○ 60 60 80
4 Tool Type T_TYPE ○ × - - - 5
5 Tool Number (T Code) T_CODE ○ ○ 100 100 120
6 Option Group Number O_GROUP ○ ○ 120 120 120
7 Magazine Number MAG ○ ○ 80 80 100 6
8 Pot Number POT ○ ○ 80 80 100
9 Origin Magazine O_MAG ○ ○ 80 80 100 7
10 Origin Pot O_POT ○ ○ 80 80 100
11 Tool Management T_MANAGE ○ ○ 100 100 120
12 Tool Life Count Type L_TYPE ○ ○ 120 120 120 8
13 Tool Size T_SIZE ○ ○ 120 120 140
14 Data Access DATA_ACCS ○ ○ 120 120 140 A1
15 Data Search DATA_SRCH ○ ○ 120 120 140
16 Tool Life Count Period L_PERIOD ○ ○ 120 120 140
17 Spindle Speed (S) SPEED ○ ○ 100 100 120 A2
18 Feedrate (F) FEEDRATE ○ ○ 100 100 120
19 Tool Life Counter L_COUNT ○ ○ 130 130 130
Z
20 Maximum Tool Life Value L_MAX ○ ○ 130 130 130
21 Forenoticed Tool Life L_NOTICE ○ ○ 130 130 130
22 Tool Life State L_STATUS ○ ○ 150 150 150
23 Tool Life Consumption L_CONSUM ○ × - - -
24 Path PATH ○ ○ 60 60 75
25 Length Offset No. (H) OFS_NUMBER ○ ○ 80 80 80
26 Diameter Offset No. (D) (*1)
27 Shape Compensation No.

(TG)
28 Wear Compensation No. (TW)
29 Length Offset No. (OFS)
83
B-64647EN/02
No. Item Symbol name Maximum
Column size setting

Show/hide setting
column size (px)
10.4" 15.0" 19.0"
1
2 30
31
Offset Data 1 to 13
Virtual Tool Tip Direction
OFS_DATA (*2)
TIP
○
○
○
○
120
80
120
80
120
100
32 Oversize Tool Geometry T_GEONUM ○ ○ 80 80 100
3 Number
33 Flutes FLUTES ○ ○ 80 80 100
34 Holder Shape HOLDER ○ ○ 80 80 100
4 35 Tool Mount Position SETTING ○ ○ 80 80 100
36 Size Data 1 to 8 T_SIZEDAT (*3) ○ ○ 100 100 120
5 37 Customize 0 to 40 CUSTOM (*4) ○ ○ 100

(*5)
100 120
6 35 Coord. System COORDINATE ○ ○ 120 120 140

36 Catalog No. CATALOG (*6) ○ ○ 90 90 90
37 Conditions
7 *1: When OFS_NUMBER is defined, all of Nos. 22 to 26 that are viewable are
displayed.
*2: When OFS_DATA is defined, all of Offset Data 1 to 13 that are viewable are
8 displayed.
You can select them individually by defining OFS_DATA1 to 13.
*3: When T_SIZEDAT is defined, all of Size Data 1 to 8 that are viewable are
A1 displayed.
You can select them individually by defining T_SIZEDAT1 to 8.
*4: When CUSTOM is defined, all of Customize 0 to 40 that are viewable are
displayed.
A2 You can select them individually by defining CUSTOM0 to 40.
*5: For Customize 0, the column size cannot be customized. For Customize 1 to
40, the column size can be customized.
Z *6: When CATALOG is defined, Catalog No. and Conditions are displayed.
84
B-64647EN/02
2.4.1.7 Customizing the tool list (tree view) on the tool individual settings
screen
2.4.1.7
 Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 2.4.1.7 Customizable Tree View Parts and Tool Data Items (Shown in Red
Frames) 8
You can customize the tool list (tree view) on the tool individual settings screen.
To customize the tool list (tree view), define the following items in the
A1
customization definition file:
• Tree name A2
• Tree order
• Tool data item Z
• Tool data item order

NOTE
• If the multi-edge tool management function is enabled, the
customization function on the tool individual settings screen is
disabled.
85
B-64647EN/02
Description example of the customization definition file
#Perform individual tree customize:YES or NO

INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Perform tool data sorting in customization of individual tree: YES or NO
1 INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT=YES
#Display item list
TREE_ITEM={
[Tool]
2 Offset, OFS_NUMBER,TIP
sample1,OFS_NUMBER,TIP,MAG
[Holder]
}
3 :
Adding to the individual tool settings screen tree

4 An optional tree item defined in the customization setting file is displayed as a
child node of the tool management number or group number in the individual tool
settings screen tree.
5 If a tree item displayed by customization is selected, the tool data item defined in
the customization setting file is displayed in the tool data.
6 If the tree name does not fit in one line, it is displayed in two lines.
If the tree name does not fit in two lines, the trailing characters are omitted.
While a tree item displayed by customization is selected, the tool image preview
shows "Tool Image".
7
 Customizable tool data items
Customizable tool data items that can be linked to the defined tree are as follows:
8 Each valid option shows "○" in customizable items.
A1 Table 2.4.1.7 (a) Customizable tool data items

No. Item Standard Tool life Tool Customizable
management management
A2 function function
1 No. ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Group Number ○ ○
Z 3 Number in Group ○ ○
4 Tool Name ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Tool Number (T) ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Option Group Number ○ ○
7 Magazine Number ○ ○
8 Pot Number ○ ○
9 Origin Magazine ○ ○
10 Origin Pot ○ ○
11 Tool Management ○ ○
12 Tool Size ○ ○ ○
13 Data Access ○ ○
86
B-64647EN/02

function function
14 Data Search ○ ○
15
16
Tool Life Count Period
Spindle Speed (S)
○
○
○
○
1
17 Feedrate (F) ○ ○
18 Life Count Type ○ ○ ○ 2
19 Life Consumption ○ ○ ○
20
21
Tool Life Counter
Maximum Tool Life
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
Value
22 Forenoticed Tool Life ○ ○ ○ 4
23 Tool Life State ○ ○ ○
24 Path ○ ○
25 Coord. System ○ ○
5
26 Length Offset No. (H) ○ ○ ○
27 Diameter Offset No.
(D)
○ ○ ○ 6
28 Shape Compensation ○ ○
No. (TG) 7
29 Wear Compensation ○ ○
No. (TW)
30 Length Offset No. ○ ○ ○ 8
(OFS)
31
32
Offset Data
Virtual Tool Tip
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
A1
Direction
33 Tool Type ○ ○ ○ ○
A2
34 Oversize Tool ○ ○
Geometry Number
35 Tool Model Number ○ ○ ○ ○ Z
36 Tool Image ○ ○ ○ ×
37 Flutes ○ ○ ○ ○
38 Holder Shape ○ ○ ○ ○
39 Tool Mount Position ○ ○ ○ ○
40 Tool Data 1 to -10 ○ ○ ○ ○
41 Comment ○ ○ ○ ○
42 Customize 0 to 40 ○ ○
43 Holder Model Number ○ ○ ○ ○
44 Holder Image ○ ○ ○ ×
45 Use Tool Number ○ ○
87
B-64647EN/02

function function
46 Tool parts image ○ ○ ○ ×
1
 Customization setting file
Define the following item in the customization setting file:
2 • Tree name
• Tree order
3 • Tool data item
• Tool data item order
4
In the Tool Manager, the customization setting file is loaded to determine items to
be displayed on the individual settings screen when an application is started.
5
Description rules for individual settings screen tree customization in the
6 customization setting file
Describe the definition of the customization setting file in the following setting for
individual settings screen tree customization:
TREE_ITEM={}
7 Individual settings screen tree customization is disabled under one of the following
conditions:
8 • There is no tree customization definition in the customization setting file.
• The customization setting file does not exist.
A1 The following shows the definition types of the customization setting file:
A2 Table 2.4.1.7 (b) Customization setting file definition types

Z Tree customization
enable/disable
INDIVIDUAL_TREE
_CUSTOMIZE
Describe it in upper case from the
beginning.
When
INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES is
set, individual settings screen tree
customization is enabled.
Tool data item INDIVIDUAL_TREE Describe it in upper case from the
sorting enable/ _CUSTOMIZE_SOR beginning.
disable T When tree customization is enabled
(INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES),
if
INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT=
YES is defined, tool data item sorting
becomes enabled.
88
B-64647EN/02

Item definition TREE_ITEM={ Describe it in upper case from the
beginning.
It indicates the definition start of individual
}
settings screen tree customization.
Describe it from the beginning.
1
It indicates the definition end of
Tree name [TOOL]

customization.
List one name you want to display in the
2
Tree order [HOLDER] tree in each line.
Optional tree name Tree items are displayed in the order that
the names are described in the 3
Up to two optional tree names can be
defined. 4
Tool data item Symbol name Describe symbol names for items you want
to display, each separated by a comma,
following the defined optional tree name. 5
Items are displayed in the order that the
display item symbols are described in the
customization setting file when tool data
item sorting is enabled
6
(INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT
=YES).
For details on the symbol name types of
7
tool data items, see "Table 2.4.1.7 (c)
Correspondence Table for Display
Symbols". 8
Comment # Putting # at the beginning treats the line as
a comment line. A comment line does not
affect the customization setting behavior. A1
Use a comment line to leave a note in the
A2
Table 2.4.1.7 (c) Correspondence Table for Display Symbols
No. Item Symbol name Z
1 No. NUMBER
2 Group Number GROUP
3 Number in Group GROUPNUM
4 Tool Name T_NAME
5 Tool Number (T) T_CODE
6 Option Group Number O_GROUP
7 Magazine Number MAG
8 Pot Number POT
9 Origin Magazine O_MAG
10 Origin Pot O_POT
89
B-64647EN/02
No. Item Symbol name

11 Tool Management T_MANAGE
12 Tool Size T_SIZE
13 Data Access DATA_ACCS
1 14 Data Search DATA_SRCH
15 Tool Life Count Period L_PERIOD
2 16
17
Spindle Speed (S)
Feedrate (F)
SPEED
FEEDRATE
18 Life Count Type L_TYPE
3 19 Life Consumption L_CONSUM
20 Tool Life Counter L_COUNT
4 21
22
Maximum Tool Life Value
Forenoticed Tool Life
L_MAX
L_NOTICE
23 Tool Life State L_STATUS
5 24 Path PATH
25 Coord. System COORDINATE
6 26 Length Offset No. (H) OFS_NUMBER
27 Diameter Offset No. (D)
28 Shape Compensation No. (TG)
7 29 Wear Compensation No. (TW)
30 Length Offset No. (OFS)
8 31
32
Offset Data
Virtual Tool Tip Direction
OFS_DATA
TIP
33 Tool Type T_TYPE
A1 34 Oversize Tool Geometry Number T_GEONUM
35 Tool Model Number T_MODEL
A2 36
37
Flutes
Holder Shape
FLUTES
HOLDER
38 Tool Mount Position SETTING
Z 39 Tool Data 1 to -10 T_SIZEDAT
40 Comment COMMENT
41 Customize 0 to 40 CUSTOM
42 Holder Model Number H_MODEL
43 Use Tool Number T_USENUM
90
B-64647EN/02
• The customization setting is disabled under one of the following

conditions:
[Tool] or [Holder] is not described.
Three or more optional tree names were defined.
• The definition of the target tree name is disabled under one of the 1
following conditions:

NOTE
There is no tool data item definition in the defined optional tree
name. 2
There is an invalid tool data item definition in the defined optional
tree name.
• The definition described last is enabled, and the definitions before that
are ignored under one of the following conditions:
3
Multiple [Tool] or [Holder] items were defined.
Multiple optional tree names were defined.
4
2.4.1.8
2.4.1.8
Setting to hide the T codes
When both of the tool management function and tool life management function are
5
disabled, you can hide the T codes on the screen shown in the table below.
6
Table 2.4.1.8 (a) T code hide setting target
Screen T code hide setting target
7
Table display screen T Code column
Search window Tool Number (T Code)
Individual Tool Settings screen Tool Number (T Code) 8
Select Import/Export Item screen Machine Collision Avoidance Function Tool Data
A1
To enable this setting, add the definition shown in the frame to the customization
setting file (custom.txt) stored in the following location:
A2
HIDE_TCODE=YES Z
The details of this setting are as shown in the table below.
Table 2.4.1.8 (b) Customization setting file definition types

T code hide HIDE_TCODE Describe in upper case from the beginning.
When HIDE_TCODE=YES is defined, the T code
hide function is enabled.
If description other than the above or no
description is specified, the T code hide function is
disabled.
91
B-64647EN/02
• If the T code hide function is enabled, T codes are not processed in
 Tool Manager unique data (TOOLDATA.XML) used to import/export

tool data.
1 NOTE At import: The <tcode> tag is not loaded.

At export: The <tcode> tag is not output.
2 2.4.1.9 Setting the multi-edge tool management function

To enable the multi-edge tool management function, set the following items:
3 • CNC option: Multi-edge tool management function

• CNC parameter: Parameter MEB (No.13210#3) = 1
4
2.4.2 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function
5
2.4.2
Set the auxiliary function time to estimate a more accurate cycle time with the
cycle time estimation function.
6 An auxiliary function time that you set will be added when estimating a cycle time.
Each auxiliary function time that you set will be also held when:
• The cycle time estimation function is terminated and then restarted.
• Estimation data is successfully updated.
7
• The M codes assigned to call macros by macro executer, which are
8 set for the compile parameters (Nos. 9023 to 9032) of execution
macros, are not added when estimating a cycle time.
• For the second auxiliary function (B code), you can change the
A1 
NOTE
address to command the second auxiliary function to a different one
(A, C, U, V, W) other than B, by the settings of the parameter No.
3460. Note that, in the auxiliary function time setting window, [B code]
is fixedly displayed regardless of which address is set. To set the
A2 second auxiliary function to be used when executing estimation, the
address set for the parameter No. 3460 is used.
Z
2.4.2.1 Application definition file
The identifier ID of "CycleTimeEstimation", which is the default value of the cycle
2.4.2.1
time estimation function, is set in the application definition file (apps-general.xml).

The cycle time estimation function cannot be set to start at the same time with
Application Manager. Do not specify "startup" in the option of the <entry> tag in
"CycleTimeEstimation".
Specify this option when displaying multiple applications in your combination.
By default, only the last selected application is displayed, and other applications
are hidden.
Adding this alwaysvisible option allows a simultaneous display of multiple
applications without displaying the last selected application.
92
B-64647EN/02
2.4.2.2 Supported systems

The cycle time estimation function can be used on the following systems:
2.4.2.2
• Machining center
• Lathe
• Multi-path system that meets the conditions shown in the table below
1
Table 2.4.2.2 Multi-path Systems That Can Use the Cycle Time Estimation 2
Function
Device Maximum
number of
Maximum
total number
Maximum
number of
Maximum
total number
3
paths of axes axes per path of spindles
Series 30i-MODEL B 4 20 16 6
4
Series 31i-MODEL B 4 20 12 6
Series 31i-MODEL B5 4 20 12 6
Series 32i-MODEL B 2 10 8 2 5
• When only the first path is a machining path on a multi-path system, 6


NOTE
you can set to use the cycle time estimation function (See "2.4.2.3
Setting a multi-path system").
• Time estimation cannot be performed for the second and subsequent 7
paths.
8
2.4.2.3 Setting a multi-path system
To execute the cycle time estimation function for the first path on a multi-path
2.4.2.3
system, all of the following conditions must be met: A1

• The multi-path system meets the conditions in the previous section "2.4.2.2
Supported systems". A2
• The first path of the multi-path system is the target of the cycle time estimation
(See the following).
Z
 Setting to execute the cycle time estimation function on a multi-path
system
 • This setting is unnecessary for a single-path system.

MEMO
Use the following procedure to set the first path of the multi-path system as the
target of the cycle time estimation:
93
B-64647EN/02
<1> Open the following setting file (text file):

File location: D:¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥CycleTimeEstimation¥Setting
File name: Setting_data.txt
<2> Write the following in the file and save it.
1
[MachiningPath]
MACHINE_PATH1 = YES
2
• Only the first path can be set as the cycle time estimation target.
3 
NOTE
For example, even if you specify "MACHINE_PATH2 = YES", the
second path will not be the cycle time estimation target (Similarly for
the third and subsequent paths).
4
2.4.2.4 Auxiliary function time setting window
5 In the auxiliary function time setting window, you can set a time for each auxiliary
2.4.2.4
function.
Follow the procedure below to select an auxiliary function for which you want to
6 set a time.
<1> Press the [Settings] soft key.

7 The setting slide appears.
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> Select an auxiliary function for which you want to set a time.
The auxiliary function time setting window appears.
The figure below shows a display example of when [M Code] is selected.
94
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
2.4.2.5 Outputting the estimation result to an XML file
2.4.2.5
You can output the estimation result displayed on the screen to an XML file. 5
The estimation result output to a file can be used for other applications.
 Estimation result output settings

6
Use the following procedure to enable the estimation result output:
<1> Open the following setting file (text file): 7
File location: %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CycleTimeEstimation¥Setting
File name: Setting_data.txt
8
<2> Change the following setting in the file to "YES" and save it.
A1
[Result]
OUTPUT_RESULT = YES
 Output timing and output location of the estimation result file A2

When the estimation result output is set to be enabled, the estimation result file is
output at the following timings:
• When estimation is completed Z
• When estimation data update is completed
The output destination and file name are as follows:

• Output destination: D:¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥CycleTimeEstimation¥Result
• File name: Result.xml
95
B-64647EN/02
• Only one estimation result is retained for each program and is

overwritten every time estimation is executed.
• When the estimation result output file is opened in an application, it
1 must be read-only.

NOTE
• Close the file immediately when necessary work is done after it is
opened.
This is because the estimation result file cannot be updated while it
2 is open in an application.
• The estimation result file cannot be opened in an application while
it is being written.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
96
B-64647EN/02
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION
2.5
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLI-

CATION
You can set up the machining application functions, such as the CNC operation 1
screen and machine collision avoidance function.
2
2.5.1 Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen 3
2.5.1
Work required for machining including machining program editing and executing
can be performed in the iHMI CNC operation screen. You can customize various
operations and displays in the CNC operation screen. 4
2.5.1.1 Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function 5
Enable/disable the multi-path edit function. The multi-path edit function divides the
2.5.1.1
edit screen into as many edit areas as the number of paths (up to three) so that
the main program of each path can be edited simultaneously. 6
• For details about simultaneous editing of multi-path program, see
 "EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY" in 7
"FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-
MEMO
64644EN-1).
8
 File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

A1
• File name
Setting_data.txt A2
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\
Z
 Detailed setting items

• Setting group name
[Multi_Path]
• Specifiable key name

MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the multi-path edit
function.
97
B-64647EN/02
 Describe each setting data under the group name of [Multi_Path].

MEMO
1
• Multi-path edit function enable/disable setting
2 For MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.1 Setting values for MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE

3 Setting Function enable/ Description
disable
4 1
0
Function enable
Function disable
Enables the multi-path edit function.
Disables the multi-path edit function.
Except 1
5 Not set
6
2.5.1.2 Setting the multi-path edit paths and order
In the multi-path edit function, set the paths to divide the edit screen and the
2.5.1.2
display order.
7
• For details about simultaneous editing of multi-path program, see
8  "EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY" in

"FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-
MEMO
64644EN-1).
A1
A2 • File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
Z %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥

[Multi_Path]
ORDER_OF_MULTI_PATH: Specify the multi-path edit paths and order.
98
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.2 Setting Values for ORDER_OF_MULTI_PATH

Setting Description
PARAMETER The paths and order vary depending on the multi-path display
group number parameter (No. 13131) and multi-path display order
number (No. 13132) settings.
When the parameters are not set, multi-path edit is disabled.
1
FIXED The paths and order are fixed regardless of the parameter
Other than
PARAMETER
settings.
Up to three paths can be edited simultaneously, displaying Path 1,
2
Not set Path 2, and Path 3 in that order from the left of the edit screen.
3
• The number of paths to be edited simultaneously varies depending on

NOTE
the display unit size.
Up to two paths for 10.4-inch display unit and three paths for 15 or 19- 4
inch display unit.
5
 Setting example for the MTB configuration file
The following shows an example to set Setting_data.txt to the following settings:
6
• Multi-path edit function: Enable
• Multi-path edit paths and order: Varies depending on the multi-path display
group number parameter (No. 13131) and multi-path display order number (No. 7
13132) settings.
/*Multi path setting*/

8
[Multi_Path]
MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE=1
ORDER_OF_MULTI_PATH=PARAMETER A1
2.5.1.3 Enabling/disabling the multi-path display function A2
Enable/disable the multi-path display function. The multi-path display function
2.5.1.3
divides the MEM mode base screen into as many display areas as the number of
paths (up to three) so that the information of each path can be displayed Z
simultaneously.

• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
99
B-64647EN/02

[Multi_Path]
1 • Specifiable key name

MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the multi-path display
function. (MEM mode base only)
2
3  • Describe each setting data under the group name of [Multi_Path].
MEMO
4 • Multi-path display function enable/disable setting

For MULTI_DISPLAY_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
5
Table 2.5.1.3 Setting values for MULTI_DISPLAY_ENABLE
6 Setting Function enable/ Description
disable
1 Function enable Enables the multi-path display function.
7 0
Except 1
Function disable Disables the multi-path display function.
Not set
8
2.5.1.4 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path display
A1 2.5.1.4
When the multi-path display function is enabled, specify the number of divided
areas of the display.
A2  File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

• File name
Z Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder

[Multi_Path]
MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER: Set the number of divided areas of the
multi-path display. (MEM mode base only)
100
B-64647EN/02
 • Describe each setting data under the group name of [Multi_Path].

MEMO
1
• Number of divided areas of the multi-path display setting (MEM mode base only)
For MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER, set one of the following values.
2
Table 2.5.1.4 Setting values for MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER
Setting Description
3
2 Displays two paths simultaneously.
3 Displays three paths simultaneously. 4
For a two-path system, two paths are displayed simultaneously.
For the 10.4-inch display unit, this setting is invalid.
Other than 2 and 3 Displays as many as the number of paths simultaneously, which is 5
Not set the smaller of the number of paths to be displayed simultaneously
(10.4-inch display unit: 2, 15/19-inch display unit: 3) or the number
of system paths. 6
 Setting example for the MTB configuration file 7
The following shows an example to set Setting_data.txt to the following settings:
• Multi-path display function: Enable
• Number of divided areas of the multi-path display: 2 (MEM mode base only)
8
/*Multi path setting*/
[Multi_Path]
A1
MULTI_DISPLAY_ENABLE=1
MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER=2
A2
 For how to enable/disable the multi-path display function, see "2.5.1.3
Z
MEMO Enabling/disabling the multi-path display function".
2.5.1.5 Hiding the modal G codes

Setting the standard screen parameters (Nos. 3124 to 3127, Nos. 11365 to 11367)
2.5.1.5
hides the corresponding modal G codes.

The hidden modal G codes are closely displayed.
101
B-64647EN/02
 • For details about the parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-

MEMO
1
2 2.5.1.6 Setting machine data to be displayed on the base screen
Set machine data to be displayed on each mode base screen according to the
2.5.1.6
3 machine.
• [A]: Machine type (vertical or horizontal)
• [B]: Maximum value of the actual feedrate meter
4 • [C]: Maximum value of the spindle speed meter
• [D]: Spindle rotation direction
5 • [E]: Axis status display
6
E
7
A D
8
C
A1 B
A2
Fig. 2.5.1.6 MEM Mode Base Screen
Z
• The same [A] and [D] icon indicates both "Machine type" and
 "Spindle rotation direction".
For details, see "■ Setting the spindle rotation direction icon
MEMO
display" described later.

• File name
Setting_data.txt
102
B-64647EN/02
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥
 Machine type (vertical or horizontal)

• Setting group name 1
[Machine_Type]

2
HORIZONTAL: Set the machine type (vertical or horizontal).
3
Table 2.5.1.6 (a) Setting Values for HORIZONTAL
Setting Description 4
0 Vertical
1 Horizontal
5
The following shows an example of setting the machine type to "horizontal lathe".
6
[Machine_Type]
HORIZONTAL =1
7
 • For details on the icon displays, see "■ Setting the spindle rotation
MEMO
direction icon display" described later.
8
 Maximum scale value of the actual spindle speed meter A1
[Spindle_N] (N: Spindle number 1 to 3): When applying the setting to all paths
[PATHn_Spindle_N] (n: Path number, N: Spindle number 1 to 3): When
A2
applying the setting to each path
Z
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL: Set the maximum scale value of the actual
spindle speed meter.
The following shows an example of setting Spindle 1 on Path 2 to "3000min-1".
[PATH2_Spindle_1]
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL =3000
103
B-64647EN/02
If this is not set, a value is calculated from the parameters for the setting
value as follows.
1. Obtain the gear selection method.
1 Type M gear: Meets all of the following three conditions.

M-type, with the constant surface speed control option, GTT (No.
3706#4) = 0
2  Type T gear: Other than the above

2. Calculate the maximum value according to the gear.
MEMO
Type M gear: MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3744) * No. 3736 / 4095
Type T gear: MIN(MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3743, No. 3744),
3 No. 3772)
(However, when No. 3772 is 0, MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3743,
No. 3744).)
4 3. Round the number with the upper two digits remaining.
5  Spindle rotation direction signal inversion Yes/No
6 • Setting group name

[Spindle_N] (N: Spindle number 1 to 3): When applying the setting to all paths
[PATHn_Spindle_N] (n: Path number, N: Spindle number 1 to 3): When
applying the setting to each path
7
ROTATION_REVERSE: Set whether or not to inverse the spindle rotation
8 direction signal.
A1 Table 2.5.1.6 (b) Setting Values for ROTATION_REVERSE

Setting Description
A2 1 Forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0,

reverse rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1
(*1)
Z 0 Forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1,

reverse rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0
(*1)
*1: The rotation direction signal is a signal for each spindle (See the next table).
Table 2.5.1.6 (c) Signals to Switch between ON/OFF of Motor Excitation at Cs

Outline Control for Each Spindle
Signal Description
SFRA<Gn070.5> 1st spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVA<Gn070.4>
SFRB<Gn074.5> 2nd spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVB<Gn074.4>
104
B-64647EN/02
Signal Description
SFRC<Gn204.5> 3rd spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVC<Gn204.4>
SFRD<Gn266.5> 4th spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVD<Gn266.4>
1
The following shows an example of setting Spindle 3 to "rotate in the forward
direction by the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1 and in the reverse 2
direction by the rotation signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0".
[Spindle_3]
ROTATION_REVERSE=0
3
4
 • For details on the icon displays, see "■ Setting the spindle rotation
direction icon display" described later.
MEMO
5
 Maximum scale value of the actual feedrate meter
With the reference maximum value of the meter set as the machine unit, the 6
maximum value is displayed in a unit that is converted into inches or millimeters
according to the unit of input at the moment (modal). As a result, the maximum
value of the actual feedrate meter, mean value scale, and meter to be drawn are 7
displayed in the appropriate unit of input.
The maximum value of the actual feedrate meter is displayed using one of the
following two reference values depending on the MTB configuration file: 8
When "MAX SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL" is set in the MTB configuration file
When the MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL setting value is regarded as the A1
machine unit and the unit of input is different from the machine value, the
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL setting value is converted into the appropriate
unit of input and used as the maximum value of the actual feedrate meter (Two A2
significant figures. It is rounded up to an integer with the upper two digits
remaining. However, a value greater than 99999 is set to 99999).
Z
Table 2.5.1.6 (d) Maximum Value of the Actual Feedrate Meter When
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL Is Set
Parameter INM (No. Maximum value of the actual feedrate meter
1001#0) setting [Metric input system] [Inch input system]
0 (Metric system MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL
machine) setting value [metric system setting value [metric system
machine] machine] / 25.4
1 (Inch system MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL
machine) setting value [inch system setting value [inch system
machine] x 25.4 machine]
105
B-64647EN/02
When "MAX SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL" is not set in the MTB configuration

file
If the unit of input is different from the machine value, the parameter No. 1420
setting value is converted into the appropriate unit of input and used as the
1 maximum value of the actual feedrate meter (Two significant figures. It is rounded
up to an integer with the upper two digits remaining. However, a value greater than
99999 is set to 99999).
2
Table 2.5.1.6 (e) Maximum Value of the Actual Feedrate Meter When
3 MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL Is Not Set
Parameter INM (No. Maximum value of the actual feedrate meter
1001#0) setting
4 0 (Metric system
[Metric input system]
Combined value of parameter
[Inch input system]
Combined value of parameter
machine) No. 1420 of the axis (No. No. 1420 of the axis (No.
5 3115#3 = 0) used for actual

speed calculation [metric
3115#3 = 0) used for actual
speed calculation [metric
system machine] system machine] / 25.4
6 1 (Inch system Combined value of parameter Combined value of parameter
machine) No. 1420 of the axis (No. No. 1420 of the axis (No.
3115#3 = 0) used for actual 3115#3 = 0) used for actual
speed calculation [inch speed calculation [inch system
7 system machine] x 25.4 machine]
8  Axis status display

When the axis status display is enabled, the status of each control axis is
displayed as follow:
A1 D: Removal of the axis
R: Releasing the axis (Arbitrary axis switching)
L: Machine lock
A2 M: Mirror image

Z [Current_Position]

AXIS_STATUS_DISPLAY_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the axis
status display.
• Axis status display enable/disable setting

For AXIS_STATUS_DISPLAY_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
106
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.6 (f) Setting values for AXIS_STATUS_DISPLAY_ENABLE

Setting Function Description
enable/disable
1 Enabled Displays the axis status.
Other than 0
Not set
1
0 Disabled Does not display the axis status.
2
 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon display
The spindle rotation direction icon is determined by a setting combination of the 3
following three items:
• Machine type (vertical or horizontal)
• Spindle rotation direction signal inversion Yes/No
4
• Signal status to switch between ON/OFF of motor excitation at Cs outline control
for each spindle 5
The table below shows an example of icon display for the settings of Spindle 1 on
Path. 6
Table 2.5.1.6 (g) Setting Example of the Spindle Rotation Direction Icon Display 7
Setting contents of the MTB
Signal state
configuration file
Machine type Spindle rotation Displayed Icon 8
(vertical or direction signal Gn70.5 Gn70.4
horizontal) inversion
Vertical No 0 0 Hide A1
0 1
A2
1 0
Z
1 1 Hide
Yes 0 0 Hide
0 1
1 0
1 1 Hide
107
B-64647EN/02
Setting contents of the MTB

Signal state
configuration file
Machine type Spindle rotation Displayed Icon
(vertical or direction signal Gn70.5 Gn70.4
1 horizontal)
Horizontal No
inversion
0 0 Hide
0 1
2
1 0
3
1 1 Hide
4 Yes 0
0
0
1
Hide
5 1 0
6
1 1 Hide
7 2.5.1.7 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon display
Set the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon to be displayed in the spindle
2.5.1.7
8 information display tile on the machining program execution screen.

The uniform peripheral speed control mode icon can be displayed by setting the
signal.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.1.7 Machining program execution screen
108
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• To use this function, uniform peripheral speed control (option) is
required.
1
 Signal 2
Signal to notify that the uniform peripheral speed control is being performed.
Table 2.5.1.7 (a) Signal 3

Signal Description
CSS<Fn002.2> Uniform peripheral speed control signal 4
 Signal setting 5
Table 2.5.1.7 (b) Setting for uniform peripheral speed control signal
6
Signal
Description Displayed Icon
Fn002.2
0 Out of uniform peripheral speed control Hide 7
mode
1 In uniform peripheral speed control mode
8
A1
2.5.1.8 Changing the traveling direction guide
You can change the traveling direction guide displayed in the JOG, HND, INC, and
A2
2.5.1.8
REF mode base screens.

By default, the sample image shown below is displayed.
Z
109
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.5.1.8 JOG Mode Base Screen
5
 How to set the traveling direction guide
6 Store an image that you want to display in the folder below and set a file name.
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\JOG_HND_REF\GUIDANCE
7 The naming rules for file names are as shown in the table below.
Table 2.5.1.8 Naming Rules for File Names

8 Item Description
Format n_specific character string.png (n: Path number)
A1 Example: Image file name for Path 1: 1_sample.png
A file name must be set for each path.
An image without "n_" (n: Path number) at the beginning of the file
A2 Available character
name is not displayed.
Single-byte alphabet, number, symbol
File format png
Z
• The folder above stores the sample image. You can edit this sample
image to use it. You can also use a different image or photograph. In
this case, note that the file format must be png.

NOTE
• The image is automatically enlarged/reduced (aspect ratio fixed) to fit
the screen, but the sizes below are recommended.
10.4 inch: 370 (width) x 235 (height)
15 inch: 440 (width) x 305 (height)
19 inch: 570 (width) x 455(height)
110
B-64647EN/02
2.5.1.9 Setting the workpiece coordinates slide

You can change the minimum and maximum values of the XYZ axes setting
2.5.1.9
during operation for 3D graphics in the workpiece coordinates slide.

You can also set whether to prohibit input operation not only during operation/
pause but also during stoppage.
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 2.5.1.9 Workpiece coordinates slide

6
 File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file 7

• File name
Setting_data.txt 8
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting
A1
 Detailed setting items A2
[Graphic_range]
Z
The specifiable key names are as shown in the table below.
Use each key to set the maximum and minimum values for all the axes of
machine coordinates drawn on a graphic.
Table 2.5.1.9 (a) Key Names That Can Be Specified in [Graphic_range]

Key name Setting contents Initial value
Coordinate axis Minimum/maximum
category
X_MIN_VAL Min. -1000.0
X Axis
X_MAX_VAL Max. 1000.0
111
B-64647EN/02
Key name Setting contents Initial value

Coordinate axis Minimum/maximum
category
Y_MIN_VAL Min. -1000.0
Y Axis
1 Y_MAX_VAL Max. 1000.0
Z_MIN_VAL Min. -1000.0
Z Axis
Z_MAX_VAL Max. 1000.0
2
3 [Offset_data]
4 SPEC_TYPE: Set a condition to prohibit input.
The setting values are as shown in the table below.
5 Table 2.5.1.9 (b) Setting Values for SPEC_TYPE
6 0
Setting Description
Prohibits input operation during operation/pause.
1 Prohibits input operation during operation/pause/stoppage.
7
2.5.1.10 Setting the displayed contents on the setting slide
8 Set whether or not to display the setting items on the setting slide.
2.5.1.10
The setting items include "Select Cutting Condition" and "5-axis Machining
Condition" in the "Set-up" group.
A1
A2 • File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
Z %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥

[Setting_Slide]
The specifiable key names are as shown in the table below.
Use each key to set whether or not to display on the setting slide.
112
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.10 (a) Key Names That Can Be Specified in [Setting_Slide]

Key name Setting contents
DISPLAY_SETTING_SLIDE Set whether or not to display the vertical
soft keys on the setting slide.
MEASUREMENT_CYCLE_BASIC_SETTING Set whether or not to display
Measurement Cycle (Basic).
1
MEASUREMENT_CYCLE_MEASUREMENT_ Set whether or not to display
SETTING Measurement Cycle (Measurement). 2
MEASUREMENT_CYCLE_AFTER_ Set whether or not to display
MEASUREMENT_SETTING Measurement Cycle (After
Measurement). 3
MEASUREMENT_CYCLE_LEGACY_ Set whether or not to display
SCREEN_SETTING Measurement Cycle.
SELECT_CUTTING_CONDITION_SETTING Set whether or not to display Select 4
Cutting Condition.
ADJUST_QUALITY_LEVEL_OF_
MACHINING_SURFACE_SETTING
Set whether or not to display Adjust
Quality Level of Machining Surface. 5
5_AXIS_MACHINING_CONDITION_ Set whether or not to display 5-axis
SETTING
CHOPPING_SETTING
Machining Condition.
Set whether or not to display Chopping.
6
HI_PRECISION_OSCILLATION_SETTING Set whether or not to display High
Precision Oscillation. 7
CHUCK_TAILSTOCK_BARRIER_SETTING Set whether or not to display Chuck/
Tailstock Barrier.
SETTING_PARAMETER_SETTING Set whether or not to display Setting 8
Parameter.
SIMULATION_SETTING Set whether or not to display the
Simulation setting. A1
EDITING_MODE_SETTING Set whether or not to display the
Program Edit Method setting items.
AUTOMATIC_INSERTION_OF_SEQUENCE_ Set whether or not to display the A2
NUMBERS_SETTING Sequence No. Auto Insert setting items.
OPERATOR_ERROR_PREVENT_SETTING Set whether or not to display the
misoperation prevention function
Z
setting.
Table 2.5.1.10 (b) Setting Values Common to All Keys

Setting Description
HIDE Hides the items on the setting slide.
SHOW Shows the items on the setting slide.
Null
Not set
113
B-64647EN/02
2.5.1.11 Opening/closing the custom macro variable slide

You can display custom macro variables as a list in the custom macro variable list
2.5.1.11
slide.
1  Opening the custom macro variable list slide

<1> On the operation screen, press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key
(shown in the red frame in the figure below).
2 The custom macro variable list slide appears.
3
4
5
6
7
8  Closing the custom macro variable list slide
<1> Press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
The custom macro variable list slide closes and returns to the operation screen.
A1
A2 
NOTE
• The [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key is displayed when the
custom macro (optional function) is enabled.
114
B-64647EN/02
2.5.1.12 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and values

2.5.1.12
1
B 2
3
C
4
Fig. 2.5.1.12 Custom Macro Variable List Slide
5
Table 2.5.1.12 (a) Item List
6
Name Description
A Custom macro Displays the first number of each range of displayable custom
variable tab macro variable numbers. 7
B Custom macro Displays custom macro variable numbers and values.
variable display tile
C Guidance Displays messages such as warnings. 8
 Setting the display range of custom macro variable numbers A1

Set the display range of custom macro variable numbers displayed in the custom
macro variable tab.
A2
● Local variables and common variables
Z
Table 2.5.1.12 (b) Local variables and common variables
Display
Range of variable numbers
condition*1
Local
Common variable
variable
(1) (2) (3)
#100 to #150 to #200 to #500 to #550 to #98000 to
#1 to 33
149 199 499 549 999 98499
N N N ○ ○ × × ○ × ×
N N Y ○ ○ × ○ *2 ○ × ×
Y N N ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ×
115
B-64647EN/02
Display
condition*1
Local
Common variable
variable
(1) (2) (3)
1 #1 to 33
#100 to #150 to #200 to #500 to #550 to #98000 to
149 199 499 549 999 98499
Y N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ *2 ○ ○ ×
2 - Y N ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
- Y Y ○ ○ ○ ○ *2 ○ ○ ○
3 Tab (1) Tab (2) Tab (3) Tab (4) Tab (7)
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
4
*1: The custom macro variable numbers are displayed or hidden depending on the
combination of the following optional functions.
5 (1) Add custom macro common variable
(2) Add custom macro common variable (1000 variables)
6 (3) Built-in macro
*2: You can hide #200 to 499 (built-in macro variables) by the settings of the
machine configuration file.
7 • File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
8 %APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\
• Setting
A1 Setting group name: [CUSTOM_MACRO]
Specifiable key name: EMBEDED_MACRO_NOTDISPLAY (1: Hidden,
Other than 1: Displayed)
A2
● System variables
Z Table 2.5.1.12 (c) System variables

Parameter setting Range of variable numbers
#10000 to #100000 to
No.11369#4(CSD) #1000 to 8499
89999 199999
0 × × ×
1 ○ ○ *2 ○
Tab (5) Tab (6) Tab (8)
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
*2: Hidden when the settings are set as shown below:
116
B-64647EN/02
Custom macro system variable #8570 = 1 (#10000 to 89999 are used for P-
CODE variables.)
● Tab operation
Table 2.5.1.12 (d) Tab operation

1
Operation
No. Function
Soft key MDI keys Touch panel Others 2
<→>
1 Tab movement - <←> Scroll bar -
<TAB> 3
 Setting the number of significant digits of custom macro variables 4

Set the number of significant digits of custom macro variables displayed in the
custom macro variable tab.
5
● Number of significant digits of numeric values
The number of significant digits of numeric values vary depending on the
parameter settings as shown below: 6
Parameter F16 (No. 6008#0 = 0): 12 digits
Parameter F16 (No. 6008#0 = 1): 8 digits
7
● Display when a numeric value exceeds the number of significant digits
When a numeric value exceeds the number of significant digits, the numeric value
itself is not displayed, and instead is displayed as shown below (common to all 8
languages).
Table 2.5.1.12 (e) For the Parameter F16 (No. 6008#0 = 0)

A1
Range of the numeric value Display in the numeric value area
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 + *.*** A2
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 - *.***
Variable value > 999999999999.
Variable value < -999999999999.
+ ***.*
- ***.*
Z
Table 2.5.1.12 (f) For the parameter F16 (No. 6008#0 = 1)

Range of the numeric value Display in the numeric value area
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 + *.***
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 - *.***
Variable value > 99999999. + ***.*
Variable value < -99999999. - ***.*
117
B-64647EN/02

MEMO
1
2 2.5.1.13 Enabling/disabling the workpiece measurement function
Set the workpiece measurement function for the workpiece coordinates slide.
2.5.1.13
3
• File name
4 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
5 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥
6  Detailed setting items

[Work_measure]
WORK_MEASURE_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the workpiece
8 measurement function.
Table 2.5.1.13 (a) Setting Values for WORK_MEASURE_ENABLE

A1 Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the workpiece measurement function.
A2 DISABLE
Other than ENABLE
Disables the workpiece measurement function.
Not set
Z
EXT_EFFECT: Set whether or not to consider the EXT offset value for
workpiece measurement.
Table 2.5.1.13 (b) Setting Values for EXT_EFFECT

Setting Description
ON Considers the EXT offset value.
OFF Does not consider the EXT offset value.
118
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
PRM Set whether or not to consider the EXT offset value using the
Other than ON/OFF parameter (No. 1015#6) setting.
Not set • Parameter (No. 1015#6) = 1: Considers the EXT offset value.
• Parameter (No. 1015#6) = 0: Does not consider the EXT offset
value. 1
2.5.1.14 Updating the coordinate value on the Preset Relative Coordinates

2
window in synchronization with axis movement
3
2.5.1.14
Set whether or not to update the coordinate value on the Preset Relative
Coordinates window in synchronization with axis movement.
4
• File name
Setting_data.txt
5
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\ 6
 Detailed setting items 7
[Presetting_Relative_Coordinate]
8
UPDATE_BY_AXIS_MOVEMENT: Set whether or not to update the coordinate
value on the Preset Relative Coordinates window in synchronization with axis A1
movement.
Table 2.5.1.14 Setting Values for UPDATE_BY_AXIS_MOVEMENT A2

Setting Description
EXECUTED Updates the coordinate value on the Preset Relative Coordinates Z
window in synchronization with axis movement.
NOT_EXECUTED Does not update the coordinate value on the Preset Relative
Not set Coordinates window in synchronization with axis movement.
2.5.1.15 Showing/hiding the custom macro variable names

Show/hide the custom macro variable names.
2.5.1.15
The variable names set to be shown are displayed in the custom macro variable
list slide.
119
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.5.1.15 Custom Macro Variable List Slide
5 When any of the conditions below is met, you can change variable names.
6 (a) Parameter VRN (No. 3207#5 =1) (Displays the variable names of common
variables #500 to #549 in the custom macro variable list slide)
(b) The custom macro variable name expansion function (option) and custom
macro variable name are enabled.
7
Table 2.5.1.15 Variable name display
8 Display condition*1
Local
Common variable System variables

variable
A1 (1) (2) (3)
#1 to 33
#100 #500 #550
#98000 #1000 #10000 #100000
to to to to
to 499 to 549 to 999
98499 8499 89999 199999
A2 0 N N × × × × × × × ×
0 N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Z 0
0
Y
Y
N
Y
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 N N × × ○ × × × × ×
1 N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Y N ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Y Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
*1: The custom macro variable names are displayed or hidden depending on the
combination of the following conditions.
120
B-64647EN/02
(1) Setting of parameter VRN (No. 3207#5) (Variable names of common

variables #500 to #549 on the custom macro variable screen)
0: Not display.
1: Display.
(2) The number of valid custom macro variable names is "1000" on the
optional custom macro variable expansion function. 1
(3) The number of valid custom macro variable names is "4000" on the
optional custom macro variable expansion function.
2

NOTE
• You cannot edit variable names. 3
4
2.5.1.16 Condition to use the machining simulation function 5
Check the conditions to use the machining simulation function. The machining
2.5.1.16
simulation function allows you to check how machining will be performed by the
program through graphic drawings before you proceed to actual machining. 6
The following parameter settings are required to use the machining simulation
function.
7
Table 2.5.1.16 (a) Required Parameters for the Machining Simulation
Parameter
Bit number
(Parameter
Setting
Function
8
No. value
name)
9071 - 90
or
Set the P-CODE macro number. The setting
value is as follows:
A1
91 • Machining center: 90
14706 -
• Lathe: 91
Set the orientations of the basic three axes of
A2
spindle 1 under the following conditions:
• For single-path T-type, M-type, or complex
• For two-path T-type
Z
Always for the Path 1 side
Path 2 side
When the parameter No. 27401#0 (SME)
is "1"
• For three-path T-type
Path 2 side
is "1"
Path 3 side
When the parameter No. 27402#0 (TME)
is "1"
121
B-64647EN/02
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
14707 - When the parameter No. 14702#1 (SUB) is "1"
1 (With sub-spindle), set the orientations of the

basic three axes of spindle 2 under the
• Always for the single-path T-type
2 • For two-path T-type
Path 1 side
When the parameter No. 14701#1 (FSE) is
3 "1"
Path 2 side
When the parameter No. 27401#1 (SSE) is
4 "1"
Path 1 side
5 "1"
Path 2 side
6 When the parameter No. 27401#1 (SSE) is
"1"
Path 3 side
When the parameter No. 27402#1 (TSE) is
7 8654 #1 (CXW) 1
"1"
Allows you to use the machining simulation
function without opening the maintenance
8 display.
You can enable the machining simulation function in the MTB configuration file
A1 (setting_data.txt) when all conditions below are met.
• Series (See "Supported series" described later.)
A2 • System configuration (See "Supported system configurations" described later.)
 Supported series
Z The machining simulation screen supports the following series:
Table 2.5.1.16 (b) Series Supported by the Machining Simulation Screen

TYPE Series
0 G501 G50A G503
1 G301 G30A G303
G401 G40A G403
G421 G42A G423
2 G311 G31A G313
122
B-64647EN/02
TYPE Series
4 G411 G41A G413
G431 G43A G433
7 G511 G51A G513
C G521 – G523 1
 Supported system configurations 2
The machining simulation screen supports the system configurations below:
• Machine control type: Lathe, machining center
3
• Number of paths: 1, 2

4
• File name
Setting_data.txt 5
• Storage folder
6
[Machining_Simulation_Enable] 8
Enable/disable the following items: A1
SIMULATION_ENABLE: Machining simulation screen
SIMULATION_PATH1_ENABLE: Machining simulation for Path 1
SIMULATION_PATH2_ENABLE: Machining simulation for Path 2 A2
PATHn¥SIMULATION_ENABLE: Machining simulation for Path n
Z
 Describe each setting data under the group name of
MEMO [Machining_Simulation_Enable].
• Machining simulation screen enable/disable setting

For SIMULATION_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
123
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.16 (c) Setting values for SIMULATION_ENABLE

Setting Enable/Disable Description
0 Disable Disables the machining simulation screen.
Except 1
1 Not set
1 Enabled Enables the machining simulation screen.
2 • Machining simulation enable/disable setting for Path 1

For SIMULATION_PATH1_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
3
Table 2.5.1.16 (d) Setting Values for SIMULATION_PATH1_ENABLE
4 Setting Enable/Disable Description

0 Disabled Disables machining simulation for Path 1.
1 Enabled Enables machining simulation for Path 1.
5 Other than 0
Not set
6
• Machining simulation enable/disable setting for Path 2
For SIMULATION_PATH2_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
7
Table 2.5.1.16 (e) Setting Values for SIMULATION_PATH2_ENABLE
8 Setting Enable/Disable Description
0 Disable Disables machining simulation for Path 2.
Other than 1
A1 Not set
1 Enabled Enables machining simulation for Path 2.
A2
• Machining simulation enable/disable setting for Path n
Z For PATHn¥SIMULATION_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.16 (f) Setting values for PATHn¥SIMULATION_ENABLE

0 Disable Disables machining simulation for Path n.
Other than 1
Not set
1 Enabled Enables machining simulation for Path n.
124
B-64647EN/02
• If machining simulation is enabled for two or more paths, the

machining simulation screen is not displayed on the MEM base mode

screen.
• Do not set a value greater than one set in the NC machine
NOTE configuration to the number of paths in the MTB configuration file. For 1
example, do not set PATH2¥SIMULATION_ENABLE=1 in a machine
configuration with the number of paths set to 1.
2
3
2.5.1.17 Machining simulation function settings
Set the following machining simulation function items in the MTB configuration file
4
2.5.1.17
(setting_data.txt).
• Workpiece coordinate system of single-path two-spindle machining 5

• Chamfering tool nose angle setting
• Single-path two-spindle machining enable/disable
6
 • For details, see "MACHINING SIMULATION" in "FANUC iHMI CNC
Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
7
MEMO
8
 Required parameter
• Single path, two spindles
For the workpiece coordinate systems of the main and sub spindles, specify
A1
the values shown in Table 2.5.1.17 (a) respectively in the following parameters.
• Main spindle: Parameter No. 14706 A2
• Sub-spindle: Parameter No. 14707
Z
Table 2.5.1.17 (a) Setting Values in Parameter Nos. 14706 and 14707
Setting Coord. System Rightward Upward
16 Right-handed +Z +X
coordinate system
17 Right-handed -Z +X
coordinate system
18 Right-handed -Z -X
coordinate system
19 Right-handed +Z -X
coordinate system
125
B-64647EN/02
Setting Coord. System Rightward Upward

20 Right-handed +X +Z
coordinate system
1  File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

• File name
2 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
3 %APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\Setting\
4  Chamfering tool nose angle

5 [Machining_Simulation_Tool]

CHAMFER_CUTTER_ANGLE: Set a nose angle of the chamfering tool to be
drawn with the simulation function.
USE_TOOL_GEOMETRY_SIZE_DATA: Obtain tool information from the CNC
7 tool geometry dimension data.
• Setting values for CHAMFER_CUTTER_ANGLE

8 For CHAMFER_CUTTER_ANGLE, set one of the following values.
A1 Table 2.5.1.17 (b) Setting Values for CHAMFER_CUTTER_ANGLE

enable/disable
A2 1 or above 0.001° Specify a value of the nose angle in units of
0.001 °.
Example: For CHAMFER_CUTTER_ANGLE =
Z 30000 (30 °)
Not set When this is not set, it is taken as the initial value
of 45000 (45.0 °) to draw a chamfering tool.
• Setting values for USE_TOOL_GEOMETRY_SIZE_DATA

For USE_TOOL_GEOMETRY_SIZE_DATA, set one of the following values.
126
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.17 (c) Setting Values for USE_TOOL_GEOMETRY_SIZE_DATA

enable/disable
0 Disable Obtains tool information from the tool database.
Other than 1
Not set
1
1 Enabled Obtains tool information from the CNC tool
geometry dimension data.
2
 Single-path two-spindle machining enable/disable
3
[Machining_Simulation]
4
Table 2.5.1.17 (d) Specifiable key name 5
Key name Description
PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE Set whether to enable/disable the Spindle 2
machining for Path 1.
6
SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED Specify the presence or absence of the sub-spindle
(Spindle 2). 7
CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1 Switches the rotation axis number in machining
simulation between Spindle 1 and Spindle 2 with a
sub-spindle by the spindle selection command
(Path 1).
8
If CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1 is set to 1, set
CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2
the parameter No. 27312#0 to "1" on Path 1.
Switches the rotation axis number in machining
A1
sub-spindle by the spindle selection command
(Path 2).
A2
If CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2 is set to 1, set
the parameter No. 27312#0 to "1" on Path 2.
ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP1_PATH1 Set the C axis number for Spindle 1 when the
Z
spindle is switched (Path 1). If
CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1=1 and the
parameter No. 27312#0=1 on Path 1 are not set,
this setting is ignored.
127
B-64647EN/02
Key name Description

1 parameter No. 27312#0=1 on Path 1 are not set,

2 spindle is switched (Path 2). If

3 PATH2_SPINDLE1_ENABLED Set whether Turret 2 can be used or not on Spindle
1.
4 PATH2_SPINDLE2_ENABLED Set whether Turret 2 can be used or not on Spindle

2.
PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE1 Set the position of Turret 2 in relation to Spindle 1.
5 PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE2 Set the position of Turret 2 in relation to Spindle 2.

INTERFERE_PRIOR_MODE Set the cutting priority mode of the interference
6 check function.
PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥BELOW_ Set the position of Turret m in relation to Spindle n.
WORK
PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ENABLED Set whether to enable/disable the Spindle n
7 machining for Path m.
PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS Switches the rotation axis number in machining
8 sub-spindle by the spindle selection command
(Path n).
If PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS is set to 1, set
A1 PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ROTATE_
the parameter No. 27312#0 to "1" on Path n.
Set the C axis number for Spindle n when the
AXIS_NO spindle is switched (Path m). If
A2 PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS=1 and the
parameter No. 27312#0=1 on Path m are not set,
Z TURNING_SIMULATION_C0 Set whether to enable/disable the drawing function

at C axis coordinate value = 0 for tool track
drawing.
PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ Sets the M code number to switch the machining
MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING mode for Spindle n on Path m from milling to
turning.
PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ Sets the M code number to switch the machining
MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING mode for Spindle n on Path m from turning to
milling.
SIMULATION_MODE Set the drawing mode for machining simulation.
MEMORY_SIZE Set the available system memory size.
DRAW_INTERVAL Set the display screen update interval.
128
B-64647EN/02
• Setting values for PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE

For PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.17 (e) Setting Values for PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE

Setting Enable/Disable Description 1
0 Disable Disables the Spindle 2 machining for Path 1.
Except 1
Not set 2
1 Enabled Enables the Spindle 2 machining for Path 1.
3
• Setting Values for SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED
For SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED, set one of the following values.
4
Table 2.5.1.17 (f) Setting Values for SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED
5
0 None Specifies the absence of a sub-spindle.
Except 1
Not set
6
1 Enabled Specifies the presence of a sub-spindle.
7
• Setting values for CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1/
CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2 8
For CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1 and CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2,
set to switch the rotation axis number by the spindle selection command in
machining simulation. A1
Table 2.5.1.17 (g) Setting values for CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1/
CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2 Setting
A2
enable/disable Z
0 Disable Does not switch the rotation axis number in
Other than 1 machining simulation between Spindle 1 and
Not set Spindle 2 with a sub-spindle by the spindle
selection command.
Set the parameter No. 27312#0 to "0" on Path 1/2.
1 Enabled Switches the rotation axis number in machining
sub-spindle by the spindle selection command.
Set the parameter No. 27312#0 to "1" on Path 1/2.
129
B-64647EN/02
• Setting values for ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP1_PATH1/

ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP1_PATH2
For ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP1_PATH1 and ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP1_PATH2,
set the C axis number for Spindle 1 when the spindle is switched. To enable this
setting, CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH1=1 and the parameter No.
1 27312#0=1 on Path 1/2 need to be set.
2 • Setting values for ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP2_PATH1/

ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP2_PATH2
For ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP2_PATH1 and ROTATE_AXIS_NO_SP2_PATH2,
3 set the C axis number for Spindle 2 when the spindle is switched. To enable this
setting, CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS_PATH2=1 and the parameter No.
27312#0=1 on Path 1/2 need to be set.
4
• Setting Values for PATH2_SPINDLE1_ENABLED
5 For PATH2_SPINDLE1_ENABLED, set one of the following values.
6 Table 2.5.1.17 (h) Setting Values for PATH2_SPINDLE1_ENABLED

enable/disable
0 Disable Disables the use of Turret 2 on Spindle 1.
7 Other than 1
Not set
8 1 Enabled Enables the use of Turret 2 on Spindle 1.
• Setting Values for PATH2_SPINDLE2_ENABLED

A1 For PATH2_SPINDLE2_ENABLED, set one of the following values.
A2 Table 2.5.1.17 (i) Setting Values for PATH2_SPINDLE2_ENABLED

Z 0
enable/disable
Disable Disables the use of Turret 2 on Spindle 2.
Other than 1
Not set
1 Enabled Enables the use of Turret 2 on Spindle 2.
• Setting Values for PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE1

For PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE1, set one of the following values.
130
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.17 (j) Setting Values for PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE1

Setting Description
0 Sets Turret 2 on the upper side of Spindle 1.
Other than 1
Not set 1
1 Sets Turret 2 on the lower side of Spindle 1.
2
• Setting Values for PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE2
For PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE2, set one of the following values.
3
Table 2.5.1.17 (k) Setting Values for PATH2_BELOW_SPINDLE2
0 Sets Turret 2 on the upper side of Spindle 2.
Other than 1
Not set 5
1 Sets Turret 2 on the lower side of Spindle 2.
6
• Setting values for INTERFERE_PRIOR_MODE
For INTERFERE_PRIOR_MODE, set one of the following values.
7
Table 2.5.1.17 (l) Setting values for INTERFERE_PRIOR_MODE
8
enable/disable
0
Other than 1
Disable Performs animation drawing with the priority of
speed.
A1
Not set
• During turning machining or when
A2

NOTE
the tool is released from the blank,
unexpected interference may be
detected.
Z
1 Enabled Performs animation drawing with the priority of
cutting.
• Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥BELOW_WORK

For PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥BELOW_WORK, set one of the following values.
131
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.17 (m) Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥BELOW_WORK

Setting Description
0 Sets Turret m on the upper side of Spindle n.
Other than 1
1 Not set
1 Sets Turret m on the lower side of Spindle n.
2
• Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ENABLED
For PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ENABLED, set one of the following values.
3
Table 2.5.1.17 (n) Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ENABLED
4 Setting Description
0 Disables the use of Turret m on Spindle n.
Other than 1
5 Not set
1 Enables the use of Turret m on Spindle n.
6
7

NOTE
• When m = 1, n = 1 cannot be set.
8
• Setting values for PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS
A1 For PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.17 (o) Setting values for PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS

A2 Setting Function Description
enable/disable
Z 0
Other than 1
Disable Does not switch the rotation axis number in
machining simulation between Spindle 1 and
Not set Spindle 2 with a sub-spindle by the spindle
selection command.
Set the parameter No. 27312#0 to "0" on Path n.
1 Enabled Switches the rotation axis number in machining
sub-spindle by the spindle selection command.
Set the parameter No. 27312#0 to "1" on Path n.
• Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ROTATE_AXIS_NO

For PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥ROTATE_AXIS_NO, set the C axis number for
Spindle n when the spindle is switched. To enable this setting,
132
B-64647EN/02
PATHn¥CHANGE_ROTATE_AXIS=1 and the parameter No. 27312#0=1 on

Path m need to be set.
• Setting Values for TURNING_SIMULATION_C0

For TURNING_SIMULATION_C0, set one of the following values. 1
Table 2.5.1.17 (p) Setting Values for TURNING_SIMULATION_C0
Setting Description
2
NO Disables the drawing function at C axis coordinate value = 0 for
Other than YES
Null
tool track drawing.
Starts drawing at C axis coordinate value for tool track drawing.
3
Not set Does not switch the machining mode by the specified M code.
YES Enables the drawing function at C axis coordinate value = 0 for
tool track drawing.
4
Starts drawing at C axis coordinate value = 0 for tool track
drawing.
Switches the machining mode (turning mode/milling mode) by the 5
specified M code.
6
 • When the drawing function is enabled, the default machining mode
MEMO
(turning mode/milling mode) is turning.
7
• Setting values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING 8
For PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING, set one of the
following values.
A1
Table 2.5.1.17 (q) Setting Values for
PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING
A2
Setting Description
8 or less digit value Sets the M code number to switch the machining mode for Spindle
(except for 0) n on Path m from milling to turning. (m: 1 to 3, n: 1 to 2) Z
If the machining mode is switched to turning by the specified M
code, drawing starts at C coordinate value = 0.
If Spindle 2 (SPINDLE2¥...) is set, the following settings are
required to switch to the turning mode:
SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED=1
PATHm¥SPINDLE2¥ENABLED =1 (m: Path 1 to 3)
Other than 8-digit Does not switch to the turning mode.
value
0
Null
Not set
133
B-64647EN/02
The following is an example of setting a single path with sub-spindle:
PATH1\SPINDLE2\ENABLED=1
TURNING_SIMULATION_C0=YES
1 PATH1\SPINDLE1\MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING=100
PATH1\SPINDLE2\MCODE_MILLING_TO_TURNING=101
2 • Setting values for TURNING_SIMULATION_C0

For TURNING_SIMULATION_C0, set one of the following values.
3 Table 2.5.1.17 (r) Setting Values for TURNING_SIMULATION_C0

Setting Description
4 NO Disables the drawing function at C axis coordinate value = 0 for
Other than YES tool track drawing.
Null Starts drawing at C axis coordinate value for tool track drawing.
5 Not set Does not switch the machining mode by the specified M code.
YES Enables the drawing function at C axis coordinate value = 0 for
6 tool track drawing.
Starts drawing at C axis coordinate value = 0 for tool track
drawing.
Switches the machining mode (turning mode/milling mode) by the
7 specified M code.
8  • When the drawing function is enabled, the default machining mode

(turning mode/milling mode) is turning.
MEMO
A1
• Setting Values for PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING
A2 For PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING, set one of the

following values.
Z Table 2.5.1.17 (s) Setting Values for

PATHm¥SPINDLEn¥MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING
Setting Description
8 or less digit value Sets the M code number to switch the machining mode for Spindle
(except for 0) n on Path m from turning to milling. (m: 1 to 3, n: 1 to 2)
If the machining mode is switched to milling by the specified M
code, drawing starts at C coordinate value.
If Spindle 2 (SPINDLE2¥...) is set, the following settings are
required to switch to the milling mode:
PATHm¥SPINDLE2¥ENABLED =1 (m: Path 1 to 3)
134
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
Other than 8-digit Does not switch to the milling mode.
value
0
Null
Not set 1
The following is an example of setting multi paths with sub-spindle:
2
PATH2\SPINDLE2\ENABLED=1
TURNING_SIMULATION_C0=YES 3
PATH1\SPINDLE1\MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING=102
PATH2\SPINDLE2\MCODE_TURNING_TO_MILLING=103
4
• Setting values for SIMULATION_MODE
For SIMULATION_MODE, set one of the following values.
5
Table 2.5.1.17 (t) Setting Values for SIMULATION_MODE
Setting Description
6
BASIC Runs with the standard machining simulation function.
Null
Not set
7
ADVANCED Runs with the advanced machining simulation function.
8

NOTE
• If any other value than the predetermined values is set, the machining
simulation screen is disabled even when SIMULATION_ENABLE = 1. A1
• Setting values for MEMORY_SIZE

A2
For MEMORY_SIZE, set one of the following values.
Z
Table 2.5.1.17 (u) Setting Values for MEMORY_SIZE
Setting Description
Null Sets the available system memory size to one of the following
Not set default values.
Invalid value • For main memory 2 GB: 300000 KB
Other than positive • For main memory 4GB: 1000000KB
integer • For main memory 8GB: 4000000KB
Positive integer Sets the available system memory size in KB.
• Setting values for DRAW_INTERVAL

For DRAW_INTERVAL, set one of the following values.
135
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.17 (v) Setting Values for DRAW_INTERVAL

Setting Description
Null Sets the display screen update interval to 200 milliseconds
Not set (default).
1 Invalid value
Other than positive
integer
2 Positive integer Sets the display screen update interval in milliseconds.
3  • The shorter the update interval is set, the longer the machining
simulation cycle time is, and vice versa.
MEMO
4
5  Enabling/disabling the NC program conversion function
6 [NC_Program_Conversion]

7 NC_PROGRAM_CONVERSION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the
NC program conversion function.
8 • Setting values for NC_PROGRAM_CONVERSION_ENABLE

For NC_PROGRAM_CONVERSION_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
A1 Table 2.5.1.17 (w) Setting values for

NC_PROGRAM_CONVERSION_ENABLE
A2 Setting Function Description
enable/disable
Z 0
Other than 1
Disable Disables the NC program conversion function.
Not set
1 Enabled Enables the NC program conversion function.
2.5.1.18 Machining simulation screen

Machining simulation screen allows you to check how machining will be performed
2.5.1.18
by the program through graphic drawings before you proceed to production

machining.
For details, see "MACHINING SIMULATION" in "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation
Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
136
B-64647EN/02
 Displaying the Machining Simulation Screen

The machining simulation screen can be displayed from the EDIT mode base
screen or background edit screen (MEM mode base screen).
<1> In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, press the [Change
Screen] soft key.
1
The machining simulation screen appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
 Display at mode switching
The machining simulation screen includes the following two screens: A2
(1) Machining simulation screen, which is displayed from EDIT mode
(2) Machining simulation screen, which is displayed from MEM mode
The machining simulation screen has independent screen information for each
mode. Therefore, the program displayed in the machining simulation screens for
Z
EDIT and MEM modes may differ from each other. The machining blank
graphically drawn in the machining simulation screen will be initialized by mode
switching.
 Supported tools
To perform machining simulation, you need to set a tool geometry.
Cycle execution and graphic drawing are performed by referring to the tool
geometry dimension data input and tool geometry dimension data.
The following shows the settable tools and data:
137
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.18 (a) Supported tools

Item Mount position Information
General Tool A: Cutting
angle
1 B: Nose angle
2
Flat End Mill
3
4
5 Threading Tool B: Nose angle
7
Grooving Tool W: Tip width
8 L: Tip length
A1
A2 Button Turning Tool L: Tip length
Point Corner Straight A: Cutting

Tool angle
B: Nose angle
138
B-64647EN/02

Drilling Tool B: Nose angle
1
2
Chamfering Tool D: Cutter
diameter
3
4
Ball End Mill Tool 5
6
7
Tap Tool
8
A1
Reamer Tool
A2
Z
Boring Tool
139
B-64647EN/02

Face Mill Tool
1
2
Versatile Tool W: Tip width
L: Tip length
3
4
5
6  Commands to draw a tool
To draw a tool on the animation screen, use one of the following commands:
• Tool compensation number command
7 For the machine control type T (T-type): T or D code

For the machine control type M (M-type): D code
8 • Tool drawing command
Conditions to use the tool compensation number command for T-type
A1 For the machine control type T, the conditions to use the tool compensation
number command are as shown in the table.
A2 Table 2.5.1.18 (b) Conditions to use the tool compensation number command for
T-type
Z Tool compensation
number command
Use condition
Extended tool select Tool management function
function (*1) (*2)
T code (*3) Disabled Disabled
D code Disabled Enabled (*5)
Enabled (*4) Disabled
Enabled (*4) Enabled (*5)
*1: Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

*2: Enabled when one of the following optional functions is applied:
• Tool management function: 64 pairs
140
B-64647EN/02

*3: For a T code, it is the offset number used by the tool geometry compensation
number in the tool command.
The offset number is determined by the following parameters:
• Parameter No. 3032 (Allowable number of digits for a T code) 1
• Bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 (Geometry compensation number = 0:
Same as wear compensation number, 1: Same as tool selection number)
• Parameter No. 5024 (Number of tool compensation values)
2
• Parameter No. 5028 (Number of digits of a compensation number with a T
code) 3
*4: If the extended tool select function is enabled, the operation is the same as the
above (*3) except for specifying a compensation number with a D command.
When the extended tool select function is used, machining simulation can be 4
used even in a multi-path system.
*5: When the tool management function is enabled, the modal D number used
when the D99 command (or D command with a number set in parameter No. 5
13265) is specified will be the offset number.
The modal D is the offset number set in the tool type number specified with a T
code. 6
Conditions to use the tool compensation number command for M-type
For the machine control type M, the conditions to use the tool compensation 7
number command are as shown in the table.
Table 2.5.1.18 (c) Conditions to use the tool compensation number command for 8
M-type
Tool compensation
number command
Use condition A1
Tool management function (*1)
D code Disabled (*2)
Enabled (*3) A2
*1: Enabled when one of the following optional functions is applied:
• Tool management function: 64 pairs Z
*2: When the tool management function is disabled, the command value number
will be the offset number.
*3: When the tool management function is enabled, the modal D number used
when the D99 command (or D command with a number set in parameter No.
13265) is specified will be the offset number.
The modal D is the offset number set in the tool type number specified with a T
code.
141
B-64647EN/02
Tools drawn with tool drawing commands

You can draw tool geometry using the following commands (tool definition blocks).
Table 2.5.1.18 (d) Tool Geometry Drawn with Tool Drawing Commands
1 Command Drawn tool geometry

G1910 General tool (turning)
2 G1911
G1912
Threading tool (turning)
Grooving tool (turning)
G1913 Button turning tool (turning)
3 G1914 Straight tool (turning)
G1921 Drilling tool (turning/milling)
4 G1922
G1923
Tapping tool (turning/milling)
Reamer tool (turning/milling)
G1924 Boring tool (turning/milling)
5 G1930 Face mill tool (milling)
G1931 Chamfering tool (milling)
6 G1932 Flat end mill tool (milling)
G1933 Ball end mill tool (milling)
7  Individual path machining simulation

By setting the parameter No. 27309 for each path, you can perform machining
8 simulation individually.
If a path with No. 27309 set to 0 exists, machining simulation is executed for all
paths.
A1 If a value other than 0 is set to No. 27309 for all paths, the first digit is treated as a
bit, and the second and subsequent digits are treated as R signal in the setting
value. If R signal is ON, machining simulation is started for the path. If R signal is
OFF, machining simulation is not started.
A2 If machining simulation is started for each path, an icon indicating the simulation
execution path appears in a tile showing the content title.
If R signal specified in No. 27309 is turned OFF for a path that is executing
Z machining simulation, the icon indicating the execution path is updated, and
machining simulation for the path is stopped. If R signal specified in No. 27309 is
turned ON for a path that is not running machining simulation, the icon indicating
the execution path is updated, and the machining simulation status remains the
same.
 Two-screen display function

[Machining_Simulation]
142
B-64647EN/02
2SCREEN_SIMULATION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the two-

screen display function for the machining simulation screen.
• Setting Values for 2SCREEN_SIMULATION_ENABLE

Set one of the following values. 1
Table 2.5.1.18 (e) Setting Values for 2SCREEN_SIMULATION_ENABLE
Setting Function enable/ Description
2
disable
0
Except 1
Disable Disables the two-screen display function.
3
1 Enabled Enables the two-screen display function.
Not set Complies with No. The function is enabled or disabled according to 4
27314#3 the setting of bit 3 of parameter No. 27314.
No. 27314#3 = 0: Disables the two-screen display
function.
No. 27314#3 = 1: Enables the two-screen display
5
function.
6

NOTE
• To achieve the two-screen display for the machining simulation
screen, SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED, as well as
2SCREEN_SIMULATION_ENABLE, must be set to "1".
7
 Main spindle display position

8
[Machining_Simulation] A1
SPINDLE1\SCREEN: Set whether to display the main spindle on the right side
A2
or left side in individual spindle machining simulation with the two-screen
display. Z
• Setting Values for SPINDLE1\SCREEN
Set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.18 (f) Setting Values for SPINDLE1\SCREEN

Setting Display position Description
RIGHT Right side Displays the sub-spindle on the left side and main
Other than spindle on the right side.
LEFT
LEFT Left side Displays the main spindle on the left side and sub-
spindle on the right side.
143
B-64647EN/02
Setting Display position Description

Not set Complies with No. The drawing positions of Spindle 1/Spindle 2 are
27314#4 and No. determined by a setting combination of bit 4 of
27314#5 parameter No. 27314 and bit 5 of parameter No.
1 27314, respectively.
No. 27314#4 = 0 and No. 27314#5 = 1: Displays
the main spindle on the left side and sub-spindle on
the right side.
2 No. 27314#4 = 1 and No. 27314#5 = 0: Displays
the sub-spindle on the left side and main spindle on
the right side.
3 Combination other than the above: Displays
Spindle 1 on the left side and Spindle 2 on the right
side.
4
2.5.1.19 Enabling/disabling the turning function and milling function
5 2.5.1.19
Enable/disable the following functions:
6 • Turning function
• Milling function

• File name
8 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
A1 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥
A2  Detailed setting items

Z [Machine_Type]

TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the turning
function.
MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the milling
function.
• Turning function and milling function enable/disable setting

For TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE and MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE, set
one of the following values.
144
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.19 Setting Values for TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE and

MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE
enable/disable
Other than 0
and 1
Function disable Disables the cycle.
"Not set" includes the following:
1
Not set • There is no MTB configuration file.
0 Function disable
• Nothing is described in the MTB configuration file.
Disables the cycle.
2
1 Function enable Enables the cycle.
3

NOTE
• When the function of both TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE and
MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE is disabled, the soft keys to display
the cycle menu will be hidden.
4
5
2.5.1.20 Setting program guidance messages
6
In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, the meaning of a word
2.5.1.20
at the cursor position in a program being edited is displayed as a program

guidance message.
You can make settings to associate words with program guidance messages in
7
the following user customization files.
8
• Program guidance definition file
• Program guidance message file
A1
 Program guidance definition file
The program guidance definition file is used to describe relationships between A2
command codes/addresses and messages.
Create an appropriate program guidance definition file shown below according to
the system type and G code system of a machine for which you want to customize Z
the program guidance messages.
Table 2.5.1.20 (a) Program Guidance Definition Files to Create

File name Description
guideMu.txt Program guidance definition file for M-type system
guideTAu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system A in T-type
system
guideTBu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system B in T-type
system
guideTCu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system C in T-type
system
145
B-64647EN/02
File name Description

guideCMu.txt Program guidance definition file common to all system types
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\ProgramGuidance\
1
Describe relationships between command codes and words, command codes and
parameters, and command codes/words and messages. The program guidance
2 definition file consists of two definitions, a parameter tag and structure information,
described later.
3 Parameter tag
Describe conditions when structure information is enabled in the following format.
<Parameter No.,Parameter BIT,Parameter value,Complex machine flag>\r\n
4
Table 2.5.1.20 (b) Items Described in a Parameter Tag
5 Item Description
Parameter No. Parameter number
6 Parameter BIT Parameter BIT (0 to 7)
Parameter value Parameter value (0 or 1)
Complex machine flag Value Device
7 0
T
○
M
○
Complex machine
×
1 ○ ○ ○
8 2 × × ○
○: Parameter tag enabled, ×: Parameter tag disabled

A1
• A parameter tag remains enabled until the next parameter tag
appears.
A2 • It is enabled when the parameter tag setting value is the same as
"Parameter value" at start-up.
Z 
NOTE
For complex machines, it is also enabled when "Complex machine
flag" is 1 or 2.
• To specify structure information that is independent from parameter
conditions, set it to <0,0,0,1>.
• The first path is always referenced for parameters.
• A line break (¥r¥n) must be entered at the end of each line.
Structure information
Describe relationships between command codes/words and messages in the
following format.
Command code character string Message ID,Address letter Message ID...\r\n
146
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.20 (c) Items Described in Structure Information

Item Description
Command code Describe a command code using a character string.
character string
Message ID Describe an ID defined in the program guidance message file. 1
Address letter Describe an address using a letter (one single-byte character).
2
• Describe a command code group in each line.
• There are two command code character string types, "address +
number" and "address". 3
• Repeat entering a set of "Address letter Message ID" as necessary

(not required).
NOTE
• Only "address" is allowed to be used for address letters.
4
• There are the following restrictions.
Each line can contain up to 256 bytes including a line break.
Each command code character string or word can contain up to 16
5
bytes.
6
An description example of the program guidance definition file is as follows.
7
Table 2.5.1.20 (d) Description Example of Program Guidance Definition File
Line File contents Description
1 <0,0,0,1> Enabled regardless of the parameters (even for complex
8
machines)
2 G100 180,T 60 180 for message ID of G100 program guidance message and
60 for message ID of address T program guidance message
A1
following G100
3 <980,7,1,1> Enabled when bit 7 of parameter No. 0980 is 1 (enabled even
for complex machines)
A2
4 G100 100,X 120 100 for message ID of G100 program guidance message and
120 for message ID of address X program guidance
message following G100
Z
5 G120 111 111 for message ID of G120 guidance message
6 <980,7,1,0> Enabled when bit 7 of parameter No. 0980 is 1 (disabled for
complex machines. Same as <0,0,0,1>.)
7 G140 112 112 for message ID of G140 guidance message
The following contents are enabled according to the condition of parameter No.
0980.
147
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.20 (e) Contents to Be Enabled According to the Condition of

Parameter No. 0980
Parameter No. Contents to be enabled
0980#7 value Complex machine T- or M-type
1 0 (other than 1) "G100 180,T 60" in second line "G100 180,T 60" in second line
"G140 112" in seventh line
1 "G100 100,X 120" in fourth line "G100 100,X 120" in fourth line
2 "G120 111" in fifth line "G120 111" in fifth line
"G140 112" in seventh line "G140 112" in seventh line
3
 Program guidance message file
The program guidance message file is used to describe message IDs specified in
4 the program guidance definition file and character strings to be actually displayed.
Prepare this file for each language. Describe character strings to be displayed in
each language.
5 Use the same IDs between 0 and 3499 for message IDs for all languages.
FANUC standard data program guidance messages use IDs between 0 and 2499.
6
Table 2.5.1.20 (f) File Names and Corresponding Languages
File name Supported language Character code
7 gudmsg0u.txt English Shift-JIS

gudmsg1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS
gudmsg2u.txt German Shift-JIS
8 gudmsg3u.txt French Shift-JIS
gudmsg4u.txt Italian Shift-JIS
A1 gudmsg5u.txt Spanish Shift-JIS

gudmsg6u.txt Swedish Shift-JIS
gudmsg7u.txt Czech Shift-JIS
A2 gudmsg8u.txt Portuguese Shift-JIS
gudmsg9u.txt Polish Shift-JIS
Z gudmsgau.txt Russian UTF-16 (with BOM)

gudmsgbu.txt Chinese (traditional) Shift-JIS
gudmsgcu.txt Chinese (simplified) UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgdu.txt Korean UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgeu.txt Turkish Shift-JIS
gudmsgfu.txt Dutch Shift-JIS
gudmsggu.txt Hungarian Shift-JIS
gudmsghu.txt Bulgarian UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgiu.txt Romanian Shift-JIS
gudmsgju.txt Finnish Shift-JIS
gudmsgku.txt Danish UTF-16 (with BOM)
148
B-64647EN/02

gudmsglu.txt Vietnamese UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgmu.txt Indonesian UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgnu.txt Slovak UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgou.txt Slovene UTF-16 (with BOM) 1
gudmsgpu.txt Tamil UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgqu.txt Hindi UTF-16 (with BOM)
2
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\ProgramGuidance\
3
Describe relationships between message IDs specified in the program guidance
definition file and character strings to be actually displayed in the following format.
4
Message ID,Character string\r\n
This file must be prepared for each language. Use the same IDs for message IDs
5
for all languages.
6
Table 2.5.1.20 (g) Items Described in the Program Guidance Message File
Item Description
Message ID Message ID (decimal)
7
Character string Character string to be actually displayed
8
• Describe one set of message ID and character string in each line.
• Use a message ID specified in the program guidance definition file in A1
 decimal format.
NOTE • There are the following restrictions.
The maximum length of a character string depends on the character
A2
limit of the program guidance message display area.
2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function

You can enable/disable the M code list function. You can also change text and
2.5.1.21
messages to be displayed in the M code menu screen.
 Enabling M code list function

By enabling the M code list function, you can display [M Code] soft key to display
the M code list window.
149
B-64647EN/02
<1> Prepare an M code menu screen definition file and an M code message file.
• The file name is "dlgmcdeu.txt" only.

• In the default setting state, "dlgmcdeu.txt", where FANUC standard
1  settings are written, is provided.

• For the M code menu screen definition file and M code message file,
MEMO
see "■ Customizing the M code menu screen" in "2.5.1.21 Setting up
M code input function".
2
3 <2> Store the M code menu screen definition file in the directory below:
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\M_code\
4 <3> Enable the M code list function with the MTB configuration file.
● File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
5 • File name
Setting_data.txt
6 • Storage folder
● Detailed setting items

[MCode_Function]
MCODE_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the M code list function.
A1 • M code list function enable/disable setting

For MCODE_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
A2 Table 2.5.1.21 (a) Setting values for MCODE_ENABLE

Setting Function enable/disable Description
Z 1 Function enable Enables the M code list function
0 Function disable Disables the M code list function
 Customizing the M code menu screen

You can change text and messages to be displayed in the M code menu screen.
● File names to be created

You need to create the files shown below to customize the M code menu screen.
M code menu screen definition file

Define the structure of the M code menu screen.
150
B-64647EN/02
• File name
dlgmcdeu.txt
M code message files

The following shows the M code message files that correspond to the message
IDs described in the M code menu screen definition file. Prepare an M code 1
message file for each language.
The file names and their corresponding languages are as follows:
2
Table 2.5.1.21 (b) M code message files
File name Description 3
mcdmsg0u.txt For English display
mcdmsg1u.txt
mcdmsg2u.txt
For Japanese display
For German display
4
mcdmsg3u.txt For French display
mcdmsg4u.txt For Italian display 5
mcdmsg5u.txt For Spanish display
mcdmsg6u.txt
mcdmsg7u.txt
For Swedish display
For Czech display
6
mcdmsg8u.txt For Portuguese display
mcdmsg9u.txt For Polish display 7
mcdmsgau.txt Russian
mcdmsgbu.txt
mcdmsgcu.txt
For Chinese (Traditional) display
For Chinese (Simplified) display
8
mcdmsgdu.txt For Korean display
mcdmsgeu.txt Turkish A1
mcdmsgfu.txt Dutch
mcdmsggu.txt
mcdmsghu.txt
Hungarian
Bulgarian
A2
mcdmsgiu.txt Romanian
mcdmsgju.txt Finnish Z
mcdmsgku.txt Danish
mcdmsglu.txt Vietnamese
mcdmsgmu.txt Indonesian
mcdmsgnu.txt Slovak
mcdmsgou.txt Slovene
● Creating an M code menu screen definition file

Create an M code menu screen definition file (dlgmcdeu.txt) according to the
format below:
151
B-64647EN/02
The M code menu screen definition file consists of specification lines of tab title
tags to specify tab titles and specification lines of M code character string
definitions to define M code messages.
Format of the tab title tag

1 <TABn=Tab title message ID>
2 Table 2.5.1.21 (c) Tab title tag

Item Description
TABn= Describe a screen number of each tab for "n" in "TABn="
3 starting from 1.
The M code character strings defined between the tab title line
and the next tab title line are displayed in the same tab screen.
4 Tab title message ID For a tab title message ID, describe a message ID defined in
the M code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) using an integer.
5 Format of the M code character string definition
6 M code character string,Message ID
Table 2.5.1.21 (d) Tab title tag
7 Item
M code character
Description
For an M code character string, describe a command code
string using a character string.
8 Message ID
Use "M" + numeric value for a command code.
For a message ID, describe a message ID defined in the M
code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) using an integer.
A1
A2 
NOTE
• Break the line for each definition.
Z Description example
<TAB1=2500>
M11,2511
M12,2512
<TAB2=2501>
M71,2521
M72,2522
● Creating an M code message file

Create an M code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) according to the format below:
Format
Message ID,Character string
152
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.21 (e) Tab title tag

Item Description
Message ID For a message ID, specify a message ID specified in the M
code menu screen definition file (dlgmcdeu.txt) using an
integer. 1
Character string For a character string, describe a character string to be
actually displayed.
2
• Break the line for each definition.

NOTE
• A number from 0 to 9999 can be used as a message ID.
• Each character string can contain up to 60 single-byte characters
3
including an M code.
4
Description example
2500,Chuck 5
2501,Stylus
2511,M11:Chuck clamp
2512,M12:Chuck unclamp
2521,M71:Stylus probe ON 6
2522,M72:Stylus probe OFF
7
2.5.1.22 Setting the soft keys on the machining drawing screen
Set the soft key position pattern to call the machining drawing screen.
2.5.1.22
8
• File name A1
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
A2
 Detailed setting items Z

[SOFTKEY_ARRANGEMENT]
CHANGE_INFORMATION: Set the soft key position pattern.
Table 2.5.1.22 Setting Values for CHANGE_INFORMATION

Setting Description
TYPE_0 Places the [Load Meter] soft key and [Machining Drawing] soft key
(switching between the [Drawing ON] and [Drawing OFF] soft
keys) in the second page of soft keys.
153
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
TYPE_1 Places the [Load Meter] soft key and [Machining Drawing] soft key
(switching between the [Drawing ON] and [Drawing OFF] soft
keys) in the first page of soft keys.
1
2.5.1.23 Enabling/disabling the cutting condition calculation function
2 2.5.1.23
Set whether to enable/disable the function to calculate the cutting condition from a
tool or workpiece material.
3
 • For details on the cutting condition calculation function, see "Cutting
Condition Calculation Function" in "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation
MEMO Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
4
5 • File name
6 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
7  Detailed setting items

8 [Cutting_Condition_Calculation]
A1 CUTTING_CONDITION_CALCULATION: Set whether to enable/disable the
cutting condition calculation function.
A2 Table 2.5.1.23 Setting Values for CUTTING_CONDITION_CALCULATION

Setting Description
Z ENABLE Enables the cutting condition calculation function.

DISABLE Disables the cutting condition calculation function.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
2.5.1.24 Setting the string search for programs on the data server
Switch the string search method used when editing a program on the data server.
2.5.1.24
This applies to the search functions with the <↓> or <→> key, such as string
search, end search, replace, and replace all.
154
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• This setting works only when a program on the data server is being
edited.
1
• File name 2
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
3
[StringSearch]
5
DATASERVER_SEARCH_TYPE: Set the program string search function to the
high speed type or cancelable type. 6
Table 2.5.1.24 Setting Values for DATASERVER_SEARCH_TYPE
7
Setting Description
FAST_TYPE Switches the program string search to the high speed type.
Other than The search speed is high, but you cannot cancel a search in 8
CANCELABLE progress.
Not set
CANCELABLE Switches the program string search to the cancelable type. A1
The search speed is not high, but you can cancel a search in
progress.
A2
• If both the turning cycle function and milling cycle function are

NOTE
disabled, the soft key to open the cycle menu does not appear.
For how to enable/disable this function, see "2.5.4.1 Condition to use
Z
the machining cycle creation function".
155
B-64647EN/02
Description example
/*EDIT mode base screen setting*/

[Fixed_Form_Function]
FIXED_FORM_ENABLE=1
1 TURNING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE=0
MILLING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE=0
[MCode_Function]
2 MCODE_ENABLE=1
[StringSearch]
DATASERVER_SEARCH_TYPE = FAST_TYPE
3
2.5.1.25 Setting the function to highlight a program that is being edited
4 2.5.1.25
You can highlight a specific item, such as an axis name or subprogram call in a
program that is being edited, by coloring its text or background.
The highlight function needs to be set in the MTB configuration file and display
5 color setting file.
6  Highlight function enable/disable setting

Set the highlight function in the MTB configuration file.
7 • File name
Setting_data.txt
A1 • Setting group name
[Program_Highlight]
A2 • Specifiable key name

PROGRAM_HIGHLIGHT: Set whether to enable/disable the highlight function.
Z Table 2.5.1.25 (a) Setting Values for PROGRAM_HIGHLIGHT

Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the highlight function.
DISABLE Disables the highlight function.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
 Highlight target item enable/disable setting

Set the highlight function for each target item in the display color setting file.
● File name and storage folder of the display color setting file
• File name
156
B-64647EN/02
Color_setting.txt
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥ProgramHighlight¥
Table 2.5.1.25 (b) Setting group name
Setting group Description 2
name
Search_String Display color setting group for search string
Comment Display color setting group for comment 3
MTB_String_n Display color setting group for MTB-specific string *
Maximum number of groups: 50
Specify the target group number for n (1 to 50). 4
Undefined_Data Display color setting group for data with undetermined value "?"
Macro_Variables Display color setting group for macro variable 5
Macro_Statements Display color setting group for macro statement
Axis_Name Display color setting group for axis name
Subprogram_Call Display color setting group for subprogram call 6
Macro_Call Display color setting group for macro call
G_Code Display color setting group for G code command 7
M_Code Display color setting group for auxiliary function
Tool_Offset Display color setting group for tool offset command
S_Code Display color setting group for spindle command 8
F_Code Display color setting group for feedrate command
B_Code Display color setting group for second auxiliary function A1
Sequence_Numbers Display color setting group for sequence number
*: To use this group, you need to configure the setting in the MTB string setting file.
See "■ Setting the MTB string setting file" shown below.
A2
• Specifiable key name Z
HIGHLIGHT: Set whether to enable/disable the target item (common to all
paths).
Table 2.5.1.25 (c) Setting Values for HIGHLIGHT
Setting Description
ENABLE Enables highlighting the target item.
DISABLE Disables highlighting the target item.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
FONT_COLOR: Set the text color (common to all paths).

BACK_COLOR: Set the background color (common to all paths).
157
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.25 (d) Setting Values for FONT_COLOR/ BACK_COLOR

Setting Description
#000000 to Sets the text color or background color with a hexadecimal RGB
1 #FFFFFF value.
In case of R = 255, G = 0, B = 128, for example, specify #FF0080.
Other than #000000 Sets the same text color or background color as in the edit area.
2 to #FFFFFF
Not set
3 Description example
4 [Search_String]
HIGHLIGHT=ENABLE
BACK_COLOR=#FFFF00
5 [Comment]
HIGHLIGHT=ENABLE
FONT_COLOR=#008000
6 [Axis_Name]
HIGHLIGHT=DISABLE
FONT_COLOR=#0000FF
7 [MTB_String_1]
HIGHLIGHT=ENABLE
FONT_COLOR=#FF00FF
・
8 ・
・
A1 Default values of the display color setting file
Table 2.5.1.25 (e) Default values of the display color setting file
A2 Setting group
Default value
Note
Highlight Text color Backgrou
nd color
Z Search_String Enabled Not set #FFFF00 Background color:
Yellow
Comment Enabled #008000 Not set Text color: Green
MTB_String_1 to Enabled #FF00FF Not set Text color: Pink
MTB_String_50
Undefined_Data Enabled #FF0000 Not set Text color: Red
Macro_Variables Enabled #993300 Not set Text color: Brown
Macro_Statements Enabled #993300 Not set Text color: Brown
Axis_Name Disabled #0000FF Not set Text color: Blue
Subprogram_Call Enabled #FF6400 Not set Text color: Orange
Macro_Call Enabled #FF6400 Not set Text color: Orange
158
B-64647EN/02
Default value
Setting group Highlight Text color Backgrou Note
nd color
G_Code Enabled #800080 Not set Text color: Purple
M_Code Disabled #800080 Not set Text color: Purple 1
Tool_Offset Disabled #800080 Not set Text color: Purple
S_Code Disabled #0099FF Not set Text color: Light blue
F_Code Disabled #0099FF Not set Text color: Light blue
2
B_Code Disabled #800080 Not set Text color: Purple
Sequence_Numbers Disabled #008000 Not set Text color: Green 3
If you enable highlighting all the items, the default display colors will be as shown
below. 4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 2.5.1.25 Default Display Colors When Highlighting All the Items Is Enabled Z
 Setting the MTB string setting file
To set a text color or background color to the display color setting group for MTB-
specific string, you need to set the MTB string setting file.
● File name and storage folder of the MTB string setting file
• File name
You can configure the all-path common setting or individual path setting for the
MTB string setting file.
All-path common setting file: String_setting_cmn.txt
Individual path setting file: String_setting_path_n.txt (n is a path number for
individual setting)
159
B-64647EN/02
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥ProgramHighlight¥
Character strings specified in the all-path common setting or individual path
setting are displayed in the specified colors.
1 If the all-path common setting overlaps with the individual path setting, the
individual path setting takes precedence.
Set the character strings of the display color setting groups 1 to 50 (MTB_String_1
2 to MTB_String_50) for MTB-specific string.
• Define a character string (exactly matched) you want to highlight with 20 or less
3 characters under "MTB_String".
Up to four character strings can be set to one group for each path (fifth and
subsequent groups are invalid).
4 Description example
To define G00 and G01 for MTB_String_1, G02 and G03 for MTB_String_2, and
5 G04 for MTB_String_3
6 [MTB_String_1]
G00
G01
[MTB_String_2]
G02
7 G03
[MTB_String_3]
G04
8
• If a character string contains a character (double-byte character or
A1 tab) that cannot be registered to the program, it is not highlighted.

NOTE
• If you specify 21 or more characters, the character string is highlighted
only up to 20th character.
• If the character string matches a comment word in the program, it is
A2 not highlighted.
Z
2.5.1.26 Setting the misoperation prevention function
Set whether or not to display the misoperation prevention function message on
2.5.1.26
the tool slide screen and workpiece coordinates screen.

• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
160
B-64647EN/02

[Operator_Error_Prevent]
1
MESSAGE_DISPLAY: Set whether or not to display the misoperation
prevention function. 2
Table 2.5.1.26 Setting Values for MESSAGE_DISPLAY
Setting Description
3
SHOW Displays the misoperation prevention function setting.
Not set
4
HIDE Does not display the misoperation prevention function setting.
5
2.5.1.27 Setting up the fixed sentence function
You can enable/disable the fixed sentence function. You can also change text and
6
2.5.1.27
messages to be displayed in the insert fixed sentence for machining window.
 Enabling the fixed sentence function 7

You can enable/disable the fixed sentence function.
When the fixed sentence function is enabled, the [Fixed Sentence] soft key to
display the insert fixed sentence for machining window appears. 8
<1> Prepare an insert fixed sentence screen definition file, a fixed sentence
registration definition file, and a selection screen message file.
A1
• Each file name is as follows: A2
Insert fixed sentence screen definition file: fixdlgu.txt
Fixed sentence registration definition file: fixfrmNu.txt ("N" varies
 depending on the language.)

Selection screen message file: fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt ("N" varies
Z
MEMO depending on the language.)
• For each definition file, see "■Customizing the insert fixed
sentence for machining window" in "2.5.1.27 Setting up the fixed
sentence function".
<2> Store the definition files in the directory below:

%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\Fixede_Form
<3> Enable the fixed sentence function with the MTB configuration file.
161
B-64647EN/02

• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
1 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥

[Fixed_Form_Function]
FIXED_FORM_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the fixed sentence
4 function.
TURNING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the fixed
sentence function (turning).
5 MILLING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the fixed

sentence function (milling).
For FIXED_FORM_ENABLE, TURNING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE, and
6 MILLING_FIXED_FORM_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.27 (a) Setting values for FIXED_FORM_ENABLE

7 Setting Function enable/disable Description
1 Function enable Enables the fixed sentence function.
8 0 Function disable Disables the fixed sentence function.
DATA_TYPE: Set to enable inputting a fixed sentence from a file and outputting it
A1 to a file. For DATA_TYPE, set one of the following values.
A2 Table 2.5.1.27 (b) Setting Values for DATA_TYPE

Setting Description
TYPE_DP Disables inputting/outputting a fixed sentence from/to a file.
Z TYPE_DB Enables inputting/outputting a fixed sentence from/to a file.
• When TYPE_DB is specified in DATA_TYPE, a registered fixed

sentence is also displayed in the MTB tab.

NOTE
• When TYPE_DP is specified in DATA_TYPE, a registered fixed
sentence can be switched to TYPE_DB. However, it cannot be
switched from TYPE_DB to TYPE_DP.
• If you input a fixed sentence from an external file, an existing fixed
sentence will be overwritten with the new one.
162
B-64647EN/02
 Customizing the insert fixed sentence for machining window

You can change the display contents in the insert fixed sentence for machining
window with the user customization files below.
● Insert fixed sentence screen definition file [fixdlgu.txt]

Define the name of a tab displayed on the insert fixed sentence screen. 1
Format of the insert fixed sentence screen definition
<Mode>=***,<Tab>=***,<MsgNo>=***
Define the name of one tab displayed on the fixed sentence screen in one line 2
until the line break.
Table 2.5.1.27 (c) Insert Fixed Sentence Screen Definition

3
Item Description
<Mode>= Specify the mode (Turning/Milling) where the fixed sentence 4
belongs with one of the following values:
1: Fixed sentence for turning mode
2: Fixed sentence for milling mode 5
3: For both turning and milling
<Tab>= Specify the number (1 to 7) of a tab where you want to display
the name. 6
The tab name can contain up to eight single-byte characters.
If multiple definitions were set to the same tab, the last defined
information becomes valid. 7
<MsgNo>= Specify a name you want to display with Message ID defined
in fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt.
8
● Fixed sentence registration definition files [fixfrmNu.txt]
Define the default fixed sentence.
Format of the fixed sentence registration definition
A1
<Mode>=***,<Tab>=***,<Title>=***,<Code>=***
Define one fixed sentence in one line until the line break. "N" in fixfrmNu.txt varies
depending on the language.
A2
Table 2.5.1.27 (d) Fixed Sentence Registration Definition Z
Item Description
<Mode>= Specify the mode (Turning/Milling) where the fixed sentence
belongs with one of the following values:
1: Fixed sentence for turning mode
2: Fixed sentence for milling mode
3: For both turning and milling
<Tab>= Specify the number (1 to 7) of a tab where you want to display
the fixed sentence.
<Title>= Specify the registration name of the fixed sentence. The
screen can display up to 22 characters.
163
B-64647EN/02
Item Description
<Code>= Specify a fixed sentence.
Only characters that can be input from the NC MDI keys can
be used for a fixed sentence.
1 If a fixed sentence has multiple blocks, separate them by ";".

Example: <Code>=M69;M75;G28U0W0V0T00;M74;
2 • The number of fixed sentences that can be registered for each tab
3

NOTE
is 30.
• The number of characters that can be registered for each fixed
sentence is 256. If 257 or more characters are set, nothing is
displayed.
4 Prepare a fixed sentence registration definition file for each language.

5
Table 2.5.1.27 (e) Fixed sentence registration definition files
6 File name Supported language Character code
fixfrm0u.txt English Shift-JIS
fixfrm1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS
7 fixfrm2u.txt German Shift-JIS
fixfrm3u.txt French Shift-JIS
8 fixfrm4u.txt
fixfrm5u.txt
Italian
Spanish
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
fixfrm6u.txt Swedish Shift-JIS
A1 fixfrm7u.txt Czech Shift-JIS
fixfrm8u.txt Portuguese Shift-JIS
A2 fixfrm9u.txt
fixfrmau.txt
Polish
Russian
Shift-JIS
UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmbu.txt Chinese (traditional) Shift-JIS
Z fixfrmcu.txt Chinese (simplified) UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmdu.txt Korean UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmeu.txt Turkish Shift-JIS
fixfrmfu.txt Dutch Shift-JIS
fixfrmgu.txt Hungarian Shift-JIS
fixfrmhu.txt Bulgarian UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmiu.txt Romanian Shift-JIS
fixfrmju.txt Finnish Shift-JIS
fixfrmku.txt Danish Shift-JIS
fixfrmlu.txt Vietnamese UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmmu.txt Indonesian UTF-16 (with BOM)
164
B-64647EN/02

fixfrmnu.txt Slovak UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmou.txt Slovene UTF-16 (with BOM)
● Selection screen message files [fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt] 1

Define a character string displayed on the tab with Message ID and character
string to be displayed.
Format of the selection screen message 2
Message ID,Message
"N" in fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt varies depending on the language.
Prepare a selection screen message file for each language. 3
Table 2.5.1.27 (f) Selection screen message files 4

fixfrm_vgamsg0u.txt English Shift-JIS 5
fixfrm_vgamsg1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg2u.txt
fixfrm_vgamsg3u.txt
German
French
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
6
fixfrm_vgamsg4u.txt Italian Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg5u.txt Spanish Shift-JIS 7
fixfrm_vgamsg6u.txt Swedish Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg7u.txt
fixfrm_vgamsg8u.txt
Czech
Portuguese
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
8
fixfrm_vgamsg9u.txt Polish Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgau.txt Russian UTF-16 (with BOM) A1
fixfrm_vgamsgbu.txt Chinese (traditional) Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgcu.txt
fixfrm_vgamsgdu.txt
Chinese (simplified)
Korean
UTF-16 (with BOM)
UTF-16 (with BOM)
A2
fixfrm_vgamsgeu.txt Turkish Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgfu.txt Dutch Shift-JIS Z
fixfrm_vgamsggu.txt Hungarian Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsghu.txt Bulgarian UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrm_vgamsgiu.txt Romanian Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgju.txt Finnish Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgku.txt Danish Shift-JIS
165
B-64647EN/02
2.5.1.28 Setting the reuse function and range selection function for cycle free
figure creation
You can set the following functions:
2.5.1.28
• Subprogram figure reuse function

1 • Milling figure blank reuse function
• Turning figure blank reuse function
2 • Part range selection function
• Blank range selection function
3
 Subprogram figure reuse function enable/disable setting
Set the subprogram figure reuse function in the MTB configuration file.
4 ● File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
• File name
5 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
7 [Reuse_Function]
8 REUSABLE_FIGURES_IN_SUBPROGRAM: Set whether to enable/disable

the subprogram figure reuse function.
A1 Table 2.5.1.28 (a) Setting Values for REUSABLE_FIGURES_IN_SUBPROGRAM

Setting Description
A2 ENABLE
DISABLE
Enables the subprogram figure reuse function.
Disables the subprogram figure reuse function.
Other than ENABLE
Z Not set
No key Follows the setting of the parameter (No. 14703#7).
1: Disabled / 0: Enabled
 Milling figure blank reuse function enable/disable setting

Set the milling figure blank reuse function in the MTB configuration file.
• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
166
B-64647EN/02

[Reuse_Function]
REUSABLE_BLANK_FIGURES_FOR_MILLING_FIGURE: Set whether to 1
enable/disable the milling figure blank reuse function.
Table 2.5.1.28 (b) Setting Values for

2
REUSABLE_BLANK_FIGURES_FOR_MILLING_FIGURE
ENABLE Enables the milling figure blank reuse function.
DISABLE
Other than ENABLE
Disables the milling figure blank reuse function.
4
Not set
5
 Turning figure blank reuse function enable/disable setting

6
Set the turning figure blank reuse function in the MTB configuration file.
7
• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
8
● Detailed setting items A1
[Reuse_Function]
A2
REUSABLE_BLANK_FIGURES_FOR_TURNING_FIGURE: Set whether to
enable/disable the turning figure blank reuse function. Z
Table 2.5.1.28 (c) Setting Values for
REUSABLE_BLANK_FIGURES_FOR_TURNING_FIGURE
Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the turning figure blank reuse function.
DISABLE Disables the turning figure blank reuse function.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
167
B-64647EN/02
 Part range selection function enable/disable setting

Set the part range selection function in the MTB configuration file.
• File name
1 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder

[Range_Select]

RANGE_SELECTIONS_OF_PART: Set whether to enable/disable the part
range selection function.
5
Table 2.5.1.28 (d) Setting Values for RANGE_SELECTIONS_OF_PART
6 Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the part range selection function.
DISABLE Disables the part range selection function.
7 Other than ENABLE

Not set
8 1: Disabled / 0: Enabled
A1  Blank range selection function enable/disable setting

Set the blank range selection function in the MTB configuration file.
A2 ● File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

• File name
Setting_data.txt
Z • Storage folder

[Range_Select]
RANGE_SELECTIONS_OF_BLANK: Set whether to enable/disable the blank
range selection function.
168
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.28 (e) Setting Values for RANGE_SELECTIONS_OF_BLANK

Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the blank range selection function.
DISABLE Disables the blank range selection function.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
1
1: Disabled / 0: Enabled 2
2.5.1.29 Setting the tool slide 3

Set the following items in the tool slide:
2.5.1.29
• Showing/hiding the tool name 4

• Filtering switch method (geometry and wear/geometry/wear)
• Default filtering display (geometry and wear/geometry/wear) 5
• Virtual tool tip direction display setting (number only/number and icon)
• Position of the [Tool Manager] soft key
6
• File name
7
Setting_data.txt
8
• Storage folder
A1
Table 2.5.1.29 (a) Setting Group Names and Specifiable Key Names A2
Group name Key name Description Setting value
[Tool_Data] TOOL_NAME Show/hide the tool name. Table 2.5.1.29 Z
(b)
GEOMETRY_WEAR_ Set the filtering switch Table 2.5.1.29
DISPLAY_TYPE method (geometry and wear/ (c)
geometry/wear) common to
all paths.
You can set it for each path
by adding "PATHn¥" (n: Path
number) to the beginning of
the key name.
169
B-64647EN/02
Group name Key name Description Setting value

GEOMETRY_WEAR_ Set the filtering default Table 2.5.1.29
DEFAULT_DISPLAY display (geometry and wear/ (d)
geometry/wear) common to
1 all paths.
You can set it for each path
by adding "PATHn¥" (n: Path
number) to the beginning of
2 the key name.
VIRTUAL_TOOL_TIP Set the virtual tool tip Table 2.5.1.29
_DIRECTION direction display method (e)
3 (number only/number and
icon).
HEADER_MESSAGE Set whether the header Table 2.5.1.29
4 message in the first column (f)
matches Tool Manager or not.
[SOFTKEY_ TOOL_MANAGER Set a page of soft keys where Table 2.5.1.29
5 ARRANGEME the [Tool Manager] soft key is (g)
NT] located.
6
Table 2.5.1.29 (b) Setting Values for TOOL_NAME
Setting Description
7 SHOW Shows the tool name/type.
Other than HIDE
Not set
8 HIDE Hides the tool name/type.
A1 Table 2.5.1.29 (c) Setting Values for

(PATHn\)GEOMETRY_WEAR_DISPLAY_TYPE
A2 Setting Display type Description

INDIVIDUAL Individual display Use the filtering soft key to switch the display
type between geometry only and wear only.
Z ALL All display type Use the filtering soft key to switch the display
Other than between all (geometry and wear), geometry only,
INDIVIDUAL and wear only.
Not set
The following shows an example of setting Path 2 and Path 3 to the individual
display type and the other paths to the all display type.
[Tool_Data]
GEOMETRY_WEAR_DISPLAY_TYPE=ALL
PATH2\GEOMETRY_WEAR_DISPLAY_TYPE=INDIVIDUAL
PATH3\GEOMETRY_WEAR_DISPLAY_TYPE=INDIVIDUAL
170
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.29 (d) Setting Values for

(PATHn\)GEOMETRY_WEAR_DEFAULT_DISPLAY
Setting Default filtering display item
GEOMETRY Geometry
WEAR Wear 1
ALL Geometry and wear
Other than
GEOMETRY/
Individual display type: Wear
All display type: Geometry and wear
2
WEAR/ALL
Not set
3
The following shows an example of setting the default screen of Path 2 and Path 3
to "Geometry and wear" and the default screen of the other paths to "Wear".
4
[Tool_Data]
GEOMETRY_WEAR_DEFAULT_DISPLAY=WEAR
PATH2\GEOMETRY_WEAR_DEFAULT_DISPLAY=ALL 5
PATH3\GEOMETRY_WEAR_DEFAULT_DISPLAY=ALL
Table 2.5.1.29 (e) Setting Values for VIRTURL_TOOL_TIP_DIRECTION

6
Setting Item displayed in virtual tool tip direction
NUMBER Number only 7
ICON Icon and number
Other than
NUMBER 8
Not set
A1
Table 2.5.1.29 (f) Setting Values for HEADER_MESSAGE
Setting Description A2
OFFSET_NUMB Set the display of the header message in the first column to the same
ER "tool compensation number" as in Tool Manager.
This setting decreases the number of characters that can be
displayed as the tool name.
Z
NUMBER Set the display of the header message in the first column to "No.".
Not set
Indefinite value
The following is an example of setting the display of the header message in the
first column to the same "tool compensation number" as in Tool Manager.
[Tool_Data]
HEADER_MESSAGE=OFFSET_NUMBER
171
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.1.29 (g) Setting Values for TOOL_ MANAGER

Setting Page of soft keys where the [Tool Manager] soft key is located
Type0 Second page of soft keys
Other than
1 TYPE1
Not set
Type1 First page of soft keys
2
2.5.1.30 Setting the memory card slot used for DNC operation
3 2.5.1.30
You can set whether or not to enable the memory card slot on the display unit for
DNC operation when PANEL iH Pro is used.

• File name
5 Setting_data.txt
D:¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥Setting¥

[Machining_Simulation_Enable]
MEMORYCARD_ON_PANELIHPRO_FOR_DNC: Set whether to enable or
A1 disable the memory card slot on PANEL iH Pro for DNC operation.
A2  • Describe the setting data under the group name of

[Program_Manager].
MEMO
Z • Memory card slot settings

For MEMORYCARD_ON_PANELIHPRO_FOR_DNC, set one of the following
values.
Table 2.5.1.30 Setting Values for

MEMORYCARD_ON_PANELIHPRO_FOR_DNC
Setting Description
AVAILABLE Enables the memory card slot on PANEL iH Pro for DNC
operation.
172
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
UNAVAILABLE Disables the memory card slot on PANEL iH Pro for DNC
Other than AVAILABLE operation.
Not set
No key
1
The following shows an example to enable the memory card slot on PANEL iH 2
Pro for DNC operation.
/*Machining_Simulation_Enable setting*/ 3
MEMORYCARD_ON_PANELIHPRO_FOR_DNC = AVAILABLE
4
• To use the memory card slot on PANEL iH Pro for DNC operation, you
need to enable the memory card slot in the MTB configuration file and
5

NOTE
set the parameter PCM (No. 0300#0) to "1". For details, see "5.7
PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE".
• In any other mode than RMT, the memory card slot setting is disabled
because DNC operation is unavailable. 6
2.5.1.31 Copying/moving program folders 7

Set whether to enable the function to copy or move all programs in the program
2.5.1.31
folder after selecting it.

8
• File name A1
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder A2

Z
[Program_Manager]
FOLDER_COPY_MOVE_ENABLE: Enables or disables the function to copy or
move program folders.
Table 2.5.1.31 Setting Values for FOLDER_COPY_MOVE_ENABLE

Setting Description
ENABLE Enables the function to copy or move program folders.
173
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
DISABLE ENABLE Disables the function to copy or move program folders.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
1 No key

2 The following shows an example to enable the copying or moving of program
folders.
3 /*Folder_Copy_Move_Enable setting*/
[Program_Manager]
FOLDER_COPY_MOVE_ENABLE = ENABLE
4
5 2.5.2 Setting Up the Machining Cycle
2.5.2
Set the machining cycle parameters according to the machine.

6 The following parameter settings are required to use the machining cycle.
Table 2.5.2 Required Parameters for the Machining Cycle

7 Parameter
Bit number
Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
8 8650 #0 (RSK) 1 Executes initialization required for the
machining cycle when <RESET> is pressed.
A1 9000 #0 (SQN) 0 Keeps displaying the program number and

sequence number of the user program which is
the call source until the executed macro is
finished and returns to the user program.
A2 Changing this parameter setting to "1"
changes the display from the program number/
sequence number that is executing the
Z machining cycle to the P-CODE macro used in
the iHMI system.
9071 - 90 Set the P-CODE macro number. The setting
or value is as follows:
91 • Machining center: 90
• Lathe: 91
174
B-64647EN/02
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
9072 - 20 Set the number of blocks that sequentially
process the macro statement in the executed
macro program. The recommended value is as 1
follows:
• Series 30i/31i/32i: 20
• Series 0i-F Plus: 40 2
 For a multi-path system, the value
needs to be adjusted because it is
NOTE not always "20".
3
0001 #1 (FCV) 0 Sets the program format to Series 16 standard
format.
4
14706 - Set the orientations of the basic three axes of
spindle 1 under the following conditions:
• For single-path T-type, M-type, or complex
5
• For two-path T-type
Path 2 side 6
is "1"
• For three-path T-type 7
Path 2 side
is "1"
8
Path 3 side
When the parameter No. 27402#0 (TME)
is "1"
A1
A2
Z
175
B-64647EN/02
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
14707 - When the parameter No. 14702#1 (SUB) is "1"
1 (With sub-spindle), set the orientations of the

basic three axes of spindle 2 under the
• Always for the single-path T-type
2 • For two-path T-type
Path 1 side
3 "1"
Path 2 side
When the parameter No. 27401#1 (SSE) is
4 "1"
Path 1 side
5 "1"
Path 2 side
6 When the parameter No. 27401#1 (SSE) is
"1"
Path 3 side
When the parameter No. 27402#1 (TSE) is
7 5209 #2 (DWP) 1
"1"
If there is no dwell command (address P) in a
lathe rigid tap, enable the dwell command
8 (address P) of a block where the hole

machining command is specified.
14499 - 2 to 5 Set the number of blocks that sequentially
A1 process the macro statement in the macro

program that is executing the machining cycle.
This setting is usually unnecessary, but you
need to adjust it within the valid range if a high-
A2 load process is executed using your auxiliary
macro.
8654 #1 (CXW) 1 Allows you to use the machining cycle without
Z opening the maintenance display.
2.5.3 Setting Up the Measurement Cycle

2.5.3
Set the measurement cycle parameters in the Set-up Guidance according to the
machine.
The following parameter settings are required to use the Set-up Guidance.
176
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.3 (a) Required Parameters for the Set-up Guidance Function
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
9000 #0 (SQN) 0 Changing this parameter setting to "1"
changes the display from the program number/
1
sequence number that is executing the
measurement cycle to the P-CODE macro
used in the iHMI system. 2
9071 - 90 Set the P-CODE macro number. The setting
or
91
value is as follows:
• Machining center: 90 3
• Lathe: 91
9072 - 20 Set the number of blocks that sequentially
process the macro statement in the executed 4
macro program. The recommended value is as
follows:
• Series 30i/31i/32i: 20 5
• Series 0i-F Plus: 40
 For a multi-path system, the value

needs to be adjusted because it is
6
NOTE not always "20".
0001 #1 (FCV) 0 Sets the program format to Series 16 standard

7
format.
12381 - Set the first number of the P-CODE macro
variable area to retain measurement condition
8
data.
variable area to retain calibration data.
A1
variable area used as a workpiece to execute
the measurement function.
A2
variable area to retain measurement results. Z
12385 - Set the number of variables in the P-CODE
macro variable area to retain measurement
results.
177
B-64647EN/02
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
9051 - The Set-up Guidance function uses P-CODE
1 9052
9053
variables.
To use the Set-up Guidance function in FS30i/
9054 31i/32i-B and 0i-F Plus, set the following P-
CODE variable parameters:
2 • 9051:
Set the area number for P-CODE variables
(#10000 to #19999) used by the macro
3 executer of each path.
• 9052:
Set the area number for extended P-CODE
4 variable (#20000 to #29999) used by the

macro executer of each path.
• 9053:
Set the number of P-CODE variables
5 (#10000 to #19999).
• 9054:
6 Set the number of extended P-CODE
variables (#20000 to #29999).
See "Supplementary information about the
P-CODE variable parameters" and "Setting
7 examples of the P-CODE variable parameters"

described later.
8654 #1 (CXW) 1 Allows you to use the Set-up Guidance
8 function without opening the maintenance

display.
A1  Supplementary information about the P-CODE variable parameters

Precautions
A2 P-CODE variables to be used must not be duplicated between the Set-up

Guidance function and the machine manufacturer.
Z When the machine manufacturer does not create a P-CODE macro

Set the parameters as follows:
Table 2.5.3 (b) Parameter Settings (When the Machine Manufacturer Does Not
Create a P-CODE Macro)
Parameter Setting
No.
When using P-CODE variables between #10000 and #19999
9051 Area number for P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999)
• Machining center: 90
• Lathe: 91
178
B-64647EN/02
Parameter Setting
No.
9053 Number of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999)
• When using with the standard specifications: 1200
• When increasing the number of workpiece measurement condition
groups: 1
(No. 12384 value - No. 12381 value) + (No. 12385 value + 1)
When using P-CODE variables between #20000 and #29999
9052 Area number for extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999)
2
• Machining center: 90
9054
• Lathe: 91
Number of extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999)
3
• When using with the standard specifications: 1200
groups: 4
When the machine manufacturer creates a P-CODE macro

5
Set the parameters as follows:
6
Table 2.5.3 (c) Parameter Settings (When the Machine Manufacturer Creates a P-
CODE Macro)
Parameter Setting
7
No.
When the machine manufacturer uses P-CODE variables between #10000 and #19999
in the P-CODE macro and P-CODE variables between #20000 and #29999 in the Set-up
8
Guidance function
9051 Area number for P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999): Any value A1
9052 Area number for extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999): Any
value
9053 Number of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999): Number of variables A2
used by the P-CODE macro of the machine manufacturer
9054 Number of extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999)
• When using with the standard specifications: 1200 Z
groups:
When using a P-CODE variable only between #10000 and #19999
9051 Area number for P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999): Any value
179
B-64647EN/02
Parameter Setting
No.
9053 Number of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #19999)
• When using with the standard specifications: 1200 + Number of
1 variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine manufacturer

groups:
(No. 12384 value - No. 12381 value) + (No. 12385 value + 1) +
2 Number of variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine
manufacturer
When using a P-CODE variable only between #20000 and #19999
3 9052 Area number for extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999): Any
value
4 9054 Number of extended P-CODE variables (#20000 to #29999)

• When using with the standard specifications: 1200 + Number of
variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine manufacturer
5 groups:
(No. 12384 value - No. 12381 value) + (No. 12385 value + 1) +
6 Number of variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine
manufacturer
7  Setting examples of the P-CODE variable parameters

The following are setting examples of the P-CODE variable parameters.
8 Table 2.5.3 (d) Setting Examples of the P-CODE Variable Parameters

Parameter Setting value
No.
A1 Example 1: When using with the standard specifications
• Number of variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine manufacturer: 0
A2 • Number of variables used by the Set-up Guidance function: 1200 (between #10000
and #19999)
9053 1200
Z 9054
12381
0
10000
12382 10180
12383 10300
12384 10500
12385 699
Example 2: When using with the standard specifications
(between #10000 and #19999)
• Number of variables used by the Set-up Guidance function: 1200 (between #20000
and #29999)
9053 3000
180
B-64647EN/02
Parameter Setting value

No.
9054 1200
12381 20000
12382 20180 1
12383 20300
12384 20500
12385 699
2
Example 3: When using with the standard specifications
(#10000 to #12999)
3
• Number of variables used by the Set-up Guidance function: 1200 (#13000 to #14199)
9053
9054
4200
0
4
12381 13000
12382 13180 5
12383 13300
12384
12385
13500
699
6
Example 4: When increasing the number of workpiece measurement condition groups
• Number of variables used by the P-CODE macro of the machine manufacturer: 3000 7
(#10000 to #12999)
• Number of variables used by the Set-up Guidance function: 1400 (#13000 to #14399)
9053 4400 8
9054 0
12381
12382
13000
13290 (The number of variables to be used increases as the number of
A1
workpiece measurement condition groups increases.)
12383 13500 (The number of variables to be used increases as the number of
workpiece measurement condition groups increases.)
A2
12384 13700
12385 699 Z
To use the Set-up Guidance, you need to set the number of measurement
condition types, measurement conditions, and a measuring tool, as well as the
required parameters. You can manually edit them in the P-CODE variable or set
them on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
(1) Number of measurement condition types

The types for the number of types are as follows. Determine the type according
to the number of measuring tools to be used or the number of measurement
conditions.
• Number of tool measurement types
181
B-64647EN/02
• Number of workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection types

(2) Measurement conditions
The measurement condition types are as follows. Set an appropriate value
according to the machine accuracy or the measuring tool to be used.
1 • Measurement conditions for tool measurement

• Measurement conditions for workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
(3) Measuring tool settings
2 The measuring tool setting types are as follows. Set the catalog values of a
measuring tool to be used. The set values can be calibrated in a measurement
cycle.
3 • Touch sensor position settings for tool measurement
• Probe geometry settings for workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
4
2.5.3.1 Manually setting in the P-CODE variable
5 2.5.3.1
The settings are required depending on the measurement type to be used.
6  When measuring a tool using a touch sensor

The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set.
7 • Values need to be specified in millimeters even when the parameter

(No.0000#2=1) (inch input) is set.
• Setting the system variable (#8570=1) allows read and write of the P-
8 
NOTE
CODE variable from the custom macro.
• The following "probe motion" and "probe geometry data" types are
associated with each other. For example, probe geometry data
A1 associated with probe motion type A needs to be set in probe
geometry data type A. Similarly, configure B to F.
A2 ● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for tool measurement
m: Value of the parameter (No.12381) (First number of the measurement condition
Z variable (default 10000))
Table 2.5.3.1 (a) Settings for the Number of Measurement Condition Types for
Tool Measurement
P-CODE variable Description
number
#[m+0] You can set multiple pairs of measurement condition data
referenced during tool measurement. Specify a value larger
than 1 in this item when you want to change the measurement
conditions depending on the touch sensor to be used in a
machine with touch sensors installed in multiple positions. Up
to four pairs can be set. If you use only one pair of
measurement conditions, set 1.
182
B-64647EN/02
● Settings for the measurement conditions for tool measurement

variable (default 10000))
Table 2.5.3.1 (b) Settings for the Measurement Conditions for Tool
1
Measurement
P-CODE variable number
Description
2
Type A Type B Type C Type D
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11

Distance X between the
reference point and tool mount 3
×0)+0] ×1)+0] ×2)+0] ×3)+0]
position
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11

Distance Z between the
reference point and tool mount 4
x0)+1] x1)1] x2)+1] x3)+1]
position
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Move speed at first
x0)4] x1)+4] x2)4] x3)4] measurement
5
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Approach amount at first
x0)5] x1)5] x2)5] x3)5] measurement
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Return amount at first
6
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Overrun amount at
7
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Move speed to the start point
x0)8] x1)8] x2)8] x3)8] at measurement 8
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Move speed at second
#[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 #[(m+7)+(11 Return amount after second A1
x0)10] x1)10] x2)10] x3)10] contact
● Settings for the number of calibration types for tool measurement

A2
n: Value of the parameter (No.12382) (First number of the calibration variable
(default 10180)) Z
Table 2.5.3.1 (c) Settings for the Number of Calibration Types for Tool
Measurement
number
#[n+0] You can set multiple pairs of touch sensor calibration data
referenced during tool measurement. Specify a value larger
than 1 in this item when you use a machine with touch sensors
installed in multiple positions. Up to four pairs can be set. If
you use only one pair of calibration data, set 1.
183
B-64647EN/02
 When measuring a workpiece using a touch probe

The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set.
• Values need to be specified in millimeters even when the parameter

1 (No.0000#2=1) (inch input) is set.
• Setting the system variable (#8570=1) allows read and write of the P-
2

NOTE
CODE variable from the custom macro.
associated with probe motion type A needs to be set in probe
3
● Settings for touch sensor calibration data
4 n: Value of the parameter (No.12382) (First number of the calibration variable
(default 10180))
5 Table 2.5.3.1 (d) Settings for Touch Sensor Calibration Data
6 P-CODE variable number

Description
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position X when
x0)+0] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the +X direction
7 0] 0] 0] (reference value)
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Y when
8 1] 1] 1] (reference value)
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Z when
A1 2] 2] 2] (reference value)
x0)+3] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the -X direction
A2 3] 3] 3] (reference value)
Z 4] 4] 4] (reference value)
5] 5] 5] (reference value)
x0)+6] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the +Y direction
184
B-64647EN/02

Description
x0)+9] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the -Y direction
#[(n+7)+(A
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Y when
1
#[(n+7)+(A
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Z when
2
3
x0)+12] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the +Z direction
4
13] 13] 13] (reference value) 5
x0)+15] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the -Z direction
17] 17] 17] (reference value) A1
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for workpiece set-up/
post-machining inspection A2
Z
Table 2.5.3.1 (e) Settings for the Number of Measurement Condition Types for
Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection
number
#[m+1] You can set multiple pairs of measurement condition data
referenced during workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
and probe calibration. Specify a value larger than 1 in this item
when you want to change the measurement conditions
depending on the probe to be used in a machine using probes
with a different geometry. Up to six pairs can be set. If you use
only one pair of measurement conditions, set 1.
185
B-64647EN/02
● Settings for the probe motion in the diameter direction

1 Table 2.5.3.1 (f) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Diameter Direction
Description
Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type F
2 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
3 (21x0)+0] (21x1)+0] (21x2)+0] (21x3)+0] (21x4)+0] (21x5)+0]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Approach amount at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
4 (21x0)+1] (21x1)+1] (21x2)+1] (21x3)+1] (21x4)+1] (21x5)+1]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Return amount at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
5 (21x0)+2] (21x1)+2] (21x2)+2] (21x3)+2] (21x4)+2] (21x5)+2]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Overrun amount at
6 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+3] (21x1)+3] (21x2)+3] (21x3)+3] (21x4)+3] (21x5)+3]
measurement
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1

Move speed to the start point
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
at measurement
(21x0)+4] (21x1)+4] (21x2)+4] (21x3)+4] (21x4)+4] (21x5)+4]
7 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+5] (21x1)+5] (21x2)+5] (21x3)+5] (21x4)+5] (21x5)+5]
8 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Return amount after second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
contact
(21x0)+6] (21x1)+6] (21x2)+6] (21x3)+6] (21x4)+6] (21x5)+6]
A1
● Settings for the probe motion in the axis direction
A2 m: Value of the parameter (No.12381) (First number of the measurement condition
Z Table 2.5.3.1 (g) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Axis Direction
Description
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+7] (21x1)+7] (21x2)+7] (21x3)+7] (21x4)+7] (21x5)+7]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+8] (21x1)+8] (21x2)+8] (21x3)+8] (21x4)+8] (21x5)+8]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+9] (21x1)+9] (21x2)+9] (21x3)+9] (21x4)+9] (21x5)+9]
186
B-64647EN/02

Description
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Overrun amount at
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+10] (21x1)+10] (21x2)+10] (21x3)+10] (21x4)+10] (21x5)+10]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1
1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) Move speed to the start point
+(21×0)+1
1]
+(21×1)+1
1]
+(21×2)+1
1]
+(21×3)+1
1]
+(21×4)+1
1]
+(21×5)+1 at measurement
1]
2
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+12] (21x1)+12] (21x2)+12] (21x3)+12] (21x4)+12] (21x5)+12]
measurement 3
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+13] (21x1)+13] (21x2)+13] (21x3)+13] (21x4)+13] (21x5)+13]
contact 4
● Settings for the probe motion in the axis direction 5
6
Table 2.5.3.1 (h) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Axis Direction
Description
7
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
Move speed at first
measurement
8
(21x0)+14] (21x1)+14] (21x2)+14] (21x3)+14] (21x4)+14] (21x5)+14]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
A1
(21x0)+15] (21x1)+15] (21x2)+15] (21x3)+15] (21x4)+15] (21x5)+15]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
A2
(21x0)+16] (21x1)+16] (21x2)+16] (21x3)+16] (21x4)+16] (21x5)+16]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
Overrun amount at
measurement
Z
(21x0)+17] (21x1)+17] (21x2)+17] (21x3 (21x4)+17] (21x5)+17]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed to the start point
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
at measurement
(21x0)+18] (21x1)+18] (21x2)+18] (21x3)+18] (21x4)+18] (21x5)+18]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+19] (21x1)+19] (21x2)+19] (21x3)+19] (21x4)+19] (21x5)+19]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
contact
(21x0)+20] (21x1)+20] (21x2)+20] (21x3)+20] (21x4)+20] (21x5)+20]
187
B-64647EN/02
● Settings for the number of calibration types for workpiece set-up/post-machining

inspection
(default 10180))
1 Table 2.5.3.1 (i) Settings for the Number of Calibration Types for Workpiece
Set-up/Post-machining Inspection
2 P-CODE variable Description
number
#[n+2] You can set multiple pairs of probe calibration data referenced
3 during workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection. Specify a
value larger than 1 in this item when you want to set calibration
data for each probe in a machine using probes with a different
4 geometry. Up to six pairs can be set. If you use only one pair of
calibration data, set 1.
5 ● Settings for probe geometry data

6 (default 10180))
Table 2.5.3.1 (j) Settings for Probe Geometry Data

7 P-CODE variable number
Description
8 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1])
#[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1])
#[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1])
#[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1])
#[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1])
#[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1])
Probe length
x#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5
x0)+0] ×1)+0] ×2)+0] ×3)+0] ×4)+0] ×5)+0]
A1 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) Stylus ball diameter (X-
x#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 axis direction)
A2 x0)+1] ×1)+1] ×2)+1] ×3)+1] ×4)+1] ×5)+1]
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
Z x(1+#[n+1])
x#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1]) Stylus ball diameter (Y-
×#[n+0])+(5 axis direction)
x0)+2] ×1)+2] ×2)+2] ×3)+2] ×4)+2] ×5)+2]
Stylus ball position viewed
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
from the spindle center
x(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1])
when the ball is shifted
x#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5
x0)+3] ×1)+3] ×2)+3] ×3)+3] ×4)+3] ×5)+3]
position (X-axis direction)
Stylus ball position viewed
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1])
when the ball is shifted
x#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5
x0)+4] ×1)+4] ×2)+4] ×3)+4] ×4)+4] ×5)+4]
position (Y-axis direction)
188
B-64647EN/02
2.5.3.2 Setting on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen

The settings are required depending on the measurement type to be used.
2.5.3.2
 Displaying the MANUAL GUIDE i screen

<1> Set the following parameters. 1
• Set the parameter (No.14792#2=1) (Use the MANUAL GUIDE i screen).
• Set one of the parameters (No.14794#0 to #5) to 1 (Assign the MANUAL 2
GUIDE i to a function key).
#0:POS, #1:PRG, #2:OFS, #3:SYS, #4:MES, #5:GRP
3
<2> Restart the system.
<3> Display the MANUAL GUIDE i screen from the maintenance display and press 4
the [Settings] soft key.
The data setting window appears.
5
 When measuring a tool using a touch sensor
The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set in the
data setting window.
6
The following "measurement conditions for tool measurement" and 7


"touch sensor position" types are associated with each other. For
example, the touch sensor position associated with measurement
NOTE conditions for tool measurement type A needs to be set in touch sensor 8
position type A. Similarly, configure B to F.
A1
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for tool measurement
<1> Select the Measurement Condition tab.
A2
<2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Measurement Condition Z
Groups for Tool Measurement].
189
B-64647EN/02
• Determine the number of types according to the installation location of

a touch sensor to be used and the measurement condition type.
Example:
For one touch sensor installation location and two measurement
1  condition types (overrun amount large and small)
Number of types = 2
MEMO Type A: Installation location 1, measurement condition (overrun
2 amount large)
Type B: Installation location 1, measurement condition (overrun
amount small)
3 • Up to four types can be set.
4 ● Settings for the tool measurement motion

5 <2> Select the condition to set from [Tool Measurement A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
6 <3> Set each item.
● Settings for the number of touch sensor position types and whether to use the
offset value
7 <1> Select the Calibration tab.
8 <3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Calibration Data Groups for
Tool Measurement].
A1 <4> Set [Whether to Use Offset Value for Tool Measurement Calibration] (0: Not
use, 1: Use).
A2 ● Settings for the touch sensor position

<1> Select the Calibration tab.
Z <2> Select the condition to set from [Position of Touch Sensor A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
<3> Set each item.
 When measuring a workpiece using a touch probe

The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set in the
data setting window.

NOTE
associated with probe motion type A needs to be set in probe
190
B-64647EN/02
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for workpiece set-up/
post-machining inspection
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Measurement Condition 1
Groups for Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection].
2
• Determine the number of types according to the probe type and
measurement condition type to be used.
Example:
For two probe types (long, short) and two measurement condition
3
 types (overrun amount large, small)
MEMO
Number of types = 4
Type A: Probe (short), measurement condition (overrun amount large) 4
Type B: Probe (long), measurement condition (overrun amount large)
Type C: Probe (short) measurement condition (overrun amount small)
Type D: Probe (long), measurement condition (overrun amount small) 5
• Up to six types can be set.
6
● Settings for the probe motion
7
<2> Select the condition to set from [Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection
A to F] and press the <INPUT> key. 8
<3> Set each item.
● Settings for the number of touch sensor position types and whether to use the
A1
offset value
<1> Select the Calibration tab. A2
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Calibration Data Groups for Z
Tool Measurement].
<4> Set [Whether to Use Offset Value for Tool Measurement Calibration] (0: Not
use, 1: Use).
● Settings for the touch sensor position

<1> Select the Calibration tab.
<2> Select the condition to set from [Position of Touch Sensor A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
<3> Set each item.
191
B-64647EN/02
● Settings for the machine coordinate value on a surface where the reference
workpiece is placed
1 <3> Set the machine coordinate value on a surface where the reference workpiece
is placed in [Machine Coordinate Value on Surface Where Reference
Workpiece Is Placed].
2
A value set in [Machine Coordinate Value on Surface Where Reference
3 Workpiece Is Placed] is referenced in the following measurement
cycles.
4  • Measurement cycle (probe Z-axis direction) - Calibration - G2001:

Probe length
MEMO • Measurement cycle (probe X-axis direction) - Calibration - G2101:
Probe length
5 For details on measurement cycles, see "Set-up Guidance

OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-3).
6
● Settings for the post-machining inspection motion
7 <2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> After executing post-machining inspection, specify the offset value ratio set as
8 the tool offset amount in [Offset Amount of Setting Value to Post-machining
Inspection Tool Offset Amount].
A1
2.5.4 Setting Up the Cycle-related Window
A2 2.5.4
2.5.4.1 Condition to use the machining cycle creation function
Z Set to enable the machining cycle creation function.

2.5.4.1

• File name
Machining_Cycle_data.txt
• Storage folder

[Cycle_Function]
192
B-64647EN/02

TURNING_CYCLE_FUNCTION: Set whether to enable/disable the turning
cycle function.
MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the milling
cycle function.
1
Table 2.5.4.1 Setting Values for TURNING_CYCLE_FUNCTION and
MILLING_CYCLE_FUNCTION
2
Setting Description
0
1
Disables the cycle function.
Enables the cycle function.
3
4

NOTE
5
6
2.5.4.2 Opening the cycle input screen on the cycle selection screen by
tapping
2.5.4.2
Set whether you can open the cycle input screen by tapping while the cycle
7
selection window is displayed.
8
• File name
Setting_data.txt
A1
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥SETTING¥ A2
Z
[Cycle_Function]
OPEN_BY_TAP: Set whether or not to open the cycle input window by one
tapping.
Table 2.5.4.2 Setting Values for OPEN_BY_TAP

Setting Description
DISABLE Opens the cycle input window by tapping.
Other than ENABLE
Not set
193
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
ENABLE Does not open the cycle input window by tapping.
1 
NOTE
2
3 2.5.4.3 Setting the cycle input window not to close when opening a slide
You can set the cycle input window not to close when opening a slide.
2.5.4.3
This setting allows the cycle input window to display the same contents before and
4 after opening a slide.

• File name
6 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder

[Cycle_Function]
A1
DISPLAY_WINDOWS_WHEN_COVERED: Set the cycle input window
A2 behavior when opening a slide.
Z Table 2.5.4.3 Setting Values for the Window Display State Save Function
Setting Description Description
CLOSE Close window Closes the cycle input window when opening a
slide.
UNCLOSE Do not close window Does not close the cycle input window when
opening a slide.
• The value is interpreted as "CLOSE" (Close window) under the

NOTE
The setting file is not accessible.
No definition is found in the setting file.
An illegal value (value other than "CLOSE" and "UNCLOSE") is set.
194
B-64647EN/02
2.5.4.4 Changing to display the first page of soft keys

When you close the cycle input screen with the [OK] soft key, the second page of
2.5.4.4
soft keys is normally displayed in the base screen.

You can set to change this behavior so that the first page of soft keys is displayed 1
(menu selection soft key autoback function).
This setting applies to the following functions: 2

• Machining cycle
• Figure cycle 3
• Coordinate conversion cycle
• Measurement cycle 4
• G contour
• Drawing command
5

NOTE
• A cycle that displays figure screens sequentially after creating a cycle
is not subject to this setting.
6
7
• File name
Setting_data.txt
8
• Storage folder A1

A2
[Cycle_Function] Z
SOFTKEY_AUTO_BACK: Set whether to enable/disable the menu selection
soft key autoback function.
Table 2.5.4.4 Setting Values for the Menu Selection Soft Key Autoback Function
disable
ENABLE Function enable Enables the menu selection soft key autoback
function.
195
B-64647EN/02

disable
DISABLE Function disable Disables the menu selection soft key autoback
Other than function.
1 ENABLE
Not set
2 2.5.4.5 Customizing the character strings on the cycle creation screen

Customize the character strings displayed on the cycle creation screen.
2.5.4.5
3 You can set region-specific cycle names and input items.
 Customizable screens
4 The character strings on the following cycle creation screens can be customized:
• Cycle selection window
5 • Cycle input window
6  Target function
The character strings can be customized for the following functions:
• Machining cycle
7 • Figure cycle
• Coordinate conversion cycle
8 • Figure copy
• Drawing command
A1 • Contouring programming
• Measurement cycle
A2
Z
196
B-64647EN/02
 Customizing the character strings on the cycle selection window
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.5.4.5 (a) Cycle Selection Window
5
File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
• File name
iHMI_cycle_vgamsgNu.txt ("N" indicates a language type. See the table below)
6
Table 2.5.4.5 (a) Language Types That Can Be Specified in the File 7
Language Language type Language Language type
English 0 Korean D 8
Japanese 1 Turkish E
German 2 Dutch F
French 3 Hungarian G A1
Italian 4 Bulgarian H
Spanish 5 Romanian I A2
Swedish 6 Finnish J
Czech 7 Danish K
Portuguese 8 Vietnamese L Z
Polish 9 Indonesian M
Russian A Slovak N
Chinese (traditional) B Slovene O
Chinese (simplified) C
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥CycleCreation¥MTB
197
B-64647EN/02
• Format
Line break with ¥n: You can break a cycle name or machining category soft
1 key name at any position.
A line is not broken for any other character string (¥n is displayed as a part of
message).
2 The machining category soft key names correspond to the character string
message IDs as shown in the table below.
A line break is inserted for a soft key name at its position while a single-byte
3 space is inserted for a machining category character string at its position.
Table 2.5.4.5 (b) Machining Category Soft Key Names and Corresponding
4 Message IDs
Window title Character string Message ID
5 Create Milling Cycle XY 50012

YZ 50013
6 XC 50014
ZC 50015
XA 50016
7 YB 50017
8  Customizing character strings on the cycle input window
A1
A2 A
Fig. 2.5.4.5 (b) Cycle Input Window

• File name
198
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.4.5 (c) Files Corresponding to Customized Character Strings on the

Cycle Input Window
Type File name
A Language file about the window title and input items dlgmsgNu.txt (*1)
B Language file about the guidance errmsgNu.txt (*1) 1
C Language files about the soft key names iHMI_keymsgNu.txt (*1)
*1: "N" indicates a language type. See "Table 2.5.4.5 (a) Language Types That
Can Be Specified in the File".
2
• Storage folder 3
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥CNCOPERA¥CycleCreation¥MTB
• Format
4
5
dlgmsgNu.txt
-Line break with ¥n: You cannot specify it (¥n is displayed as a part of
message). 6
errmsgNu.txt
-Line break with ¥n: You cannot specify it (¥n is displayed as a part of
message). 7
-To specify a character string containing a shared message and variable, use
two message IDs.
In case of shared message "Key in numerals." and variable "(°)", to change 8
the shared message to "Please key in numerals.", define "Please key in
numerals.%1" for the ID53 message.
To change the variable to "(DEG)", define "(DEG)" for the ID325 character A1
string.
Message IDs and character strings to be customized using two message
IDs are as shown in the table below. A2
Table 2.5.4.5 (d) Examples of a Guidance Display Combining Two Message IDs Z
Character string Message Guidance Display Character string (ID) to
ID combine
Key in 53 Key in numerals. -
numerals.%1
Key in numerals. (MM, INCH) (324)
(MM, INCH)
Key in numerals.(°) (°) (325)
Key in numerals.(SEC) (SEC) (326)
Key in numerals.(MM/MIN, (MM/MIN, MM/REV, INCH/
MM/REV, INCH/MIN, MIN, INCH/REV) (327)
INCH/REV)
199
B-64647EN/02
Character string Message Guidance Display Character string (ID) to

ID combine
Key in (MM_INCH_DEG/MIN,
numerals.(MM_INCH_DEG MM_INCH/REV) (467)
1 /MIN, MM_INCH/REV)
Key in numerals.(%) (%) (328)
Key in numerals.(RPM) (RPM) (329)
2
iHMI_keymsgNu.txt
-Line break with ¥n: You can specify a line break position.
3
 Displaying the message ID
4 To identify the message ID for a character string to customize, perform the

following:
<1> Remember the procedure to display the character string to customize.
5 <2> Store the customization data file describing the message ID to be entered in a
location where you want to write the character string as shown below in the
6 folder previously mentioned.
0,0
1,1
2,2
7 ...
<3> Use the procedure remembered in step <1> to display the target window.
8 The message ID is displayed in the location where the character string to be

customized is displayed.
A1
A2
Z
200
B-64647EN/02
The valid range of message IDs is as shown in the table below.

Type File name Message ID range
Message ID for the cycle iHMI_cycle_vgamsgNu.txt 0 to 19999
selection window 50000 to 59999
Message ID for the window title
and input items on the cycle input
dlgmsgNu.txt 0 to 1499
2001 to 2499
1
window 10000 to 19999
Message ID for the guidance on
the cycle input window
errmsgNu.txt 0 to 680 2
Message ID for the soft key iHMI_keymsgNu.txt 0 to 969
names on the cycle input window 10022 to 29999 3
4
2.5.5 Comparison between Machine Collision Avoidance
2.5.5
Function and 3D Interference Check Function 5
Both of the machine collision avoidance function and the 3D interference check
function are optional functions to stop the machine beforehand when detecting
interactive interference with the machine or tool to prevent damage on the 6
machine.
Select one of the functions according to your system configuration or work
environment. 7
Comparison between the two functions is shown in the table below:
Table 2.5.5 Comparison between Machine Collision Avoidance Function and 3D

8
Interference Check Function
Item Description A1
Machine collision avoidance 3D Interference Check
Supported
indicator/
• PANEL iH Pro • PANEL iH
• Commercial PC (Windows 7 64- • PANEL iH Pro A2
external device bit version)
Required option • 3D interference check by PC
functions (-R542)
-
Z
• Machine collision avoidance
function (A02B-0207-J921)
201
B-64647EN/02
Item Description
Machine collision avoidance 3D Interference Check
Work item • Work by the machine tool builder • Work by the machine tool builder
(MTB) (MTB)
1 Create a 3D machine model
file
Enable the function (Set the
parameters)
Prepare for defining blanks/ Set the display items
2 jigs (Both require CGTech

simulation software
Create model figures
(machine components, tool
VERICUT.) holders)
Setting the parameters Set a moving axis
3 Configure the settings in iHMI Set a check target
• Work by the end user combination
Define blanks/jigs (Use simple Update the setting data
4 edit/detail edit/CAD data)
Monitor machine collision
Monitor interference check
• Work by the end user
Create model figures (blanks/
5 jigs)
Set a moving axis
Set a check target
6 combination
Update the setting data
Monitor interference check
7
2.5.6 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Func-
tion
8 2.5.6
To use the machine collision avoidance function (option), you need to create a 3D
machine model beforehand and set data. In the machine collision avoidance
A1 function, the machine manufacturer creates a 3D machine model, and the end
user defines the blanks and jigs.
A2  • For the machine collision avoidance function, see "MACHINE

COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION" in "FANUC iHMI Home Screen
MEMO OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
Z
2.5.6.1 Creating a 3D machine model

To create a 3D machine model, you need to use simulation software VERICUT
2.5.6.1
provided by CGTech to create the files below.

• Start-up project file (xxx.VcProject) (It contains the information about blanks and
jigs.)
• Template of a machine file (xxx.mch or xxx.xmch)
• Template of a control file (xxx.ctl or xxx.xctl)
202
B-64647EN/02
• Template of a tool file (xxx.tls)

• Machine structure file (xxx.stl)
Create a machine structure and tool data on a PC and register the data to PANEL
iH Pro. 1
VERICUT
Define a 2
machine model.
3
4
Tool definition
5
6
7
Fig. 2.5.6.1 (a) Creating a machine structure and tool data 8
• For details about how to create a 3D machine model file, contact A1

CGTech.
• To create a 3D machine model file, CGTech simulation software
VERICUT version 7.4.1 or later is required. A2
 • If your VERICUT is the version 7.4.1 or later, you can use it.
• When you do not have VERICUT, you can obtain it for free of charge
MEMO by making a partner license agreement with CGTech (Note that
support for VERICUT may be at your expense).
Z
• You can request CGTech to create a 3D machine model file (at your
expense).
• For how to use VERICUT, see the VERICUT help.
 Tolerance when creating a 3D machine model

To use VERICUT to create a 3D machine model, set a tolerance (cutting
resolution or cutting accuracy) to a value nearly 0.7.
The blank is roughly cut, but this does not cause a problem with detecting
interference.
A smaller tolerance makes the cutting surface of the blank more smooth, but this
increases CPU load.
203
B-64647EN/02
• A smaller tolerance makes the cutting surface of the blank more

NOTE
smooth, but this increases CPU load.
• For details about the tolerance, see the VERICUT help or contact
1 CGTech.
2  Preparing the definition of blanks and jigs

Perform preparations for end users to define blanks and jigs.
3 In VERICUT, connect one jig ([Fixture]) to the part called [Attach] and one blank
([Stock]) to that jig.
4
5
6
7
8
A1 Fig. 2.5.6.1 (b) Project tree
A2 • In VERICUT, you can connect multiple jigs ([Fixture]) and blanks

([Stock]) to [Attach]. However, to use this function, you should always
 connect one jig ([Fixture]) to [Attach] and one blank ([Stock]) to that jig.
• You can add multiple model geometries to a jig ([Fixture]) and a blank
Z MEMO ([Stock]).
• For details about [Attach], blank ([Stock]), and jig ([Fixture]), see the
VERICUT help.
2.5.6.2 Setting various settings of the machine collision avoidance function

Set the following various settings of the machine collision avoidance function.
2.5.6.2
- Common Settings
- Machine Setting
- Individual Path
Follow the procedure below to display the settings screen.
204
B-64647EN/02
<1> From the Home screen, start the machine collision avoidance function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The soft keys are switched. A1
A2
Z
<3> Press the [Common Settings], [Machine Setting], or [Individual Path] soft key.
The common settings screen, machine setting screen, or individual path
settings screen appears.
205
B-64647EN/02
• When [Machine Setting] is enabled, the [Machine Setting] and

NOTE
[Individual Path] soft keys appear.
• If you changed the settings, you need to restart the machine collision
avoidance function to apply the changes.
1
2.5.6.3 Setting the common items
2 Set the common settings of the machine collision avoidance function.
2.5.6.3
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.5.6.3 (a) Common settings screen (Common tab)
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 2.5.6.3 (b) Common settings screen (Color tab)
Z
206
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
Fig. 2.5.6.3 (c) Common settings screen (Position tab)
4
5
Fig. 2.5.6.3 (d) Soft Keys on the Common Settings Screen
• Pressing the [Select Check] soft key allows you to enable/disable the
6
setting items. (You can perform this operation when focus is placed on
 the check box.)

• Pressing the [OK] soft key confirms your entry and exits. 7
MEMO • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits. 8
Table 2.5.6.3 (a) Items of Common Settings (Common Tab) A1

Item Description Initial value
Auto Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50 A2
(msec) automatic operation. (0 to 600)
Manual Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50
(msec) manual operation. (0 to 600) Z
Update Interval Specify the update interval of a simulation. (128 or 300
(msec) above) (PANEL iH Pro only)
[Detail Edit] of Blank/ Enables the [Detail Edit] button for blanks and jigs. Cleared
Jig Enabled
[Machine Setting] Enables the machine setting. Cleared

Enabled
Auto Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50
(msec) automatic operation. (0 to 600)
Manual Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50
(msec) manual operation. (0 to 600)
207
B-64647EN/02

Update Interval Specify the update interval of a simulation (PANEL 300
(msec) iH Pro only). (128 or longer)
In PANEL iH, a drawing is not updated during
1 [Detail Edit] of Blank/

machining.
Enables the [Detail Edit] button for blanks and jigs. Cleared
Jig Enabled
2
Table 2.5.6.3 (b) Items of Common Settings (Color Tab)
3 Item Description Initial value
Blank Color 1 Specify the blank color 1 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 220 130
4 Blank Color 2 Specify the blank color 2 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 220 190
Blank Color 3 Specify the blank color 3 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 180 130
5 Jig Color 1
Jig Color 2
Specify the jig color 1 in RGB. (0 to 255)
Specify the jig color 2 in RGB. (0 to 255)
220 200 170
190 190 190
6 Jig Color 3 Specify the jig color 3 in RGB. (0 to 255) 90 90 90
Table 2.5.6.3 (c) Items of Common Settings (Position Tab)

Offset Turning Tool Offsets Z and X at the gauge point, which are set Cleared
Setting Position in the tool manager, at tool change based on the
8 CNC offset information.
Z = Geometry offset (Z) + Z axis offset value
X = Geometry offset (X) + X axis offset value
A1 The same number as the tool number is used as
the offset number used for offset.
Note:The compensated data will not be reflected
A2 Z Axis Offset Value

to the data in the tool manager.
Sets the offset values for Z axis for the 1st turret. 0.0
(for 1st turret) Note:The turret for path 1 shall be the 1st turret.
Z X Axis Offset Value

(for 1st turret)
Sets the offset values for X axis for the 1st turret.
Note:The turret for path 1 shall be the 1st turret.
0.0
Z Axis Offset Value Sets the offset values for Z axis for the 2nd turret. 0.0
(for 2nd turret) Note:The turret for path 2 shall be the 2nd turret.
X Axis Offset Value Sets the offset values for X axis for the 2nd turret. 0.0
(for 2nd turret) Note:The turret for path 2 shall be the 2nd turret.
208
B-64647EN/02

Offset Milling Tool Offsets the tool diameter, which is set in the tool Cleared
Radius manager, at tool change based on the CNC offset
information.
Tool diameter = Tool diameter offset x 2
The same number as the tool number is used as 1
the offset number used for offset.
Note:The compensated data will not be reflected
to the data in the tool manager. 2
2.5.6.4 Setting the machine configuration 3

Set the machine configuration for the machine collision avoidance function. You
2.5.6.4
can configure the machine configuration settings to use machine collision

avoidance function, such as connection to the CNC or 3D machine model file 4
storage location.
5
6
7
8
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (a) Machine Setting Screen (Common Tab) A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (b) Machine Setting Screen (Notification Tab)
209
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (c) Machine Setting Screen (Notification 2 Tab)
4
5
6
7
8 Fig. 2.5.6.4 (d) Machine Setting Screen (Save Function Tab)
A1
A2 Fig. 2.5.6.4 (e) Soft Keys on the Machine Setting Screen
Z • Pressing the [Select Storage] soft key displays a dialog for you to
specify the location where you want to store the file. (You can perform
this operation when focus is placed on [3D Machine Model File
Storage].)
 • Pressing the [Select Check] soft key allows you to enable/disable the
setting items. (You can perform this operation when focus is placed on
MEMO the check box.)
• Pressing the [OK] soft key confirms your entry and exits.
• If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
210
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (a) Items of Machine Setting (Common Tab)

Node Number Specify a node number (0 to 7) of the HSSB to be 0
connected to the CNC.
3D Machine Model
File Storage
Set the storage location of the start-up project file. None 1
Path 1 Name Specify the path name. None
Specify the path name (sub system ID) given when
creating the 3D machine model file.
2
Select the box to use the selected path. 3
Select the box to use the selected path.
Path 4 Name Specify the path name. None 4
Select the box to use the selected path.
5

NOTE
Use the initial setting value for the node number.
6
7
Table 2.5.6.4 (b) Items of Machine Setting (Notification Tab)
Item Description Initial value 8
Notification PMC Data Specify the flag area for information notification None
No. from the CNC to be used in the notification
function with PMC data.
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address
A1
number (0 or above)
(Example: 1:R100 for R100 in the first path)
Move Notification with Select the box when using move notification with None
A2
PMC Data PMC data.
Reload 3D Machine Select the box when reloading a 3D machine None Z
Model File model file.
Attachment Select the box when replacing an attachment. None
Replacement
Blank/Jig Attachment Select the box when setting the blank/jig None
Position Setting attachment position.
Blank Delivery Select the box when delivering a blank. None
M/T Mode Change Select the box when switching the milling (M)/ None
turning (T) mode.
Skiving Select the box when switching the skiving. None
Model Reset Select the box when resetting a 3D machine None
model file.
211
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (c) Items of Machine Setting (Notification 2 Tab)

Enable/Disable Select the box when enabling/disabling the None
Check interference check by the PMC signal.
1
Table 2.5.6.4 (d) Items of Machine Setting (Save Function Tab)
Save Period (Days) Set the save period to save the file when a 3D 0
machine model file is specified.
3 If 0 is set, the file is not saved.
At CAS Start Check the box to save the file when the machine None
collision avoidance function is activated.
4 At CAS End Check the box to save the file when the machine None
collision avoidance function is ended.
5 At Interference
Occurrence
Check the box to save the file when interference
occurs.
None
6 At Edit End Check the box to save the file when the simple edit None
is ended.
At Detail Edit End Check the box to save the file when the detail edit None
is ended.
7
 Notification function with PMC data
8 The notification function with PMC data receives information from the CNC via
PMC data to control the machine collision avoidance function. When each function
is enabled in the PMC Notification tab, soft keys used to set the enabled function
A1 are displayed as follows:
A2
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (f) Soft Keys for the Notification Function with PMC Data
Z
The following nine functions can be set on a screen displayed when each soft key
is pressed.
Table 2.5.6.4 (e) Items of Notification Function with PMC Data Setting
Item Description
Move Notification Function to notify you of move information via PMC data
with PMC Data because the CNC moves a structure with an unknown move
path on an axis other than the CNC control axis and PMC
control axis.
Reload 3D Machine Function to reload a 3D machine model file to replace all
Model File structures, such as turret replacement.
212
B-64647EN/02
Item Description
Attachment Function to replace an attachment, such as a spindle head.
Replacement
Blank/Jig Attachment Function to adjust the blank/jig attachment position according
Position Setting
Blank Delivery
to the measurement results on the machine.
Function to deliver a blank in 2-spindle 2-turret turning.
1
M/T Mode Change Function to switch between the milling (M) mode and turning
(T) mode. 2
Skiving Function to switch to the skiving mode in a gear machine.
Model Reset
Enable/Disable
Function to automatically reset the mode geometry.
Function to enable/disable the interference check by the PMC
3
Check signal.
The notification function with PMC data notifies you of information from the CNC
4
as follows:
5
<1> The CNC writes notification information to the PMC data area.
Specify the information writing area on the setting screen of each function.
<2> The CNC turns on the information notification flag bit corresponding to the
6
written information.
<3> The machine collision avoidance function executes the function corresponding 7
to the enabled information notification flag bit and then turns off the bit
(Machine collision avoidance).
<4> The CNC moves to the next process when the notification flag bit is turned off.
8
The following table shows the area of the flag bit for information notification from
the CNC used in the notification function with PMC data.
A1
This area can be specified in [Notification PMC Data No.] in the PMC Notification
tab on the machine setting screen. A2
Table 2.5.6.4 (f) Area of the Information Notification Flag Bit
Offset Function name Information flag bit
Z
+0 Move Notification with bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to move on
PMC Data the corresponding path
bit4 to bit7: Not used
+1 Reload 3D Machine bit0: Request to reload
Model File bit1 to bit7: Not used
+2 Attachment Replacement bit0: Request to replace the attachment
+3 Blank/Jig Attachment bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to set the
Position Setting blank position on the corresponding path
bit4 to bit7: Path 1 to 4. Request to set the jig
position on the corresponding path
213
B-64647EN/02
Offset Function name Information flag bit

+4 Blank Delivery bit0: Request to deliver the blank
+5 M/T Mode Change bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to switch the
1 mode on the corresponding path
+6 Skiving bit0: Request to turn on/off the skiving
2 +7 Model Reset
bit0: Request to reset the model
3 +8 Enable/Disable Check bit0: Request to enable/disable the check
4  Setting the items of [Move Notification with PMC Data]

Set the items of [Move Notification with PMC Data]. Move information is sent via
5 PMC data because the CNC moves a structure with an unknown move path on an
axis other than the CNC control axis and PMC control axis.
6
The soft keys are switched.
7
8
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Move
PMC] soft key.
A1 The Move Notification with PMC Data setting screen appears.
A2
Z
214
B-64647EN/02
<3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
Confirm your entry and exit the settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
 • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
MEMO • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
215
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (g) Items of Move Notification with PMC Data Setting
Item Description Initial
value
Move Data Specify an area to store the coordinate value and feedrate None
1 Notification PMC sent via PMC data.
Data No. Specify the target information with an axis number between
101 and 106 in [CNC Axis No. Assignment to Axis
2 Movement of CAS] in the individual path settings.
Axis no. Offset Description
3 101 +0 Machine coordinate value

(Double)
+8 Feedrate (Double)

(Double)
+24 Feedrate (Double)
(Double)
6 +40 Feedrate (Double)
106 +80 Machine coordinate value

(Double)
7 +88 Feedrate (Double)
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address number (0 or

8 above)
Interference Specify an area which is notified of interference detection None
A1 PMC Data No.
(For Detection
information set in the machine collision avoidance function
when interference is detected on any of Path 1 to 4.
Notification)
A2 +0
Offset Description
Interference detection notification
(WORD)
Z Bit0: Interference was detected on any

of Path 1 to 4.
If this signal is turned on, stop an axis corresponding to the

individual path notification signal on the machine.
above)
216
B-64647EN/02

value
Interference Specify an area which is notified of interference detection None
PMC Data No. information set in the machine collision avoidance function
(For Individual
Path Notification)
when interference occurs during a move to the notified
coordinate value. 1
Offset Description
+0 Interference detection notification 2
(WORD)
Bit0: Interference was detected on
Coordinate 101 (+ direction)
3
:
4
Coordinate 101 (- direction) 5
Coordinate 102 (- direction)
: 6
Coordinate 106 (- direction)
If this signal is turned on, stop the corresponding axis on the 7
machine.
above) 8
• To use the Double type of PMC data, PMC management software

A1
version 40A5/25 or later is required.
• Use a machine coordinate value for the coordinate value. Be sure to
A2

NOTE
specify the current position for an axis that you do not move.
• Since an axis move using move notification with PMC data is
controlled separately from the CNC axis, it cannot be stopped on the
machine collision avoidance function side. To stop the related axis, Z
monitor the interference PMC data and stop the axis on the machine.
 Setting the items of [Reload 3D Machine Model File]

Configure the settings to reload a 3D machine model file to replace all structures,
such as turret replacement.

217
B-64647EN/02
1 <2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Reload]
soft key.
The Reload 3D Machine Model File setting screen appears.
2
3
4 Confirm your entry and exit the settings.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2 • Pressing the [Select Storage] soft key displays a dialog for you to
specify the location where you want to store the file. (You can perform
 this operation when focus is placed on [3D Machine Model File
Z MEMO
Storage].)
• If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
218
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (h) Items of Reload 3D Machine Model File Setting

value
Reload PMC Specify an area to store the 3D machine model file number None
Data No. you want to reload, which is sent via PMC data. 1
Offset Description
+0 Reload file number (1 to 8) (WORD)
2
above)
(Example: 1:R1100 for R1100 in the first path) 3
3D Machine Specify the storage location of a 3D machine model file you None
Model File want to reload.
Storage The first storage shows the name set in [3D Machine Model
File Storage] in the Common tab on the machine setting
4
screen (Cannot be changed).
5

NOTE
• All of 3D machine model files to be reloaded must have the same
machine configuration. 6
 Setting the items of [Attachment Replacement]

7
Configure the settings to replace a spindle attachment, such as a spindle head.
The connection source component (child side) used in this function is the 1st
spindle on Path 1.
8
<1> Press the [Settings] soft key. A1
A2
Z
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Attach] soft
key.
The Attachment Replacement setting screen appears.
219
B-64647EN/02
<3> Set each item on the Source 1, Source 2, Connect, and Return tabs and press
the [OK] soft key.
1
Same as the
1st spindle
2 on Path 1 in
the individual
settings
3 (Cannot be
changed).
4
5
6  • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
7
Table 2.5.6.4 (i) Items of Connection Destination 1/2 Component (Child Side)
Info Setting
8 Item Description Initial
value
A1 Replacement
PMC Data No.
Specify an area to store attachment replacement
information, which is sent via PMC data.
None
Offset Description
A2 +0 Reload file number (1 to 8) (WORD)
+2 Connect or Return
Z (-1 to -8, 1 to 8) (WORD)

Connect: Set a positive value.
Return: Set a negative value.

above)
Name Specify the connection destination component name given None
when creating the 3D machine model file.
Spindle Name Specify the 1st spindle name given when creating the 3D None
machine model file.
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned in the 3D machine model 0
file.
220
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (j) Items of Connection Destination Component (Parent Side) Info
Setting
value
Name Specify the connection destination component name given
when creating the 3D machine model file.
None 1
Table 2.5.6.4 (k) Items of Return Destination Component (Parent Side) Info
2
Setting
Item Description Initial 3
value
Name Specify the return destination component name given when None
creating the 3D machine model file. 4
● Relationship with the 3D machine model file items 5
The following table shows the relationship between the items set on the
Attachment Replacement setting screen and the 3D machine model file items.
6
(4)
(1)
(2) 7
(5)
8
A1
(3) A2
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (g) 3D Machine Model File Items Z

Table 2.5.6.4 (l) Relationship with the 3D Machine Model File Items
No. Item
(1) Connection source component (child side) info (Name)
(2) Connection source component (child side) info (Spindle name)
(3) Connection source component (child side) info (Tool index)
(4) Connection destination component (parent side) info (Name)
(5) Return destination component (parent side) info (Name)
221
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the items of [Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting]

Configure the settings to adjust the blank/jig attachment position according to the
measurement results on the machine.
1 <1> Press the [Settings] soft key.

2
3 <2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Position
Adjust] soft key.
4 The Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting screen appears.
5
6 <3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
222
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (m) Items of Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting

value
Blank Position Specify an area to store the blank attachment position. None
Setting PMC
Data No. Type Offset Description
1
X +0 Relative travel distance in
Y +8
X-axis direction (Double)
Relative travel distance in
2
Y-axis direction (Double)
Z +16 Relative travel distance in 3
Zaxis direction (Double)
A +24 Relative travel distance in
A-axis direction (Double) 4
B +32 Relative travel distance in
B-axis direction (Double)
C +40 Relative travel distance in 5
C-axis direction (Double)
above)
6
Jig Position
Setting PMC
Specify an area to store the jig attachment position.
None
7
Data No. above)
8

NOTE
• To use the Double type of PMC data, PMC management software
version 40A5/25 or later is required.
A1
A2
 Setting the items of [Blank Delivery]
Configure the settings to deliver a blank in 2-spindle 2-turret turning.
Z
223
B-64647EN/02
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Delivery]
soft key.
The Blank Delivery setting screen appears.
1
3
4
5
6
7
In VERICUT, the set structure is displayed as follows.
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If input data has an error, a message appears.

MEMO
224
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (n) Items of Blank Delivery Setting

value
Delivery PMC Specify an area to store blank delivery information. None
Data No.
Offset Description
1
+0 Delivery method WORD
1: Release 1 (Open)
2: Grab 1 (Close)
2
3: Release 2 (Open)
4: Grab 2 (Close)
3
above)
(Example: 1:R1100 for R1100 in the first path) 4
Delivery Setting Specify the delivery setting name given when creating the None
Name 3D machine model file.
5
 Setting the items of [M/T Mode Change]
Configure the settings to switch between the milling (M) mode and turning (T) 6
mode in a complex machine.

7
8
A1
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Change M/
T] soft key.
The M/T Mode Change setting screen appears.
A2
Z
225
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6  • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
7 Table 2.5.6.4 (o) Items of M/T Mode Change Setting

8 Change PMC Specify an area to store M/T mode change information.

value
None
Data No.
A1 +0
Offset Description
M/T mode (for Path 1) WORD
0: Switch to the turning mode (T)
A2 +2
1: Switch to the milling mode (M)
Z +4
+6 M/T mode (for Path 4) WORD

above)
226
B-64647EN/02
● Individual settings when using the M/T mode change function

When using the M/T mode change function, set the spindle information as follows:
1st Spindle Information: Configure the M mode.
2nd Spindle Information: Configure the T mode.
Tool number notification is

2
used in both the M and T
modes. 3
Settings for M mode
4
Settings for T mode
5
Fig. 2.5.6.4 (h) Individual path settings screen 6
• Settings for M mode
Spindle Name: Specify the tool spindle name in the M mode.
7
Tool Index: Specify the index number for the tool spindle.
Set how to specify the rotation command for the tool spindle. 8
• Settings for T mode
Spindle Name: Specify the workpiece spindle name in the T mode. A1
Tool Index: Specify the index number for the turning tool.
Set how to specify the rotation command for the workpiece spindle.
A2
• How to replace the tool
When using the M/T mode change function, use [Signal] or [Variable] to Z
perform active tool notification. If [M Code] or [T Code] is used, it does not work
correctly.
The 1st spindle data is used for the M mode, and the 2nd spindle data for the T
mode.
227
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the items of [Skiving]

Configure the settings to switch the skiving mode. This works only for Path 1.

1 The soft keys are switched.
2
3 <2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Skiving]
soft key.
The Skiving setting screen appears.
4
5
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If input data has an error, a message appears.
MEMO
228
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.4 (p) Items of Skiving Setting

value
Notification PMC Specify an area to store the skiving mode change. None
Data No.
Offset Description
1
+0 Skiving setting WORD
0: OFF
1: ON
2
above) 3
4
 Setting the items of [Model Reset]
Configure the settings to use the model reset function.
5
6
7
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Model
Reset] soft key. 8
The Model Reset setting screen appears.
A1
A2
Z
229
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6  • The above describes only how to display the screen because there
are no setting items of the model reset function.
MEMO
7  Setting the items of [Enable/Disable Check]

Configure the settings to use the function to enable/disable the check.
8 The horizontal soft key display changes.
A1
<2> Press the [Enable/Disable Check] soft key.
A2 The Enable/Disable Check setting screen appears.
230
B-64647EN/02
This finalizes the set values to exit the screen.
1
2
3
Enable/Disable Check Setting Screen Example 4

Item Description 5
Change PMC
Data No. Offset Description
+0 Check enable/disable setting WORD 6
0: Disable
1: Enable
7
8
A1
• If input data has an error, the following message appears, moving
the focus to the error item. A2

MEMO
Z
231
B-64647EN/02
2.5.6.5 Configuring the individual path settings

Set the machine collision avoidance function for each path. You can assign a CNC
2.5.6.5
axis number to the axis identifier given when creating a 3D machine model file
(xxx.Vcproject) and configure the spindle settings.
1
2
3
4
5 The setting items
depend on the
6 selected information
notification method.
Fig. 2.5.6.5 Individual path settings screen

7
• Every time you press the [Select Path] soft key, you see a different
8 path. Pressing this key with the maximum path number being
displayed displays Path 1. The maximum path number is four for the
PANEL iH Pro and two for the PANEL iH.
A1  • Specify the [Select Check] soft key to use a path and the 1st and 2nd
spindle information. When each check box is selected, the appropriate
MEMO items are enabled.
A2 • If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the
error item.
Z
232
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.6.5 Items of Common Settings

Path Name Displays the name set in [Path Name] in the None
Common tab on the machine setting screen.
CNC Axis No.
Assignment to Axis
Specify a CNC axis number corresponding to the All -1
CAS moving axis.
1
Movement of CAS
CAS moving X Y Z A B C
axis U V W A2 B2 C2 2
The selectable values are as follows:
CNC Relative Axis Number: 1 to 48
Move Notification with PMC Data: 101 to 106 3
Axis not used: -1
For details about move notification with PMC
data, see "■Notification function with PMC data"
in "2.5.4.4 Setting the machine configuration".
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
233
B-64647EN/02

Active Tool Specify the method notifying you of the number M code 6
Notification of the currently used tool.
Select one of the following options:
1 • [M Code], [Signal], [Macro Variable] or [T

Code]
When selecting [M Code], specify M code
numbers (0 or above). (Example: 6 for
2 M06)
The tool number represents the number of
the last commanded T code.
3 When selecting [Signal], specify the signal
in the following form. Configure to notify
you of the T code number within the range
4 of four bytes (two words) from the specified

signal.
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal
address number (0 or above)
5 (Example: 1:R1000 for R1000 in the first
path)
6 When selecting [Macro Variable], specify
the number of the macro variable in the
following form. Configure to notify you of
the T code number with the specified
7 macro variable.
Form: Path number (1 or above)#Macro
number (1 or above)
(Example: 1#123 for #123 in the first path)
8 When using [T Code], a specified T code is
used.
• To use the tool life management and tool
A1 management functions, use [Signal] or
[Macro Variable] to notify you a tool number.
• When both of two used spindles are tool
A2 spindles:
When using [M Code] or [T Code], the 1st
spindle is always considered as a tool
Z spindle (the 2nd spindle cannot be used as

a tool spindle).
When using [Signal], set the T code
number of the 1st spindle to the specified
signal and that of the 2nd spindle to the
next signal (example: For R1000, R1000 is
for the 1st spindle, and R1004 is for the
2nd spindle).
When using [Macro Variable], set the T
code number of the 1st spindle to the
specified variable and that of the 2nd
spindle to the next variable (example: For
#123, #123 is for the 1st spindle, and #124
is for the 2nd spindle).
234
B-64647EN/02

Tool Change Method Specify the tool change method. Follow NC
Select one of the following options: Parameter
[Follow NC Parameter], [ATC], or [Turret]
When [Follow NC Parameter] is selected, the tool
change method is determined as follows: 1
• Milling system
Always ATC
• Lathe system 2
NC parameter No. 5040#3 (TCT)
= 0: Turret, = 1: ATC
A check box for Select the box to use the 1st spindle. Selected 3
specifying the 1st
spindle
Spindle Name Specify the 1st spindle name given when None 4
For one spindle, you can omit its name.
When using it as a rotary tool on the turret, do not
specify the name.
5
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned to the 1st spindle 1
in the 3D machine model file.
When using it as a workpiece spindle for lathe or
6
a rotary tool on the turret, set 0.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
235
B-64647EN/02

1st Spindle Specify the notification method of the 1st spindle [M Code]
Information information. CW:3
Select one of the following options: CCW:4
1 • [M Code], [Signal] or [Macro Variable]

When selecting [M Code], specify the M
Stop: 5
code numbers (0 or above) for [CW],

[CCW], and [Stop].
2
When selecting [Signal], specify the signal
3 in the following form.
4 Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal

address number (0 or above)
(Example: 1:R1000 for R1000 in the first
5 path)
Configure to notify you of the spindle
information with the specified signal (byte).
6 [Stop]: 0 [CW]: 1 [CCW]: 2
When selecting [Macro Variable], specify
the number (1 or above) of the macro
variable in the following form.
7
Form: Path number# Macro number
(Example: 1#123 for #123 in the first path)
8 Configure to notify you of the spindle
information with the specified macro
variable.
A1 [Stop]: 0 [CW]: 1 [CCW]: 2
A check box for Select the box to use the 2nd spindle. Cleared
specifying the 2nd
A2 spindle
Spindle Name Specify the 2nd spindle name given when None
Z When using it as a rotary tool on the turret, do not
specify the name.
If the 1st spindle is not set, the 2nd spindle is
disabled.
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned to the 2nd 1
spindle in the 3D machine model file.
When using it as a workpiece spindle for lathe or
a rotary tool on the turret, set 0.
2nd Spindle Set the information as with the 1st spindle None
Information information.
When using [M Code] for both the 1st and 2nd
spindles, specify a different number from the 1st
spindle.
236
B-64647EN/02
• When the methods other than [M Code] are used to notify you of the
information about the active tool and CW, CCW, and Stop of the
spindle, the information is based on actual machine actions and is
passed to you with a time lag of the preview time.
• To use [Signal] or [Macro Variable], keep the values until the state is 1

NOTE
changed. Set the value as "0" when the NC is in reset state.
• If you changed the settings, restart the machine collision avoidance
function to apply the changes. 2
• Since the PMC control axis is controlled separately from the CNC axis,
it cannot be stopped on the machine collision avoidance function side.
To stop the related PMC control axis, take measures such as turning
on the ECLRg signal on the machine for a group to which the axis
3
belongs.
4
2.5.6.6 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance function
2.5.6.6
When the machine collision avoidance function is used, it outputs the position 5
(preview coordinate value) advanced for a period of time set in the preview time
from the machine coordinate value (current coordinate value) managed on the
CNC, so that the machine can be stopped before interference occurs. 6
The preview time can be specified in the Common tab on the common settings
screen.
7
Table 2.5.6.6 (a) Description of Coordinate Values
Item Description 8
Current coordinate Machine coordinate value managed on the CNC, which is a
value position specified for the servo. It is a position advanced for a
period of time required to decelerate and stop from the actual
machine position.
A1
Preview coordinate It is a position advanced for a period of the preview time from the
value current coordinate value. A2
Time required
to decelerate
Preview
time
Z
Specified
and stop path
Current Preview coordinate

coordinate value
Actual machine
value
position
Fig. 2.5.6.6 (a) Preview Time of the Machine Collision Avoidance Function
237
B-64647EN/02
 Operation before machine stop

There are the following five steps before the machine is stopped by the machine
collision avoidance function.
1 (1) Preview coordinate 0.7 msec or less Machine Collision

Avoidance
value acquisition 12.0 msec
function side
2 (2) Interference check Interference
detected
(3) Machine stop command 0.07 msec or

3 (4) Stop request receipt by NC CNC side
8.0 msec or less
(5) Machine stop process
(including the time to TS msec
4 decelerate and stop)
Servo axis stopped

5
Fig. 2.5.6.6 (b) Operation before Machine Stop
6
Table 2.5.6.6 (b) Details on Operation before Machine Stop
No. Description Required time
7 (1) Time to obtain the coordinate value in a 1-path 10-axis 0.7 msec or
configuration. less
8 (2) Time to determine interference by the machine collision

avoidance function based on the preview coordinate value
12.0 msec or
less
obtained in (1) and complete its process.
A1 (3) Time to detect interference and notify the NC of it. 0.07 msec or
less
(4) Time before the NC starts the stop process after receiving the 8.0 msec or
A2 (5)
notification.
Time required to decelerate and stop.
less
TS msec
(= Time constant (ms) + Servo time constant (normally 33 ms) +
Z CNC process time (20 ms))
Since the current coordinate value is a position advanced for a period of time
required to decelerate and stop from the actual machine position, the minimum
time required to detect interference is 20.77 msec, which is the total time of (1) to
(4).
Specify a value greater than the above "minimum time required to detect
interference" and lower than the maximum preview time (600 msec).
 • It is recommended that the preview time should be 50 msec or less to

reduce the load in obtaining the preview coordinate value.
MEMO
238
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• If the preview time is set shorter than the minimum time required to
detect interference, the machine cannot be stopped before actual
interference occurs.
1
 When the rapid traverse time constant is greater than the maximum 2
preview time (600 msec)
If the rapid traverse time constant settings meet the following conditions when a
rapid traverse (G00) block is executed in automatic operation, multiply the rapid 3
traverse rate used in preview coordinate value calculation by the following
magnification:
• There is an axis that meets "Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time 4
constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)".
• The axis that meets the above condition is moving in rapid traverse (G00) during
automatic operation.
5
P1620 + P1621
6
Rapid traverse rate = Rapid traverse command rate x
600 - TAP
TAP: Setting value in the parameter (No.10928) 7
Maximum magnification: 10.0
• Even when the fast traverse override is enabled or acceleration/ 8

 deceleration before interpolation is used for fast traverse, if the
condition "Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant
MEMO (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)" is met, A1
multiply by the above magnification.
A2
• There will be an error in the preview coordinate value due to automatic
speed control on the CNC, automatic acceleration/deceleration, or
Z
override value changes. The longer the preview time is set, the
greater the error may be. For this reason, specify the minimum value

NOTE
that can stop the axis before interference for the preview time.
• Depending on the CNC conditions, such as when minute continuous
blocks are executed or a function that does not support the preview
coordinate value is executed, prediction may not be performed up to
the position specified in the preview time. Estimated required time until
the output preview coordinate value is output at the same time. Use
this value as well for interference check.
239
B-64647EN/02
2.5.6.7 Signals available during the execution of the machine collision

avoidance function
The signals listed below are available during the execution of the machine
2.5.6.7
1
As shown below, "n" in each address represents the position of the
address used in each path.
2  Path 1: n = 0 (0 to 999)
Path 2: n = 1 (1000 to 1999)
MEMO
Path 3: n = 2 (2000 to 2999)
3 Path 4: n = 3 (3000 to 3999)
4  Machine collision avoidance function executing signal O3C <Fn528.0>

Table 2.5.6.7 (a) O3C<Fn528.0>
5 Item Description
Section Output signal
6 Function This signal outputs the execution state of the machine collision
avoidance function.
Action This signal is 1 during the execution of the machine collision avoidance
function.
7 When the machine collision avoidance function stops, the signal
changes to 0.
8
 Machine collision avoidance function data read stop signal ORS
<Fn528.1>
A1 Table 2.5.6.7 (b) ORS<Fn528.1>
Item Description
A2 Section Output signal
Function This signal outputs the state indicating that the machine collision
avoidance function stops the reading of preview coordinate value data.
Z Action This signal monitors the interval of reading of preview coordinate value
data by the machine collision avoidance function. If the parameter
No.10925 is set to an incorrect value, or if the function cannot read data,
the signal changes to 1. This signal returns to 0 when the loading of data
restarts.
When this signal is 0, or when one of the interference alarm signals
±OC1 to ±OC8 <Fn528, Fn529> is 1, the interval of reading of data is not
monitored.
240
B-64647EN/02
• The value 1 of this signal indicates that the machine collision

NOTE
avoidance function stops due to any reason, for example, a hang-up
of an application. Check the state of the machine collision avoidance
function.
1
2
MEMO
3
 Machine collision avoidance function current machine position output
signal OMP <Fn528.2>
4
Table 2.5.6.7 (c) OMP<Fn528.2>
Item Description
5
Section Output signal
Function This signal outputs the state indicating that only current machine 6
coordinate values are being output.
Action This signal changes to 1 when the coordinate values obtained by the
machine collision avoidance function are output as current coordinate 7
values instead of preview coordinate values.
8
 Interference detection alarm signal +OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529>, -OC1 to -OC8
<Fn530>
Table 2.5.6.7 (d) +OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529>, -OC1 to -OC8 <Fn530> A1
Item Description
Section Output signal A2
Function This signal is output if the machine collision avoidance function detects a
collision.
"OC1 to +OC8" represents the number of axes (the 1st to the 8th axes) Z
for which interference is detected.
"+" represents the positive direction. "-" represents the negative
direction.
Output When the axis is commanded to stop in the event of detection of
conditions interference by the machine collision avoidance function, the
interference detection alarm (OT516, OT517) occurs. In this case, this
signal changes to 1. Once the signal is 1, that axis and its direction are
stored. You cannot further move the axis to the same direction. You can
move it to only the axial direction opposite to the stored direction.
241
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• Even when the parameter O3A (No.10926#0) is set to 1, if the
machine is commanded to stop, this signal changes to 1.
1
2  • For details about the parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-
MEMO
3
 Signal address
4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn528 OMP ORS O3C
5
Fn529 +OC8 +OC7 +OC6 +OC5 +OC4 +OC3 +OC2 +OC1
6
Fn530 -OC8 -OC7 -OC6 -OC5 -OC4 -OC3 -OC2 -OC1
7
2.5.7 Setting Up the 3D Interference Check Function
8 2.5.7
2.5.7.1 Overview of the 3D interference check function

The 3D interference check function is an optional function to stop the machine
2.5.7.1
A1 beforehand when detecting interactive interference with the machine, workpiece,

or tool to prevent damage on the machine.
Built in the CNC device, the 3D interference check function is used to register
A2 model figures, such as spindles and tool holders, and update setting data to the
CNC device using the 3D interference check application.
The roles of the 3D interference check application and CNC device are as shown
Z in the figure below:
242
B-64647EN/02
3D Interference Check CNC device

Application
Register a model figure
Set an axis
Set a check target
Reflect settings
1
combination
Monitor interference check Perform target interference check

2
Control the machine when
interference is detected
3
Fig. 2.5.7.1 (a) Roles of 3D Interference Check Application and CNC Device
This function supports the following indicators: 4

• PANEL iH
• PANEL iH Pro 5
To open the 3D interference check application, press [INTERFERENCE CHECK]
on the Home screen. 6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.7.1 (b) Modeling Screen of 3D Check Interference Application
243
B-64647EN/02
 Definition of terms
The major terms used to explain this function are shown in the table below:
Table 2.5.7.1 Terms Used for 3D Interference Check Function

1 Term Definition
OBJECT Refers to a machine component (spindle, table, chuck, jig, tailstock,
etc.) or workpiece.
2 "Tool holder" and "tool" are distinguished from "interference object".
TOOL HOLDER A collective term for turret, tool holder, turret, spindle head, etc.
3 Tool
Model figure
A collective term for cutter, byte, tool, etc.
Defines interference objects, tool holders, and tools as the
interference check target.
4 Geometry
It consists of some figures.
Consists of some figure elements.
Shape Contains position and size information and turns into a "figure
5 element" when it is set to be associated with a figure.
6  Screen layout
The screen layout of the 3D interference check function is shown in the figure
below:
7
3D interference check function
8
Monitor screen
A1 Modeling screen Object name window
(Main screen) Moving axis setting window
A2 Edit figure element window Edit shape window
Shape number selection window
Z Shape No. list slide Rotational movement amount input window
Interference check combination manager slide Parallel movement window
Setting slide Display settings window Change length window
Data import/export slide Drawing coordinates setting window Size input window
Diagonal point input window
Position input window
Fig. 2.5.7.1 (c) Screen Layout of 3D Interference Check Function
244
B-64647EN/02
 • The main screen consists of the monitor screen and modeling screen,
and you can change the screen using the corresponding soft key.
MEMO • The default main screen can be specified in the setting file.
2.5.7.2 Setting and operation flow of the 3D interference check function

1
The setting and operation flow of the 3D interference check function is shown in
2.5.7.2
the figure below: 2

When creating a new figure model When using a created figure model
Action item
Enable the function
Reference
2.5.7.3
Action item
Enable the function
Reference
2.5.7.3
3
Set the display items 2.5.7.4 Set the display items 2.5.7.4 4
Create the following model
figures
2.5.7.5 Input setting data
Import setting data created on
2.5.7.8
5
• Interference object (spindle, another device and use it for
table, chuck, jig, tailstock, interference check instead of
etc.) performing the actions from 6
• TOOL HOLDER "Create model figures" to "Set
a check target combination"
Set a moving axis 2.5.7.6

shown left 7
Set a check target
combination
2.5.7.7 8
Update the setting data 2.5.7.9 Update the setting data 2.5.7.9 A1
Monitor interference check 2.5.7.10 Monitor interference check 2.5.7.10
A2
Fig. 2.5.7.2 Setting and Operation Flow of the 3D Interference Check Function
 • The end user needs to create a model figure that cannot be created by
Z
the machine tool builder (MTB).
MEMO
2.5.7.3 Enabling the 3D interference check function

2.5.7.3
 Setting the parameters

Set the following parameters.
• ICE (No. 10930#0) = 0 (Enable the 3D interference check function.)
For details, see "5.23.1 General Parameters of the 3D Interference Check

Function".
245
B-64647EN/02
 Setting the MTB setting file

The following items can be set in the MTB setting file:
• Initial display screen
• Showing/hiding the vertical soft key to open the Data Import/Export slide
1
2 • File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
3 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥INTERFERENCECHECK¥SETTING¥
4 Details on the setting items of the initial display screen

[Initial_Screen]
SCREEN_NAME: Set a screen to be displayed when the application starts.
6
Table 2.5.7.3 (a) Setting Values for SCREEN_NAME
Setting Description
7 MONITOR Monitor screen
MODELING Modeling screen
8
• The value is interpreted as "MONITOR" (monitor screen) under the
A1  following conditions:
NOTE No definition is found in the setting file.
A2 An illegal value is set in the setting file.
Details on the setting items to show/hide the Data Import/Export slide

Z
[Data_Input_Output_Slide]
DISPLAY_ENABLE: Set whether to show or hide the vertical soft key to open the
Data Import/Export slide.
246
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.3 (b) Setting Values for DISPLAY_ENABLE

Setting Description
0 Disabled (The vertical soft key is hidden.)
1 Enabled (The vertical soft key is shown.)
1
• The value is interpreted as "0" (hidden) under the following conditions:

NOTE
No definition is found in the setting file.
2
An illegal value is set in the setting file.
3
2.5.7.4 Setting the display items
2.5.7.4
Use the setting slide to set the following items: 4

• Display Settings: Display items
• Drawing Coordinate Setting: 3D drawing coordinate system right after power-on 5
6
 • To use this function, parameter ICD (No.10930#1) must be set to 0.
For details, see "5.23.1 General Parameters of the 3D Interference
NOTE Check Function".
7
To open the setting slide
On the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Settings] vertical soft key.
8
A A1
B
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.7.4 (a) Setting slide
247
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.4 (a) Part Names and Functions on the Setting Slide
Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the slide.
B Setting window Select the setting window to display.
1 select button
C Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
2 D Horizontal soft keys
Opens the setting window corresponding to the selected item.
3
[Select]
4
 Display Settings
5 When you select [Display Settings] and press the [Select] soft key in the setting
slide, the Display Settings window opens.
6
A
B
7
8 C
A1
D
A2 Fig. 2.5.7.4 (b) Display Settings Window
Z Table 2.5.7.4 (b) Part Names and Functions on the Display Settings Window
Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the window.
B Number of Specify the number of shapes that can be displayed/modified
Displayed Shapes (Range: 0 to 150).
For example, if "100" is specified, 101th and subsequent
shapes are treated as protected shapes and not displayed in
the modeling screen.
However, if "0" is specified, all shapes are displayed like when
"150" is specified.
If the shape number registered as a figure element is greater
than this value, it shows "(Cannot Edit)" in the figure tree of
the Edit Figure screen, preventing you to edit the shape.
248
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
C Interference object/ • Edit Figure
tool holder settings Shows or hides each interference object/tool holder.
If this setting is set to "Invalid", the figure behaves as
follows:
The target interference object/tool holder is not displayed 1
in the interference object list tree of the modeling screen
and is treated as a protected (non-modifiable) figure
(However, 3D model drawing can be executed). 2
The moving axis setting changes to "Invalid" even if it is
set to "Valid".
• Moving Axis
Enables or disables the moving axis setting for each
3
interference object/tool holder. To set "Validate" in Moving
Axis Setting, you need to set "Validate" in Edit Figure.
If this setting is set to "Invalid", the [Moving Axis] soft key in 4
the modeling screen becomes disabled.
D Message display
area
Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
5
6
Fig. 2.5.7.4 (c) Soft Keys Displayed When the Display Settings Window Opens 7
Table 2.5.7.4 (c) Soft Keys Displayed When the Display Settings Window Opens 8
Name Function
A Validates the value on which the cursor is positioned in Edit
Figure or Moving Axis.
A1
[Valid] A2
B Invalidates the value on which the cursor is positioned in Edit
Figure or Moving Axis.
Z
[Invalid]
 Drawing Coordinate Setting

When you select [Drawing Coordinate Setting] and press the [Select] soft key in
the setting slide, the Drawing Coordinate Setting window opens.
249
B-64647EN/02
1
B
2
3
4 C
Fig. 2.5.7.4 (d) Drawing coordinates setting window
5
Table 2.5.7.4 (d) Part Names and Functions on the Drawing Coordinate Setting
6 Window
Name Function
7 B Drawing coordinate Select the drawing coordinate system of a confirmation shape

selection area to be displayed right after power-on.
"*" is shown to the left of the selected drawing coordinate
system.
8 C Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
A1
 To select the coordinate system
A2 "*" is shown next to the currently selected coordinate system.

<1> Move the cursor to select the target coordinate system.
To move the cursor down, press the <↓> or <→> key.
Z To move the cursor up, press the <↑> or <←> key.
To move the cursor to the top, press the <PageUp> or <PageDown> key.
<2> Press the [OK] soft key.
250
B-64647EN/02
2.5.7.5 Creating model figures

The number of definable model figures is as shown in the table below:
2.5.7.5
Table 2.5.7.5 (a) Number of Definable Model Figures

Model figure Number of definable model figures 1
TOOL/TOOL For single-path systems: 1
HOLDER
OBJECT
For multi-path systems: Up to 4 (1 for each path)
Up to 6
2
Up to 3 for single-path systems with parameter ENO (No. 10930#6) =
0
3
The configuration of model figures that can be created with this function is as
shown in the figure below: 4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
251
B-64647EN/02
Model figure Geometry Shape
TOOL 1 Figure n
1
2 TOOL 4
Figure n
1 per path
3 Automatically generated from

tool geometry dimension data
or tool compensation data
4
TOOL HOLDER 1 Figure n Shape n
5 Shape n
6
TOOL HOLDER 4
Figure n Shape n
7 1 per path
Up to 120 figures
Shape n
8 OBJECT 1 Figure n Shape n
A1 Figure n Shape n
A2 OBJECT 6 Figure n Shape n
Z Shape n
Figure n
Up to 10 figures per Up to 150

interference object
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (a) Configuration of Model Figures That Can Be Created with This
Function
252
B-64647EN/02
• Registering multiple figures to a model figure for the following

situations increases the accuracy of interference check.
 Consider workpiece figure changes over machining.
For example, register different figures for before and after rough
MEMO
machining.
Register jigs with different figures. 1
 Modeling screen 2
The available operations in the modeling screen are as follows:
• Set an interference object and tool holder 3
• Add/edit a figure
To switch from the monitor screen to the modeling screen, press the [Modeling
4
Screen] soft key.
A B 5
6
7
8
A1
C A2
D
Z
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (b) Modeling screen
Table 2.5.7.5 (b) Part Names and Functions in Modeling Screen

Name Function
A Interference object Displays model figures (interference objects, tool holders, and
list tools) and their component figures in a tree form.
The following items are displayed in the interference object list
and tool holder list according to the valid figure setting:
• Set: Model figure name + Valid figure name
• Not set: Model figure name + (Valid Figure Not Set)
253
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
B Interference object Draws a machine layout in three dimensions and displays its
drawing area origin axis (reference coordinate origin). For details, see
"Reference coordinate origin" described later.
1 The machine layout can be moved and rotated using the

touch panel.
2 D
area
Horizontal soft keys (First page)
Switches to the monitor screen.
3
[Monitor Screen]
4 Select one of the following in the interference object list or tool
holder list:
• (Add Figure): Displays the [Add Figure] soft key.
5 [Add Figure]/
• Registered figure: Displays the [Edit Figure] soft key.
Either soft key opens the Edit Figure window.
6
[Edit Figure]
7 Deletes the figure selected in the interference object list.

If you press the [OK] soft key on the delete confirmation
window, the selected figure is deleted.
To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
8 [Delete Figure]
Makes the figure selected in the interference object list
pastable.
A1 [Copy]
Makes the figure selected in the interference object list
A2 pastable and deletes it after it is pasted.
[Cut]
Z Pastes the copied or cut figure.
[Paste]
Sets the figure selected in the interference object list valid.
When the valid figure is set, "" (check mark) is displayed in
the figure name in the interference object list.
[Valid Figure]
Opens the Object Name window.
[Object Name]
254
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
The Moving Axis Setting window appears.
[Moving Axis] 1
Horizontal soft keys (Second page)
Adjusts the size automatically so that the 3D model fits into
the window. 2
[Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings. 3
[Zoom In] 4
Decreases the magnification of the drawings.
5
[Zoom Out]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement.
For details, see "Parallel movement soft keys" in "2.5.7.5
6
Creating model figures" described later.
[Move] 7
Changes the graphic operation using the touch panel.
Every time you press the key, the operation is toggled
between rotational movement and parallel movement 8
[Change Operation] (default).
For details on touch panel operation, see "Graphic
operations from the touch panel" of "2.5.7.10 Monitoring
interference check".
A1
Switches to the row of soft keys used for fixed rotation.
For details, see "Fixed rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating
model figures"described later.
A2
[Fixed Rotation]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation.
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating
Z
model figures" described later.
[Arbitrary Rotation]
Switches the drawing area from single display to quad display.
For details, see "Quad display of the interference object
drawing area" in "2.5.7.5 Creating model figures" described
later.
[Quad Display]
Switches the drawing area from quad display to single display.
[Single Display]
255
B-64647EN/02
• Model figures with [Edit Figure] set to "Invalid" in the Display Settings
window are not displayed in the interference object list (but displayed
1

NOTE
in the interference object drawing area).
For details, see "2.5.7.4 Setting the display items".
• If parameter ICD (No. 10930#1) is set to 1, figure names are not
displayed in the tool list of the interference object list.
2
Parallel movement soft keys
3 When you press the [Move] soft key, the parallel movement soft keys appear.
The position and action of each parallel movement soft key is as follows:
4
5 Fig. 2.5.7.5 (c) Parallel Movement Soft Keys
6
Table 2.5.7.5 (c) Parallel Movement Soft Keys
Name Function
7 Moves the 3D model upward.
8 [Upper]
Moves the 3D model downward.
A1
[Lower]
A2 Moves the 3D model leftward.
Z [Left]
Moves the 3D model rightward.
[Right]
Moves the center of the 3D model to the center.
[Center]
256
B-64647EN/02
Fixed rotation soft keys

When you press the [Fixed Rotation] soft key, the fixed rotation soft keys appear.
The position and action of each fixed rotation soft key is as follows:
1
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (d) Fixed Rotation Soft Keys
2
Table 2.5.7.5 (d) Fixed Rotation Soft Keys
Name Function
3
Selects the XY plane.
4
[XY]
Selects the ZY plane. 5
[ZY] 6
Selects the YZ plane.
7
[YZ]
Selects the XZ plane.
8
[XZ]
Selects the ZX plane. A1
[ZX] A2
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.
Z
[Isometric XY]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward
and has the opposite view.
[Isometric XY]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +X axis faces upward.
[Isometric YZ]
257
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Y axis faces upward.
1 [Isometric ZX]
Free rotation soft keys

2 When you press the [Free Rotation] soft key, the free rotation soft keys appear.
The position and action of each free rotation soft key is as follows:
3
4 Fig. 2.5.7.5 (e) Free Rotation Soft Keys
5 Table 2.5.7.5 (e) Free Rotation Soft Keys
6 Name Function
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the right
side of the screen.
7 [Upper]
Rotates the 3D model in a counterclockwise direction viewed from the
right side of the screen.
8 [Lower]
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the top of
A1 the screen.
[Left]
A2 Rotates the 3D model in a counterclockwise direction viewed from the
top of the screen.
Z [Right]
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the front.
[CW]
Rotates the 3D model in a counterclockwise direction viewed from the
front.
[CCW]
258
B-64647EN/02
Quad display of the interference object drawing area

When you press the [Quad Display] soft key, the interference object drawing area
is divided into four.
You can check an interference object from four views simultaneously.
To return to the full-screen display, press the [Single Display] soft key.
1
2
Top view Solid view
3
4
Front view Right side view

5
6
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (f) Quad Display of Interference Object Drawing Area 7
Operations in the interference object list
8
• To select a figure, press the <↑> and <↓> keys.
The selected figure turns to the selection color (reddish) in the interference
object drawing area. A1
• To expand or collapse the tree, press the <SPACE> key.
Reference Coordinate Origin

A2
The reference coordinate origin (shown in the red circle below) is displayed in the
origin axis of a machine layout drawn in the interference object drawing area. Z
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (g) Reference Coordinate Origin
259
B-64647EN/02
 Flow of Model Figure Definition

To include a model figure in interference check, it needs to be defined.
The flow of model figure definition is as follows:
Action item Reference

1 Set a model figure name "Setting a model figure name"
2 Add a figure to the model

figure
"Adding a figure"
3 Add a shape to the figure • "Adding a shape (new shape)"

• "Adding a shape (by copying)"
• "Adding a shape (using the Shape No. List slide)"
4
Set the added shape "Setting the shape"
5 Fig. 2.5.7.5 (h) Flow of Model Figure Definition
6  Setting a model figure name

Using the Object Name window, set the name of a model figure (interference
object, tool holder, or tool).
7
 • To use this function, parameter ICD (No.10930#1) must be set to 0.
8 NOTE Check Function".
A1 To open the Object Name window

In the interference object list on the modeling screen, select a model figure and
A2 press the [Object Name] soft key.
A
Z B C
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (i) Object name window
260
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.5 (f) Part Names and Functions in Object Name Window
Name Function
B Name Select the name of a model figure (interference object, tool
holder, or tool).
For details on the number corresponding to each name, see
1
the next table "Number Corresponding to Each Model Figure
C Suffix
Name".
Adds a suffix to the name.
2
Range: 0 to 9 (If "0" is specified, a suffix is not displayed.)
3
Table 2.5.7.5 (g) Number Corresponding to Each Model Figure Name
Num Model figure name 4
ber OBJECT TOOL HOLDER Tool
0 Following default names Following default names Following default names
• T-type • T-type: TURRET • T-type: CUTTER
5
OBJECT 1, 4: • M-type: TOOL HOLDER • M-type: TOOL
WORKPIECE
OBJECT 2, 5: CHUCK 6
OBJECT 3, 6:
SPINDLE
• M-type 7
OBJECT 1, 4:
WORKPIECE
OBJECT 2, 5: JIG
OBJECT 3, 6: TABLE
8
1 SPINDLE TURRET CUTTER
2 TABLE TOOL HOLDER BYTE A1
3 WORKPIECE TURRET Tool
4
5
CHUCK
JIG
SPINDLE HEAD
-
-
–
A2
6 TAILSTOCK - –
7 TOOL HOLDER - – Z
8 STRUCTURE - –
9 OBJECT - –
A WORK HEAD - –
B WORK LIMIT - –
261
B-64647EN/02
• For complex systems under multi-path control, the default names of

the machine control type on each path are used for the default TOOL
and TOOL HOLDER names.
1 For the default OBJECT name, however, the default name on M-type

NOTE
is used if all paths are set to M-type or the default name on T-type is
used if at least one of all paths is set to T-type.
• To update the setting changes to the CNC device, one of the following
2 operations must be performed:
Turn on the CNC device again.
Change the signal (TDICHG<G519.4>) to change the 3D
3 interference check settings to "1".
4 To set a model figure name

<1> Select the model figure name from [Name] in the Object Name window.
5 To select the name, use the <0> to <9> keys.

For details on the number corresponding to each name, see the previous table
"Number Corresponding to Each Model Figure Name".
6
 • The <↑>, <↓>, <PageUp>, and <PageDown> keys cannot be used.
7 NOTE
8 <2> Specify a suffix as necessary.

• To move the cursor between the name and suffix, use the <←> or <→> key.
• To select the suffix, use the <0> to <9> keys.
A1 <3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The model figure name is set.
A2
 Adding a figure
Z To add a figure to the model figure, perform the following:

<1> In the interference object list on the modeling screen, expand the OBJECT or
TOOL HOLDER tree and select "(Add Figure)".
262
B-64647EN/02
• For details on operations in the interference object list, see

"Modeling screen" described earlier.

NOTE
• When the number of added figures reaches the upper limit, "(Add
Figure)" is not displayed.
1
For details, see "Table 2.5.7.5 (a) Number of Definable Model
Figures".
2
<2> Press the [Add Figure] soft key or <INPUT> key.
The figure is added and displayed in the interference object list.
3
• Sequential numbers are assigned to the names of added figures,

NOTE
starting from 1. If some middle numbers are available after figures
were deleted, these are assigned to figure names in ascending order.
4
• Figure names cannot be changed.
5
 Adding a shape (new shape)
Use the Edit Figure window to add a new shape to the figure. 6
To open the Edit Figure window
<1> In the interference object list on the modeling screen, expand the OBJECT or 7
TOOL HOLDER tree and select "FIGURE n" (n; 1, 2, 3, ...).
 • For details on operations in the interference object list, see

8
"Modeling screen" described earlier.
MEMO
A1
<2> Press the [Edit Figure] soft key or the <INPUT> key.
The Edit Figure window appears. A2
Z
263
B-64647EN/02
1 B
D
2
3 C
4 E
F
5
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (j) Edit Figure Window
6
Table 2.5.7.5 (h) Part Names and Functions in Edit Figure Window
7 A
Name
Title display
Function
Displays the title of the window.
B Figure list Displays the list of figure elements (shapes) that make up of
8 each figure.
"(Cannot Edit)" may be displayed depending on the setting of
[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings
A1 C Shape setting list/

window. For details, see "2.5.7.4 Setting the display items".
Displays the setting values of the figure element (shape) or
figure setting list figure selected in the figure list.
A2 For details on the displayed contents when a figure is

selected, see "Setting the figure reference" described
earlier.
Z D
E
Figure display area
Message display
Draws a figure in three dimensions.
area
F Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.

NOTE
• [Delete Element] only resets the association between the figure and
shape and does not delete the original shape of the figure element.
264
B-64647EN/02
To add a new shape to the figure

<1> In the figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
select "(Not Set)".
1
2
3
<2> Press the [Add Element] soft key.
4
5
The Edit Shape window opens.
For details on subsequent operations, see "Editing shapes" described earlier.
6
 Adding a shape (by copying)
To copy a registered shape and add it as a new shape, perform the following: 7
<1> In the figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
select "SHAPE n" (n: 1, 2, 3, ...) in the copy source.
8
A1
A2
<2> Press the [Copy] or [Cut] soft key.
<3> Press the <↑> and <↓> keys and select "FIGURE n" (n: 1, 2, 3, ...) in the copy
destination.
<4> Press the [Paste] soft key.
The shape number selection window is displayed.
265
B-64647EN/02
1
2
 • If you press the [Cut] soft key in step <2>, the shape in the copy
source is deleted.
3 MEMO
4 <5> Enter the number (Range: 1 to 150) of a new shape you want to add in [Shape
No.].
5 • The shape number range varies depending on the setting of

[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings window. For
6 details, see "2.5.7.4 Setting the display items".

NOTE
• You can select the number of a registered shape (with "" (check
mark) shown in [Register Shape]), but the original shape is
overwritten.
7 • You cannot select the number of a registered figure element (with

"" (check mark) shown in [Register Figure Element]).
8 <6> Press the [OK] soft key.

The figure element (shape) is set in the Edit Figure window.
A1 If the overwrite confirmation window appears, press the [OK] soft key to set the
figure element (shape) to the Edit Figure window (the original shape is
overwritten).
A2 <7> With the copied figure element (shape) selected, press the [Edit Element] soft
key.
Z
The Edit Shape window opens.
For details on subsequent operations, see "Editing shapes" described earlier.
 Adding a shape (using the Shape No. List slide)

The Shape No. List slide allows you to perform the following operations:
• Add a new shape
• Edit/delete a registered shape
266
B-64647EN/02
To open the Shape No. List slide

In the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Shape No. List] vertical soft
key.
A
1
2
B C 3
4
D E
5
F
6
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (k) Shape No. List Slide
7
Table 2.5.7.5 (i) Part Names and Functions in Shape No. List Slide
Name Function 8
B Shape list Displays the following items:
• Shape No.: Shape type icon of the registered shape +
A1
Shape number
Shape Type: Rect., Cylinder, Plane
If shape data is not set, the icon is not displayed. A2
If shape data is illegal, X mark is displayed in the icon.
Shape number range: 1 to 150 (It varies depending on the
setting of [Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Z
Settings window.) For details, see "2.5.7.4 Setting the
display items".
If one shape is registered to multiple figures, the shape
number is not displayed for the second and subsequent
figures.
• Interference Object Name: Name of the model figure to
which the shape is registered
• Figure No.: Figure number of the model figure to which the
shape is registered
C Shape drawing area Draws the shape selected in the shape list in three
dimensions.
D Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
267
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
E Shape search Enter a shape number to search.
number input area
F Horizontal soft keys (First page)
1 Searches for the shape number entered in the shape search
number input area.
The following action is performed according to whether the
2 [Search Shape No.]
searched shape number is found or not:
• Shape number found: Highlights the matched shape
number in the shape list.
3 • Shape number not found: Displays a warning message.

Select one of the following in the shape list:
• Unregistered shape number: Displays the [Add Shape] soft
4 [Add Shape]/
key.
• Registered shape number: Displays the [Edit Shape] soft
key.
Either soft key opens the Edit Shape window.
5
6 [Edit Shape]
Used for a shape not registered to a figure.
This key deletes the shape selected in the shape list.
If you press the [OK] soft key on the delete confirmation
7 [Delete Shape]
window, the selected shape is deleted.
To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
Makes the shape selected in the shape list pastable.
8
[Copy]
A1 Used for a shape not registered to a figure.
This key makes the shape selected in the shape list pastable
and deletes it after it is pasted.
A2 [Cut]
Pastes the copied or cut shape.
Z
[Paste]
The input support soft keys are displayed.
For details, see "Editing shapes" described later.
[Input Support]
Displayed when a shape number registered to a figure is
selected in the shape list. When you press this key, the Edit
Figure window opens.
[Edit Figure]
Horizontal soft keys (Second page)
268
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
the window.
[Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings.
1
[Zoom In]
2
3
[Zoom Out]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement. 4
For details, see "Parallel movement soft keys" in "2.5.7.5
Creating model figures".
[Move] 5
operations from the touch panel" in "2.5.7.10 Monitoring 7
interference check".
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating 8
model figures".
[Fixed Rotation]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation. A1
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating
model figures".
[Arbitrary Rotation] A2
drawing area" in "2.5.7.5 Creating model figures". Z
[Quad Display]
[Single Display]
269
B-64647EN/02
To add a new shape to the figure

<1> In the shape list on the Shape No. List slide, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
select an unregistered shape.
<2> Press the [Add Shape] soft key.
1 The Edit Shape window opens.
For details on subsequent operations, see "Setting the shape" described
earlier.
2
 Setting the shape
3 In the Edit Shape window, set the details of the following shapes:
• New shape added to the figure
4 • Registered shape
A
5 B
C
6 D
7 E F
8
G
A1 Fig. 2.5.7.5 (l) Edit shape window
A2 Table 2.5.7.5 (j) Part Names and Functions in Edit Shape Window
Name Function
Z A Title display Displays one of the following titles according to the window
opening operation (adding a new shape or editing a shape):
• Add Shape
• Edit Shape
B Shape No. Select the shape number (1 to 150).
However, it cannot be selected if this window is opened by
specifying a shape number in the Edit Figure window or the
Shape No. List slide.
The shape number range varies depending on the setting of
[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings
window. For details, see "2.5.7.4 Setting the display items".
C Shape Type Select "Rect.", "Cylinder", or "Plane" for the shape type.
If you change the type during shape edit, the setting data is
cleared (The confirmation message appears).
270
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
D Numeric Unit Select either of the following items as the numeric unit.
• "Machine": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
machine.
• "Input": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
input data such as NC programs. 1
E Guide figure Displays a guidance map appropriate for the selected shape
F Shape data input

type.
Set items appropriate for the selected shape type.
2
area For details on the setting items of each shape type, see the
G Message display
next table.
3
area
4
Table 2.5.7.5 (k) Setting Items of Each Shape Type
Shape Type Setting item Description 5
Rectangular Reference Specify the position of the reference vertex of the
Parallelepiped Vertex rectangular parallelepiped using coordinates.
In 3D drawing, the coordinate axis of the reference
vertex is displayed in this point.
6
Adjacent Vertex Specify the three points adjacent to the reference
1, 2, 3 vertex (relative position to the reference point) with
coordinates.
7
Cylinder Start Point Specify the start point of the cylinder.
In 3D drawing, the coordinate axis of the reference
8
End Point Specify the end point (relative position to the start
point) with coordinates. A1
Radius Specify the radius of the cylinder.
Plane Free Point Specify the free point on the plane with coordinates.
In 3D drawing, the coordinate axis of the reference A2
Vertical Vector Specify the plane by inputting a vector perpendicular
to the plane. Z
For example, to specify the ZY (YZ) plane, leave
"0.000" in the Y-axis and Z-axis input fields and enter
any number (except for "0", such as "1") in the X-axis
input field.
To set a shape as a figure element of the figure

<1> Set each item in the Edit Shape window.
It returns to the Edit Figure window where you added or edited the shape or to
the Shape No. List slide.
271
B-64647EN/02
<3> Repeat adding or editing a shape as necessary.
 Editing shapes
You can perform the following edit operations on a registered shape.
1
Table 2.5.7.5 (l) Target Shape Types for Edit Operations
2 Edit operation Description

Rotational Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder, plane
movement
3 Parallel Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder, plane
movement
Length change Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder
4 Size input Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder
Diagonal point Rectangular parallelepiped that is parallel
5 input
Position input
to the basic coordinates X, Y, and Z
Cylinder
6
To display the soft keys used to select edit methods, perform the following:
<1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, select the target figure
7 you want to edit.

<2> Press the [Edit Figure] soft key or the <INPUT> key.
The Edit Figure window appears.
8
• For details on the Edit Figure window, see "Adding a shape (new
A1  shape)".
• Alternatively, you can edit the shape from the Shape No. List slide.
MEMO For details on the Shape No. List. slide, see "Adding a shape
(using the Shape No. List slide)".
A2
<3> Press the [Input Support] soft key.
Z The input support soft keys are displayed.
The positions and operations of the input support soft keys are as follows:
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (m) Input Support Soft Keys
Table 2.5.7.5 (m) Input Support Soft Keys

Name Function
[Rotational Opens the Rotational Movement window (see "Rotational
Movement] movement").
272
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
[Parallel Opens the Parallel Movement window (see "Parallel movement").
Movement]
[Change Length] Opens the Change Length window (see "Length change").
[Size Input] Opens the Size Input window (see "Size input"). 1
[Diagonal Input] Opens the Diagonal Point Input window (see "Diagonal point input").
[Position Input] Opens the Position Input window (see "Position input").
2
Rotational movement
When you press the [Rotational Movement] soft key for input support, the
Rotational Movement amount input window opens.
3
Use this window to rotate the shape around each axis.
A 4
B C
5
D 6
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (n) Rotational movement amount input window
7
Table 2.5.7.5 (n) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rotational Movement
Window 8
Name Function
A
B
Title display
Rotation Angle
Specify the shape rotation angle around each coordinate axis.
A1
Setting range: -360 to 360
C Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the rotation operation. A2
area
To rotate the selected shape, specify the rotation angle for each coordinate axis
Z
and press the [OK] soft key.

NOTE
• When you rotate a shape n degrees in a certain direction and then
rotate it back n degrees (the same amount) in the opposite direction,
the shape may not return to its original orientation.
If you perform a rotation operation for two or more axes simultaneously, you may
not achieve the shape/orientation you intended depending on the order the
rotation operation was executed. In such a case, perform the rotation operation for
one axis at a time.
273
B-64647EN/02
For example, to rotate the target shape 30 degrees around the X axis and 60
degrees around the Y axis, perform the following:
<1> On the Rotational Movement amount input window, enter 30 for [Around X
Axis].
1 <2> Press the [OK] soft key.

The shape rotates 30 degrees around the X axis, and the Rotational Movement
window closes.
2 <3> Press the [Rotational Movement] soft key to open the Rotational Movement
amount input window again.
3 <4> Enter 60 for [Around Y Axis].

4 The shape rotates 60 degrees around the Y axis, and the Rotational Movement
window closes.
5 Parallel movement
When you press the [Parallel Movement] soft key for input support, the Parallel
6 Movement amount input window opens.
Use this window to parallel move the shape relative to each axis.
A
7
B C
8
D
A1 Fig. 2.5.7.5 (o) Parallel movement window
A2 Table 2.5.7.5 (o) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Parallel Movement
Window
Z Name Function
B Distance Specify the distance the shape should move relative to each
coordinate axis.
C Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the parallel operation.
area
To parallel move the selected shape, specify the distance for each coordinate axis
and press the [OK] soft key.
274
B-64647EN/02
Length change
If the shape type is a rectangular parallelepiped or cylinder, when you press the
[Change Length] soft key for input support, the Change Length window opens.
Use this window to adjust the length of the shape.
A 1
B
D
2
C 3
E
Change Length (Rect.) Window 4
A 5
B
D 6
C 7
E
Change Length (Cyl.) Window
8
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (p) Change length window
A1
Table 2.5.7.5 (p) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Change Length
Windows
Name Function
A2
B Incremental Value • Enter the incremental value to change the length of the Z
currently set value.
• If a negative value is entered, the shaped will be shortened.
• If you select the [Match the incremental values.] check box,
all input items will be the same value.
275
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
C Extension Direction Select the direction in which you want to change the length
from the following items.
• "Both Sides": Changes each length on the start point side
1 and end point side by the amount specified as the

incremental value.
• "Start Point Side": Changes the length on the start point side
by the amount specified as the incremental value, without
2 changing the end point side.
• "End Point Side": Changes the length on the end point side
by the amount specified as the incremental value, without
3 changing the start point side.
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the change length
operation.
4 E Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
5 To change the length of the selected shape, specify an incremental value for the
portion to be changed and press the [OK] soft key.
6
• Results of operations on the radius of a cylinder will be the same
7

NOTE
regardless of the extension direction specified.
• You cannot set a negative incremental value in which its absolute
value is equal to or greater than the size of the shape.
8 Size input
When you press the [Size Input] soft key for input support, the Size Input window
A1 opens.
Setting methods will be different depending on the shape type as follows:
• Rectangular Parallelepiped
A2 You can set a rectangular parallelepiped using the reference vertex and size in
each axis direction. You can only create or edit a rectangular parallelepiped that
is parallel to the basic coordinates X, Y, and Z.
Z • Cylinder
You can set a cylinder using the start point, radius, and axis direction height. You
can only create or edit a cylinder that is parallel to one of the basic coordinates
X, Y, or Z.
276
B-64647EN/02
D 1
C
2
E
Size Input Window (for Rectangular Parallelepiped)

3
A
4
B 5
D
6
C
7
E
Size Input Window (for Cylinder) 8
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (q) Size input window
A1
Table 2.5.7.5 (q) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Size Input Windows
Name Function
A2
B Reference Vertex Specify the position of the reference vertex using coordinates.
(rectangular Z
parallelepiped)
Start Point (cylinder) Specify the position of the start point using coordinates.
C Size (rectangular Specify the size of each axis using distance from the
parallelepiped) reference vertex.
Radius/Height/ Specify the size of each item.
Height Direction For height direction, select an axis.
(cylinder)
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the size input operation.
E Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
277
B-64647EN/02
To determine the size of the selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft
key.
Diagonal point input

When you press the [Diagonal Input] soft key for input support, the Diagonal Point
1 Input window opens.
You can set a rectangular parallelepiped using the reference vertex and diagonal
point. You can only create or edit a rectangular parallelepiped that is parallel to the
2 basic coordinates X, Y, and Z.
A
3
B
4 D
5 C
6 E
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (r) Diagonal point input window
7 Table 2.5.7.5 (r) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Diagonal Point Input
Window
8 Name Function
B Reference Vertex Specify the position of the reference vertex of the rectangular
A1 parallelepiped using coordinates.
C Diagonal Point Specify the position of the diagonal point of the rectangular
parallelepiped using coordinates.
A2 D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the diagonal point input
operation.
Z E Message display
area

NOTE
• You cannot set the same value for the reference vertex and diagonal
point for each axis.
To create or edit the rectangular parallelepiped by entering the diagonal point for
the selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
278
B-64647EN/02
Position input
When you press the [Position Input] soft key for input support, the Position Input
window opens.
You can set a cylinder using the start point, end point, and radius.
A 1
B 2
C
D
3
E
4
F
5
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (s) Position input window
6
Table 2.5.7.5 (s) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Position Input Window
A
Name
Title display
Function
7
B Start Point Specify the position of the start point of the cylinder using
coordinates.
8
C End Point Specify the position of the end point of the cylinder using
coordinates.
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the position input A1
operation.
E Radius Specify the radius of the cylinder.
F Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages. A2
area
To create or edit a cylinder by entering the start point, end point, and radius for the
Z
selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
 Setting the figure reference

For the figure you created, you must set the reference position, etc. in the Figure
Reference Setting window.
To open the Figure Reference Setting window, perform the following:
279
B-64647EN/02
<1> In the Figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> or <↓> key to select
"FIGURE n" (where n is 1, 2, 3, etc.).
1
2 The settings for the selected figure are displayed in the figure settings list.
Setting items are different for the interference object and tool holder.
3
4
5
Setting Items for Interference Object Setting Items for Tool Holder
6
<2> Press the [Figure Reference] soft key.
7
The Figure Reference Setting window appears.
8
A1
A2
Z
280
B-64647EN/02
A
B
C
1
D
2
G
Figure Reference Setting Window for Interference Object

3
A 4
B
C
5
E
6
7
F
G 8
Figure Reference Setting Window for Tool Holder
Fig. 2.5.7.5 (t) Figure Reference Setting Window

A1
Table 2.5.7.5 (t) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Figure Reference A2
Setting Windows
Name Function Z
B Numeric Unit Select either of the following items as the numeric unit.
• "Machine": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
machine.
• "Input": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
input data such as NC programs.
C Figure Reference Specify the position of the origin in the reference coordinates.
Position
281
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
D Reference Rotation If the interference object rotates by movement of a rotation
Angle (interference axis, specify the angle of the rotation axis when each figure
object) was measured (1: master rotation axis, 2: slave rotation axis).
1 This item only displays when a rotation axis was set in the
Moving Axis Setting window.
E Tool Origin (tool Specify the position of the tool origin viewed from the
2 F
holder)
Tool Tip Direction
reference position.
Specify the tool tip direction viewed from the tool origin.
(tool holder)
3 G Message display
area
4 To reflect the figure settings that you have edited, press the [OK] soft key.
 Setting the valid figure

5 To set an interference object figure as the interference check target, you must set
that figure as the valid figure. (Any figure not set as the valid figure will not be
6 checked for interference.)
If multiple figures are set as interference objects, only one figure can be set as the
valid figure.
7 • You do not have to set a valid figure for a tool holder or tool.
For a tool, the figure that will be the interference check target is the
 figure that corresponds to the tool selected by the method set with
8 MEMO
parameter ICT (No.10930#2).
• When parameter ICV (No.10930#3) is set to 1, the valid figure setting
can be canceled.
A1
To set an interference object figure as the valid figure, perform the following:
A2 <1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, press <↑> or <↓> to
select the figure you want to set as the valid figure.
<2> Press the [Valid Figure] soft key.
The selected figure is set as the valid figure, and  (check mark) will be
displayed next to the figure name in the Interference Object list.
282
B-64647EN/02
1
How to cancel the valid figure setting
Press the [Valid Figure] soft key again. 2
Note that, parameter ICV (No.10930#3) must be set to 1. For details, see
"5.23.1 General Parameters of the 3D Interference Check Function".
2.5.7.6 Setting the moving axis

3
This section explains how to associate the interference object or tool holder with
2.5.7.6
the linear axis or rotation axis used to move them. Use the Moving Axis Setting 4
window to make these settings.
To open the Moving Axis Setting window, perform the following:
<1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, press the <↑> or <↓> key 5
to select the interference object or tool holder to which the moving axis will be
set.
6
7
<2> Press the [Moving Axis] soft key.
The Moving Axis Setting window appears. 8

NOTE
• If [Moving Axis Setting] in the Display Settings window is set to
"Invalid", the [Moving Axis] soft key will be disabled. For details,
see "2.5.7.4 Setting the display items".
A1
A2
A
C
B Z
D
Fig. 2.5.7.6 (a) Moving axis setting window
283
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.6 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Moving Axis Setting
Window
Name Function
1 B Interference Object If the axis moves in sync with another interference object, set
No. to Sync the number (1 to 6) of that interference object.
However, depending on the conditions, set one of the
2 following numbers.
• 0: If there is no interference object that moves in sync
• 1 to 3: When parameter ENO (No.10930#6) is set to 0 for a
3 single path system
If any number other than 0 is set, [Absolute Path No.] and

items on each tab cannot be set.
4 For tool holders, this item is not displayed.
C Absolute Path No. Set the path number to which the interference object belongs.
0: First path
5 For tool holders, this setting cannot be changed.
D Tab Switch the tab to Linear Axis Setting tab, Rotation Axis Setting
6 tab, or Settings for Each Figure Element tab (you can also
switch these with the <TAB> key).
Set items related to each tab.
E Display area for For details on each item, see the descriptions for each tab
7 each setting item later in this section.
F Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
8
Linear Axis Setting tab
A1 Set the linear axis used to move the target object.
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.7.6 (b) Linear Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis Setting Window
284
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.6 (b) Setting Items on the Linear Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis
Setting Window
Setting item Description
Axis no. For the first to third axes of the linear axis used to move the target
object, set the number of the axis that is parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis
in the basic coordinates.
1
If there is no applicable moving axis, set this item to 0.
Direction Set either of the following values based on whether the direction of
the first to third axes of the linear axis used to move the target object
2
is the same as the positive direction of the X, Y, or Z axis in the basic
coordinates.
• "Same Direction" (0) 3
• "Reverse Direction" (1)
4
Rotation Axis Setting tab
Set the rotation axis used to rotate the target object.
5
6
7
Fig. 2.5.7.6 (c) Rotation Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis Setting Window 8
Table 2.5.7.6 (c) Setting Items on the Rotation Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis A1
Setting Window
Setting item
Axis no.
Description
Set the axis number for the first and second rotation axes used to rotate
A2
the target object.
If there is no applicable rotation axis, set this item to 0. If 0 is set, all
subsequent items cannot be set. Z
285
B-64647EN/02

Rotation Select from the followings the direction of the rotation center axis
Center Axis viewed from the reference coordinates of the first and second rotation
Direction axes used to rotate the target object.
1 • 1: Around X axis
• 2: Around Y axis
• 3: Around Z axis
2
3
4 • 4: Around the axis inclined at an
arbitrary angle ("a" in the figure on right).
Angle "a" is formed by tilting the X axis
from the positive direction of the X axis
5 toward the positive direction of the Y c
axis. b
6 • 5: Around the axis inclined at an

arbitrary angle (b in the figure on right). a
Angle "b" is formed by tilting the Y axis

from the positive direction of the Y axis
7 toward the positive direction of the Z

axis.
• 6: Around the axis inclined at an
arbitrary angle (c in the figure on right).
8 Angle "c" is formed by tilting the Z axis
from the positive direction of the Z axis
toward the positive direction of the X
A1 axis.
Inclination Set the inclination ("a" in the figure above) when the first and second
rotation axes used to rotate the target object are tilted rotation axes.
A2 Rotation Set the rotation direction of the first and second rotation axes used to
Direction rotate the target object.
Set either of the followings based on the direction from the negative
Z direction toward the positive direction of the axis specified in [Axis No.].
• 0: "CW" (clockwise)
• 1: "CCW" (counter-clockwise)
Rotation Set the position of the rotation center axis viewed from the reference
Center Axis coordinates of the first and second rotation axes used to rotate the
Position target object.
286
B-64647EN/02
Settings for Each Figure Element tab

Set the master rotation and slave rotation of the rotation axis used to rotate the
target object.
1
2
3
Fig. 2.5.7.6 (d) Settings for Each Figure Element Tab on the Moving Axis Setting
Window
4
Table 2.5.7.6 (d) Setting Items on the Settings for Each Figure Element Tab on the
Moving Axis Setting Window 5
Rotation Set either of the followings based on whether figure elements 1 to 6
should be rotated using the master rotation axis or the slave rotation
6
axis.
• 0: Rotate
• 1: Do not rotate
7
You cannot set slave rotation without setting a master rotation.
8
2.5.7.7 Setting combinations of model figures as interference check targets A1
Use the Interference Check Combination Manager slide to set combinations of
2.5.7.7
targets for interference check.

A2

NOTE
• To use this function, parameter ICD (No.10930#1) must be set to 0.
Check Function". Z
How to open the Interference Check Combination Manager slide

On the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Interference Check
Combination Manager] vertical soft key.
287
B-64647EN/02
1
2 B
3
C
4
D
5 Fig. 2.5.7.7 Interference check combination manager slide
6 Table 2.5.7.7 Name and Function of Each Part of the Interference Check
Combination Manager Slide
Name Function
7 A Title display Displays the title of the slide.
B Interference check Displays the settings for the interference check combinations.
8 combination list When you place the cursor on a specific combination, that
combination will be in the selected state, allowing you to set
whether or not to execute the interference check.
A1 C Message display
area
A2
Z
288
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
D Horizontal soft keys
Sets whether or not to check interference for the selected
interference check combination.
• Always Valid: Always check interference
• Invalid for Cut Feed: Check interference except during
1
[Always Valid]
cutting feed
• Always Invalid: Always exclude from interference check
2
[Invalid for Cut
Feed] 3
4
[Always Invalid]
The column that contains the cell where the cursor is placed
(except gray cells) will be set to the selected state.
5
[Select Column] 6
The row that contains the cell where the cursor is placed
(except gray cells) will be set to the selected state.
7
[Select Row]
How to set whether or not to execute interference check

8
<1> Move the cursor to the cell of the target you want to set.
A1

NOTE
• You cannot select gray cells. A2
How to select the column/row that contains the target cell to set
Z
Press the [Select Column] or [Select Row] soft key.
<1> Press one of the following soft keys.
• [Always Valid]
• [Invalid for Cut Feed]
• [Always Invalid]
According to the soft key you pressed, whether or not to execute interference
check will be set, and the cell display will change.
If you select multiple cells in step <1>, the setting will be applied to all of those
cells.
289
B-64647EN/02
2.5.7.8 Importing/exporting setting data for 3D interference check

Use the Data Import/Export slide to perform the following operations.
2.5.7.8
• Import 3D interference check setting data created with other devices

• Export 3D interference check setting data set with this application
1
 • The data import/export function is enabled in operation modes other
2 MEMO
than the EDIT mode.
3 How to open the Data Import/Export slide

On the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Data Import/Export] vertical
soft key.
4
A
5
6
B
7
8
C
A1 D
Fig. 2.5.7.8 (a) Data import/export slide

A2
Table 2.5.7.8 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part of the Data Import/Export
Z Slide
Name Function
B Description display Displays the description of the function.
area
290
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
D Horizontal soft keys
Opens the File Import window.
1
[File Import]
Opens the File Export window.
2
[File Export] 3
 Importing files
Use the File Import window to import specified files from the CNC device.
4
To open the File Import window, press the [File Import] soft key on the Data
Import/Export slide. 5
A
B 6
7
C
D 8
E A1
Fig. 2.5.7.8 (b) File Import Window
A2
Table 2.5.7.8 (b) Names and Functions of Each Part on the File Import Window
Name Function Z
B Imported File Specify either one of the following files as the import file type.
specification area • "G10 Format File": Files similar to those punched with CNC
devices.
• "Parameter File": Files to which interference check
combination parameters are exported.
291
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
C Folder tree Specify the folder where the import file is stored.
Up to six levels of folders are displayed.
Displayed devices are as follows:
1 • M_CARD: memory card

• USB_MEM: USB flash drive
• DATA_SV: Data server
• DTSVR_HOST: Data server host
2 • FTP_HOST: Multi-function Ethernet
• EMB_ETHER: Embedded Ethernet
D File list Displays a list of files contained in the folder you select in the
3 folder tree.
E Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
4
To import a file from the CNC device, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
5
 Exporting files
6 Use the File Export window to export specified files to the CNC device.
To open the File Export window, press the [File Export] soft key on the Data
Import/Export slide.
7 A
8
A1 B
A2
Z C
Fig. 2.5.7.8 (c) File Export Window
Table 2.5.7.8 (c) Names and Functions of Each Part on the File Export Window
Name Function
B Folder tree Specify the folder where the file should be exported.
Up to six levels of folders are displayed.
For displayed devices, see "Table 2.5.7.8 (b) Names and
Functions of Each Part on the File Import Window".
292
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
area
To export a file to the CNC device, perform the following: 1

<1> Set each item on the File Export window and press the [OK] soft key.
The window to enter the export file name appears.
2
3
<2> Specify the name of the export file and press the [OK] soft key. 4
The file will be exported to the export destination.
If a file with the same name exists in the export destination 5

The overwrite confirmation window appears.
Set the required items and press the [OK] soft key.
6
2.5.7.9 Reflecting setting data for 3D interference check
2.5.7.9
Change the 3D interference check related settings change signal 7

(TDICHG<G519.4>) to "1" and reflect the 3D interference check data to the CNC
device memory.
8
2.5.7.10 Monitoring interference check
You can monitor the state of the interference check on the monitor screen.
A1
2.5.7.10
You can also use this screen to check that there are any incorrect data settings
you have made up to this point.
 Monitor screen
A2
To display the monitor screen when the modeling screen is displayed, press the
[Monitor Screen] soft key. Z
293
B-64647EN/02
A
1
B E
2
C
3
D
4 F
G
5 Fig. 2.5.7.10 (a) Monitor screen
6
Table 2.5.7.10 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part of the Monitor Screen
Name Function
7 A Current position
display area
Displays the current position of all control axes used
throughout the system.
B Tool offset number Displays the tool offset number currently used.
8 C
display area
Valid Figure display The following contents are displayed according to the
area interference check target.
A1 • Interference object: Valid figure number
• Tool holder: Figure number
D Diagnostic Displays the following information related to the 3D
A2 Information display
area
interference check.
• "Calculated Time"
• "Margin Width"
Z E Monitoring drawing
area
Simulation results of the 3D interference check are shown in
animation.
F Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
G Horizontal soft keys
Switches to the modeling screen.
[Modeling Screen]
Switches the control axis displayed.
[Show Next Axis]
294
B-64647EN/02
Name Function
the window.
[Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings.
1
[Zoom In]
2
3
[Zoom Out]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement. 4
For details, see "Parallel movement soft keys" of "2.5.7.5
[Move] 5
operations from the touch panel" later in this section. 7
For details, see "Fixed rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating
model figures". 8
[Fixed Rotation]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation.
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" in "2.5.7.5 Creating A1
model figures".
[Arbitrary Rotation]
A2
[Quad Display]
drawing area" in "2.5.7.5 Creating model figures".
Z
[Single Display]
 Alarm display when interference is detected

The following alarm appears when an interference is detected.
Interference Detected ({Interference object 1},{Interference object 2})
295
B-64647EN/02
{Interference object 1} and {Interference object 2} indicate the name of the

interference object that was defined.
For details on defined names, see "Setting a model figure name" of "2.5.7.5
1 If Japanese or English is set as the language in the connected CNC device, the
location of interference will be highlighted (blinking) in red.
When you deactivate the alarm, the highlight displayed will be canceled.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 Fig. 2.5.7.10 (b) Monitor Screen Display when Interference is Detected
A1  Graphic operations from the touch panel

You can use the touch panel to move the interference object displayed on the
drawing area.
A2 These operations can all be used on the following screens.
• Monitor screen
Z • Modeling screen
• Edit Figure window
• Shape No. List slide
The operation methods used for graphics will vary depending on whether the
touch panel supports multi-touch operation. The graphic operations based on the
difference in touch panel specifications are as follows:
296
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.5.7.10 (b) Graphic Operations from Touch Panel

Touch panel operation Operation of interference object drawn
Multi-touch Multi-touch not During parallel During rotation
supported supported movement mode (*1) mode (*1)
Pinch Tap Zoom out Zoom out 1
Stretch Double-tap Zoom in Zoom in
Drag Drag Parallel movement Rotation
(parallel moves (rotates toward the 2
toward the drag drag direction. Same
direction) movement as when
you press the 3
[Upper], [Lower],
[Left], or [Right] soft
key for free rotation).
4
*1 To switch between parallel movement mode and rotation mode, press the
[Change Operation] soft key.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
297
B-64647EN/02
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION
2.6
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT

APPLICATION
1 You can set up the improvement application functions such as the Data Logger
and Maintenance Manager.
2
3 2.6.1 Editing Data Items to Be Collected by the Data Log-
ger Function
2.6.1
Edit data items to be collected by the Data Logger function. You can import an
4 edited data item configuration file from the memory card or USB flash drive to the
CNC.
5
 • For the Data Logger function, see "DATA LOGGER" in "FANUC iHMI
6 MEMO
Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
7
2.6.1.1 Log item configuration file
The log item configuration file (DataLoggerInfo.xml) is an XML format file output
2.6.1.1
8 by exporting log items. Information required to import log items is described.

A description example of DataLoggerInfo.xml is as follows:
A1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>

<dataloggerinfo>
<item>
<id>ST_007</id>
A2 <period>600000</period>
<path>1</path>
<section>X0000</section>
<num>4</num>
Z </item>
<item>
(...)
</item>
</dataloggerinfo>
Between <dataloggerinfo> and </dataloggerinfo>, describe log item information

displayed in the log item list.
Describe each log item information between <item> and </item>.
298
B-64647EN/02
 Tags included between <item> and </item>

Table 2.6.1.1 (a) List of tags for log item information
element
<id> 1
<period>
<item> ○ <path> Describe information related to one log item.
<section>
<num>
2
Log item ID For details about the descriptions, see
<id> ○ None the Id column described in "■ Contents to be
described for each tag".
3
Describe a collection cycle of data. For the minimum
<period> ○ None
unit that can be described, see the Period column
described in "■ Contents to be described for each
4
tag".
Describe a data path. For details about the 5
<path> × None descriptions, see the Path column described in "■
Contents to be described for each tag".
Describe data sections (axis No./address/variable 6
number/data number). For details about the
<section> × None
descriptions, see the Section column described in
"■ Contents to be described for each tag". 7
Describe the number of obtained data. For details
about the descriptions, see the Num column
<num> × None
described in "■ Contents to be described for each
tag".
8
 Symbol description
A1
To use the following symbols between the tags, use a replacement character
string between the tags. A2
Table 2.6.1.1 (b) List of symbols to be replaced
Replacement Usage example
Z
Target
character Before replacement After replacement
symbol
string
& & <section>Data0&1</section> <section>Data0&1
</section>
< < <section>Data<0></section> <section>Data<0></section>
299
B-64647EN/02
 Contents to be described for each tag

Table 2.6.1.1 (c) Log item information
No. Data name Id Path Section Num Period*1
1 Control axis AX_001 1~10 Not required Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
1 actual required 00000,3600000
speed
2 Control axis AX_002 1~10 1~32 1~32 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
2 road meter 00000,3600000
3 Control axis AX_003 1~10 1~32 1~32 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
load current 00000,3600000
3 (%)
4 Actual AX_004 1~10 Not required Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
spindle required 00000,3600000
4 speed
5 Spindle load AX_005 1~10 Not required Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
5 meter
6 Status ST_001 1~10 Not required
required
Not
00000,3600000
1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
information required 00000,3600000
6 7 Alarm ST_002 1~10 Not required Not 10000,30000,60000,1800000,3600
message required 000
8 Operator ST_003 1~10 Not required Not 10000,30000,60000,1800000,3600
7 message
9 PMC signal ST_004 1~10 Alphabetical Not
required 000
1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
(Bit) characters + required 00000,3600000
8 four-digit
numeric value
10 PMC signal ST_005 1~10 Alphabetical 1~16 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
A1 (1-byte) characters +
four-digit
00000,3600000
numeric value
A2 11 PMC signal
(2-byte)
ST_006 1~10 Alphabetical 1~8
characters +
1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
00000,3600000
four-digit
numeric value
Z 12 PMC signal ST_007 1~10 Alphabetical 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
(4-byte) characters + 00000,3600000
four-digit
numeric value
13 Conversatio ST_008 1~10 0~999999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
nal macro 00000,3600000
variable
14 Auxiliary ST_009 1~10 0~999999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
macro 00000,3600000
variable
15 Execution ST_010 1~10 0~999999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
macro 00000,3600000
variable
300
B-64647EN/02

16 Custom ST_011 1~10 0~999999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
macro 00000,3600000
variable
17 Program
name
RU_001 1~10 Not required Not
required
1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
00000,3600000
1
18 Sequence RU_002 1~10 Not required Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,18
no.
19 Number of RU_003 1~10 Not required
required
Not
00000,3600000
5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
2
machined required ,3600000
parts
3
20 Total RU_004 1~10 Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
number of required ,3600000
machined
parts
4
21 Powered RU_005 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
Time requi
red
required ,3600000 5
22 Operated RU_006 1~10 Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
time required ,3600000 6
23 Cutting time RU_007 1~10 Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
required ,3600000
24 Fan speed MA_001 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000 7
requi required ,3600000
red
25 Servo MA_002 1~10 Not required Not 1800000,3600000 8
insulation required
deterioration
26 Spindle MA_003 1~10 Not required Not 1800000,3600000 A1
insulation required
deterioration
27 Total travel MA_004 1~10 0~999999999 Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000 A2
distance required ,3600000
28 Spindle Total MA_005 1~10 0~999999999 Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
Rotations required ,3600000 Z
29 Servo MA_006 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
amplifier requi required ,3600000
internal red
cooling fan
speed
30 Servo MA_007 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
amplifier requi required ,3600000
radiator red
cooling fan
speed
301
B-64647EN/02

31 Common MA_008 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
power requi required ,3600000
supply red
1 internal
cooling fan
speed
2 32 Common
power
MA_009 Not Not required
requi
Not
required
5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
,3600000
supply red
radiator
3 cooling fan
speed
33 Spindle MA_010 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
4 amplifier requi required ,3600000
internal red
cooling fan
5 speed
34 Spindle MA_011 Not Not required Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
6 amplifier
radiator
requi
red
required ,3600000
cooling fan
speed
7 35 Servo
amplifier
MA_012 1~10 Not required Not
required
5000,10000,30000,60000,1800000
,3600000
APC battery
8 state
For *1Period, enter one of the numeric values.
A1
2.6.1.2 Log file
A2 The log file is a CSV file output by exporting logs.
2.6.1.2
In the log file, the contents to be displayed with the data display function are
described.
Z The CSV file consists of date information that describes data dates and data
information that describes data.
Date/Time Data
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss,"○○○○○○"
302
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.6.1.2 Description in the log file

Date/Time header Data header
Describe a date/time header. Describe a data name, path, section name,
number of data, and cycle.
Date/Time cell Data cell 1
Describe a recorded date/time in the form Describe log contents between the double
of "YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss". quotes (" ").
A date and time and the header of data contents are displayed in the first line, and
2
data in the second and subsequent lines. The description in the data cell is
enclosed by the double quotes (" ").
The following shows an example of the contents in the log file.
3
File name: DataLog_20160818103200.csv (created at 10:32:00 on August 18,
2016)
4
Date Time PMC SIGNAL(4byte) path 1 address X0 data4
period 1s 5
2016/01/01 00:00:00, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/01/01 00:00:01, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/01/01 00:00:02, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000" 6
2016/01/01 00:00:03, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/8/18 10:31:57,
(...)
"030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
7
2016/8/18 10:31:58, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/8/18 10:31:59, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000" 8
2016/8/18 10:32:00, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
A1
A2
Z
303
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2 Editing Parts Data to Be Managed by the Mainte-

nance Manager Function
2.6.2
Edit parts data to be managed by the Maintenance Manager function.
1 • For the Maintenance Manager, see "MAINTENANCE MANAGER" in
 "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
2 MEMO
• For details about the tags related to maintenance items, see the
"MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA" in "FANUC iHMI Home
Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
3
The maintenance item information file (MaintenanceInfo.xml) is used to export/
4 import maintenance item setting data. Describe maintenance item information
between <maintenanceinfo> and </maintenanceinfo>.
5 <maintenanceinfo>
<category>
<name>MACHINE</name>
6 <items>
<item>
<itemname>
<lang>
<en>Machine01</en>
7 <ja> 機械 01</ja>
</lang>
</itemname>
<abbreviation>
8 <lang>
<en>M01</en>
<ja> 機 01</ja>
</lang>
A1 </abbreviation>
<partsname>
<lang>
A2
<en> Machine01-parts </en>
<ja> 機械 01- パーツ </ja>
</lang>
</partsname>
Z <decitionmethod>OR</decitionmethod>
<datatype1>1201</datatype1>
<datarangemax1>123.45</datarangemax1>
<datarangemin1>0</datarangemin1>
<decitiontype1> LOWER</decitiontype1>
</item>
<item>
・
・
</item>
<item>
・
・
</item>
</items>
</category>
</maintenanceinfo>
304
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.1 Setting parts placement information

You can set replacement parts information (such as the model number of the SP
2.6.2.1
amplifier etc.) to be displayed on the Information Center. You can also display the
images of parts to be replaced together with the explanations of the procedures
for replacing the parts.
1
• Check the mounting positions of the CNC device and servo/spindle
amplifiers in the allocation drawing.
2
 The FANUC specifications are displayed in the following number
MEMO
format:
Servo/spindle amplifiers: A06B-xxxx-Hxxx 3
Servo/spindle motors: A06B-xxxx-Bxxx
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
305
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.2 Standard icons list

2.6.2.2
Table 2.6.2.2 Standard Icons List
No. Icon Description No. Icon Description No. Icon Description
1 0 No icon 21 Filter 47 Flow rate
1 Fan 22 Regulator 48 Acceleration

2
2 Battery 23 Belt 49 Speed
3 3 Servo motor 24 Gear 50 Shock
4 Spindle 26 Oil 51 Travel distance

4 motor
5 Condenser 28 Door 52 Signal
5 6 Cable 29 Cushion 53 Time

rubber
6 7 Touch panel 30 Coolant 54 Number of times
of movement
8 LCD panel 31 Light 55 Luminous
intensity
7 9 Memory 32 Fire extinguisher 56 Torque
storage
8 10 Fuse 33 Tool replacement

device
57 Actual power
consumption
11 Common power 34 Air cylinder 58 Integrated power
A1 supply consumption
12 Servo amplifier 36 Pump 59 Regenerative
electric power
A2 13 Spindle 39 Conveyor
amplifier
14 Pulse coder 41 Resistance value
Z
15 Separate type 42 Temperature
detector
17 Linear guide 43 Pressure
18 Ball screw 44 Concentration
19 Bearing 45 pH
20 Telescopic cover 46 Number of

revolutions
306
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.3 Switching maintenance items display

You can switch the display/hide of the maintenance items registered in the
2.6.2.3
machine maintenance category according to the PMC signal state.

To switch the maintenance items display, follow the procedure below:
<1> Prepare an maintenance items display switch configuration file described in

1
XML format.
2
 • The file name is "MainteShowSettings.xml" only.
• For details about the file, see "2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display
MEMO switch configuration file". 3
<2> Store the maintenance items display switch configuration file in the directory 4
below:
%APPDATA%\MTB\Maintenance\Settings\
5
<3> Start the Maintenance Manager application.
• For the Maintenance Manager application, the maintenance items display 6
switch settings are loaded from the XML file and saved.
• If the load fails, the display switch settings are not saved and will be loaded
again when the application is started next time.
7
• When the XML file is successfully loaded, it will be automatically deleted.
8
• The maintenance items remains in the current display state until
you restart the Maintenance Manager application even when the A1

NOTE
display/hide conditions are met while the Maintenance Manager
application is running.
• This function will be enabled when the application is started next
time after the settings are configured.
A2
 Action of hidden maintenance items

Z
• Measurement is not performed for hidden maintenance items.
When maintenance items are hidden, previous measurement results will be
discarded.
• Hidden maintenance items are included in the number of registrations in a
category.
Therefore, when the total number of displayed and hidden maintenance items
exceeds the registrable number of maintenance items, you cannot add the
number of maintenance items.
307
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.4 Outputting the display switch settings of the maintenance items

You can output the current display switch settings of the maintenance items in
2.6.2.4
XML format.
The current display settings of the maintenance items are output in XML format by
storing the file in a specified directory.
1 To output the display switch settings of the maintenance items, follow the
procedure below:
2 <1> Create the following directory.

%APPDATA%\MTB\Maintenance\Settings\backup
3
<2> Create a blank XML file named "MainteShowSettings.xml" and store it in the
directory created in Step 1.
4
5 The current display switch settings of the maintenance items are output to the
XML file created in Step 2. Then a time stamp is added to the file name.
6
• For details about the file, see "2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display
 switch configuration file".

• The output is not performed every time you start the Maintenance
7 MEMO Manager application, as the file name is changed when output is
successfully done.
8
A1 2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch configuration file
The maintenance items display switch configuration file is used for the
2.6.2.5
maintenance items display switch function.

A2 As the switch conditions of the maintenance items display state, describe various
informations between <mainteshowsettings> and </mainteshowsettings>.
The following shows a description example of an XML file. In this example, the
Z maintenance item name "test", PMC Path 1, and G1000 are set, and the
maintenance item will be displayed when the bit-1 PMC signal state is ON.
<mainteshowsettings>
<items>
<item>
<itemname> test</itemname>
<checktype>1</checktype>
<checkcond>1,G1000.1</checkcond>
<showmode>1</showmode>
</item>
</items>
</mainteshowsettings>
308
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• Create a maintenance items display switch configuration file using the
Unicode.
1
 Tags included between <mainteshowsettings> and </
mainteshowsettings>
Table 2.6.2.5 (a) List of Tags for Maintenance Item Information
2
element 3
<items> ○ <item> Maintenance item information group. Describe
information about each maintenance item in the
<item> tag. 4
 Tags included between <item> and </item> 5
Table 2.6.2.5 (b) List of tags for information for each maintenance item
XML tag Required Child Description 6
element
<itemname> ○ None Describe the name (English) of a maintenance
item whose display state you want to switch. You 7
may enter up to 127 characters for the name.
<checktype> × None Describe the determination method to switch the
display state. 8
Describe a numeric value described in "■ Display
state switch determination methods".
If this is not defined, no determination to switch
the display state will be made.
A1
<checkcond> × None Describe conditions to switch the display state.
Describe a format according to the determination
method described in "■ Display state switch
A2
determination methods".
Z
<showmode> × None Set whether to display or hide the item when the
specified PMC is ON
Set 0 (hide) or 1 (show).
If this is not defined, it is taken as 1 (show).
309
B-64647EN/02
 Display state switch determination methods

Table 2.6.2.5 (c) List of display state switch determination methods
How to <checktype> <checkcond>
determine
1 the state
PMC signal 1 "A,BCCCC.D"
(bit) A: Integer of 1 or more
2 B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (regardless of
upper case or lower case letters)
CCCC: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such
3 as "0001".)
D: Integer from 0 to 9
4  Symbol description
5 string between the tags.
6 Table 2.6.2.5 (d) List of symbols to be replaced

Replacement Use example
Target
Character
symbol Before replacement After replacement
string
7 & & <itemname>Machine0&1 <itemname>Machine0&1
</itemname> </itemname>
8 < < <itemname>Machine<0>

</itemname>
<itemname>Machine<0>
</itemname>
A1
2.6.2.6 Protecting maintenance items
You can protect maintenance items added by the machine manufacturer from
2.6.2.6
A2 being edited or deleted by the end user operation.

Maintenance items protection can be set for the following maintenance
categories:
Z • CNC system maintenance items
The CNC system maintenance category can be protected.
• Machine maintenance items
The machine maintenance category or each maintenance item can be
protected.
 Function control when the protection setting is enabled

The following functions cannot be used when the maintenance items protection
setting is enabled:
310
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.6.2.6 Function control when the protection setting is enabled

Function Description
Detecting a The [Detect Items] soft key is disabled.
maintenance item
Adding a maintenance
item
The [Add] soft key is disabled. 1
Editing a maintenance The [Edit] soft key is disabled.
item 2
Deleting a maintenance The deletion target is no longer selected.
item
Importing setting data The [Import] soft key is disabled. 3
Exporting setting data When the maintenance category is set to be protected or all
maintenance items are set to be protected:
The [Export] soft key is disabled. 4
When a maintenance item is set to be protected:
A protected item is not to be output to an XML file.
Setting the capacitor The [Reset Capacitor Capacity] soft key is disabled. 5
capacity again
Displaying the Generate The [Generate Preset] soft key is disabled.
Preset File window 6
 Enabling the maintenance items protection setting 7

You can enable the maintenance items protection setting by loading an XML file
that describes the maintenance items protection setting to the Maintenance
Manager application. 8
<1> Prepare an XML file that describes the maintenance items protection setting. A1
 • The file name is "MainteShowSettings.xml" only.
• For details about the XML file, see "2.6.2.7 Maintenance items A2
MEMO protection setting file".
Z
<2> Store the XML file in the following folder:
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Settings¥

The protection setting described in the XML file is loaded to the Maintenance
Manager application and saved in the database.
311
B-64647EN/02
• When the XML file is successfully loaded, it will be automatically
 deleted. After that, the protection setting is read from the database.
• When the protection setting fails to be loaded, the log is output to a
MEMO text file. The file name is "MainteShowSettingsLog.txt" only and
1 stored in the same folder as the XML file.
2
2.6.2.7 Maintenance items protection setting file
3 2.6.2.7
The maintenance items protection setting file is used in the protection function for
the CNC system maintenance category and machine maintenance category.
4 As the conditions of the maintenance items protection setting, describe

information between <mainteshowsettings> and </mainteshowsettings>.
The following is a description example of the XML file setting to protect the CNC
5 system maintenance and maintenance item name "test".

<items>
<item>
<itemname>test</itemname>
<protect>1</protect>
7 </item>
</items>
<cncprotect>1</cncprotect>
8
• Use the same XML file as the maintenance items display switch
A1 configuration file for a maintenance items protection setting file
 (Setting tags are different). The maintenance items display switch
configuration takes precedence over the maintenance items
MEMO
A2 protection setting.
• Create a maintenance items protection setting file using the Unicode.
Z
 Tags included between <mainteshowsettings> and </
mainteshowsettings>
Table 2.6.2.7 (a) List of Tags for Maintenance Item Information
element
<item> tag.
312
B-64647EN/02

element
<cncprotect> × None Set whether or not to protect maintenance items
in the CNC system maintenance category.
0: Does not protect maintenance items.
1: Protects maintenance items. 1
If this is not defined, it is taken as "0".
If the setting value is out of range, "1" is written to
database. 2
<mtbprotect> × None Set whether or not to protect maintenance items
in the machine maintenance category.
0: Does not protect maintenance items. 3
1: Protects maintenance items (set for each
maintenance item).
2: Protect maintenance item (set for category)
4
If the setting value is out of range, "2" is written to
database.
5
 Tags included between <item> and </item>
Table 2.6.2.7 (b) List of tags for information for each maintenance item
6
element 7
<itemname> ○ None Describe the name (English) of a maintenance
item whose display state you want to switch.
You can enter up to 127 characters for the 8
name.
<checktype> × None Describe the determination method to switch the
display state. A1
Describe the number specified in "■ Display
A2
<checkcond> × None Describe conditions to switch the display state.
Describe the format according to the Z
determination method specified in "■ Display
<showmode> × None Set whether to display or hide the item when the
specified PMC is ON.
Set 0 (hide) or 1 (show).
313
B-64647EN/02

element
<protect> × None Set whether or not to protect maintenance
items.
1 0: Does not protect maintenance items.

1: Protects maintenance items.
If the setting value is out of range, "1" is written
2 to database.
The protection setting described in

3
 the <protect> tag is applied only
when "1" (Protects maintenance
NOTE items (set for each maintenance
4 item)) is set in the <mtbprotect> tag.
5  Display state switch determination methods
6 Table 2.6.2.7 (c) List of display state switch determination methods

How to <checktype> <checkcond>
determine
the state
7 PMC signal 1 "A,BCCCC.D"
(bit) A: Integer of 1 or more
B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (no case
8 sensitive)
CCCC: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such
as "0001".)
A1 D: Integer from 0 to 7
A2  Symbol description
string between the tags.
Z
Table 2.6.2.7 (d) List of symbols to be replaced
Target
Character
symbol Before replacement After replacement
string
<itemname>Machine0&1 <itemname>Machine0&1
& &
<itemname>Machine<0> <itemname>Machine<0>
< <
314
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• Reset the protection setting before exporting items with the
maintenance items protection setting enabled.
2.6.2.8 Setting the maintenance completion notification and the maintenance 2

completion control
You can check the state of a maintenance item or restrict the maintenance
3
2.6.2.8
completion process by associating an appropriate CNC PMC signal with the target
maintenance item.
The following operations are made available by setting the maintenance items
display switch configuration file (MainteShowSettings.xml).
4
• Notification of the warning/abnormal state of a maintenance item and
maintenance completion using a PMC signal 5
• Completion process control of a maintenance item associated with a PMC signal
Completion process control refers to avoiding accepting a completion process
for a specific maintenance item. A completion process includes the following 6
actions:
Pressing the [Maint. Complete] soft key 7
Executing a completion process using an external API
8
 • For details on the maintenance items display switch configuration file,
see "2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch configuration file".
MEMO
A1
 PMC signals used in the maintenance completion control function
The maintenance completion control function uses the PMC signals as shown
A2
below.
Maintenance completion control function PMC signal (output)

Z
The function notifies you of the warning/abnormal state of monitor data by using
the following appropriate PMC signal bit with the Maintenance Manager
application.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Warning/abnormal
state
315
B-64647EN/02
#0 to #1 Notification of the warning/abnormal state of monitor data

00: No warning or abnormality occurred.
01: A warning occurred.
10: An abnormality occurred.
#2 to #7 Not used
1
Maintenance completion control function PMC signal (input)
You can specify whether or not to control the completion process of a
2 maintenance item by using the following appropriate PMC signal bit with an
external application.
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Completion process
4 control
#0 to #1 Completion process control of a maintenance item
5 0: Not control
1: Control
#2 to #7 Not used
6
 Description example of the maintenance completion control function
setting
7 To associate a CNC PMC signal with a maintenance item, write the address of a
PMC signal to use in the maintenance items display switch configuration file
(MainteShowSettings.xml). The following shows a description example:
A1 <items>
<item>
<itemname>test</itemname>
<compchkoutaddress>1,R9400</compchkoutaddress>
A2 <compchkinaddress>1,R9401</compchkinaddress>
</item>
<item>
<itemname>test2</itemname>
Z <compchkoutaddress>1,R9500</compchkoutaddress>
<compchkinaddress>1,R9501</compchkinaddress>
</item>
</items>
 Description in the Tags

The description in the tags used in the maintenance completion control function is
provided below.
The following table shows details about each tag.
316
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.6.2.8 (a) Tags included between <mainteshowsettings> and </

mainteshowsettings>
element
1
<item> tag.
2
Table 2.6.2.8 (b) Tags included between <item> and </item>
XML tag Required Child Description 3
element
<itemname> ○ None Describe the name of a maintenance
item to which you want to set the 4
maintenance completion control
function in English. You can enter up to
127 characters for the name. 5
<compchkoutaddress> × None Specify the reference address of the
(*1) output PMC signal for the maintenance
completion control function. Write the
reference address in the format shown
6
in the table below.
To specify the path, put the path
number and a comma at the beginning
7
of the address (separate the path
number and address with a comma).
Unless defined, this function is not 8
executed.
<compchkinaddress> × None Specify the reference address of the
(*1) input PMC signal for the maintenance A1
completion control function. Write the
reference address in the format shown
in the table below. A2
To specify the path, put the path
number and a comma at the beginning
of the address (separate the path
number and address with a comma).
Z
Unless defined, this function is not
executed.
*1: Both or either one of them can be registered.
 PMC signal reference address format

The following table shows the format of the reference address of a PMC signal
specified in the <compchkoutaddress> or <compchkinaddress> tags.
317
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.6.2.8 (c) PMC Signal Reference Address Format

Format Description
EFFFF E: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (regardless of upper
case or lower case letters)
1 FFFF: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such as
"0001".)
2
 • If you specify the same address as that of a PMC signal used in
another function, this function may not work correctly.
3 NOTE
 Setting procedure for the maintenance completion control function

4 Associating a PMC signal with a maintenance item (importing the
maintenance items display switch configuration file)
5 <1> Describe the following tags in the maintenance items display switch
configuration file (MainteShowSettings.xml).
6 • <itemname>: Maintenance item name
• <compchkinaddress>: Reference address of input PMC signal
• <compchkoutaddress>: Reference address of output PMC signal
7 <2> Store the maintenance items display switch configuration file in the directory
below:
8 %APPDATA%¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Settings¥
The maintenance items display switch configuration file is loaded, and the
A1 setting is registered to the database.
Backing up the maintenance items display switch configuration file

A2 To back up the maintenance items display switch configuration file, perform the
following:
Z <1> Open the "backup" directory under the following directory:

<2> Store an empty maintenance items display switch configuration file
(MainteShowSettings.xml) in the "backup" directory.
The setting of the registered maintenance items display switch configuration
file is overwritten to the maintenance items display switch configuration file
(MainteShowSettings.xml) stored in the "backup" directory.
The file name changes as follows:
MainteShowSettings_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.xml
(YYYYMMDDhhmmss: Date and time when the configuration file was
overwritten)
318
B-64647EN/02
Disassociating a PMC signal from a maintenance item

To disassociate a PMC signal from a maintenance item, perform the following:
<1> Copy the backup file (MainteShowSettings_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.xml) created
in the previous section to the following directory:
1
<2> Rename the file copied in step <1> as follows:
MainteShowSettings.xml 2
(Delete the "_YYYYMMDDhhmmss" part from the file name.)
<3> Open the file renamed in step <2> and delete the reference address
(<compchkinaddress> or <compchkoutaddress>) of the PMC signal you want
3
to disassociate.
<4> Start the Maintenance Manager application. 4
The modified maintenance items display switch configuration file is loaded, and
the new setting is registered to the database.
5
Setting whether or not to restrict the maintenance completion control
function
To set whether or not to restrict the maintenance completion control function,
6
change the PMC signal (completion process control) of the address associated
with the maintenance item using an external application.
7
 • For details on the PMC signals, see "PMC signals used in the
maintenance completion control function". 8
MEMO
A1
2.6.2.9 Outputting the maintenance items protection setting
The maintenance items protection setting can be output to an XML file.
2.6.2.9
A2
<1> Create the following folder:
%APPDATA%¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Settings¥backup¥ Z
<2> Create an empty XML file called "MainteShowSettings.xml" and store it in the
folder created in step 1.

The current maintenance items protection setting is written to the XML file.
 • When the file is output, the file name changes with the time stamp
added to it.
MEMO
319
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.10 Detecting maintenance items from an external application

You can extend the function to detect maintenance items from an external
2.6.2.10
application by loading an XML file that describes the PMC signal setting used in
integration with the external application to the Maintenance Manager application.
1 <1> Prepare an XML file that describes the PMC signal setting used in integration
with the external application.
2
 • The file name is "MainteCoordinatedSetting.xml" only.
• For details about the XML file, see "2.6.2.10 External application
3 MEMO integration file".
4 <2> Store the XML file in the following folder:

5
6 The setting described in the XML file is loaded to the Maintenance Manager
application and saved in the database.
7  • When the Maintenance Manager is started, if the setting used in

integration with the external application is registered in the
MEMO database, the backup XML file is output.
8
<4> Set the integration start PMC signal from the external application.
A1 When detecting that PMC signal is turned ON, the Maintenance Manager
detects maintenance items.
A2 <5> Maintenance item detection is completed.

The Maintenance Manager sets the completion PMC signal described in the
XML file. The external application detects that the completion PMC signal is
Z turned ON.
• If an error occurs or protection items detection fails when the XML

file is loaded, the error log is output to a text file. The file name is
 "MaintenanceErrorLog.txt" only and stored in the following folder:
MEMO %APPDATA%¥SYSTEM¥Maintenance¥
For details on the error logs, see "■ Error code list" in "2.6.2.9
Detecting maintenance items from an external application".
320
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
• To detect maintenance items from an external application, the
Maintenance Manager needs to be running.
1
 Solutions to defects
This function may cause the symptoms below. In such a case, follow the
appropriate solution according to the cause. 2
Table 2.6.2.10 (a) Solutions to defects 3
No. Symptom Cause Solution
1 All CNC system NC setting was not
maintenance items obtained.
Check the error log file and then
contact your representative. 4
are not detected. The maintenance items
information RDB
(relational database)
5
failed to be updated.
The log collection
application is not
Check the error log file and wait a
while for the log collection
6
working correctly. application to recollect the log.
Then, execute maintenance items
detection again. If the symptom is 7
not solved, restart iHMI and execute
maintenance items detection again.
If the issue resides even after 8
restart, please contact your
representative.
2 • The servo The log collection Check the error log file and wait a A1
resistance is not application is not while for the log collection
detected. working correctly. application to recollect the log.
• The servo battery
is not detected.
Then, execute maintenance items
detection again. If the symptom is
A2
• The spindle not solved, restart iHMI and execute
resistance is not
detected.
If the issue resides even after
Z
representative.
Machine (part) failure Check the error log file and then
contact your representative.
321
B-64647EN/02
No. Symptom Cause Solution

3 The main power The log collection Check the error log file and wait a
condenser is not application is not while for the log collection
detected. working correctly. application to recollect the log.
1 Then, execute maintenance items

2 If the issue resides even after
representative.
3 4 The fans are not The log collection Check the error log file and wait a
detected. application is not while for the log collection
working correctly. application to recollect the log.
4 Then, execute maintenance items
5 maintenance items detection again.

If the issue resides even after
6 representative.
The fans are not Check if the fans are running
rotating (A fan that is not correctly. If not, contact your
rotating is not to be representative.
7 detected).
8  Error code list

If an error occurs with a function that is not displayed in the screen, such as file
load when the Maintenance Manager application is started, the error log is
A1 recorded in a text file.
The format of the error log is as follows:
A2 Table 2.6.2.10 (b) Error log format

File name Format
Z MaintenanceErrorLog.txt "yyyy/MM/dd/hh:mm:ss.sss, error message, error code"
The error messages and error codes are as follows:
Table 2.6.2.10 (c) Error message/error code list

Error condition Error message Error PMC
code outputtable
The file cannot be opened. <File name> open error. 0001 ×
The required tag does not exist. <Tag name> tag is not exist in 0002 ×
<File name>.
322
B-64647EN/02
Error condition Error message Error PMC

code outputtable
The tag value is not entered. <Tag name> value is not exist in 0003 ×
<File name>.
The tag value has an invalid
PMC address.
<Tag name> value is invalid
PMC address in <File name>.
0004 ×
1
The tag value has the same <Tag name> value is already 0005 ×
PMC address as another tag
value does.
used PMC address in <File
name>.
2
The Maintenance Manager is The maintenance application is 0101 ○
busy because it is operating.
(*1)
busy.
3
The CNC setting is incorrect. The CNC setting is improper. 0102 ○
The log collection application is DTLogger doesn't operate 0103 ○ 4
not working correctly. normally.
Update to DB failed. Database update error. 0104 ○
The tag value has an invalid <Tag name> value is invalid 0201 × 5
maintenance item name. itemname in <File name>.
The tag value is too long. <Tag name> value is too long in
<File name>.
0202 ×
6
The tag value cannot be <Tag name> value is not 0203 ×
converted to a number. convert to numeric value in
<File name>. 7
The protection setting value is <Tag name> value is invalid 0204 ×
invalid.
The tag value is out of valid
protect setting in <File name>.
<Tag name> value is out of 0205 ×
8
range. range in <File name>.
*1: When the function is integrated with an external application, the Maintenance A1
Manager must be put in the following states:
• The maintenance information list screen (showing icons or data) is displayed.
If any window is opened, press the [Close], [OK], or [Cancel] soft key to close A2
the window.
• The [Maintenance Complete] or [Item Settings] soft key is not pressed.
If the [Maintenance Complete] or [Item Settings] soft key is pressed, press the
Z
[Close] soft key.
323
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.11 External application integration file

The external application integration file is used in a function to detect maintenance
2.6.2.11
items from an external application.

As the conditions of maintenance items detection from an external application,
describe information between <maintecoordinatedsetting> and </
1 maintecoordinatedsetting>.
The description example of MainteCoordinatedSetting.xml is as follows:

<maintecoordinatedsetting>
<settings>
3 <setting>
<type>1</type>
<readaddress>1,X0010</readaddress>
<writeaddress>1,X0020</writeaddress>
4 </setting>
</settings>
</maintecoordinatedsetting>
5
6 
NOTE
• Create an external application integration file using the Unicode.
7
 Tags included between <maintecoordinatedsetting> and </
maintecoordinatedsetting>
8 Table 2.6.2.11 (a) List of tags for the external application integration setting
A1 element
<settings> ○ <setting> External application integration setting group.
Describe information for each external application
A2 integration setting in the <setting> tag.
When the delete option is set to 1, the
corresponding external application integration
Z setting is deleted from the database and not

registered in the database.
 Tags included between <setting> and </setting>
Table 2.6.2.11 (b) List of tags for each external application integration setting
element
<type> ○ None Set the function to execute external application
integration.
Describe the format specified in "■ External
application integration function".
324
B-64647EN/02

element
<readaddress> ∆ (*1) None Set the PMC signal address to be updated by
the external application.
Describe the format specified in "■ PMC signal
setting format". 1
<writeaddress> ∆ (*1) None Set the PMC signal address to be updated by
the Maintenance Manager.
Describe the format specified in "■ PMC signal 2
setting format".
*1: This is not necessary when the delete option is specified in the setting tag.
3
 External application integration function
Table 2.6.2.11 (c) External application integration function list 4
Integration function <type>
Maintenance items 1 5
detection
6
 PMC signal setting format
Table 2.6.2.11 (d) PMC signal setting format

7
XML tag Format
<readaddress> "A,BCCCC" (single-byte characters)
<writeaddress> A: Integer of 1 or more 8
B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (no case sensitive)
CCCC: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such as
"0001".) A1
2.6.2.12 PMC signals used in external application integration A2

External application integration notifies you of request detection or execution
2.6.2.12
results using the PMC signals.

The corresponding PMC signals are as follows:
Z
 External application integration PMC signal (read)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Integration function request
• Integration request
00000000: The integration function is not requested. (*1)
00000001: The integration function is being requested.
325
B-64647EN/02
 External application integration PMC signal (write)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Error description Integration Integratio
function result n request
1 • Integration request
0: The integration request is being monitored. (Integration request acceptable
*2)
2 1: The integration function is being executed.
• Integration function result
3 00: The integration function has not been executed.
00000 is output to #3 to #7.
01: The last executed integration function is successfully completed.
4 00000 is output to #3 to #7.
10: The last executed integration function failed.
One of the following errors is output to #3 to #7:
5 • Error description
6 00001: The last executed integration function failed due to the busy state.
00010: The last executed integration function failed due to the CNC setting.
00011: The last executed integration function failed due to the log collection
application.
7 00100: The last executed integration function failed due to the Maintenance
Manager database.
11111: The last executed integration function failed due to some other reason.
8 *1: This is not halted even if the PMC signal is changed while the integration
function is being executed.
*2: To execute the integration function again after it is completed, you need to set
A1 the read PMC signal to "The integration function is not requested".
A2 2.6.2.13 Generating the preset file to automatically detect maintenance items

If maintenance items are automatically detected using the preset file, you can
2.6.2.13
Z check the connection state of the machine configuration.

A behavior to automatically detect maintenance items varies depending on
whether the preset file exists or not.
326
B-64647EN/02
When the preset file does not exist When the preset file exists
Data Logger Data Logger
Data Logger DB
Maintenance
Data Logger DB
Maintenance
Preset file
2
Manager Manager
Obtain the source Refer to the Data Obtain the preset 3

data of maintenance Logger information for file information
items from the Data configuration check as items
Logger information
Maintenance
but not import items
Maintenance
4
information DB information DB
System System
maintenance maintenance 㻌
items items
5
Fig. 2.6.2.13 (a) Differences in a Detection Behavior between Whether the Preset
File Exists or Not
6
 Generating the preset file
Generate the preset file, which can automatically detect maintenance items.
7
The preset file needs to be stored in the following folder so that it can be loaded
during automatic detection. The preset file is generated in xml format.
8
Table 2.6.2.13 (a) Preset File Storage Location
PANEL iH
Device
¥Storage
Folder
A1
Card2¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Settings
PANEL iH Pro (SSD type) D:¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Settings A2
PANEL iH Pro (HDD type) C:¥ProgramData¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥Maintenance¥Setti
ngs
<1> In the maintenance item list screen, press the [Item Settings] soft key.
Z
The soft key display changes.
327
B-64647EN/02
<2> Press the [Detect Items] soft key.

For the devices of the connected CNC system, their maintenance items are
detected and automatically configured.
1
2 • During maintenance item detection, the fan warning/abnormality
thresholds and maximum data range may not be set correctly in rare
3 cases due to unstable fan speed.

NOTE
• In such a case, perform one of the following procedures to reconfigure
the correct thresholds:
Wait for a while and press the [Detect Items] soft key again.
4 Edit the maximum data range and thresholds in the Edit Item
window.
5
<3> When maintenance items are displayed in the CNC system maintenance item
6 fields, press the [Generate Preset] soft key.
The Generate Preset File window appears.
7
8 The [Generate Preset] soft key is toggled between enabled/disabled under the
A1 [Generate Preset] soft key Display condition

Enabled When all of the following conditions are met
• The CNC System Maintenance tab is selected.
A2 • The CNC System Maintenance tab is not protected.
• CNC system maintenance items exist.
Disabled When any of the following conditions are met
Z • The CNC System Maintenance tab is not selected.
• The CNC System Maintenance tab is protected.
• CNC system maintenance items do not exist.
328
B-64647EN/02
<4> Press the [View] soft key or [View] in the Generate Preset File window.
1
2
3
4
5
6
<5> Select a folder where you want to generate the preset file and press the [OK]
soft key.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
329
B-64647EN/02

The preset file is generated for all maintenance items existing in the CNC
system maintenance item fields in the selected folder.
The preset file generation completion message appears.
1 If preset file generation fails or the preset file cannot be loaded correctly, the
following states are judged as errors:
2 Table 2.6.2.13 (b) State Judged As an Error

Error types State Judged As an Error
3 Failed to generate the

preset file
The specified file generation folder cannot be opened.
The preset file exists in the specified file generation folder
and is opened from another application (when it is read-
4 only).
The file cannot be saved after being generated because
the capacity is running out of space.
5 Failed to load the preset

file
A required item has a blank value.
There is a non-existing tag.
6 There is an incorrect tag (misspelling, etc.).

An entered value exceeds the maximum number of string
characters or number digits.
A value other than 0 and 1 is entered in <transit> (screen
7 transition destination when the maintenance item
information screen is displayed).
A string is entered in a number field.
8 The data type is not in accordance with the input
guidelines.
A1 A tag structure is different from expected (A necessary

child tag does not exist, etc.).
The xml file is damaged and cannot be opened.
A2 A tag is not closed.

An unopened tag is tried to be closed.
Z The following states are not judged as errors:

Table 2.6.2.13 (c) State Not Judged As an Error
State Not Judged As an Error Reason
An unnecessary child tag is written in the Only a specific tag is loaded.
<item> tag.
Multiple child tags with the same name The information of the first child tag is
belong to a single parent in the <item> obtained.
tag.
A value is specified in a tag that is The tag is not obtained as a value.
supposed to have no value (such as
<items>).
330
B-64647EN/02
State Not Judged As an Error Reason

The file is opened read-only when it is There is no impact because the file does
loaded. not need to be updated.
There is no xml. It is regarded as having no preset file, so
The xml name is unusual.

normal detection is performed.
It is regarded as having no preset file, so
1
normal detection is performed.
2
 Checking the detection result using the preset file
Check the detection result of CNC maintenance items using the preset file.
3
The soft keys are switched. 4
5
<2> Press the [Detect Items] soft key.
If the internal detection result perfectly matches the preset file, the detection
6
completion message appears.
If the internal detection result does not perfectly match the preset file, the
Unmatched Items window appears (See "Unmatched Items window").
7
8
A1
 Unmatched Items window
If there is any difference between the normal detection items and the preset file A2
after automatic detection, the Unmatched Items window appears.
The window shows an item according to the following unmatched reasons:
Table 2.6.2.13 (d) Unmatched reason
Z
Detection Source Unmatched reason
Preset file When an item exists in the preset file but
not in the normal detection result
Detect item When an item exists in the normal
detection result but not in the preset file
When you select the item in the list on the window, the message corresponding to
the unmatched reason appears in the lower part of the window.
331
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
Fig. 2.6.2.13 (b) Unmatched Items window
4
Items displayed in the list on the window are as follows:
5 Unmatched Items/Detection Source/Abbreviated Names/Target Unit Name/Target
Part Name/Serial Number/Display Icon (Normal)/Data Unit/Data Range
6 (Minimum)/Data Range (Maximum)/Determination Type/Warning Threshold//

Maintenance Guide 1/Maintenance Guide 2/Selected Item Description
One of the following two messages appears in the Unmatched Items window:
7 Table 2.6.2.13 (e) Messages in the Unmatched Items Window

Detection Preset file Message
8 None Described This maintenance item will be added from the
preset file.
If the data is not updated, execute the following.
A1 • Check that the device is correctly connected and
execute maintenance item detection.
• Restart the CNC and execute maintenance item
A2 detection.
If the items above do not solve the problem, contact
the administrator or FANUC.
Z Described None This maintenance item will not be added as a
system maintenance item because it does not exist
in the preset file.
To add it as a system maintenance item, revise the
preset file.
332
B-64647EN/02
2.6.2.14 Guide sizes that can be registered in the Maintenance Manager

In the Maintenance Manager, the following guide sizes allow the screen to be
2.6.2.14
displayed without being scrolled.

• 10.4-inch display: 311 x 536 (Unit: px)
• 15-inch display: 431 x 676 (Unit: px) 1
• 19-inch display: 687 x 932 (Unit: px)
A size larger than the above requires scrolling.

2
2.6.2.15 Setting the capacitor capacity again

3
The Reset Capacitor Capacity function allows you to detect the capacitor capacity
2.6.2.15
and set the capacity again. You need to run this function after replacing the 4
capacitor in the amplifier group or adding an amplifier group so that you can
always monitor the latest status.
This function is enabled only when the capacitor configuration is registered to the
maintenance items detection function and the maintenance items protection
5
setting is disabled.
To set the capacitor capacity again, perform the following: 6
7
8
<2> Press the [Redetect Capacitor] soft key.
A1
A2
The Reset Capacitor Capacity window appears.
Z
333
B-64647EN/02
<3> Enter the capacitor capacity (ratio of the current capacity to the maximum
capacity) in the Reset edit box.
Specify the capacity with the following appropriate value according to whether
the configuration was changed or not (Valid range: 1 to 100 (Unit: %)).
1 A
2 B
C
3
Configuration change Input value
history
4 A The capacitor was not Enter the detected current capacitor capacity.
replaced. In the above example, enter "71" in AMG-1 and "70"
(The capacity ratio in AMG-2.
5 remained the same after
configuration change.)
6 B The capacitor was

replaced with a new one.
Regard the capacity right after replacement as 100
%, so enter "100".
(The capacity ratio
increased after
7 C An amplifier group was Enter "100" like when the capacitor was replaced.
added.
8 ("-%" is displayed
because there is no
setting before
A1
To enter the same value as [After]
A2 Press the [Copy] soft key with the edit box selected.
The capacitor capacity is set again.
Z
334
B-64647EN/02
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION
2.7
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICA-

TION
You can set up the utility application functions such as the manual viewer function, 1
Web browser function, etc.
2
2.7.1 Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function 3
2.7.1
Import a manual (pdf, txt, html) to be displayed with the manual viewer function
and set the configuration and icon of the manual.
4
2.7.1.1 Manual information configuration file
2.7.1.1
The manual information configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) has description about 5

information required to display the manual list screen.
Describe manual and category information between <manualinfo> and </
manualinfo>. 6
Describe manual information between <manuals> and </manuals> and category
information between <categories> and </categories>.
A description example of ManualInfo.xml is as follows: 7
8
A1
A2
Z
335
B-64647EN/02

<manualinfo>
<manuals>
<manual protect = "1">
<name> MAINTENANCE MANUAL </name>
1 <category> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B </

category>
<image>iconImage.sgv</image>
<lang>
2 <ja>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B 保守説明
書 </caption>
<file>B-64485JA_02.pdf </file>
3 </ja>
<en>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL </caption>
4 <file>B-64485EN_02.pdf </file>
</en>
</lang>
</manual>
5 <manual>
(...)
6
</manuals>
<categories>
<category>
<name>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</name>
<lang>
7 <ja>
<caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</ja>
<en>
8 <caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</en>
</lang>
A1 </category>
<category>
(...)
</categories>
A2 </manualinfo>
336
B-64647EN/02
2.7.1.2 Manual viewer tag list

Tags and descriptions included in the manual information configuration file
2.7.1.2
(ManualInfo.xml) are as follows:
 Tags included between <manuals> and </manuals> 1

Table 2.7.1.2 (a) List of Tags for Manual Information
XML tag Required Child
element
Description
2
<manual> ○ <name><cat Describe information related to one manual.
egory><imag You can set the protect (delete protection)
e><lang> attribute.
3
1 does not allow you to delete the manual.
0 or no description allows you to delete the
manual. 4
<name> ○ None Manual identifier ID. Describe a unique
character string. If you set <name> that is
already registered, the imported information 5
will overwrite the current information.
<category> × None Manual category. Describe the category
identifier ID. 6
If no description is set, the manual is not
categorized.
<image> × None Describe the icon image file name.
7
If no description is set, the preset image is
used.
<lang> ○ <[language]> Describe information about each language in
8
the <[language]> tag.
English (<en>) is required.
If a language that is not included in the <lang> A1
tag is set to the display language, information
described in English (<en>) is displayed.
<[language]> ○ <caption> Describe information related to one display A2
<file> language.
<caption> ○ None Describe a title to be displayed on the manual
list screen. Z
If a line is broken, it is also shown broken on
the manual list screen.
<file> ○ None Describe the manual file name.
A pdf or txt file name must include the
extension.
For a html file, describe the name of a folder
containing index.html.
337
B-64647EN/02
• A manual file name described in the <file> tag may be displayed on

NOTE
the screen.
If it is written in non-alphanumeric characters, it may not be displayed
1 correctly.
2  Tags included between <categories> and </categories>

Table 2.7.1.2 (b) List of Tags for Manual Information
3 element
<category> ○ <name> Describe information related to one category.
<lang>
4 <name> ○ None Category identifier ID. Describe a unique
character string.
5 <lang> ○ <[language]> Describe information about each language in

the <[language]> tag.
English (<en>) is required.
6 If a language that is not included in the <lang>
tag is set to the display language, information
described in English (<en>) is displayed.
<[language]> ○ <caption> Describe information related to one display
7 language.
<caption> ○ None Describe the category name.
8
 Languages Used in the <[language]> Tag
A1 Table 2.7.1.2 (c) Language List

<[language]> Language <[language]> Language <[language]> Language
Tag name Tag name Tag name
A2 <en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
Z <de>
<fr>
German
French
<pl>
<hu>
Polish
Hungarian
<sk>
<fi>
Slovak
Finnish
<zh-CHT> Traditional <sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
Chinese
<it> Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian
<ko> Korean <zh-CHS> Simplified <sl> Slovene
Chinese
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian
<nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
338
B-64647EN/02
 Manual Information Added during Import

If a manual file or folder that is not included in the manual information
configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) is imported, the following information is added:
Table 2.7.1.2 (d) Manual Information Added during Import

1
XML tag Information
<name> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
<category> Not specified
2
<image> Not specified
<lang> English 3
<caption> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
<file> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
4

• A manual file name described in the <file> tag may be displayed on
the screen. 5
If it is written in non-alphanumeric characters, it may not be displayed
NOTE
correctly.
6
 Symbol description
To use the following symbols between the tags, use a replacement character 7
string between the tags.
Table 2.7.1.2 (e) List of symbols to be replaced

8
Target
symbol
Character
Before replacement After replacement
A1
string
& & <itemname>Machine0&1 <itemname>Machine0&1
</itemname> </itemname> A2
< < <itemname>Machine<0> <itemname>Machine<0>
Z
2.7.1.3 Folder configuration for import
2.7.1.3
• Place manual files (*.pdf, *.txt) and the manual information configuration file
(ManualInfo.xml) under the import folder.
For a text file, save it in the UTF-16 (other than Big Endian without BOM)
character code and import it.
• For manual files (*.html), store a set of files including index.html in a folder and
place the folder under the import folder. The folder containing a set of html files
is to be imported.
339
B-64647EN/02
• For icon image files (png, bmp, svg), store them under the image folder and
place the folder under the import folder.
The following example shows a configuration with the Manual folder in an external
device specified as the import folder.
1 External
device B-64484E pdf file (*.pdf)
Manual A_02.pdf
Manuals
B-644855 Text file (*.txt)
JA_02.txt
3 html file
B-64490 index (*.html)
JA_05 .html * Set of files
4 including
index.html
Manual information
5 Manual
Info.xml
configuration file
(ManualInfo.xml)
6
Icon image file (*.png,
Image *.png *.bmp, *.svg)
7 Fig. 2.7.1.3 Import Folder Configuration Example
2.7.1.4 Naming rules to update a manual file

8 2.7.1.4
If the following naming rules are met when a manual without the manual
information configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) is imported, the manual file or
folder can be updated during import without deleting the older version.
A1
 Naming rules
A2 • A file or folder must have the manual name and the version (two-digit number)
connected with "_" (underscore).
• The version of a file or folder to be imported must be higher than that of the
Z original file or folder.
For files: For folders:
AAAAA_BB. xxx AAAAA_BB

Manual Version (two- Manual Version (two-
name digit number) name digit number)
340
B-64647EN/02
● For pdf or text files
Current manual Manual to be imported
1
FANUC Series 30i- FANUC Series 30i-
MODEL B, Series MODEL B, Series
31i-MODEL B, Import 31i-MODEL B,
Series 32i-MODEL Series 32i-MODEL
B Lathe
OPERATOR'S
B Lathe
OPERATOR'S
2
MANUAL MANUAL
3
Version 1 Version 2
B-64484EN-1_01.pdf B-64484EN-1_02.pdf
The manual is updated because it is regarded as the same. 4

Fig. 2.7.1.4 (a) Example of Whether to Update the Manual (for pdf and Text Files)
5
● For html manuals
Current manual Manual to be imported 6

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,
Series 31i-MODEL B, Series
Import FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,
Series 31i-MODEL B, Series
7
32i-MODEL B 32i-MODEL B
Machining Center Machining Center
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Version 3
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Version 2
8
B-64484EN-2_03 (folder) B-64484EN-2_02 (folder)
A1
The manual is not updated because it is the same but has a lower version.
Fig. 2.7.1.4 (b) Example of Whether to Update the Manual (for html Files) A2
Z
2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function
2.7.2
Set the start page of the Web browser. You can also add an icon for each start
page to the Home screen.
Edit the Web browser configuration file (browserinfo.xml) stored in the data folder
(%APPDATA%¥USER¥Browser¥).
341
B-64647EN/02
2.7.2.1 Description of the Web browser configuration file

The description in each <startpage> tag is the information of each start page.
2.7.2.1

<browserinfo>
1 <startpage>
<name>default</name>
<url>http://xxxxxxxxxx</url>
</startpage>
2 <startpage>
<name>mtlinki</name>
<url>http://yyyyyyyyyy</url>
</startpage>
3 <startpage>
<name>zzz</name>
<url>http://zzzzzzzzz</url>
</startpage>
4 </browserinfo>
</xml>
5 Table 2.7.2.1 Description of the Web Browser Configuration File

XML tag Description
6 <name> ID (Set not to be duplicated, up to 63 characters)
<url> Start page URL
7
 • Only ID=default and ID=mtlinki are defined by default in
browserinfo.xml.
MEMO
8
A1 2.7.2.2
2.7.2.2
Setting the start page
To set the start page, change the application definition file (apps-general.xml) as
follows:
A2
<1> Edit apps-general.xml to add the web browser icon.
Z <2> Specify the ID defined in browserinfo.xml in the <subject> tag of the web
browser icon.
 • If ID is not specified, the start page defined in ID=default in

browserinfo.xml is displayed.
MEMO
342
B-64647EN/02
2.7.3 Editing the Version Information

2.7.3
You can add the version information of a file created by the machine manufacturer
to the version information display in the iHMI setting screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.7.3 (a) Version Information Display
7
To add a version information item, create a version information configuration file
(version.xml) and describe the definition of the version information item in this file.
Copy the created version information configuration file to the %APPDATA% folder. 8
The format of the version information configuration file is as follows:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?> A1

<version>
<entry>
<name>iHMI library</name >
<file>C:\Windows\SysWOW64\CncAppClient.dll</file>
A2
</entry>
<entry>
<name>Troubleshooting Data</name >
<version>1.1</version>
Z
</entry>
:
:
</version>
Table 2.7.3 Description in the Tags

<entry> tag Define each item of version information to be displayed.
<name> tag Describe a caption to be displayed in the version information item.
343
B-64647EN/02

<file> tag Describe the DLL file path.
The product version registered in the DLL file is displayed in the
version of version information.
1 <version> tag Describe a character string to be displayed in the version of

version information.
2 The added version information item is displayed between the iHMI application
version information and CNC system information.
3
4 Caption Version
5 Fig. 2.7.3 (b) Display Position of Added Version Information
6
• Describe a character string using alphabets and numbers in the
 <name> tag.
• The <entry> tag should have only either of the <file> tag or <version>
7 NOTE tag. If both are written, the <version> tag information is displayed.
8
A1 2.7.4 Using the Conventional Screen Call Function
2.7.4
With this function, you can call not only the standard screen but also the MANUAL
A2 GUIDE i screen.
If conditions to call the MANUAL GUIDE i screen are different from those to call
the standard screen, describe about them.
Z The following parameter settings are required to use the conventional screen call
function.
Table 2.7.4 Required Parameters for the Conventional Screen Call Function
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
8650 #0 (RSK) 1 Displays the MANUAL GUIDE i screen when
<RESET> is pressed.
344
B-64647EN/02
Bit number
Parameter Setting
(Parameter Function
No. value
name)
8650 #1 (CNA) 1 Keeps displaying the MANUAL GUIDE i
screen (not switching to the alarm screen)
even if an alarm occurs when the MANUAL 1
GUIDE i screen is displayed.
8654 #1 (CXW) 1 Allows you to use the conventional screen call
function without opening the maintenance 2
display.
3
2.7.4.1 Application
To use the conventional screen call function, the following applications are
4
2.7.4.1
required:
• File name
PANEL iH 5
ScrSwitchAppCE.exe
ScrSwtAppCE.dll
PANEL iH Pro 6
ScrSwitchApp.exe
ScrSwtApp.dll
• Storage folder 7
PANEL iH
\Storage Card\FANUC\iHMI\ScrSwitchApp\
PANEL iH Pro 8
C:\Program Files (x86)\FANUC\iHMI\ScrSwitchApp\
A1
2.7.4.2 Disabling the arbitrary axis switch function (MANUAL GUIDE i)
MANUAL GUIDE i does not support the arbitrary axis switch function.
2.7.4.2
To call the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, therefore, you need to disable the arbitrary A2
axis switch function.
Disable one of the following:
• Arbitrary axis switch function option
Z
• Arbitrary axis switch function parameter FAR (No. 11561#0): Set the value to "0"
(Disable).
2.7.4.3 Setting the MTB setting file

Set the following conventional screen call function items in the MTB configuration
2.7.4.3
file (Setting_data.txt).
• Enabling/disabling the conventional screen call function
• Setting the display type of the machining drawing screen
• Setting the display type of the NC statement conversion function screen
345
B-64647EN/02
• Setting the display type of the machining cycle creation screen

• Setting the display type of the machining simulation screen
• Setting the display type of the program restart screen

• File name
2 Setting_data.txt
4 2.7.4.4 Enabling/disabling the conventional screen call function

Enable/disable the conventional screen call function.
2.7.4.4
5
[Call_Maintenance_Display]

CALL_MAINTENANCE_DISPLAY_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the
conventional screen call function.
8
 • Describe each setting data under the group name of
A1 MEMO
[Call_Maintenance_Display].
A2 • Enabling/disabling the conventional screen call function

For CALL_MAINTENANCE_DISPLAY_ENABLE, set one of the following
Z values.
Table 2.7.4.4 Setting values for CALL_MAINTENANCE_DISPLAY_ENABLE

enable/disable
0 Function disable Disables the conventional screen call function.
Other than 1
Not set
1 Function enable Enables the conventional screen call function.
346
B-64647EN/02
2.7.4.5 Displaying the soft key to call the machining drawing screen
Set the display type of the machining drawing screen.
2.7.4.5

[Graphic_Drawing_of_Machining]

2
DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the machining drawing screen to iHMI
or the conventional screen. 3
[Graphic_Drawing_of_Machining].
4
MEMO
5
• Setting the display type of the machining drawing screen
For DISPLAY_TYPE, set one of the following values.
6
Table 2.7.4.5 Setting Values for DISPLAY_TYPE
Setting iHMI/ Description 7
Conventional
screen
iHMI iHMI Set the display type of the machining drawing 8
iHMI or other than screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
Not set A1
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Set the display type of the machining drawing
screen screen to the conventional screen.
A2
2.7.4.6 Displaying the soft key to call the NC statement conversion function
screen
Z
Set the display type of the NC statement conversion function screen.
2.7.4.6

[NC_Program_Conversion]

DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the NC statement conversion function
screen to iHMI or the conventional screen.
347
B-64647EN/02

[NC_Program_Conversion].
MEMO
1
2 • Setting the display type of the NC statement conversion function screen
3 Table 2.7.4.6 Setting Values for DISPLAY_TYPE

Setting iHMI/ Description
4 Conventional
screen
iHMI iHMI Set the display type of the NC statement
5 iHMI or other than conversion function screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
6 Not set
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Set the display type of the NC statement
screen conversion function screen to the
conventional screen.
7
To display the soft key to call the NC statement conversion function screen, set the
following parameter.
8 Parameter to enable the NC statement conversion function: NCO (No. 14836#0) =
0
A1
2.7.4.7 Displaying the soft key to call the cycle input screen
Set the display type of input screens, such as machining cycle, figure cycle,
2.7.4.7
A2 coordinate conversion cycle, measurement cycle, and drawing command.
Z  Detailed setting items

[Call_Maintenance_Display]
CYCLE_DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of input screens, such as
machining cycle, figure cycle, coordinate conversion cycle, measurement
cycle, and drawing command, to the iHMI screen or the conventional screen.

[Call_Maintenance_Display].
MEMO
348
B-64647EN/02
• Setting the display type of the cycle input screen

For CYCLE_DISPLAY_TYPE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.7.4.7 Setting Values for CYCLE_DISPLAY_TYPE

Setting iHMI/ Description 1
conventional
screen
iHMI iHMI Sets the display type of the cycle input 2
Other than screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
Not set 3
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Set the display type of the cycle input
4
To display the soft key to call the measurement cycle input screen, set the
following parameter.
Parameter to disable the Set-up guidance function: GID (No. 14856#0) = 0
5
To display the soft key to call the input screen for machining cycle, figure cycle,
coordinate conversion cycle, and drawing command, set the following
6
parameter.
• Parameter to enable the turning cycle function: TRN (No. 14856#2) = 1 7
• Parameter to enable the milling cycle function: MIL (No. 14856#3) = 1
8
2.7.4.8 Displaying the soft key to call the machining simulation screen
Set the display type of the machining simulation screen. A1
2.7.4.8

A2
• Specifiable key name Z
DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the machining simulation screen to the
iHMI screen or the conventional screen.

[Machining_Simulation_Enable].
MEMO
• Setting the display type of the machining simulation screen

349
B-64647EN/02

conventional
screen
1 iHMI
Other than
iHMI Sets the display type of the machining
simulation screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
2 Not set
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Sets the display type of the machining
screen simulation screen to the conventional
3 screen.
To display the soft key to call the machining simulation screen, set the following
4 parameter.
Parameter to enable the animation function: ANM (No. 14856#1) = 1
5 2.7.4.9 Displaying the soft key to call the program restart screen
6 Set the display type of the program restart screen.
2.7.4.9

[Program_Restart]
8 DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the program restart screen to the iHMI
screen or the conventional screen.
A1
[Program_Restart].
A2 MEMO
Z • Setting the display type of the program restart screen


conventional
screen
iHMI iHMI Sets the display type of the program restart
Other than screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
Not set
350
B-64647EN/02

conventional
screen
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Sets the display type of the program restart
1
2.7.4.10
2.7.4.10
Setting the function to call the MANUAL GUIDE i screen
The following functions support calling the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
2
• Thread re-machining function
• Handle machining function
3
• Edit list function
4
 Thread re-machining function
You can display the [Thread Re-machining] soft key that calls a window to select
thread re-machining in the JOG/HND mode base screen.
5
● Detailed setting items 6
[Thread_Repairing]
7
DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the thread re-machining screen to the
iHMI screen or the conventional screen. 8
[Thread_Repairing].
A1
MEMO
A2
• Setting the display type of the thread re-machining screen
Z
Table 2.7.4.10 (a) Setting Values for DISPLAY_TYPE
conventional
screen
iHMI iHMI Sets the display type of the thread re-
Other than machining screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
Not set
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Sets the display type of the thread re-
screen machining screen to the conventional
screen.
351
B-64647EN/02
To display the [Thread Re-machining] soft key, set the following parameter.
Table 2.7.4.10 (b) Settings to Display the [Thread Re-machining] Soft Key
Item Setting
1 Parameter to enable thread re-machining TRP(No.27140#7) = 1
Parameter to enable the turning cycle TRN(No.14856#2) = 0
function
2
 Handle machining function
3 You can display the icon to call the handle machining screen in the utility slide.
4 ● Detailed setting items

[Handle_Machining]
6 DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the handle machining screen to the
iHMI screen or the conventional screen.
7  • Describe each setting data under the group name of

[Handle_Machining].
MEMO
8 • Setting the display type of the handle machining screen

A1
Table 2.7.4.10 (c) Setting Values for DISPLAY_TYPE
A2 Setting iHMI/
conventional
Description
screen
Z iHMI
Other than
iHMI Sets the display type of the handle
machining screen to iHMI.
CONVENTIONAL
Not set
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Sets the display type of the handle
screen machining screen to the conventional
screen.
To display the handle machining icon, set the following items.
352
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.7.4.10 (d) Settings to Display the Handle Machining Icon

Item Setting
Handle machining function option Enabled
Manual linear/circular interpolation function Enabled
option 1
 Edit list function 2
You can display the [Edit List] soft key that calls the Edit List screen in the EDIT
mode base screen.
3
[Process_List_Editing]
4
DISPLAY_TYPE: Set the display type of the Edit List screen to the iHMI screen 5
or the conventional screen.
6
[Process_List_Editing].
MEMO
7
• Setting the display type of the Edit List screen
8
Table 2.7.4.10 (e) Setting Values for DISPLAY_TYPE A1
conventional
screen A2
iHMI iHMI Sets the display type of the Edit List screen
Other than
CONVENTIONAL
to iHMI.
Z
Not set
CONVENTIONAL Conventional Sets the display type of the Edit List screen
screen to the conventional screen.
To display the [Edit List] soft key, set the following items.
353
B-64647EN/02
Table 2.7.4.10 (f) Settings to Display the [Edit List] Soft Key
Item Setting
• Milling option One of the left options must be enabled.
• Turning option
1 •
•
Animation option
Set-up option
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
354
B-64647EN/02
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES
2.8
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE

FILES
The large-capacity memory program operation function allows you to perform 1
automatic operation with the programs stored in a program storage file
(Ncprog.bin) on the PANEL iH Pro.
2
 • This function can only be used when the "large-capacity memory
program operation function" option is used. 3
MEMO
4
2.8.1 Program Storage Files
2.8.1
The program storage file is a file that stores folders and programs that can be
accessed directly from the iHMI CNC. 5
• Maximum size of a program storage file: 40 GB
• Maximum size per program: 2 GB 6
• Maximum number of folders and programs that can be stored: total of 1000 (for
folders and programs combined)
7
8
2.8.2 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin)
2.8.2
Create a program storage file with an machine manufacturer application using any A1
one of the equipment and tools.
• PANEL iH Pro
A2
• Program storage file editing tool that runs on a commercially available PC
(Fbinbuild.exe)
• Program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll)
Z
2.8.3 Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll)

2.8.3
The program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll) is a group of functions, where
program storage file editing tool functions are made into a library so that a
program storage file (Ncprog.bin) can be created or edited from an machine
manufacturer application.
355
B-64647EN/02
The following files are included in the folders "win32" (32-bit version) and "x64"
(64-bit version) of the folder "Ncprog\Ncprogdll\" in the FOCAS2 library of the CNC
Application Development Kit (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).
• Ncprog.dll (program storage file edit library)
1 • Ncprog.lib (import library)

• Ncprog.h (header file for C language)
2
 • The program storage file edit library contains 32- and 64-bit versions.
• You can simultaneously execute the functions of the program storage
3 MEMO file edit library from multiple threads.
4 Table 2.8.3 Function List

No. Function name Function description
5 1 fbin_create Creates a new program storage file

(asynchronous function).
×
6 2
3
fbin_open
fbin_close
Opens a program storage file.
Closes a program storage file.


4 fbin_expansion Expands a program storage file (asynchronous ×
function).
7 5 fbin_get_current_folder Obtains a current folder name. 
6 fbin_set_current_folder Changes a current folder. 
8 7
8
fbin_create_program
fbin_delete_program
Creates a program in the current folder.
Deletes a program from the current folder.
×
×
9 fbin_rename_program Change a program name in the current folder. ×
A1 10 fbin_create_folder Creates a sub folder in the current folder. ×
11 fbin_delete_folder Deletes a sub folder from the current folder. ×
A2 12
13
fbin_rename_folder
fbin_information
Changes a sub folder name in the current folder.
Obtains the information of a program storage file. 
×
14 fbin_findfirst Starts search for folder/program information. 

Z 15 fbin_findnext Continues search for folder/program information. 
16 fbin_findclose Closes the find handle. 
17 fbin_open_program Opens a program. 
18 fbin_close_program Closes a program. 
19 fbin_get_program_entry Obtains a program entry number. 
20 fbin_seek Moves a program pointer. 
21 fbin_tell Obtains a program pointer. 
22 fbin_read Reads a program. 
23 fbin_write Writes a program. (1) -
24 fbin_write2 Writes a program. (2) -
25 fbin_flash_program Updates program write information. -
356
B-64647EN/02
No. Function name Function description

26 fbin_condense Arranges a program storage file (asynchronous -
function).
27 fbin_get_progress Obtains the progress rate of the asynchronous 
28 fbin_get_state
function.
Obtains the progress state of the asynchronous 
1
function.
29 fbin_cancel Aborts processing of the asynchronous function.  2
: Indicates a function that can be safely used when the program storage file
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC.
-: Indicates a function that can be used when the program storage file 3
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC, but requires attention.
×: Indicates a function that cannot be used when the program storage file
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC. 4
• Even if the contents of the program storage file (PC_MEM device)

5
is changed using this library when this file is selected in the CNC,
this change cannot be judged on the CNC side. Avoid using write-
related functions when the program storage file is selected in the 6
CNC. Otherwise, the workpiece that is being machined may be
broken, possibly leading to damage to the machine.
If you unavoidably need to use them, use them in a state that does 7
not interfere with the operation by, for example, deselecting
corresponding programs on the CNC side, and always sufficiently
check the operation.
• To use the program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll) when the
8
program storage file (PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC,
WARNING
always sufficiently check the safety by using FOCAS2 functions,
etc.
A1
You can check the CNC state and set the program operation/no
edit settings with the FOCAS2 functions below:
- cnc_pdf_rdmain: Obtains main program information. A2
- cnc_statinfo2: Reads CNC status information. (2)
- cnc_setpdf_pglock: Sets program operation/no edit settings.
- cnc_mcdp_mountchk: Checks the device selection state of a Z
program storage file.
- pmc_rdpmcrng: Reads PMC arbitrary data (range
specification).
- pmc_wrpmcrng: Writes PMC arbitrary data (range
specification).
357
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
358
3
CREATING A USER 1
APPLICATION 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes how to create the machine manufacturer's unique
application and add it.
A
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION ........................ 360
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION ....................................... 362
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE ......................... 376
3.4 STARTING A USER APPLICATION FROM A VERTICAL SOFT KEY ...... 385
359
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER 3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION 
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION
3.1
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER

APPLICATION
1 The iHMI allows you to add an application (user application) created by the
machine manufacturer to the Home screen. This chapter describes how to create
2 a user application and how to add it to the iHMI.
3  • For the partial customization of the iHMI Home screen, see "Chapter 2
SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS".
MEMO
4
5
3.1.1 Adding an Application to the iHMI
6 3.1.1
To add a user application to the iHMI Home screen, the following data needs to be
created.
7 Table 3.1.1 Data to Create Required to Add a User Application

Data to create Note
8 User application
Icon image file Image created with a general painting tool (png, bmp, svg)
A1 Application definition file Information such as an application name and Home screen
position
FANUC designated format (For details, see "2.2.1 Application
Definition File".)
A2
Add an application by creating data on the PC and transferring it to the CNC via a
Z USB flash drive.
Data transferring
User application (exe, dll, etc.)
Icon image file (bmp, jpg, etc.)
Icon displayed on the Home
Home image definition file
Execute the application from
(FANUC designated text format)
the Home
Fig. 3.1.1 Example of Adding an Application
360
B-64647EN/02
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION
• When adding an application to iHMI, be sure to place it in a directory

NOTE
under Storage Card2 in PANEL iH.
If an application is placed in any other directory than Storage Card, it
is deleted when iHMI is updated.
1
3.1.2
3.1.2
User Application 2
There are two ways to create a user application.
• Using a general development tool (Visual Studio)

3
• Using FANUC PICTURE (FANUC's unique CNC screen creation tool)
4
Each has the following features.
Table 3.1.2 Features of Visual Studio and FANUC PICTURE

5
Visual Studio FANUC PICTURE
Features Creates a complex application using Creates a screen quickly by pasting 6
C/C++, C#, and Visual Basic. Allows screen parts. Allows creation of a
free screen creation. screen that meets the iHMI screen
specifications. 7
Library Windows API Screen parts such as a button and
FOCAS2 library lamp
C/C++ standard library FOCAS2 library (subset) 8
.NET Framework Arithmetic operation
Purpose Complex screen development, such Relatively easy development of a
as the machine manufacturer's screen, such as a machine A1
unique program edit screen or operator's panel screen or
animation parameter setting screen
Screen A2
example
Select an appropriate tool to be used according to the application purposes.

Before creating an application, see "1.1.3 Settings for When an Application Is
Started/Running" to check if the required environment is provided.
361
B-64647EN/02
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION
3.2
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICA-

TION
1 This section describes how to create a user application using a general
development tool (Visual Studio) and how to use the iHMI library.
2
3 3.2.1 Overview of Creating an Application
3.2.1
You can create an iHMI user application in an environment as described in "1.1.3

Settings for When an Application Is Started/Running". For how to build an
4 environment, see the document supplied with the SDK.
You can use the iHMI library, FOCAS2 library, or a general library as necessary.
Section 3.2.2 and subsequent sections describe how to create a user application
5 using the iHMI library.
By editing the application definition file, you can add a created application to the
iHMI Home screen.
6
• Before using a general library, the machine manufacturer must fully
7  verify its operation.
• For details about the FOCAS2 library, see the dedicated manual.
MEMO • For details about the application definition file, see "2.2.1 Application
8 Definition File".
A1 3.2.2 Using the iHMI Library

3.2.2
In the iHMI, the iHMI library is available for the user application to interact with the
A2 iHMI. Using the iHMI library allows the following operations.
• Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application

Z • Starting a specific application from the user application
• Displaying a specific screen when starting the user application
 • For details about the iHMI library, see the SDK.

• To perform the above operations, you need to register an application
MEMO as a client to Application Manager.
362
B-64647EN/02
3.2.2.1 Application Manager

Application Manager is an application to manage the screen switching settings
3.2.2.1
and language settings for iHMI applications. The iHMI library is used to use the
screen switching function and iHMI setting information of Application Manager.
To use an iHMI library API, you need to register it as a client to Application 1

Manager. Client registration requires to use the RegisterClient function in the iHMI
library in the user application and change the application definition file.
2
 • Some APIs in the iHMI library can be used without client registration.
• For details about the RegisterClient function, see the function
3
MEMO specifications.
4
#include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h"
:
Include the header file 5
LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE:
6
StartAppClient();
7
Start client process RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd) ;
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100:
Register client switch (wParam) { Put the same value
case APP_SHUTDOWN:
DestroyWindow(hWnd); 8
break;
}
:
break;
End client process
A1
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
PostQuitMessage(0);
break; A2
default:
return DefWindowProc(hWnd, message, wParam, lParam);
}
return 0;
Z
}
:
363
B-64647EN/02
 Description example of the application definition file

When the RegisterClient function is used, specify "waitregister" in the <entry> tag
option in addition to the general definition.
<entry option="waitregister">
1 <name>AppTest</name>
<caption>
2
<en>Main Application</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション </ja>
</caption>
<file>%APPPATH%\AppPrimary\AppPrimary.exe</file>
3 <image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
</entry>
4 3.2.2.2 Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application

In the iHMI, you can overlap the user application with the iHMI application.
3.2.2.2
5
6
7
8
A1 Fig. 3.2.2.2 Display Example of iHMI Applications
The following shows an example of displaying the user application in full screen
A2 and the iHMI in the 15-inch size at the lower right on the 19-inch display unit. It
also adds an icon representing the user application to the Home screen and
switches between displaying the entire user application and overlapping it with the
Z iHMI.
 Description example of the user application

Set the user application to be active when it is started from the Home screen and
inactive when another application is running.
 The SetWindowLong function is Win32API. For details, see the MSDN

website.
MEMO
364
B-64647EN/02
:
{
switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE: 1
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd);
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100: Change the style not to 2
switch (wParam) { activate the application during
case APP_ACTIVATED:
activation
SetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE,
GetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE) | WS_EX_NOACTIVATE);
3
break;
case APP_DEACTIVATED:
SetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE,
GetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE) & ~WS_EX_NOACTIVATE);
4
break;
case APP_SHUTDOWN: Change the style
DestroyWindow(hWnd);
break;
back during 5
} deactivation
6
break;
:
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
PostQuitMessage(0);
break; 7
default:
}
return 0; 8
}
:
A1
Specify "alwaysvisible" in the <entry> tag option in addition to the general
definition.
A2
<entry option="alwaysvisible, waitregister">
<name>AppTest</name> Z
<caption>
<en>Main Application</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション </ja>
</caption>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
</entry>
365
B-64647EN/02
 Description example of the iHMI whole configuration file

The display position and size of an iHMI application can be changed in the iHMI
whole configuration file. (For details about the iHMI whole configuration file, see
"2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File".)
1 <settings>
:
<display>
2 <inchx10>150</inchx10>
<x>256</x>
<y>256</y>
</display>
3 </settings>
4 3.2.2.3 Starting a specific application from the user application

You can start a specific application from the user application. In addition, the CNC
3.2.2.3
operation screen or maintenance display can be started with a specific screen

5 displayed.
The following shows an example of pressing a button on the user application to

6 display the program display screen of the maintenance display and the program
manager slide of the CNC operation screen.
7  Description example of the user application

To start a specific application, start it using the ExecuteApp function.
8 Specify the application ID you want to start in the first argument and the screen
switching ID in the second argument.
A1 • For the screen switching ID for the CNC operation screen and the
 maintenance display, see the Appendix.
A2 MEMO
• For details about the ExecuteApp function, see the function
specifications.
366
B-64647EN/02
:
{
HWND hButton1, hButton2;
static bool pending = false; 1
switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE:
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd); 2
hButton1 = CreateWindow(TEXT("BUTTON"), TEXT("SDF(Program)"), WS_CHILD |
WS_VISIBLE, 10, 10, 200, 23, hWnd, (HMENU)100, hInst, NULL);
hButton2 = CreateWindow(TEXT("BUTTON"), TEXT("NC(Program Slide)"), WS_CHILD |
3
WS_VISIBLE, 235, 10, 200, 23, hWnd, (HMENU)200, hInst, NULL);
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100:
switch (wParam) {
4
case APP_SHUTDOWN:
DestroyWindow(hWnd); Process when the
break;
case COMMAND_COMPLETED:
application is started up 5
pending = false;
6
break;
}
break; Start the application
case WM_COMMAND: screen by pressing the
switch (LOWORD(wParam)) {
case 100:
button
7
if (!pending) {
if (!ExecuteApp(_T("SDF"), _T("0101"))) {
if (IsExecutionPending()) {
pending = true; 8
}
}
}
break; A1
case 200:
if (!pending) {
if (!ExecuteApp(_T("CNCOPERA"), _T("open,ProgMgrSld"))) {
if (IsExecutionPending()) {
A2
pending = true;
}
}
}
Z
break;
}
break;
:
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
}
return 0;
}
367
B-64647EN/02
3.2.2.4 Displaying a specific screen when starting the user application

By using the screen switching ID specified in the second argument of the
3.2.2.4
ExecuteApp function, you can change the application behavior (Example: Display
a specific screen of the user application).
1 The following shows an example of setting an icon to display Screen A and

Screen B of the user application on the Home screen.
2  Description example of the user application

The screen switching ID can be obtained by the GetSubject function. If the screen
3 switching ID is changed, you will be notified of APP_SUBJECT_CHANGED. (For
details about the GetSubject function, see the function specifications.)
4 #include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h"
:
{
5 switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE:
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd);
6 break;
case WM_USER + 0x100: Change notification of
switch (wParam) { screen switching ID
7
case APP_SUBJECT_CHANGED:
If(GetSubject() == _T("SCREENA")) { Screen switching ID
//Describe a process of displaying Screen A.
} else if (GetSubject() == _T("SCREENB")) {
8 }
//Describe a process of displaying Screen B.
InvalidateRect(hWnd, NULL, TRUE);

break;
A1 case APP_SHUTDOWN:
DestroyWindow(hWnd);
break;
}
A2 :
break;
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
Z PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
}
return 0;
}
:

To set an icon to display Screen A and Screen B of the user application on the
Home screen, specify the screen switching ID set in the <subject> tag in the user
application in addition to the general definition.
368
B-64647EN/02
<name>AppTest</name>
<caption>
<en>Main Application (Screen A)</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション（画面 A）</ja> 1
</caption>
<subject>SCREENA</subject> 2
</entry>
<name>AppTest</name>
3
<caption>
<en>Main Application (Screen B)</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション（画面 B）</ja>
</caption>
4
<subject>SCREENB</subject>
</entry>
5
6
3.2.2.5 Calling a specified manual from an external application
The iHMI manual viewer allows you to call the following functions for a PDF
3.2.2.5
manual registered in the manual viewer from an external application. 7

• Opening the manual
• Opening with the page number specified 8
• Opening with the content specified
To specify a manual to call from an external application, use the ExecuteApp

A1
function in the Application Manager.
A2
• For details about the ExecuteApp function, see the function
 specifications.
• The [Back to App] soft key in the manual viewer is normally disabled
Z
MEMO but becomes enabled when a manual is called from an external
application.

NOTE
• Only manuals registered in the manual viewer can be called from
external applications. To call a manual, import it to the manual viewer
beforehand.
369
B-64647EN/02
 Opening the manual

Describe the following in the argument of the ExecuteApp function:
("Manual","File name")
Specify a pdf file name you want to call for the file name. The path is not included
1 in the file name.
Description example:
2 ExecuteApp("Manual","B-64484JA_06.pdf");
3  Opening with the page number specified

Describe the following in the argument of the ExecuteApp function:
("Manual","File name#page=Page number")
4 Specify a pdf file name you want to call for the file name and the page number you
want to open for the page number.
5 Description example:
If you want to open page 5 of the manual B-64484EN_06.pdf, describe the
6 following:
ExecuteApp("Manual","B-64484EN_06.pdf#page=5");
7 • Since the display unit is set to one page in the pdf file, the page
number may be different from one written in the pdf file.
8 
NOTE
• If you specify a value other than a number for the page number, the
first page is displayed.
• If a number greater than the total number of pages is specified, the
last page is displayed.
A1
A2  Opening with the content specified
For a pdf file with content information, you can specify the content by describing
the following in the argument of the ExecuteApp function:
Z ("Manual","File name#tag=Content name")
• Specify a pdf file name you want to call for the file name and a content
name you want to open for the content name. The content name is a
 character string in information (content) linked to a specific page in the
pdf file. The page with a content that matches the string of the
MEMO
specified content name is opened. You do not need to enter all the
string as long as the characters from the beginning are matched.
370
B-64647EN/02
Description example:
If you want to open Section 1.1.5 in the table of contents of the manual B-
64484EN-2_06.pdf, describe the following:
ExecuteApp("Manual","B-64484EN-2_06.pdf#tag=1.1.5");
1
 • If you specify a content that does not exist, the first page is opened.
MEMO 2
3
3.2.2.6 Displaying the startup screen
3.2.2.6
You can start an application created by MTB, instead of the Home Screen, as the 4
default screen at iHMI startup. You can set to prevent this application screen
(hereinafter referred to as "startup screen") from switching to another iHMI screen
until a specific user operation, such as license agreement, is performed. 5
The following shows how to create the startup screen.
 Registering an application
6
To display the startup screen, register an application for screen display to the
Application Manager.
Add the following application definition to the application definition file (apps-
7
general.xml):

8
<apps home="MainMenu" first="StartupApp">
<entry option="startup,nomenu,waitregister,noinformation">
<name>StartupApp</name>
<category>Utility</category> Specify the same application name
A1
<file>D:\Apps\StartupApp.exe</file>
</entry>
: A2
:
</apps>
Z
Table 3.2.2.6 Description in the Tags
XML Description
attribute
first attribute Specify the name of an application started first at power-on.
371
B-64647EN/02
XML Description
attribute
option Specify the following separated by commas:
attribute
option Description Omitt
1 able
startup Starts the application when the Application No
Manager is started.
2 nomenu Does not display the application on the Home Yes
screen menu.
3 waitregister Starts the application in synchronization with

the Application Manager.
No
noinformation Does not display the Information Center. Yes
4
5  • If you set the Information Center to be displayed on the startup screen,
you do not need to specify noinformation in the option attribute.
MEMO
6
7  Application startup process
Start the application for screen display by executing the following process in the
CncAppClient library:
8
<1> Execute StartAppClient.
A1 <2> Register an application with RegisterClient.
<3> Lock the menu (Home screen) key with the SetAppKeyLockBits function.
A2 Example:
StartAppClient();
Z RegisterClient(_T("StartupApp"), WM_USER, hWnd);
SetAppKeyLockBits(1 << 9);
 • If you set the Home screen to be displayed from the startup screen,
you do not need to execute SetAppKeyLockBits.
MEMO
 Application end process

To end the startup screen, perform the following process in the CncAppClient
library:
372
B-64647EN/02
<1> If necessary, use the FOCAS2 function to notify the PMC ladder of startup
screen end information via the PMC signal.
<2> Unlock the menu (Home screen) key with the SetAppKeyLockBits function.
<3> Start the Home screen with the ExecuteApp function. 1
<4> Execute EndAppClient.
2
Example:
SetAppKeyLockBits(0);
ExecuteApp (_T("MainMenu"), _T("")); 3
EndAppClient();
4
 • If you did not execute SetAppKeyLockBits at startup, you do not need
MEMO
to execute SetAppKeyLockBits at end.
5
6
 Implementation example
The following shows an example of implementing the startup screen using C++:
7
• Display screen
8
A1
Message
display area
A2
Z
Accept button
Fig. 3.2.2.6 Implementation of the startup screen
373
B-64647EN/02
• Code
#include "stdafx.h"
#include "StartupApp.h"
#include "cncappclient.h"
1 // Forward declarations of functions included in this code module:

INT_PTR CALLBACK DialogProc(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM);
2
int APIENTRY _tWinMain(HINSTANCE hInstance,
HINSTANCE hPrevInstance,
LPTSTR lpCmdLine,
int nCmdShow)
3 {
UNREFERENCED_PARAMETER(hPrevInstance);
UNREFERENCED_PARAMETER(lpCmdLine);
4 // Perform application initialization:

HWND hDlg = CreateDialog(hInstance, MAKEINTRESOURCE(IDD_STARTUP), NULL,
DialogProc);
ShowWindow(hDlg, nCmdShow);
5 HACCEL hAccelTable = LoadAccelerators(hInstance, MAKEINTRESOURCE(IDC_STARTUPAPP));
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("StartupApp"), WM_USER, hDlg); Startup process
6 SetAppKeyLockBits(1 << 9);
// Main message loop:

MSG msg;
7 while (GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0)) {
if (!IsDialogMessage(hDlg, &msg)) {
if (!TranslateAccelerator(msg.hwnd, hAccelTable, &msg)) {
TranslateMessage(&msg);
8 }
DispatchMessage(&msg);
}
}
A1
A2
Z
374
B-64647EN/02
//
// Execute FOCAS2 functions here if necessary
//
SetAppKeyLockBits(0);
ExecuteApp(_T("MainMenu"), _T("")); End process
EndAppClient();
1
return (int) msg.wParam;
}
// 2
// FUNCTION: DialogProc(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM)
//
// PURPOSE: Processes messages for the dialog box.
//
3
INT_PTR CALLBACK DialogProc(HWND hDlg, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
UNREFERENCED_PARAMETER(lParam);
switch (message) {
4
case WM_INITDIALOG:
return (INT_PTR)TRUE;
case WM_COMMAND:
5
if (LOWORD(wParam) == IDOK) {
6
EndDialog(hDlg, LOWORD(wParam));
PostQuitMessage(0);
return (INT_PTR)TRUE;
}
}
break;
7
return (INT_PTR)FALSE;
}
8
• Dialog box resource
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//
A1
// Dialog
//
IDD_STARTUP DIALOGEX 0, 0, 316, 182

A2
STYLE DS_SETFONT | DS_MODALFRAME | DS_FIXEDSYS | DS_CENTER | WS_POPUP | WS_CAPTION
375
B-64647EN/02
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE
3.3
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH

FANUC PICTURE
1 A screen customized for MTB can be created using FANUC PICTURE.
2
 • For details about FANUC PICTURE, see "FANUC PICTURE
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-66284).
3 MEMO
4
5 3.3.1 Creating a New Customized Screen
3.3.1
 Customizing a screen
6 Customize a screen for MTB according to the following steps.
<1> Start FANUC PICTURE for iHMI.

7
<2> Select [File] > [Project] > [New] from the menu bar.
8
<3> Enter a folder to create a project and project name and then click the <OK>
button.
A1 The [Setting of Project] dialog box appears.
A2 <4> Select a resolution from the [Resolution] combo box and then click the <OK>
button.
<5> Select [File] > [Screen] > [New] from the menu bar.
The edit screen appears.
376
B-64647EN/02
<6> Arrange control and create a customized screen.
<7> Select [Project] > [Make MEM File] from the menu bar.
1
<8> Click the <OK> button to create a MEM file.
When a MEM file has been created, a message box will be displayed. 2
 Transferring screen data to the display unit
<1> Select [Project] > [Output MEM File] from the menu bar.
3
<2> Enter a name of the path to the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, 4
etc.) in [Transfer to] and enable [The FP driver is transferred].
5
<3> Click the <OK> button.
A "FANUC PICTURE" folder will be created at the destination.
6
<4> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) specified in the
step <2> to the display unit and execute "FANUC PICTURE¥installer.bat" on
the external device.
7
 Registering with the Home screen 8
<1> Open the application definition file "apps-general.xml" stored in the
%APPDATA% folder using a text editor.
A1
• The text editor used for editing should support the character code
described as shown below in the first line of "apps-general.xml". A2
 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>
NOTE
Character code
Z
377
B-64647EN/02
<2> Add an <entry> tag to "apps-general.xml" as shown below.

Insert it before </apps> at the end of the file in alignment with the <entry> tags
used to define another application.

1 <apps home="MainMenu" info="AppMgr">
<entry>
:
2 </entry>
<entry>
<entry> tags of another application
:
</entry>
3 Describe the following <entry> tag for FANUC PICTURE.

</apps>
4 Added contents are as follows. A delimiter "\" for the folder should be a single-
byte character.
5 For PANEL iH Pro
<entry>
6 <name>AppFP</name>
<caption>
<en>FANUC PICTURE</en>
7 </caption>
<file>D:\FANUC_PICTURE\FPDriverApp.exe</file>
8
<current>D:\FANUC_PICTURE</current>
</entry>
For PANEL iH
A1 <entry>
<name>AppFP</name>
A2 <caption>
<en>FANUC PICTURE</en>
</caption>
<file>\storage card2\FANUC_PICTURE\FPDriverApp.exe</file>
Z <image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
<current>\storage card2\FANUC_PICTURE</current>
</entry>
The following table shows details about each tag.
XML tag Description

<name> Specify "AppFP".
<category> A category whose icon is displayed on the Home screen.
Specify Planning, Machining, Improvement or Utility.
<caption> An application name displayed on the Home screen. Specify
arbitrarily.
<en>: English name, <ja>: Japanese name
378
B-64647EN/02
XML tag Description

<file> Absolute path of the FP driver file name
<current> Folder path of the FP driver installation destination
<image> Absolute path of the file name of an icon image (png, bmp, svg) to
be displayed on the Home screen used to open a screen created
with FANUC PICTURE
1
2
Incorrect description of apps-general.xml may prevent exit of the iHMI
loading screen and display of the Home screen. In this case, correct
apps-general.xml according to the following steps. 3
<1> Turn off the display unit power.

NOTE
<2> Turn on the power again while pressing "6" and "7" of the MDI unit
together. 4
The Windows desktop screen appears. At this point, ignore the
NCBOOT32 screen.
<3> Correct apps-general.xml using a text editor and save it. 5
<4> Turn on the display unit power again.
6
 Displaying a customized screen
<1> Start iHMI. 7
When iHMI is running already, restart it.
<2> Press the icon registered in the step 2 in "■ Registering with the Home screen".
8
The created customized screen appears.
A1
 • You can also add a shortcut definition to the configuration file
(apps-general.xml) and start the application via the shortcut. For A2
MEMO the setting method, see "2.2.1.2 Setting a shortcut key".
3.3.2 Changing a Customized Screen

3.3.2
To change a created customized screen, follow the steps below.
<1> Start FANUC PICTURE for iHMI.
<2> Select [File] > [Project] > [Open] from the menu bar and select a project to edit.
379
B-64647EN/02
<3> Edit the customized screen.
<4> Select [Project] > [Make MEM File] from the menu bar.
1 <5> Click the <OK> button to create a MEM file.

When a MEM file has been created, a message box will be displayed.
2
<6> Select [Project] > [Output MEM File] from the menu bar.
3 <7> Enter a name of the path to the external device (USB flash drive, memory card,
etc.) in [Transfer to].
4
<8> Click the <OK> button.
A "FANUC PICTURE" folder will be created at the destination.
5
<9> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) to the display
6 unit while it is turned off.
<10>Start the display unit and press the icon for the operator's panel of the Home
7 screen.
8 <11>When the following dialog box appears, click [Yes].
A1
A2
Z The created customized screen appears.
380
B-64647EN/02
3.3.3 Simultaneous Display with Another Application

3.3.3
iHMI can display a customized screen of FANUC PICTURE simultaneously with

the Home screen or another application.
1
2
3
4
Outer area (solid line): Customized screen
Inner area (dashed line): CNC operation screen (placed at front) 5
Fig. 3.3.3 Display Example of a Customized Screen of FANUC PICTURE
6
Create a screen according to the following steps.
7
<1> Customize a screen using FANUC PICTURE.
For how to customize a screen, see "3.3.1 Creating a New Customized
Screen". 8
<2> Copy "Data¥screen_setting.xml" in the installation folder to the following folder
of the display unit.
A1
For PANEL iH: Storage
Card2\FANUC_PICTURE\OPRATOR_SCREEN_001\data\
For PANEL iH Pro: D:\FANUC_PICTURE\OPRATOR_SCREEN_001\data
A2
<3> Add and change the codes shown in shading in the customized screen setting Z
section in the Home screen configuration file "apps-general.xml" and save the
addition and change.
<apps home="AppFP">
:
<entry option="waitregister,alwaysvisible,lockpos">
<name>AppFP</name>
:
<subject>App</subject>
</entry>
381
B-64647EN/02
<4> Copy the <entry> tag changed in the step 3 and paste it to the preceding part.
<apps home="AppFP">
:
:
</entry>
Copy
:
</entry>
3
<5> Add "nomenu" to the option attribute of the copied <entry> tag and delete the
4 value of the <subject> tag.
<apps home="AppFP">
5 :
<entry option="nomenu,waitregister,alwaysvisible,lockpos">
<name>AppFP</name>
:
6 <subject></subject>
</entry>
<name>AppFP</name>
7 :
<subject>App</subject>
</entry>
8
<6> Add and change the codes shown in shading in the Home screen setting
section in the Home screen configuration file "apps-general.xml" and save the
A1 addition and change.
<entry option="startup,waitregister">
A2 <name>MainMenu</name>
:
</entry>
Z
<7> Add and change the following codes shown in shading in the Home screen
configuration file "settings-general.xml" and save the addition and change.
382
B-64647EN/02
Table 3.3.3 (a) Contents of the Configuration File

File contents Element Value
"NN": Section to change name
<settings> inchx10 Application layout
:
<display position="dynamic">
104: 10.4 inches
150: 15 inches
1
<inchx10>NN</inchx10>
190: 19 inches
<x>NN</x>
<y>NN</y>
</display>
x Initial application display
position: X coordinate
2
</settings>
y Initial application display
position: Y coordinate 3
<8> When the Home screen has been started already, restart it. 4
Subsequently, the customized screen is displayed on the back of the Home
screen and the application started from the Home screen.
5
To change the customized screen, follow the steps below to update.
<1> Save a MEM file created after changing the screen with FANUC PICTURE in 6
an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.).
See "3.3.1 Creating a New Customized Screen".
7
<2> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) to the display
unit while it is turned off. 8
<3> Start the display unit and press the icon for the operator's panel of the Home
screen.
A1
<4> When the following dialog box appears, click [Yes]. A2

Z
The created customized screen appears.

NOTE
Key input to a customized screen displayed on the back is unavailable.
383
B-64647EN/02
 Changing the screen display position

Use the following FP function to change the position of the application displayed
simultaneously with a customized screen.
1 Table 3.3.3 (b) FP Function

Item Description
Function name setfrontpos[x_y]
2 Data type None
Argument x: X coordinate after change
3 y: Y coordinate after change
4
 • For how to use the FP function, see "FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-66284).
MEMO
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
384
B-64647EN/02
3.4 STARTING A USER APPLICATION FROM A VERTICAL SOFT KEY
3.4
3.4 STARTING A USER APPLICATION

FROM A VERTICAL SOFT KEY
When you customize a vertical soft key on the CNC operation screen, you can call 1
the corresponding user application registered to iHMI by pressing the customized
soft key.
2
3.4.1 Overview of Vertical Soft Key Customization 3
3.4.1
You can customize blank horizontal soft keys on the second page (except for
some fixed keys).
4
Vertical soft
keys 5
6
7
Fig. 3.4.1 Vertical Soft Keys (Second Page)

8
The number of soft keys that can be customized varies depending on the display A1
unit size as shown in the table below:
Table 3.4.1 Number of soft keys that can be customized A2

Display unit size Number of soft keys that can be customized
10.4" Six Z
15" Six
19" Nine

NOTE
• If you cannot call an application from a customized vertical soft key,
the cause is displayed in the message box. Remove the cause and
call the application again.
385
B-64647EN/02
3.4.2 Vertical Soft Key Setting File

3.4.2
To customize a vertical soft key, define the vertical soft key array in the vertical soft
key setting file.
The specifications of the vertical soft key setting file are as shown in the table
1 below:
Table 3.4.2 (a) Specifications of the Vertical Soft Key Setting File
2 Item Description
Description format XML (Ver.1.0)
3 Text encoding UTF-16 LE (with BOM)
File name 10.4-inch VSKeySetting104.xml If the left file does not exist,
display the following file is loaded:
4 15-inch VSKeySetting150.xml VSKeySetting.xml
display
5 19-inch
display
VSKeySetting190.xml
Saved PANEL iH \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
6 location
(folder)
PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
(SSD type)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
7 (HDD type)
8 Elements described in the vertical soft key setting file are as shown in the table
below:
A1
A2
Z
386
B-64647EN/02
Table 3.4.2 (b) Elements Described in the Vertical Soft Key Setting File
Tag name Description Note
settings Root element of the vertical Be sure to describe at least one in
soft key settings. the file.
page Element that represents one
page of the vertical soft keys.
Be sure to describe at least one as a
child node of settings.
1
If blank is specified, the vertical soft
entry Element that represents one

key page will be all blank.
If blank is specified, the
2
soft key. corresponding soft key will be blank.
You can define multiple soft
keys, and they are placed in
3
the order that they are defined.
name Specify the identifier ID of an If nothing or blank is specified, the
application to start with the soft corresponding soft key will be blank.
4
key. (*1)
subject Specify a character string to
be passed when an
This element is optional. 5
application to start with the soft
key is called. (*1)
The parameter can contain up 6
to 63 characters.
image Specify the name of an icon If nothing or an invalid file is
image to be displayed on the specified, the corresponding soft key
7
soft key (For details, see will be blank.
"Table 3.4.2 (c) Format of Icon
Images That Can Be 8
Displayed on the Vertical Soft
Keys").
key Specify a function key that This element is optional. A1
works as the soft key shortcut. If an invalid value or blank is
specified, the shortcut will be
disabled. A2
The function keys corresponding to
character strings that can be
specified are as follows:
Z
Configurable Function key
character string
FUNCKEY5 <S1>
FUNCKEY6 <SHIFT> + <S1>
FUNCKEY7 <S2>
*1: For details on identifier IDs and character strings passed when an application
is called, see "1. Adding an application to the Home screen" in "iHMI Home
Screen" (A-40717) that comes with the following SDK:
• PANEL iH Pro SDK: CNC Application Development Kit (A08B-9010-
J555#ZZ12)
387
B-64647EN/02
• PANEL iH SDK: iHMI Application SDK for PANEL iH (A08B-9110-

J713#ZZ11)
The format of icon images that can be displayed on the vertical soft keys is as
shown in the table below:
1
Table 3.4.2 (c) Format of Icon Images That Can Be Displayed on the Vertical Soft
2 Keys
Item Description
3 Format
Bit depth
PNG (alpha channel allowed)
32-bit
Display 10.4-inch display 33 x 33 pixels • The display size is automatically
4 size 15-inch display 51 x 51 pixels adjusted to the specified size when
drawing.
19-inch display 51 x 51 pixels
• The 15/19-inch display unit icon
5 can be used for the 10.4-inch

display unit.
Saved PANEL iH ¥Storage Card2¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥CNCOpera¥
6 location
(folder) PANEL iH Pro
Setting¥VSKey¥image
D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey\image
(SSD type)
7 PANEL iH Pro
(HDD type)
C:¥ProgramData¥FANUC¥iHMI¥MTB¥CNCOpera¥
Setting¥VSKey¥image
8
A1
A2
Z
388
B-64647EN/02
3.4.3 Description Example of the Vertical Soft Key Setting

File
3.4.3

<settings>

1
<page>
2

<entry>

<name>App1</name>

<subject>ExtraParameter</subject> 3

<image>App1Image.png</image>

<key>FUNCKEY5</key> 4
</entry>

<entry> 5
</entry>

<entry/>
6

<entry>

7
<name>App2</name>
<image>App2Image.png</image>
</entry> 8

</page>
</settings>
A1
• If you specify soft keys (entry elements) more than the number of soft
A2
keys that can be customized in one page (page element), the excess
soft keys will not be displayed.
 Example: If seven entry elements are defined for the 10.4-inch display Z
unit, the seventh entry element will not be displayed.
NOTE
• If the number of soft keys (entry elements) specified in one page (page
element) is less than the number of soft keys that can be customized,
the shortage soft keys will be blank.
389
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
390
4
1
MAINTENENCE 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes how to back up/restore data and update the software.
A
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ................................................................. 392
4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP ............................................................... 402
4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE .................................................. 406
4.4 INCORPORATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC SYSTEM ............. 417
391
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENENCE 
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE
4.1

You can use the iHMI batch backup function to save all data files created with the
1 iHMI function and general data created by the machine manufacturer or end users
to an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.), as well as to perform
restore from saved data.
2
3 iHMI batch
Storage device (CF/ Backup external
HDD/SSD) backup function device (USB flash
4 • iHMI application data
• Machine manufacturer
Backup process drive, memory card,
Restore process etc.)
application data
5 • End user data
Fig. 4.1 Data Backup/Restore

6
Although you can select any file but system program files of the operating system
and application for data used in the iHMI batch backup function, based on the
7 allowable size and runtime for the backup process, the followings are considered
as data that can be backed up.
8 Table 4.1 Backup Target Data

Data type Description
A1 iHMI data • Database (Data Logger, Maintenance Manager, tool
management function, etc.)
• Setting data files (setting data for the Home screen and
A2 application, etc.)
• Data files (calendar data, memo data, etc.)
• Operation manual
Z • Help
Machine • Machine manufacturer setting data
manufacturer data • Machine manufacturer application data
• Database (Maintenance Manager, etc.)
• Data file (image, guide, etc.)
End user data • Database (Maintenance Manager, etc.)
• Data file (image, guide, etc.)
• End user setting data
392
B-64647EN/02
4.1.1 Starting the Backup Screen

4.1.1
You can start the operation screen for the iHMI backup function using the following
methods:
For the CNC device with the MDI keyboard (HSSB connection) 1
<1> Power on the CNC device while pressing down the MDI keys <6> and <7>
simultaneously.
Keep the keys pressed down for five seconds. 2
The NCBOOT32 screen appears.
<2> Select the iHMI tab.

3
The operation screen for the batch backup function will be displayed.
4
For the CNC device without the MDI keyboard
<1> Power on the device.
5
<2> Double-click the NCBOOT32 icon on the taskbar.
The NCBOOT32 screen appears. 6
<3> Press the [Setting] soft key.
7
<4> Select the Boot Option tab.
8
<5> From the list of connected CNCs, select the check box for the target device and
press the [OK] soft key.
A1
<6> Power off and then on the device.
The NCBOOT32 screen appears. A2
<7> Select the iHMI tab. Z
The operation screen for the batch backup function will be displayed.
393
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4  Batch backup screen
When you start the backup screen, the batch backup screen is displayed.
5
6
D
7 E
F
A
8 G
H
A1 B I
C J
A2 K
Z Fig. 4.1.1 (a) Batch backup screen
Table 4.1.1 (a) Description of the Batch Backup Screen

Name Description
A Data list Displays individual lists of data to be backed up in a batch.
Name: Displays the names of the individual lists.
File Path: Displays the file paths of the individual lists.
Result: Displays the results of executing [Backup all] or [Restore
all] as "OK" or "NG".
B List name Displays the name of the list currently displayed.
C Progress bar Displays the progress of the [Backup all] or [Restore all] process.
394
B-64647EN/02
Name Description
D Backup all Executes batch backup. Execution results will be recorded to the
log file.
E Restore all Executes batch restore from data that was backed up in a batch.
F Extract
Execution results will be recorded to the log file.
Expands and displays the content of all individual files currently
1
displayed. For details, see the next section "■Individual backup
G Select
screen".
Expands and displays the content of the individual file selected.
2
For details, see the next section "■Individual backup screen".
H Add Additionally registers the individual lists to the list. You can also 3
specify a new list (new file).
I Delete Deletes the individual lists that are selected from the list.
J Import List Reads in the backup list from the data backed up in a batch and 4
replaces it with the current list.
K View Log Displays the details of the execution results (contents of the log
file) of [Backup all] or [Restore all]. 5
 Individual backup screen 6
When you press the [Extract] soft key in the batch backup screen, the contents of
all lists are expanded and displayed.
Also, when you select an individual list in the batch backup screen and press the 7
[Select] soft key, the contents of that individual list are expanded and displayed.
In the individual backup screen, you can save and restore data in the list either in
a batch or individually. 8
A1
D
E A2
F
A G Z
H
B I
C J
Fig. 4.1.1 (b) Individual Backup Screen
395
B-64647EN/02
Table 4.1.1 (b) Description of the Individual Backup Screen

Name Description
A Data list Displays lists of data to be backed up in a batch.
Name: Displays the name of the data.
1 File Path: Displays the file path of the data.
Result: Displays the results of executing [Backup all] or
[Restore all] as "OK" or "NG".
2 B List name
C Progress bar
Displays the name of the list currently displayed.
Displays the progress of the [Backup all] or [Restore all] process.
D Backup all Executes batch backup of data in the list.
3 E Restore all Executes batch restore of the data in the list from the data that
was backed up in a batch.
4 F Backup one
G Restore one
Executes backup of only the data selected in the list.
Executes restore of backed up data for only the data selected in
the list.
5 H Add Additionally registers data to the list. You can specify with a file
name or folder.
I Delete Deletes the selected data from the list.
6 J Back Returns to the previous batch backup screen.
7  Backup data lists

The batch backup target data lists are the following text files that are stored in the
iHMI data folder "%APPDATA%¥System".
8
Table 4.1.1 (c) Backup Data Lists
A1 File name Description

AllBackup.bkl Lists the following individual list files.
A2 iHMIbackup.bkl
MTBbackup.bkl
Individual list for iHMI system data.
Individual list for MTB data.
UserBackup.bkl Individual list for end user data.
Z
The data format is as follows. List and define the name and file path of the data.
If you specify a folder, all files including sub folders under the specified folder will
be backed up.
List name (maximum 30 characters)

Data name/list name (maximum 30 characters), file path
...
Example: Contents of AllBackup.bkl (when using PANEL iH Pro)
396
B-64647EN/02
All backup list files

iHMI data list,%APPDATA%¥system¥iHMIbackup.bkl
MTB data list,%APPDATA%¥system¥MTBbackup.bkl
User data list,%APPDATA%¥system¥UserBackup.bkl
1
Data created with the iHMI basic functions will be registered in "iHMIbackup.bkl"
(default).
2
 Adding data
To data to each list, perform the following:
3
<1> In the individual backup screen, press the [Add] soft key.
4
<2> Enter the name and file path.
5
6
7
Press the [File] soft key to specify a file or the [Folder] soft key to specify a folder.
The file selection dialog appears where you can select the folder or file from the
8
displayed list.
Note that, if you omit the name, the name at the end of the file path will be
automatically selected.
A1
<3> Press the [OK] soft key. A2
The data is registered to the list.
Z
 Deleting data
To delete data from the list, select the data from the list and press the [Delete] soft
key.
397
B-64647EN/02
4.1.2 Saving Data in a Batch

4.1.2
This function allows you to batch save data in the list displayed on the batch
backup screen into an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
1 <1> In the batch backup screen, press the [Backup all] soft key.
The file selection dialog box appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
<2> Specify the destination folder to save "AllBackup.bkl" to.
8 The save process starts, the contents of the list will be expanded, and the
results will be displayed in the [Result] column one by one as the process
completes.
A1 Data that was successfully saved will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be
displayed if the save process was not successful.
When the data save process is completed for all lists, the screen returns to the
A2 original screen with the results of each list displayed.
Z  To display the results in detail, press the [View Log] soft key. See "4.1.6
Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results".
MEMO
398
B-64647EN/02
4.1.3 Restoring Data in a Batch

4.1.3
4.1.4
This function allows you to batch restore data in the list displayed on the batch
backup screen from an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
<1> To use a list stored in an external device instead of the list registered in the 1
iHMI data folder, press the [Import List] soft key in the batch backup screen.
2
<2> Specify a folder storing the list (AllBackup.bkl).
3
<3> In the batch backup screen, press the [Restore all] soft key.
4
<4> Specify a folder storing the data (AllBackup.bkl).
The data restore process starts, the contents of the list will be expanded, and
the results will be displayed in the [Result] column one by one as the process 5
completes.
Data that was successfully restored will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be
displayed if the restore process was not successful. 6
When the data restore process is completed for all lists, the screen returns to
the original screen with the results of each list displayed.
7
 To display the results in detail, press the [View Log] soft key. See "4.1.6 8
Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results".
MEMO
A1
A2
4.1.4 Saving Data Individually
Z
4.1.5
This function allows you to save one data in the list displayed on the individual
backup screen into an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
<1> In the individual backup screen, select one data from the list.
<2> Press the [Backup one] soft key.

<3> Specify the destination folder.

Data save starts.
399
B-64647EN/02
The results will be displayed in the [Result] column. Data that was successfully
saved will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be displayed if the save process was
not successful.
1
4.1.5 Restoring Data Individually
2
4.1.6
This function allows you to restore one data in the list displayed on the individual
backup screen from an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
3 <1> In the individual backup screen, select one data from the list.
4 <2> Press the [Restore one] soft key.

5 <3> Specify a folder storing the data.

Data restoration starts.
The results will be displayed in the [Result] column. Data that was successfully
6 restored will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be displayed if the restore process
was not successful.
7
8 4.1.6 Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore
Results
A1 4.1.7
When you execute batch save or batch restore, the results of the last executed
process will be recorded to the log file.
A2 Batch save results: "Fanuc\iHMI\System\BackupLog.txt"

Batch restore results: "Fanuc\iHMI\System\RestoreLog.txt"
Z The data format is as follows.
Data name, file path, results ("OK"/"NG")

...
Name of list that includes the above data, file path, overall results ("OK"/"NG")
Logged execution results for the second and subsequent lists (in the same way as
above) will follow.
To display the contents of the log, press the [View Log] soft key in the batch
backup screen.
400
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
Fig. 4.1.6 [View Log] Soft Key in the Batch Backup Screen
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
401
B-64647EN/02
4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP
4.2

You can automatically back up data retained in FROM/SRAM of the CNC to
1 FROM, which does not require a battery, and restore it when necessary. This
allows you to easily recover CNC data when it is lost due to an unexpected
contingency, such as a dead battery. You can also set the parameter to retain up
2 to past three backup data. Therefore, CNC data can be switched immediately to
the state after machine adjustment or any backup state.
3 SRAM (requiring a battery)
Backup All SRAM data such as

4 parameters and offset data
5 FROM (requiring no battery)
NC program, directory
6 information Information
7 Backup data 1
8 Backup data 2
Restore
Backup data 3
A1
Fig. 4.2 Mechanism of Automatic Data Backup
A2
Z  For details about automatic data backup, see "AUTOMATIC DATA
BACKUP" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE
MEMO MANUAL" (B-64485-EN).
402
B-64647EN/02
4.2.1 Backing Up to External Memory

4.2.1
Back up SRAM data and user files of the CNC to external memory.
<1> Start the CNC.

<2> Press the <SYSTEM> key.
1
On the system screen that appears, check the following parameters:
• Parameter (No.0020) = 4 (or 17) 2
• Parameter MDP (No.0138#0) = 1
• Parameter BOP (No.0313#0) = 1 3
4
 Set the parameter (No.0020) to "4" when using a memory card or "17"
when using a USB flash drive.
MEMO
5
<3> Connect a USB flash drive or memory card to the CNC.
<4> Press the [All I/O] soft key and then [All Data] soft key.
6
The output all data screen appears.
7
 When you press the [All I/O] soft key and then [F Output] soft key, the
8
CNC parameters are output to text data.
MEMO
A1
<5> Switch to EDIT mode.
<6> Press the [Operation] soft key and then [F Output] soft key.
<7> Press the [Execute] soft key.
A2
Text data is output. When it is completed, NC data output signal ALLO will be
set to "0". Z
 For the Series 30ii-MODEL B iHMI, you can output data in the
"Maintenance Display" application.
MEMO
<8> Turn off the CNC.

Do it with the USB flash drive inserted.
<9> Turn on the CNC again while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
The boot screen starts up, and then closes.
403
B-64647EN/02
<10>Select “END” on the IPL screen.

When the CNC starts up, SRAM data and user files are output.
4.2.1.1 List of output text data

1 4.2.1.1
When you output data from the CNC, the following text data are saved to the
memory:
2 Table 4.2.1.1 List of Output Text Data

Data type File name
3 Tool Offset TOOLOFST.TXT
Parameter CNC_PARA.TXT
4 PMC parameter PMC(path

number)_PRM.TXT
PMC parameter (dual check safety) PMCS_PRM.TXT
5 Program ALL-FLDR.TXT
Pitch error compensation amount PITCH.TXT
6 Custom macro variable

Workpiece origin offset amount
MACRO.TXT
EXT_WKZ.TXT
M code group data MC-GROUP.TXT
7 Operator history OPRT_HIS.TXT
Maintenance: Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT
8 Periodic maintenance: Periodic maintenance data

2nd geometry tool offset
MAINTENA.TXT
SEC_GEOM.TXT
3D compensation data COMP3D.TXT
A1 Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset FIXTURE.TXT
Real-time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT
A2 System Configuration
PMC signal protect
SYS-CONF.TXT
DIDOENBL.TXT
Tool management: Mount history data TLATAHIS.TXT
Z Tool management: Removal history data TLDTAHIS.TXT
Servo spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT
Tool geometry data (Turret interference check) TOOL-FRM.TXT
Periodic maintenance: Machine system name data MAINTEMC.TXT
P code macro variable PCODE.TXT
Tool geometry dimension data TOOLSIZE.TXT
CNC ID information CNCIDNUM.TXT
Customer's board CSTM_BD.TXT
Operator history signal selection data OHIS_SIG.TXT
Fine torque sensing torque data FNTRQSNS.TXT
3D interference check data 3D-INTER.TXT
404
B-64647EN/02
Data type File name

System alarm history SYS_ALM.TXT
3D rotary error compensation CMP3DROT.TXT
Tool management: All tool management data AL_TLMGR.TXT
Tool management: All customized data AL_TLCSM.TXT 1
Tool life management data TOOLLIFE.TXT
5-axis machine configuration select function
Network setting information
MACHCON.TXT
NETWORK.MEM
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
405
B-64647EN/02
4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE
4.3

This appendix describes how to update the iHMI basic function software for the
1 PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro.

Check which display unit is used, PANEL iH or PANEL iH Pro.
2 30i/31i/32i-B
PANEL iH: A02B-0323-Hxxx (Integrated LCD), A13B-0201-Bxxx (Separate LCD)
PANEL iH Pro: A08B-0090-Hxxx
3 0i-F Plus
PANEL iH: A02B-0348-Hxxx (Integrated LCD)
4 PANEL iH Pro: A08B-0090-Hxxx
5 4.3.1 Preparation
4.3.1
Prepare the installation disk and media and check the iHMI version and whether
6 EWF is enabled/disabled.
7 Table 4.3.1 Items to Be Prepared

Item Description
iHMI Disk • 30i /31 i/32 i-B: A02B-0207-K777
8 • 0i-F Plus: A02B-0207-K779
The iHMI Disk has the following folder structure:
<WES>: iHMI installer for the PANEL iH Pro
A1 <WEC>: iHMI installer for the PANEL iH
Installation media PANEL iH
ATA memory card formatted in FAT16
A2 Capacity: 1 or 2 GB
Number of memory cards: One for version 8.0 or later or
two (30i /31 i/32 i-B) or one (0i-F Plus) for versions earlier
Z than 8.0
PANEL iH Pro
USB-DVD drive, or USB flash drive to which the WES
folder of the iHMI Disk is copied
Data backup media 1 GB or larger USB flash drive or memory card
4.3.1.1 Checking the iHMI version

Check the current iHMI version.
4.3.1.1
406
B-64647EN/02
<1> Press the MDI menu key to display the iHMI Home screen.
<2> Press [SETTING].
<3> Press [System Information].
<4> Press [Display Version].
1
Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled (for PANEL iH Pro
4.3.1.2
only)
2
For the PANEL iH Pro, check whether the EWF is currently enabled/disabled.
4.3.1.2
3
 • The EWF is the write protection function for C drive.
MEMO
• In Windows 10, the function name is "UWF".
4
<1> Right-click the hardware monitor (F mark) icon on the taskbar and select 5
[EWF].
6
7
8
<2> Check if the status of [Current EWF protection] is [DISABLE] or [ENABLE]. A1

[ENABLE] indicates that it is enabled.
A2
Z
<3> Press [Close].
407
B-64647EN/02
4.3.2 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH

4.3.2
Update the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH as follows:
Back up iHMI data.
1
Install iHMI.
2 Restore iHMI data.
3 4.3.2.1 Folder configuration

The PANEL iH installer consists of the following two folders:
4.3.2.1
4 <WEC¥SYSTEM>: iHMI software

<WEC¥DATA>: iHMI data
5 4.3.2.2 Backing up iHMI data

Back up iHMI data of the PANEL iH.
4.3.2.2
6
7  • For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".
MEMO
8
 When the iHMI data batch backup function is available (for iHMI version
3.0 or later)
A1 <1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
<2> Release the keys when Windows starts up.
A2 After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens.
<3> Select the [iHMI] tab.
Z <4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup.

<5> Press [Backup all].
Backup starts.
 If a dialog box appears for you to select where to save the data, select
the destination folder (USB flash drive or memory card).
MEMO
When the backup is completed, the backup results are listed. If all the lines
show "OK", the data has been successfully backed up.
408
B-64647EN/02
 When the iHMI data batch backup function is not available (for iHMI
versions earlier than 3.0)
<1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens. 1
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Run] from the start menu.
<4> Enter "EXPLORER" to start Windows Explorer. 2
<5> Copy the files in the DATA folder (%APPDATA%) to an ATA memory card
(Storage Card3) or USB flash drive (Hard Disk).
3
Installing the iHMI
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.3
Install the iHMI software.

4
 For iHMI version 7.2 or earlier 5
Install the iHMI software and iHMI data individually.
<1> Copy all the files and folders in the SYSTEM folder to an empty memory card.
6
<2> Insert the ATA memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC. 7
<3> Turn on the CNC.
The installer automatically starts up, and installation starts.
8
<4> When the completion message appears, restart the PANEL iH.
A1
A2
Z
409
B-64647EN/02
<5> Copy all the files and folders in the DATA folder to an empty memory card.
<6> Insert the ATA memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC.
1 The installer automatically starts up.
<8> Press [Start].
2 Installation starts.
3
4
5
6
7
8
 For iHMI version 8.0 or later
A1 Install the iHMI software and iHMI data at the same time.
A2 <1> Copy all the files and folders in the SYSTEM folder to an empty memory card.
<2> Copy all the files and folders in the DATA folder to an empty memory card.
Z <3> Insert the memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC.
The installer automatically starts up, and installation starts.
410
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
4.3.2.4 Restoring backed-up iHMI data

5
Restore backed-up iHMI data to the DATA folder.
4.3.2.4
6
• For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".
• Restoring data erases the standard settings. To use the original
 standard settings, do not restore data. 7

• To use the original standard settings on the Home screen, such as
NOTE
when evaluating a new function, delete apps-general.xml from the
data folder (\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI) after restoration. 8
3.0 or later)
A1
A2
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens.
<3> Select the [iHMI] tab. Z
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup.
<5> Press [Restore all].
iHMI data restoration starts.
MEMO
When the iHMI restoration is completed, the restoration results are listed. If all
the lines show "OK", the data has been successfully restored.
411
B-64647EN/02
1 <2> Release the keys when Windows starts up.
2 <3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Run] from the start menu.
<4> Enter "EXPLORER" to start Windows Explorer.
3 <5> Copy the files backed up to the ATA memory card or USB flash drive to the
DATA folder (%APPDATA%).
4
4.3.3 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH
5 Pro
4.3.3
Update the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH Pro as follows:
6 Back up iHMI data.
7 Disable EWF (if enabled).
8 Uninstall iHMI data.
Install iHMI data.

A1
Restore iHMI data.
A2 Enable EWF.
Z
4.3.3.1 Backing up iHMI data
Back up iHMI data of the PANEL iH Pro.
4.3.3.1
 • For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".

MEMO
412
B-64647EN/02
3.0 or later)
<1> Turn on the PANEL iH Pro while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup. 2
<5> Press [Backup all].
Backup starts.
3
4
MEMO
When the backup is completed, the backup results are listed. If all the lines
5
show "OK", the data has been successfully backed up.
6
7
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Computer] from the start
menu to start Windows Explorer.
A1
<4> Copy the files in the DATA folder to an ATA memory card or USB flash drive.
The DATA folder location is as follows:
%APPDATA% A2
4.3.3.2 Disabling the EWF Z
Disable the EWF if it is enabled.
4.3.3.2
<1> Right-click the hardware monitor (F mark) icon on the taskbar and select
[EWF].
<2> Press [Disable EWF protection].
<3> Press [Close].
<4> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
413
B-64647EN/02
4.3.3.3 Uninstalling the iHMI

Uninstall the iHMI software.
4.3.3.3
<1> Run [Programs and Features] from the Control Panel.

1 <2> Select [iHMI] and press [Uninstall].
Software uninstallation starts. Follow the instructions on the screen.
2

If any files are left in the folder [%APPPATH%], delete all of them. This
operation is normally not necessary. However, if files are not deleted
3 NOTE because they are protected, you need to delete them manually.
4 <3> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
5 4.3.3.4 Installing the iHMI

Install the iHMI software.
4.3.3.4
6
 If a DVD drive is not available, copy the installer folder to a USB flash
drive and insert it.
7 MEMO
8 <1> Mount the iHMI Disk.

<2> Double-click "iHMI.msi" in the installer folder under WES.
The installer starts up, and installation starts. Follow the instructions on the
A1 screen.
<3> When the completion message appears, run "Add\Update.exe".
A2
4.3.3.5 Restoring backed-up iHMI data
Z Restore backed-up iHMI data to the DATA folder.
4.3.3.5
• For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".

• Restoring data erases the standard settings. To use the original
standard settings, do not restore data.

NOTE
• To use the original standard settings on the Home screen, such as
when evaluating a new function, delete apps-general.xml from the
following data folder after restoration:
For PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI
414
B-64647EN/02
3.0 or later)
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup. 2
<5> Press [Restore all].
iHMI data restoration starts.
3
4
MEMO
When the iHMI restoration is completed, the restoration results are listed. If all
5
the lines show "OK", the data has been successfully restored.
6
7
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Computer] from the start
menu to start Windows Explorer.
A1
<4> Copy the files backed up to the ATA memory card or USB flash drive to the
DATA folder.
The DATA folder location is as follows: A2
%APPDATA%
<5> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
Z
4.3.3.6 Enabling the EWF
Enable the EWF.
4.3.3.6
415
B-64647EN/02
<3> Right-click the hardware monitor (F mark) icon on the taskbar and select
[EWF].
<4> Press [Enable EWF protection].
<5> Press [Close].
1 <6> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
416
B-64647EN/02
4.4 INCORPORATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC SYSTEM
4.4
4.4 INCORPORATION AND MAINTE-

NANCE OF CNC SYSTEM
This section describes how to incorporate, save, and delete the CNC system 1
using the NCBOOT32 screen.
2
4.4.1 Overview 3
4.4.1
The NCBOOT32 screen has the following functions:
Table 4.4.1 NCBOOT32 Functions 4

Item Description
CNC BOOT screen display The following CNC maintenance operations are available:
• Incorporating the CNC system program
5
• Backing up, restoring, and clearing SRAM
CNC BOOT screen display The following CNC setting and maintenance operations are
available:
6
• Backing up, restoring, clearing, and exporting CNC data
CNC system alarm screen - 7
display
CNC communication status -
monitor and error display 8
A1
4.4.2 Starting NCBOOT32
4.4.2
To start the NCBOOT32 screen, perform one of the following operations: A2

Starting with the rotary switch on the main print board
Set the rotary switch to position F and turn on the CNC device. Z
Starting with the MDI keys
Turn on the CNC device while pressing down the MDI keys <6> and <7>
simultaneously.
However, this option does not work for the MDI keys in Windows 10 compatible
PANEL iH Pro or USB type.
Starting with the Home screen settings

<1> Press <MENU> to display the iHMI Home screen.
<2> Press [Settings].
<3> Press [General Settings].
417
B-64647EN/02
<4> Press [Boot Setting].

<5> Tap [Enable the NCBOOT32 screen display when the power is turned on next
time.] to select the check box.
<6> Turn on the CNC device again.
1
2 4.4.3 Operating in Screens
4.4.3
 NCBOOT32 screen
3 This is the main screen to be displayed when NCBOOT32 is started up.
You can operate the CNC system data (control software, SRAM data, custom
program, iHMI data, etc.).
4
5 A
B
6 C
D
7 E
F
8
A1 G I
A2 H
Fig. 4.4.3 (a) NCBOOT32 Screen

Z
Table 4.4.3 (a) Name and Function/Operation of Each Part on the NCBOOT32
Screen
Name Function/operation
A Tab Tap an appropriate tab to switch to the target screen.
• SRAM: Switches to the SRAM backup/restore screen. For details,
see "SRAM backup/restore screen".
• File: Switches to the file operation screen. For details, see
"File operation screen".
• iHMI: Switches to the screen to back up or restore iHMI data at
once. For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".
418
B-64647EN/02
B [Load...] button Loads a file.
Tap the [Load...] button, select a file you want to load on the file
selection screen, and tap the [Load] button.
1
2
3
4
C [Save...] button Saves the CNC system data to a file.
Tap the [Save...] button, select a file you want to save on the file 5
selection screen, and tap the [Save] button.
6
7
8
D [Check...] button Displays the contents of the system data of the selected CNC. A1
A2
Z
419
B-64647EN/02
E [Delete...] button Deletes the system data of the selected CNC.
Tap the [Delete...] button, select a file you want to delete on the
file selection screen, and tap the [Delete] button.
1
2
3
4 F [CNCBackup] Replaces the current CNC system with the backup CNC system.
Button
5 G [Settings...]
Button
Changes the folder where the file should be imported and
exported.
On the setting screen that appears by tapping the [Settings...]
6 button, select a folder in the PC and tap the [OK] button.
7
8 H [Keyboard] Displays the screen keyboard.
button
(PANEL iH only)
A1
A2
Z I [Close] button Closes the NCBOOT32 screen and displays the IPL screen. For
details, see "IPL screen".
420
B-64647EN/02
 SRAM backup/restore screen

This is a screen to save and restore the CNC SRAM data.
1
A 2
B
3
4
5
6
Fig. 4.4.3 (b) SRAM Backup/Restore Screen
7
Table 4.4.3 (b) Name and Function of Each Part on the SRAM Backup/Restore
Screen
8
Name Function
A [Backup] button Saves the SRAM data.
You cannot change the backup file name because it is A1
automatically determined according to the SRAM size.
B [Restore] button Restores the SRAM data.
A2
Z
421
B-64647EN/02
 File operation screen

This is a screen to operate files in the CNC memory card or PC folder.
1
2 A
B
3
4
5
6
Fig. 4.4.3 (c) File Operation Screen
7
Table 4.4.3 (c) Name and Function of Each Part on the File Operation Screen
8 Name Function
A [Delete] button Deletes the selected file.
A1 B [Refresh] button Updates the file list.

Tap this button after an operation such as memory card
replacement.
A2
 IPL screen
The contents displayed on the IPL screen vary according to the CNC model.
Z Follow the menu.
To perform the following operations, select the appropriate item on the pop-up
menu that appears by holding down the screen for three seconds or more.
• To change the settings of devices to be input/output: Select [Setting].
• To display the screen keyboard (PANEL iH only): Select [Keyboard].
422
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
For PANEL iH Pro For PANEL iH
Fig. 4.4.3 (d) IPL Screen
4
 CNC alarm screen
This screen is displayed when a system error occurs in the CNC. 5
Like the IPL screen, this screen can be operated with the MDI keys and screen
keyboard.
The following shows an example of the CNC alarm screen. The displayed 6
contents vary depending on the system alarm that occurred.in the CNC
7
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 4.4.3 (e) CNC Alarm Screen
423
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
424
5
1
PARAMETERS 2
3
This chapter describes all parameters indicated in this manual.
For parameters that are not mentioned in this manual and details about the
parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PARAMETER 4
MANUAL" (B-64490EN).
5.1 HOW TO READ THE PARAMETER ILLUSTRATION ........................ 426 5

5.2 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS .................. 427
5.3 PARAMETERS OF MULTI-PATH EDIT ................................................ 432
5.4 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS .......................................... 434 A
5.5 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS........................... 435
5.6 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP STATE .................................................................. 436
5.7 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM
NUMBERS............................................................................................ 438
5.8 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE ................................................. 439
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ............ 440
5.10 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION FUNCTION ....... 443
5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL
DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES ................................................................. 447
5.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY ......................... 460
5.13 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY........................ 462
5.14 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY................ 479
5.15 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION .................... 484
5.16 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY ..................... 488
5.17 PROGRAM-RELATED PARAMETERS ................................................ 497
5.18 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY ...................... 504
5.19 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING PROGRAM
.............................................................................................................. 510
5.20 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP............................... 511
5.21 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE.. 512
5.22 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE
FUNCTION ........................................................................................... 514
5.23 PARAMETERS OF THE 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION ... 519
425
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS 
5.1 HOW TO READ THE PARAMETER ILLUSTRATION
5.1
5.1 HOW TO READ THE PARAMETER

ILLUSTRATION
1 A parameter that is valid with only one of the path control types for the lathe
system (T-type) and machining center system (M-type) is indicated in the upper or
2 lower row as described in the example below.

A blank field represents an unusable parameter.
3  Example 1
The parameter HTG is common to the T-type and M-type, and the RTV and ROC
parameters are valid with the T-type only.
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV HTG ROC T-
5 1403
type
HTG M-
type
6
 Example 2
7 The following parameter is valid with the M-type only.
8 T-
type
1411
Cutting feedrate M-
A1 type
A2
Z
426
B-64647EN/02
5.2 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS
5.2
5.2 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDIT-

ING OF PROGRAMS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
3202 PSR NE9 NE8
2
[Input type] : Parameter input
[Data type] : Bit path
3
# 0 NE8 Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with
program numbers O8000 to O8999.
0: Enable. 3
1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations 5

are disabled:
- Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 99999999 are not deleted.) 6
- Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 99999999 are not output.)
- Program number search 7
- Program editing of registered programs
- Program registration
- Program comparison 8
- Displaying programs
A1
The parameter setting does not affect the following

NOTE
programs:
• Programs on the data server
• Programs for running and editing memory card
A2
programs on the memory card
Z
# 4 NE9 Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations

are disabled:
programs with program numbers 9000 to 99999999 are not deleted.)
programs with program numbers 9000 to 99999999 are not output.)
427
B-64647EN/02
- Program number search

- Program comparison
1
2

NOTE
programs:
• Programs for running and editing memory card
3 programs on the memory card
3 # 6 PSR Specify whether or not to enable the search for the program
number of a protected program.
0: Disable.
5 1: Enable.
6 #7 #6 #5 #4
P9E
#3
P8E
#2 #1 #0
3204
7 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
8 # 3 P8E Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with

0: Enable.
A1 1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations

A2 are disabled:
programs with program numbers 80000000 to 99999999 are not
Z -
deleted.)
Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
output.)
- Program number search
- Program comparison
428
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
programs:
• Programs for running and editing memory card 1
2
# 4 P9E Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with
0: Enable. 3
1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations 3

are disabled:
5
deleted.)
programs with program numbers 90000000 to 99999999 are not 6
output.)
-
-
Program number search
Program editing of registered programs 7
-
-
Program comparison
Displaying programs 8

A1

NOTE
programs:
• Programs for running and editing memory card A2
Z
3210 Program protection (PSW)
[Input type] : Locked parameter

[Data type] : 2-word common
[Valid data range] : 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000

to 9999. When a value other than zero is set in this parameter and
this value differs from the keyword set in parameter No. 3211, bit 4
(NE9) of parameter No. 3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000 to
9999 is automatically set to 1.
429
B-64647EN/02
This disables the editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Until the
value set as the password (parameter No. 3210) is set as a
keyword (parameter No. 3211), NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the
password cannot be modified.
1
3211 Program protection key (KEY)
2 [Input type] : Locked parameter
3 [Valid data range] : 0 to 99999999
When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is
3 set in this parameter, the locked state is released, and the user can
now modify the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of
parameter No. 3202.
5
6 
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When
the power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
7
3220 Password (PSW)
8 [Input type] : Locked parameter

A1
This parameter sets a password (PSW). When a value other than 0
is set, a password is set. When a password is set, a blank is
A2 displayed in this parameter, and the state (locked state) where an
operation such as program editing is locked is set. When password
Z (PSW) = 0, namely, in the normal state, or when password (PSW) =

keyword (KEY), namely, in the unlocked state, this parameter can
be set.
3221 Keyword (KEY)

When the same value as the password (PSW) is set in this

parameter, the lock is released (unlocked state).
The value set in this parameter is not displayed.
430
B-64647EN/02
The value of this parameter is initialized to 0 automatically when the

power is turned on. So, if the power is turned off in the unlocked
state and then turned on again, the locked state is automatically
set.
1
3222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN)

2
3
3223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX) 3
[Data type] : 2-word common 5
The programs in a range set here can be locked. 6

Set the minimum program number and maximum program number
of a desired range.
Set this parameter to satisfy PMAX > PMIN. 7
When password (PSW) = 0, namely, in the normal state, or when
password (PSW) = keyword (KEY), namely, in the unlocked state,
this parameter can be set. 8
[Example]
Parameter (No. 3222) = 7000 A1
Parameter (No. 3223) = 8499
When the values above are set, the programs from O7000 to
O8499 can be locked.
A2
When PMIN = 0, the specification of PMIN = 9000 is assumed.
When PMAX = 0, the specification of PMAX = 9999 is assumed.
Z
So, when these parameters are set to the defaults, the programs
from O9000 to O9999 are locked.
431
B-64647EN/02
5.3 PARAMETERS OF MULTI-PATH EDIT
5.3

13131 Multi-path display group number
1 [Input type] : Parameter input
[Data type] : Byte path
2 [Valid data range]: 0 to 10
This parameter sets a group to display multiple paths

3 simultaneously on the screen using the multi-path edit function.
Paths set as the same group are separately displayed on the
same screen.
3 If you set all path values to 0, the multi-path display function is
disabled.
5 • The number of paths to be edited simultaneously

varies depending on the display unit size.
Up to two paths for 10.4-inch display unit and three
6  paths for 15 or 19-inch display unit.
• This parameter is used when the multi-path target
MEMO paths and the display order are set to depend on the
7 parameters in the MTB configuration file. For details,
see "2.5.1.2 Setting the multi-path edit paths and
order".
8
13132 Multi-path display order number
A1
A2 [Valid data range]: 1 to the number of paths contained in the multi-path display
group
Z This parameter sets the display order of paths defined as the

multi-path display group.
Set the order with values between 1 and the number of paths
contained in the multi-path display group. Use sequential numbers
of 1 or greater for the specified group paths.
432
B-64647EN/02
[Example]
The following shows an example of the multi-path display group
number set in the parameter (No. 13131) and the multi-path
display order number set in this section.
Table 5.3 Setting Examples of the Multi-path Display Group
Number and the Multi-path Display Order Number
1
Number Path Displayed Group Screen display
of CNC
paths
Group
number
display
order
(A number is a path number to be
displayed.)
2
(No. 13131) number
(No. 13132)
3
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
3
2 1 2 1 2 3
3 1 3 5
1 1 1
3 2 2 1 1 -> 2 -> 3
3 3 1
6
1 1 2
2 1 1 1 2 -> 3
7
3 2 1
8
• This parameter is used when the multi-path target
 paths and the display order are set to depend on the

parameters in the MTB configuration file. For details, A1
MEMO see "2.5.1.2 Setting the multi-path edit paths and
order".
A2
Z
433
B-64647EN/02
5.4 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS
5.4
5.4 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM

CALLS
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3233 CPD NE8
2
3
# 4 CPD Programs called by subprogram calls or macro calls are searched
as follows.
3 0: Search in the search target folder in the specified order.
1: Search in a folder with the specified path.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
434
B-64647EN/02
5.5 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS
5.5
5.5 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PRO-

TECTION KEYS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
3290 KEY
2
3
# 7 KEY Specify a memory protection signal used as a memory protection
key.
0: KEY1<Gn046.3>, KEY2<Gn046.4>, KEY3<Gn046.5>, 3
and KEY4<Gn046.6>.
1: KEY1<Gn046.3> only.
5
• The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0
or KEY=1. 6
When KEY = 0:
•KEY1: Enables a tool offset amount, workpiece
origin offset amount, and workpiece coordinates
shift amount to be input.
7
•KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and
 tool life management data to be input.

•KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
8
NOTE •KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table)
to be input.
When KEY = 1: A1
•KEY1: Enables program registration and editing,
and enables PMC data to be input.
•KEY2 to KEY4: Not used A2
• When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path 1
is followed.
Z
435
B-64647EN/02
5.6 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE
5.6
5.6 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDIT-

ING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION
1 STOP STATE
2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11330 RSC
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
3 # 7 RSC Specify an action when you execute a cycle start after stopping the
program by a single block stop and editing it.
0: Restart automatic operation.
5 Program editing during a single-block stop on the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen: Disabled
1: Display a message that prompts you whether to allow the cycle
6 start and soft keys. Use a soft key to select an operation you
want to allow or not allow. Actions are different as follows.
- Allowed: When the cycle start is executed again, automatic
7 operation is restarted.
- Not Allowed: The cycle start is disabled.
8 Program editing during a single-block stop on the MANUAL

GUIDE i screen: Enabled
A1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13102 EDT
A2 [Input type] : Parameter input

Z

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned
off before operation is continued.
# 7 EDT Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs during

memory operation.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
436
B-64647EN/02
5.6 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE
1 When 0 is set, during memory operation, you can stop

the program by a single block stop or feed hold, select
the EDIT mode, and edit the program.
When the main program is running:
1
- The same edit functions as used for ordinary
editing can be used.
When a subprogram is running: 2

- Only the word-unit edit function can be used.
- Any program called from DNC or MDI operation
NOTE cannot be edited. 3
- Only the program can be edited.
2 Before restarting memory operation, take extreme
caution to return the cursor to the position before 3
stopping the program. If you want to execute the
program from other than the cursor position when
stopped, be sure to reset the machine before 5
executing the program.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
437
B-64647EN/02
5.7 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM NUMBERS
5.7
5.7 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUM-

BER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM
1 NUMBERS
2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 ON8
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
3
 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned
5 NOTE
6 # 3 ON8 Specify the number of digits of program numbers.

0: Four.
1: Eight.
7
8 • If program numbers are changed from eight digits to
four digits, all programs will be automatically deleted
from program memory.
• If this parameter is changed from 1 to 0 and the power
A1 is turned on, the following message appears on the
 IPL screen. For the Series 30i/31i/32i (with personal

computer function with Windows CE) and for the CNC
A2 NOTE screen display function, the message appears on the
IPL screen of NCBOOT32.exe. To delete them, enter
1. Otherwise, enter 0.
Z PARAMETER NO.11304#3 IS CHANGED.

ALL PROGRAM FILE MUST BE CLEARED.
CLEAR FILE OK ? (NO=0, YES=1)
438
B-64647EN/02
5.8 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE
5.8
5.8 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
300 PCM 1
[Input type] : Setting input
[Data type] : Bit 2
#0 PCM Set the memory card interface to be used when the memory card
slot is available on the CNC or the PC is connected to FS30i/31i/ 3
32i via HSSB or Ethernet.
0: Use the memory card slot on the CNC.
1: Use the memory card slot on the PC. 3
When the CNC is in a dual-screen display mode, the data input/output destination
depends on the key input selection. 5
If there is no memory card slot on the CNC, the memory card slot on the PC is
used regardless of the parameter setting. This parameter is available only when
the CNC screen display function is in operation. 6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
301 EPM
7
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit system common 8
# 2 EPM Specify whether or not to use a program storage file for running
programs from the HDD/SSD. A1
0: Not use.
1: Use.
A2
Z
439
B-64647EN/02
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
5.9
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8850 MDG
2
[Data type] : Bit
3
# 0 MDG Specify whether or not to disable the trouble diagnosis function.
0: Enable.
3 1: Disable.
5

NOTE
6
7 3141 Path name (1st character)
8 3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)
A1
3144 Path name (4th character)
A2 3145 Path name (5th character)
Z 3146 Path name (6th character)
3147 Path name (7th character)

[Data type] : Word path
[Valid data range] : See the character/code map.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of up to seven alphanumeric
characters, katakana characters, and special characters can
be displayed as a path name.
440
B-64647EN/02
• For the characters/codes, see "CHARACTER-TO-

CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in "FANUC
Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64484EN). 1
 • When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141,
PATH1(,PATH2...) are displayed as path names.
MEMO
• When optional path name display is enlarged (with bit
2 (PNE) of parameter No. 11350 set to 1), only
2
alphanumeric characters are displayed. If any other
type of characters is set, spaces are displayed
instead.
3
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6301 EXM EXA
5
[Data type] : Bit machine group
6
# 0 EXA Specify an external alarm message specification.
0: Alarm numbers that can be sent are 0 to 999.
When displaying an alarm number, the CNC prefixes the 7
character string "EX" to the alarm number obtained by adding
1000 to the message number.
8
The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to an alarm number
for display.
A1
# 1 EXM Specify an external operator message specification.
- Message for numbers 0 to 99: Displayed together with its
A2
number.
The CNC adds 2000 to this number. Z
- Message for numbers 100 to 999: Displayed on the screen
without its number.
- Message for numbers 0 to 99: Displayed together with its
number.
The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to a message
number for display.
- Message for numbers 100 to 4095: Displayed on the screen
without its number.
6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages
441
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
1
2 [Data type] : Word machine group
3 This parameter sets the number of messages to which message

numbers are to be prefixed in external operator message display.
When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed.
3
[Example] When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of
5 message numbers 0 to 499 are displayed together with their

numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is not
displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is
6 displayed on the screen.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
442
B-64647EN/02
5.10 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION FUNCTION
5.10
5.10 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING

SIMULATION FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
14702 SFA SFB SFC SFD SR1 SP1 SUB MT1
2
[Data type] : Bit system common
3
# 0 MT1
0: Vertical
1: Horizontal (left side of chuck) 3
# 1 SUB
0: Without sub-spindle 5
1: With sub-spindle
# 2 SP1 6
0: The C=0 position of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is the same as
that of the main spindle on turret 1.
1: The C=0 position of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is 180 degrees 7
away from that of the main spindle on turret 1.
# 3 SR1 8
0: The C-axis + direction of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is the same
as that of the main spindle on turret 1.
1: The C-axis + direction of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is opposite A1
to that of the main spindle on turret 1.
# 4 SFD
A2
0: When G266#5 (SFRD) is 0 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 1, it is
considered to be forward rotation.
When G266#5 (SFRD) is 1 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 0, it is
Z
considered to be reverse rotation.
1: When G266#5 (SFRD) is 1 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 0, it is
When G266#5 (SFRD) is 0 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 1, it is
# 5 SFC
0: When G204#5 (SFRC) is 0 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 1, it is
When G204#5 (SFRC) is 1 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 0, it is
443
B-64647EN/02
1: When G204#5 (SFRC) is 1 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 0, it is

When G204#5 (SFRC) is 0 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 1, it is
1 # 6 SFB
0: When G074#5 (SFRB) is 0 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 1, it is
2 considered to be forward rotation.

When G074#5 (SFRB) is 1 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 0, it is
3 1: When G074#5 (SFRB) is 1 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 0, it is
When G074#5 (SFRB) is 0 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 1, it is
3 considered to be reverse rotation.
# 7 SFA
5 0: When G070#5 (SFRA) is 0 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 1, it is
When G070#5 (SFRA) is 1 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 0, it is
6 considered to be reverse rotation.
1: When G070#5 (SFRA) is 1 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 0, it is
7 When G070#5 (SFRA) is 0 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 1, it is
8 Directions of the axes of the machine

14706
A1 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte path
[Valid data range]: 16 to 20
A2 When the dynamic graphic display function is used, the directions
of the axes of the machine (the orientations of the basic three axes
Z of the workpiece coordinate system for the main spindle) are
selected from the following and set in the parameter:
Setting 16: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +Z, up = +X
Setting 17: Right-handed coordinate system Right = -Z, up = +X
Setting 18: Right-handed coordinate system Right = -Z, up = -X
Setting 19: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +Z, up = -X
Setting 20: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +X, up = +Z
444
B-64647EN/02
1
Setting 16 Setting 17 Setting 18
Setting 19 Setting 20
3
Fig. 5.10 Directions of the Axes of the Machine for Each Setting Value
3
14707 Orientations of the basic three axes of spindle 2 5
Axis number of C-axis in a simulation
14717
6
[Valid data range]: 0 to Number of controlled axes 7
Axis number of C-axis in a simulation
8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14788 SCP A1
[Data type] : Bit system common A2
# 0 SCP Turret 1 is based on:
0: (Conventional specification) Z
During polar coordinate interpolation in a machining simulation:
- Drawing is performed with C=0 set to coordinate value 0 of the
virtual axis.
- The current position display of C-axis is a command value
(virtual orthogonal coordinates) + C-axis value (workpiece
coordinates) when starting polar coordinate interpolation.
C language executor function when the MANUAL GUIDE i is
enabled
- A value obtained during polar coordinate interpolation in
cnc_absolute_bg() is a C-axis value when starting polar
coordinate interpolation + virtual axis command value.
445
B-64647EN/02
- The end coordinate C-axis value after polar coordinate

interpolation in anm_rdsimuelm() is a coordinate value when
starting polar coordinate interpolation + polar coordinates.
Coordinate value last specified in the interpolation mode
1: (New specification)
1 During polar coordinate interpolation in a machining simulation:
- Drawing is performed with the C-axis position where G12.1
2 was specified set to coordinate value 0 of the virtual axis.

- The current position display of C-axis is a command value
(virtual orthogonal coordinates).
3 C language executor function when the MANUAL GUIDE i is
enabled
- A value obtained during polar coordinate interpolation in
3 cnc_absolute_bg() is a command value (virtual orthogonal
coordinates).
- The end coordinate C-axis value after polar coordinate
5 interpolation in anm_rdsimuelm() is a value converted into the
workpiece coordinate system.
6 27309 ANIMESIGNAL
7 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: 2-word path
[Valid data range]: (Undefined)
8 This is an R signal number that indicates whether the specified path

is the target or not when machining simulation is started for each
A1 path in a multi-path system.

If this signal is ON, machining simulation is started for the path. If
this signal is OFF, machining simulation is not started. This is a
A2 parameter for each path. In the setting value, the first digit
represents a bit, and the second and subsequent digits represent
the signal R number.
Z
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27312 SPA

[Data type] : Bit
# 0 SPA Specify whether to switch the rotation axis number between

simulation of Spindle 1 and Spindle 2 with sub-spindle by the
spindle selection command.
0: Not switch.
1: Switch
446
B-64647EN/02
5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES
5.11
5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT

POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL DIS-
TANCE DISPLAY TILES 1
5.11.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names 2

5.11.1
(1) Parameter No. 1020 to set the program axis name for each axis
3
1020 Program axis name for each axis
[Input type] : Parameter input 3

[Data type] : Byte axis
[Valid data range]: 65 to 67, 85 to 90
5
An axis name (axis name 1: parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily
selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z. (When G code system
A is used with the lathe system, however, U, V, and W are not 6
selectable.) When bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1, the
length of an axis name can be extended up to three characters by
setting axis name 2 (parameter No. 1025) and axis name 3 7
(parameter No. 1026) (extended axis name).
For axis names 2 and 3, a character from 0 to 9 and A to Z of ASCII
code can be arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of axis name
8
3 is invalid if axis name 2 is not set for each axis. Moreover, if a
character from 0 to 9 is set as axis name 2, do not use a character
from A to Z as axis name 3.
A1
(Tip) ASCII code
X
A2
Axis Y Z A B C U V W
name
Setting 88 89 90 65 66 67 85 86 87 Z
When G code system A is used with the lathe system, and the
character X, Y, Z, or C is used as axis name 1 of an axis, a
command with U, V, W, or H specified for axis name 1 represents
an incremental programming for the axis.
447
B-64647EN/02
• When the setting value is out of range, it cannot be

recognized as an axis name.
• When a multiple repetitive canned cycle for turning is
1 used, no character other than X, Y, and Z can be used
as the address of the axis.
• When the custom macro function is enabled, the
2 same extended axis name as a reserved word cannot

NOTE
be used. Such an extended axis name is regarded as
a reserved word.
3 Because of reserved words of custom macros,
extended axis names that start with the following two
characters cannot be used:
3 AB, AC, AD, AN, AS, AT, AX, BC, BI, BP, CA, CL, CO,
US, WH, WR, XO, ZD, ZE, ZO, ZW
• In a macro call, no extended axis name can be used
as an argument.
5
6
5.11.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and
7 Subscripts
5.11.2
8 (1) Bit 0 (EEA) of Parameter No. 1000 to enable/disable an extended axis name
A1 1000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EEA
A2 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit
Z # 0 EEA Specify whether or not to enable an extended axis name and

extended spindle name.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
(2) Parameter No. 1025 for program axis name 2 for each axis
(3) Parameter No. 1026 for program axis name 3 for each axis
1025 Program axis name 2 for each axis
1026 Program axis name 3 for each axis
448
B-64647EN/02

When axis name extension is enabled (when bit 0 (EEA) of
parameter No. 1000 is set to 1), the length of an axis name can be
extended up to three characters by setting axis name 2 and axis
name 3. For axis names 2 and 3, a character from 0 to 9 and A to Z 1
of ASCII code can be arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of
axis name 3 is invalid if axis name 2 is not set for each axis.
Moreover, if a character from 0 to 9 is set as axis name 2, do not 2
use a character from A to Z as axis name 3.
(4) Parameter No. 3131 to set a subscript for an axis name

3
3131 Subscript of axis name
3
5
In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation,
synchronization control, and tandem control, specify a subscript for 6
each axis name.
Table 5.11.2 (a) Setting Values of the Subscript of the Axis Name 7
Setting Description
0 Each axis is set as an axis other than a parallel axis, 8
synchronization control axis, and tandem control axis.
1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript. A1
[Example]When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as
indicated below. A2
Table 5.11.2 (b) Setting Example When the Axis Name Is X
Z
Setting Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position
display screen
0 X
1 X1
77 XM
83 XS
If a multi-path system is used, no extended axis name is used

within a path, and no subscript is set for the axis names, then the
path number is automatically used as the subscript for the axis
names. To disable the display of axis name subscripts, set a blank
449
B-64647EN/02
(32) of ASCII code in the parameter for specifying an axis name

subscript.
1 • If even one axis in a path uses an extended axis name

when bit 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 is set to 0,
subscripts cannot be used for axis names in the path.
2 
NOTE
• If parallel axis control is used together with axis
synchronous control (or tandem control), make sure
not to set subscripts of axis names by parameter No.
3131, but to set different axis names for the axes to
3 apply axis synchronous control (or tandem control).
3 (5) Bit 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 to set whether to use subscripts when
using an extended axis name
5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 EAS

[Data type] : Bit
7 # 2 EAS Specify whether subscripts for axis names or spindle names in that
path can be used or not when an extended axis name or extended
8 spindle name is used in a path.
0: Cannot be used.
1: Can be used.
A1
A2 5.11.3 Parameters to Display Coordinate Values
5.11.3
(1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input
Z
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI

# 2 INI Specify the unit of input.

0: In metrics.
1: In inches.
(2) Bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001 to set the least command increment on the
linear axis in metric/inch system
450
B-64647EN/02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
1
2
NOTE
3
# 0 INM Specify the least command increment on the linear axis.
0: In mm (metric system machine).
3
1: In inches (inch system machine).
5
(3) Bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 to set the least input increment of each axis
ten times greater than the least command increment
6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR
7
8
# 7 IPR Specify whether or not to set the least input increment of each axis
ten times greater than the least command increment when a
number with no decimal point is specified. A1
0: Not set it ten times.
1: Set it ten times.
When the increment system is IS-A, and bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
A2
No. 3401 is set to 1 (pocket calculator type decimal point
programming), the least input increment cannot be ten times
greater than the least command increment.
Z
(4) Bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 1013 to set the increment system of each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx
451
B-64647EN/02
1

NOTE
2 #0 ISAx
#1 ISCx
#2 ISDx
3 #3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
3 Table 5.11.3 Setting Values of the Increment System of Each Axis

Increment #3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA
5 system
IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0
6 IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
7 IS-E 1 0 0 0
(5) Bit 0 (EXE) of parameter No. 10351 to extend the stroke of the minimum
8 increment system E
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A1 10351 EXE

A2 [Data type] : Bit system common
# 0 EXE Specify whether or not to enable the stroke extension of the

Z minimum increment system E.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
• Use in combination with the minimum increment

 system E (IS-E) option.
• When this parameter is enabled, the stroke is ten
MEMO
times greater.
452
B-64647EN/02
5.11.4 Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm Display

5.11.4
(1) Bit 3 (ISE) of parameter No. 1013 for the increment system IS-E
(2) Bit 4 (IPF) of parameter No. 1013 to extend the number of digits for program
commands with the minimum increment system E
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
IPFx ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx
2
1013

[Data type] : Bit axis
3

NOTE
3
5
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx
#2 ISDx 6
#3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
7
Table 5.11.4 Setting Values of the Increment System of Each Axis
Increment
system
#3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA
8
IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0 A1
IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0 A2
# 4 IPFx Specify whether or not to enable the extension of the number of Z
digits for program commands.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
(3) Bit 1 (EXD) of parameter No. 13102 to change the position data display format
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13102 EXD

453
B-64647EN/02
# 1 EXD Specify whether or not to change the position data display format
on the CNC standard screen when the function to extend the
number of digits for program commands with the minimum
increment system E is enabled.
0: Not change.
1 1: Change.
2 This parameter is disabled when the function to extend
3

NOTE
the number of digits for program commands with the
minimum increment system E is not enabled for any
axes.
3
5
5.11.5 Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius
Switching
6 5.11.5
(1) Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 to specify the move command (diameter/
7 radius) for each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 1006
DIAx
DIAx

A2
Z 
NOTE
# 3 DIAx Specify on which the move command for each axis is based.
0: Radius specification.
1: Diameter specification.
(2) Bit 2 (DPA) of parameter No. 3194 to set the absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, and remaining travel distance to follow the setting of bit 3 of
parameter No. 1006
(3) Bit 3 (DPM) of parameter No. 3194 to set the machine coordinates to follow the
setting of bit 3 of parameter No. 1006
454
B-64647EN/02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3194 DPM DPA
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
1
# 2 DPA Specify how to display the absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, and remaining travel distance during diameter/radius
2
specification switching.
0: Follow the specification during switching.
1: Follow the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
3
# 3 DPM Specify how to display the machine coordinates during diameter/
radius specification switching.
3
0: Follow the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
1: Follow the specification during switching. 5
(4) Bit 5 (PGD) of parameter No. 3400 to specify G10.9 command (programmable
diameter/radius specification switching) 6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3400 PGD 7
[Data type] : Bit path 8
# 5 PGD Specify whether or not to enable the G10.9 command
(programmable diameter/radius specification switching). A1
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
A2
• The option for the diameter and radius switching
Z

NOTE
function is required.
• When the G10.9 command is enabled by this
parameter, signal-based diameter/radius switching is
disabled.
(5) Bit 7 (PDM) of parameter No. 11222 to set the machine coordinate system
select command (G53) to follow the setting of bit 3 of parameter No. 1006
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 PDM
455
B-64647EN/02

#7 PDM Specify how to set coordinates in the machine coordinate system

select command (G53) when switching between diameter and
1 radius specification with the function for dynamic switching of
diameter/radius specification.
0: Switch between diameter and radius specification.
2 1: Follow the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
3
5.11.6 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes
3
5.11.6
(1) Bit 0 of parameter No. 3115 to show/hide the current position

(2) Bit 1 of parameter No. 3115 to show/hide the absolute coordinates, relative
5 coordinates, and remaining travel distance
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6 3115 NDAx NDPx

7 [Data type] : Bit axis
# 0 NDPx Specify whether or not to display the current position.

8 0: Display.
1: Not display.
A1

When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function, set
A2 NOTE
1 for the EGB dummy axis to disable current position
display.
Z # 1 NDAx Specify whether or not to display the current position and the
remaining travel distance in absolute and relative coordinates.
0: Display.
1: Not display (The machine coordinates are displayed).
456
B-64647EN/02
5.11.7 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top

5.11.7
(1) Bit 0 (TAD) of parameter No. 13102 to align an axis not set for current position
display to the top
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
13102 TAD
2
3
# 0 TAD Specify how to display the current position of an axis when it is not
displayed by setting bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115 to 1 or
when the axis display order is specified by parameter No. 3130. 3
0: Display the axis as blanks.
1: Align the axis to the top.
5
5.11.8 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Con- 6

trol Axes
5.11.8
7
(1) Parameter No. 3130 to set the axis display order for current position display
screens
8
3130 Axis display order for current position display screens
[Input type] : Parameter input A1

Set the order in which axes are displayed on current position A2
display screens.
457
B-64647EN/02
5.11.9 Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate Sys-

tem (Absolute/Overall)
5.11.9
(1) Bit 6 (WPS) of parameter No. 3006 to enable/disable each axis workpiece
1 coordinate system preset signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 3006 WPS

3 [Data type] : Bit
# 6 WPS Specify whether or not to enable each axis workpiece coordinate

3 system preset signal.
0: Disable.
5 1: Enable.
When this parameter is set to 1, a workpiece coordinate system is
preset after the end of the high speed program check mode.
6 (2) Bit 6 (WST) of parameter No. 8168 to automatically set a workpiece coordinate
system
7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8168 WPT
8
[Data type] : Bit
A1
# 6 WPT Specify whether or not to automatically set a workpiece coordinate
system for a slave axis at the end of synchronous control.
A2 0: Not cause.
1: Cause.
Z
 This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate
system option is enabled, and bit 6 (SPV) of parameter
MEMO No. 8167 is set to 1.
(3) Bit 0 (WPA) of parameter No. 11277 to issue an alarm when the preset signal
is turned off
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11277 WPA
458
B-64647EN/02

# 0 WPA Specify whether or not to issue an alarm when an M code for

turning on the workpiece coordinate system preset signal for an
axis is specified but the signal is not turned on, or an auxiliary 1
function lock is provided.
0: Trigger the alarm PS1820 "ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE".
1: Not issue an alarm. 2
When bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001 is set to 0 (M, S, T, and B
codes are not output in the high speed program check mode), if an
3
M code for turning on the workpiece coordinate system preset
signal for an axis is specified, the system follows the setting of this
parameter.
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
459
B-64647EN/02
5.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY
5.12
5.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD

METER DISPLAY
1
5.12.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names
2
5.12.1
See "5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL

DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES".
3
3
5.12.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and
Subscripts
5 5.12.2

6 DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES".
7
5.12.3 Parameters of Axis Name Switching
8 5.12.3

A1
A2
5.12.4 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes
5.12.4
Z See "5.11 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL

5.12.5 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top

5.12.5

460
B-64647EN/02
5.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY
5.12.6 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Con-

trol Axes
5.12.6

DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES". 1
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
461
B-64647EN/02
5.13 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.13
5.13 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMA-

TION DISPLAY
1
5.13.1 Parameters of Modal G Codes
2
5.13.1
(1) Bits 6 (GSB) and 7 (GSC) of parameter No. 3401 to set the G code system
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GSC GSB
3401
3
5 [Data type] : Bit path
# 6 GSB The G code system is set.
6 # 7 GSC
Table 5.13.1 Setting Values of the G Code Systems

7 GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
8 0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
A1

G code system B and G code system C are optional
A2 NOTE
functions. When no option is selected, G code system A
is used, regardless of the setting of these parameters.
Z
(2) Bit 4 (FPM) of parameter No.3402 to select feed per minute or feed per
revolution
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FPM
3402

# 4 FPM Specify a G code at power-on time or in the cleared state.

0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution).
462
B-64647EN/02
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute).
(3) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set data input in inches/metrics
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI 1
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: Bit path
2
# 2 INI Specify the unit of input.
0: In metrics.
3
1: In inches.
(4) Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 to enable/disable the tool change method
3
and the extended tool select function
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5
TCT
5040
6
[Data type] : Bit path 7
# 3 TCT Specify whether to enable or disable the tool change method and
the extended tool select function. 8
0: Turret rotation (Tool change operation is performed with a T
command only).
Disable the extended tool select function. A1
With a T command, an auxiliary function and tool position offset
operation are performed.
1: Automatic tool changer (ATC) (Tool change operation is
A2
performed with an M command such as M06).
Enable the extended tool select function.
With a T command, only an auxiliary function is performed.
Z
This parameter is valid with a lathe system only.
Before changing the setting value of this parameter,

cancel the offset. If the setting is changed while the
offset is applied, the subsequent offset operation may
WARNING
not be performed correctly or an alarm PS0368 occurs.
(5) Bit 3 (G36) of parameter No. 3405 to set a G code to be used with the
automatic tool change compensation function
463
B-64647EN/02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G36
3405

2 # 3 G36 Specify a G code to be used with the automatic tool length
measurement function (M series)/automatic tool offset function (T
3 series).
0: G36 (T-type only)/G37.
1: G37.1/G37.2/G37.3.
3
 If it is necessary to use G36 (counterclockwise) in
5 MEMO
circular threading, set this parameter to 1.
6 5.13.2 Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes

5.13.2
7 (1) Bit 2 (PCT) of parameter No. 3108 to set modal T, HD.T, and NX.T display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 3108 PCT

A1 [Data type] : Bit path
# 2 PCT Specify how to display modal T on the program check screen.

A2 0: Display a specified T value.
1: Display HD.T and NX.T.
Z Displayed values vary depending on the setting of bit 1 (THN) of

parameter No. 13200.
(2) Bit 0 (DHN) of parameter No. 11320 to display modal T, HD.T, and NX.T at the
same time
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11320 DHN
# 0 DHN Specify whether or not to display HD.T, NX.T, and a T number

simultaneously on the program check screen.
464
B-64647EN/02
0: Not display.
1: Display.
If DHN is set to 1, HD.T, NX.T, and T are displayed regardless of
the setting of bit 2 (PCT) of parameter No. 3108.
(3) Bit 1 (THN) of parameter No. 13200 to set where to obtain modal HD.T and 1
NX.T information from
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2
13200 THN

3
# 1 THN Specify the displayed contents of NX.T and HD.T with the tool
3
management function.
0: The tool type numbers at the first spindle position and the first 5
standby position.
1: The values specified from the PMC window.
6
(4) Parameter No. 11321 to set the spindle tool name (1st character)
(5) Parameter No. 11322 to set the spindle tool name (2nd character)
(6) Parameter No. 11323 to set the spindle tool name (3rd character) 7
(7) Parameter No. 11324 to set the spindle tool name (4th character)
11321 Spindle tool name (1st character) 8

Spindle tool name (2nd character)
11322
A1
11323 Spindle tool name (3rd character)
Spindle tool name (4th character)

A2
11324
[Input type] : Parameter input Z

[Valid data range]: See the character/code map.
The name of the spindle tool (HD.T) displayed on the program
check screen can be changed.
Any character string consisting of up to four numeric characters,
alphabetical characters, katakana characters, and symbols can be
displayed.
465
B-64647EN/02

CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in "FANUC
 Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe

1 MEMO MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
• If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code,
"HD.T" is displayed.
2
(8) Parameter No.11325 to set the next machining tool name (1st character)
3 (9) Parameter No.11326 to set the next machining tool name (2nd character)
(10) Parameter No.11327 to set the next machining tool name (3rd character)
(11) Parameter No.11328 to set the next machining tool name (4th character)
3
11325 Next machining tool name (1st character)
5 11326 Next machining tool name (2nd character)
6 11327 Next machining tool name (3rd character)
11328 Next machining tool name (4th character)

7
8 [Valid data range]: See the character/code map.
The name of the next machining tool (NX.T) displayed on the
program check screen can be changed.
A1 Any character string consisting of up to four numeric characters,
alphabetical characters, katakana characters, and symbols can be
A2 displayed.

Z CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in "FANUC
 Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe

MEMO MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
• If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code,
"HD.T" is displayed.
(12) Parameter No. 13220 to set the number of valid tools in tool management
data
13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data
466
B-64647EN/02
[Data type] : Word system common

[Valid data range]: 0 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of valid tools in tool management
data.
(13) Parameter No. 13250 to set the number of spindle tool numbers 1
Number of valid spindles
13250
2
[Valid data range]: 0 to 4 3
This parameter sets the number of spindle positions usable with the
tool management function.
3
(14) Parameter No. 13251 to set the number of next machining tool numbers
13251 Number of valid standby positions

5
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte path
6
This parameter sets the number of standby positions usable with
the tool management function.
7
8
5.13.3 Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and SMAX
5.13.3
A1
(1) Bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 24314 to show/hide modal SRPM, SSPM, and
SMAX A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24314 CSS
Z
# 7 CSS Specify whether or not to display modal information related to

constant surface speed control.
0: Not cause.
1: Cause.
467
B-64647EN/02
5.13.4 Parameters of Modal F Codes

5.13.4
(1) Bit 1 (FR3) of parameter No. 1405 to set the increment system of an F
command without a decimal point in feed per revolution
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 1405
FR3

3 [Data type] : Bit path
# 1 FR3 Specify the increment system of an F command without a decimal

3 point in feed per revolution.
0: 0.01 mm/rev (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input).
1: 0.001 mm/rev (0.00001 inch/rev for inch input).
5
(2) Bit 2 (FM3) of parameter No. 1404 to set the increment system of an F
6 command without a decimal point in feed per minute
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7 1404
FM3

A1 # 2 FM3 Specify the increment system of an F command without a decimal

point in feed per minute.
0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input).
A2 1: 0.001 mm/min (0.00001 inch/min for inch input).
Z
5.13.5 Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes
5.13.5
(1) Bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 to show/hide the compensation type
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14823 STS

468
B-64647EN/02
# 7 STS Specify whether or not to display the compensation type in the state
display area when it is specified.
0: Not display.
1: Display.
5.13.6 Parameters of Modal T Codes 2

5.13.6
(1) Parameter No. 3032 to set the allowable number of digits for T code
commands
3
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code 3
[Data type] : Byte path 5
Set the allowable number of digits for the T code.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 6
eight.
(2) Parameter No. 5028 to set the number of digits of an offset number used with a 7
T code command
Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command 8

5028

A1
Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a
A2
tool position offset number (wear offset number when the tool
geometry/wear compensation function is used).
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of
Z
tool compensation values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower one
digit
When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower
two digits
When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 999: Lower
three digits
[Example] When an offset number is specified using the lower two
digits of a T code, set 2 in parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
yy : Tool offset number
469
B-64647EN/02
xxxxxx : Tool selection

In tool management function, set 4 in this parameter to set four-digit
number in parameter No.13265.
1

A value greater than the setting of parameter No. 3032
(allowable number of digits for the T code) cannot be
2 NOTE set.
3 (3) Bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 to set the geometry offset number of tool
position offset:
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LGN
5002
5
6
# 1 LGN Specify how to set the geometry offset number of tool position
offset.
7 0: Specify the same number as wear offset number.
1: Specify the same number as tool selection number.
8
 This parameter is valid when the option for tool
A1 NOTE
geometry/wear compensation is specified.
A2 5.13.7 Parameters of Modal S Codes

5.13.7
Z (1) Parameter No. 3031 to set the allowable number of digits for modal S code
commands
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

Set the allowable number of digits for the S code.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be
eight.
470
B-64647EN/02
(2) Bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No. 3798 to enable/disable the spindle command
with a decimal point
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 SDP
1
[Data type] : Bit
2
# 3 SDP Specify whether or not to use high-precision spindle speed control:
0: Not use.
1: Use.
3
3
NOTE
5
5.13.8 Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M 6

Codes)
7
5.13.8
(1) Parameter No. 3030 to set the allowable number of digits for modal M code
commands
8
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
[Input type] : Parameter input A1

Set the allowable number of digits for the M code. A2
eight.
Z
(2) Bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 to show/hide (three) modal M codes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B

# 7 M3B Specify the number of M codes that can be specified in one block.
0: One.
1: Up to three.
471
B-64647EN/02
(3) Bit 5 (M5B) of parameter No. 11630 to show/hide (five) modal M codes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 M5B

2 # 5 M5B Specify the number of M codes that can be specified in one block.
0:
3 p to five.
3
5.13.9 Parameters of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary
5 5.13.9
Function)
6 (1) Parameter No. 3033 to set the allowable number of digits for the second
auxiliary function
7 3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

8 [Data type] : Byte path
Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
A1 When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be
eight.
To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter
A2 No. 3450 must be set to 1. In this case, the allowable number of
digits set in this parameter includes the number of decimal places.
If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the
Z alarm PS0003 "TOO MANY DIGIT" is issued.
(2) Parameter No. 3460 to set the second auxiliary function specification address
3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address
for specifying the second auxiliary function. If an address used as
an axis name is specified, the second auxiliary function is disabled.
472
B-64647EN/02
Name A B C U V W
Setting 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.

However, the name U, V, or W can be used with the T-type only 1
when G code system B or C is used. When a value from 85 to 87 is
specified with G code system A, the specification address for the
second auxiliary function is B. 2
(3) Bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 to set how to treat a decimal point in an
address that can include a decimal point
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DPI
3
3401
DPI
5
6
# 0 DPI Specify how to treat a value when a decimal point is omitted in an
address that can include a decimal point.
0: Treat it as the least input increment (normal decimal point input). 7
1: Treat it as the unit of mm, inches, degree, or second (calculator-
type decimal point input).
8
(4) Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No. 3405 to set the magnification for a value output in
the second auxiliary function
A1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405
AUX
AUX
A2
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
Z
# 0 AUX Specify the magnification for a value output (onto the code signal)
relative to a specified value when the second auxiliary function is
specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a
decimal point.
0: Use the same multiplication factor for both metric input and inch
input.
1: Set a magnification used for inch input ten times greater than
that used for metric input.
473
B-64647EN/02
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-

type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the value
output onto the code signal is a specified value multiplied by a
value indicated below.
1 Table 5.13.9 Setting Values of the Magnification for a Value Output

in the Second Auxiliary Function
2 Increment system
Parameter Parameter
AUX=0 AUX=1
3 IS-A for
reference axis
100 times 100 times
IS-B for 1000 times 1000 times
3 Metric input
reference axis
IS-C for 10000 times 10000 times
system reference axis
5 IS-D for
reference axis
100000 times 100000 times
IS-E for 1000000 times 1000000 times

6 reference axis
IS-A for 100 times 1000 times
reference axis
7 IS-B for 1000 times 10000 times
reference axis
Inch input IS-C for 10000 times 100000 times
8 system reference axis
IS-D for 100000 times 1000000 times
reference axis
A1 IS-E for 1000000 times 10000000 times
reference axis
A2
Z
5.13.10 Parameters of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary Func-
tion)
5.13.10
(1) Parameter No. 3034 to set the allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary
function
3034 Allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary function

Set the allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary function.
474
B-64647EN/02

eight.
alarm PS0003 "TOO MANY DIGIT" is issued.
(2) Parameter No. 3463 to set the third auxiliary function specification address 1
3463 Third auxiliary function specification address
2
3
for specifying the third auxiliary function.
If an address used as an axis name is specified, the third auxiliary
3
function is disabled.
5
6
5.13.11 Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary
Function)
5.13.11 7
(1) Parameter No. 3035 to set the allowable number of digits for the fourth
auxiliary function
8
3035 Allowable number of digits for the fourth auxiliary function
A1
[Valid data range]: 1 to 8 A2
Set the allowable number of digits for the fourth auxiliary function.
eight. Z
alarm PS0003 "TOO MANY DIGIT" is issued.
(2) Parameter No. 3464 to set the fourth auxiliary function specification address
3464 Fourth auxiliary function specification address

for specifying the fourth auxiliary function.
475
B-64647EN/02
If an address used as an axis name is specified, the fourth auxiliary

function is disabled.
1
5.13.12 Parameters of General Modal Information
2
5.13.12
(1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
3 [Input type] : Setting input

5 # 2 INI Specify the unit of input.

0: In metrics.
1: In inches.
6
(2) Bits 0 (ISAx), 1 (ISCx), 2 (ISDx), and 3 (ISEx) of parameter No. 1013 to set the
increment system
7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx
A1 [Data type] : Bit axis
A2  When this parameter is set, the power must be turned

NOTE
Z
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx
#2 ISDx
#3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
476
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.13.12 Setting Values of the Increment System of Each Axis

Increment #3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA
system
IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0 1
IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0
2
(3) Bit 2 (ADC) of parameter No. 10330 to enable/disable the modal information 3
highlight function
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
10330 ADC

[Data type] : Bit
# 2 ADC Specify whether or not to display a confirmation message at the 6

time of deletion of all data.
0: Display.
1: Not display.
7
8
5.13.13 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount
5.13.13
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A1
1015 WIC

A2
#6 WIC Specify the direct input of a measured workpiece origin offset

Z
amount value.
Machining center type (M-type)
0: Not consider the external workpiece origin offset amount.
1: Consider the external workpiece origin offset amount.
Lathe system (T series)
0: Valid only for the selected workpiece coordinate system.
1: Valid for all workpiece coordinate systems.
477
B-64647EN/02
• In the machining center system, you can directly input
 a measured workpiece origin offset amount value only

for the currently selected workpiece coordinate
MEMO system or external workpiece coordinate system
1 when this parameter is set to 0.
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
478
B-64647EN/02
5.14 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.14
5.14 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING

INFORMATION DISPLAY
(1) Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 to set how to count the total number of 1
machined parts and the number of machined parts
(2) Bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6700 to reset the required parts count arrival
signal 2
6700
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
PRT
#0
PCM
3
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
3
# 0 PCM Specify how to count the total number of machined parts and the
number of machined parts.
5
0: M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710.
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710. 6
# 1 PRT Specify the behavior of the required parts count arrival signal
PRTSF <Fn062.7> upon reset. 7
0: Set it to 0.
1: Not set it to 0.
8
(3) Parameter No. 6710 of an M code that counts the number of machined parts
6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts A1

[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: 2-word path A2
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined
parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed. Z
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is

performed with M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198

(external device subprogram calling), and M codes used
for subprogram calling and macro calling cannot be set
NOTE as M codes for count operation. (Even when such an M
code is set, count operation is not performed, ignoring
the M code.)
479
B-64647EN/02
(4) Parameter No. 6711 to set the number of machined parts
6711 Number of machined parts

1 [Data type] : 2-word path
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the
2 total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
3
3 
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when
bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
5 (5) Parameter No. 6712 to set the total number of machined parts
6 6712 Total number of machined parts

7 [Data type] : 2-word path
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
8 The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02,
M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
A1
A2

NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when
bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
Z (6) Parameter No. 6713 to set the number of required parts
6713 Number of required parts

[Data type] : 2-word path
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC
when the number of machined parts reaches the number of
required parts.
The number of parts is regarded as infinite when the number of
required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
480
B-64647EN/02
(7) Parameter No. 6750 to set the integrated value of power-on period
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Unit of data] : min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
(8) Parameter Nos. 6751 and 6752 to set the operation time (integrated value of 3
time during automatic operation)
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 3

1

5
[Unit of data] : msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

7
2

8
A1
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during
automatic operation (neither stop nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of
A2
parameter Nos. 6751 and 6752.
(9) Parameter Nos. 6753 and 6754 to set the integrated value of cutting time
Z
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2
481
B-64647EN/02

This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
1 performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and
circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of parameter
2 Nos. 6753 and 6754.
(10) Parameter Nos. 6755 and 6756 to set the integrated value of general-
3 purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time
3 6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal

(TMRON) ON time 1
5 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: 2-word path

7 6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal

(TMRON) ON time 2
8 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: 2-word path
A1 [Valid data range]: 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a general-purpose
integrating meter start signal TMRON <Gn053.0> from PMC is on.
A2 The actual integrated time is the sum of parameter Nos. 6755 and
6756.
Z (11) Parameters No. 6757 and No. 6758 to set the operation time (integrated
value of one automatic operation time)
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1

6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2
482
B-64647EN/02

The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of
parameter Nos. 6757 and 6758. 1
The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during the power-on
sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
483
B-64647EN/02
5.15 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION
5.15
5.15 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEE-

DRATE INFORMATION
1
5.15.1 Parameter to Display Feedrate Information
2
5.15.1
(1) Bit 0 (DPF) of parameter No. 3105 to display feedrate information
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 DPF

5 # 0 DPF Specify whether or not to display the actual feedrate.

0: Not display.
1: Display.
6
7
5.15.2 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit
8
5.15.2
(1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input in metrics/inches
A1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
A2 [Input type] : Setting input

Z # 2 INI Specify the unit of input.

0: In m
nches.
(2) Bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001 to set the least command increment on the
linear axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

484
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
1
# 0 INM Specify the least command increment on the linear axis.
0: In m 2
hes (inch system machine).
(3) Bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No. 3107 to set actual feedrate display 3
3107
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3
GSC
#2 #1 #0
3
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: Bit path
5
# 3 GSC Specify the feedrate type to be displayed.
0: Feedrate per minute.
6
1: Follow the setting of bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191.
7
(4) Bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191 to set actual feedrate display
* This parameter setting is valid only when bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No. 3107 is
1. 8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3191 FSS A1
[Data type] : Bit path A2
# 5 FSS Specify whether to display feedrate per minute or feedrate per
revolution. Z
0: Feedrate per revolution when all of the following requirements
are satisfied. Otherwise, feedrate per minute.
- Group 05 G-code is feedrate per revolution.
- Other than manual feed, rapid traverse, and dry run.
- During axis movement.
1: Fix to feedrate per revolution.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GSC) of
parameter No. 3107 is 1.
485
B-64647EN/02
5.15.3 Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate

5.15.3
(1) Parameter No. 3135 to set the number of decimal places in actual feedrate
display
1 3135 Number of decimal places in actual feedrate display

3 Set the number of decimal places in actual feedrate display.
In the case of inch input, the number of decimal places is a set
value plus two.
3 [Setting value]: 0: Metric input Displayed without a decimal point
Inch input Displayed using the second decimal place
1: Metric input Displayed using the first decimal place
5 Inch input Displayed using the third decimal place
2: Metric input Displayed using the second decimal place
Inch input Displayed using the fourth decimal place
6 3: Metric input Displayed using the third decimal place
Inch input Displayed using the fifth decimal place
7
 This parameter is valid only for feed per minute.
8 NOTE
A1 5.15.4 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed Meter

5.15.4
(1) Parameter No. 1420 to set the rapid traverse rate for each axis
A2
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis
Z [Input type] : Parameter input

[Data type] : Real axis
[Unit of data] : mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data]: Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range]: See the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100
% for each axis.
486
B-64647EN/02
For the data setting range, see the section "STANDARD
 PARAMETER SETTING TABLES" - "(C) Velocity and

angular velocity parameters" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/
MEMO 32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
1
(2) Bit 3 (NDFx) of parameter No. 3115 to consider the feedrate of each axis in
2
calculation for actual feedrate display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3
3115 NDFx
3
5
# 3 NDFx Specify whether or not to consider the feedrate of a selected axis in
calculation for actual feedrate display.
0: Consider. 6
1: Not consider.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
487
B-64647EN/02
5.16 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.16
5.16 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFOR-

MATION DISPLAY
1
5.16.1 Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and Sub-
2 5.16.1
scripts
(1) Parameter No. 3738 to set the second character of an extended spindle name
3 of each spindle
(2) Parameter No. 3739 to set the third character of an extended spindle name of
each spindle
3
3738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle
5 3739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle
6 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte spindle
7 The command for a spindle is basically "S".
When all conditions below are satisfied, however, an extended
spindle name can be used. An extended spindle name consists of
8 up to three characters starting with "S" as the first spindle name.
Thus, a command for a spindle can be specified.
- The serial (analog) spindle function is enabled.
A1 - The multi-spindle function is enabled.
- Bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1.
- Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1.
A2 - Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 1.
- Bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1. (M-type only)
As spindle name 2 (parameter No. 3738) and spindle name 3
Z (parameter No. 3739), ASCII codes from 0 to 9 and A to Z can be
arbitrary set. However, before spindle name 3 for a spindle can be
valid, spindle name 2 must be set for the spindle. Moreover, when a
character from 0 to 9 is set as spindle name 2, do not set a
character from A to Z as spindle name 3.
488
B-64647EN/02
• When an extended spindle name is used, a subscript

(for a main spindle (parameter No. 3718)) and a
subscript (for a sub-spindle (parameter No. 3719)) are
 unusable. 1
• When the custom macro function is enabled, the
NOTE
same extended spindle name as a reserved word
must not be used. Such an extended axis name is
regarded as a reserved word.
2
3
(3) Bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 to enable/disable an extended axis name
and an extended spindle name
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1000 EEA
5
[Data type] : Bit
6
# 0 EEA Specify whether or not to enable an extended axis name and
extended spindle name.
0: Disable. 7
1: Enable.
(4) Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 to set how to select the spindle in multi-
8
spindle control
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A1
3703 MPP
A2
[Data type] : Bit
Z

NOTE
# 3 MPP Specify whether or not to select a spindle using a programmed

command instead of using the signals (SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0
to Gn027.2, Gn026.3>) in multi-spindle control.
0: Not cause.
1. Update.
489
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3781
at the same time.
1
(5) Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No. 3798 to set how to specify the spindle in multi-
spindle control
2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 3798 ESN

3 [Data type] : Bit
# 1 ESN Specify what to use to specify a spindle a program when the multi-
5 spindle function is enabled and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703
is set to 1.
0: P command.
6 1: Extended spindle name.
A spindle to be specified is selected as follows:

7
Table 5.16.1 Spindle Selection Method for Each Setting Value
8 Bit 1 (ESN) of Bit 3 (MPP) of Selection method
parameter No. 3798 parameter No. 3703
0 0 Signal selection
A1 0 1 P command (S_P_)
1 0 Signal selection
A2 Extended spindle
name
1 1
or
Z P command (S_P_)

This parameter is valid when bit 0 (EEA) of parameter
No. 1000 is set to 1. When setting this parameter to 1,
NOTE also set parameter Nos. 3738 and 3739 properly.
(6) Bit 4 of parameter No. 3706 to set how to select the spindle gear
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706
GTT
490
B-64647EN/02

# 4 GTT Specify the spindle gear selection method.

0: Type M 1
1: Type T
2
• This parameter is valid only for M-type.
• Type M
There is no gear selection signal input. The CNC 3
selects a gear based on the speed range of each gear
set by a parameter beforehand according to S
commands, and the selected gear is posted through 3
the gear selection signal output. Moreover, the spindle
speed matching the gear selected by the gear
selection signal output is output.
Type T
5
There is gear selection signal input. The spindle
speed matching the gear selected by this signal is
6

NOTE
output.
• When the constant surface speed control option is
selected, type T is selected, regardless of whether
this parameter is specified. 7
• When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters are invalid:
No. 3705#2 (SGB), No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#1 8
(GST),
No.3705#3 (SGT), No.3761, No.3762, No.3705#6
(SFA),
No. 3735, No. 3736
A1
On the other hand, parameter No. 3744 becomes
valid.
• When multi-spindle control is used, select type T. A2
(7) Parameter No. 3718 to set a subscript for display of each main spindle
Z
Subscript for display of a serial spindle (main spindle) or analog
3718
spindle

[Data type] : Byte spindle
Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen
such as the position display screen.
Used when the spindle switching function is not used, or used for
the main spindle when the spindle switching function is used.
491
B-64647EN/02

NOTE
This parameter is invalid when an extended spindle
name is used.
1
(8) Parameter No. 3719 to set a subscript for display of each sub-spindle
2
3719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub-spindle)


Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen
such as the position display screen.
5 Used for the sub-spindle when the spindle switching function is

used.
6
 This parameter is invalid when an extended spindle
name is used.
7 NOTE
8 (9) Bit 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 to make a subscript usable when an
extended spindle name is used
A1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 EAS

[Data type] : Bit
Z # 2 EAS Specify whether subscripts for axis names or spindle names in that
path can be used or not when an extended axis name or extended
spindle name is used in a path.
0: Cannot be used.
1: Can be used.
5.16.2 Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed

5.16.2
(1) Parameter No. 3031 to set the allowable number of digits for the S code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
492
B-64647EN/02

Set the allowable number of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 1
eight.
(2) Bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No. 3798 to enable/disable the spindle command 2
with a decimal point
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
3798 SDP

3
[Data type] : Bit
# 3 SDP Specify whether or not to use high-precision spindle speed control:

5
0: Not use.
1: Use.
6
7

NOTE
8
A1
5.16.3 Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter
5.16.3
A2
For details on these parameters see the following manual according to the spindle
to be connected:
"FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-65280EN) Z
(1) Parameter No. 4020 to set the maximum spindle motor speed
4020
: :
4133

[Data type] : Word spindle
493
B-64647EN/02
5.16.4 Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter

5.16.4
(1) Parameters to change the spindle load meter display
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4542 SLI

[Data type] : Bit spindle
3
3

NOTE
5 # 7 SLI Specify the displayed contents of the spindle speed meter.

0: Display the current values only.
1: Display the spindle smart load meter.
6 This parameter must be set the same for all axes.
If not, the alarm SP1259 "ILLEGAL LOAD METER SETTING"
7 occurs.
(2) Parameter No. 24346 to set the short-time allowable ratio in spindle load meter
8 display
24346 Short-time allowable ratio in spindle load meter display

A2 [Unit of data] : %
[Valid data range]: (Undefined)
Set the blue and yellow area ratio against the entire spindle load
Z meter.
If 100 or above is set, it is treated as 100.
If 0 or below is set, it is treated as 90.
5.16.5 Parameters of the Current Load Ratio

5.16.5
For details on these parameters see the following manual according to the spindle
to be connected:
"FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-65280EN)
494
B-64647EN/02
(1) Parameter No. 4093 to set a load meter display value at maximum output (for
low-speed winding)
(2) Parameter No. 4127 to set a load meter display value at maximum output (for
high-speed winding)
4020 1
to to
4133
2
[Data type] : Word spindle
3
3
5.16.6 Parameters of Spindle Speed Override
5.16.6
(1) Bit 5 of parameter No. 3106 for spindle speed override 5

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 SOV 6
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: Bit 7
# 5 SOV Specify whether or not to display the spindle override value.
0: Not display.
8
1: Display.
(2) Bit 4 (EOV) of parameter No. 3713 to specify whether or not to use each
A1
spindle override signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A2
3713 EOV MSC
Z
[Data type] : Bit

NOTE
# 3 MSC Specify whether or not to use the multi-spindle control type C.

0: Not use.
1: Use.
495
B-64647EN/02
When both parameter MSC and bit 2 (MSI) of
 parameter No. 3709 for the multi-spindle control type B
1 NOTE
are set to "1", the multi-spindle control type C is
enabled.
2 # 4 EOV Specify whether or not to use each spindle override signal.

0: Not use.
3 1: Use.
3

NOTE
To use this function, the multi-spindle control type C (bit
3 (MSC) of parameter No. 3713) must be set to "Use".
5
6 (3) Bit 1 (EMS) of parameter No. 3702 to specify whether or not to use the multi-
spindle control function
7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS

A1 # 1 EMS Specify whether or not to use the multi-spindle control function.

0: Not use.
1: Use.
A2
Z
496
B-64647EN/02
5.17 PROGRAM-RELATED PARAMETERS
5.17

(1) Parameter to enable the arbitrary axis switch function
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11561 FAC FAM FAO FAW FAR
2
[Data type] : Bit 3
• When this parameter is set, the power must be turned
3

NOTE
• Setting parameter FAR deletes all history data
(operation history, alarm history, and external operator
5
message history) when the power is turned on next
time.
6
# 0 FAR Specify whether or not to enable the arbitrary axis switch function.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
7
When this parameter is set to 1, the control axis can be switched in
a multi-path system. 8
#1 FAW Specify the behavior when the retrieval command is specified for an
unreleased axis.
0: Put in the release wait state. A1
1: Trigger the alarm PS0514 "ILLEGAL COMMAND IN FLEXIBLE
PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT".
#2 FAO Specify the axis configuration when the power is turned on again. A2
0: Return to the default (setting of parameter No. 0981).
#3 FAM
1: Retain the last state.
Specify how to set the arbitrary axis switch program command.
Z
0: Identifier method.
1: Axis name method.
#4 FAC Specify the behavior when the axis is already released or belongs
to some other path in case that the release command is issued.
1: Ignore the command.
(2) Parameters of the arbitrary axis switch function
11550 Arbitrary axis switch release command M code
497
B-64647EN/02

1
2

NOTE
3 To specify the arbitrary axis switch command using a signal, set the
release command M code for each path.
3 11551 Arbitrary axis switch retrieval command M code

6
7 
NOTE
8 To specify the arbitrary axis switch command using a signal, set the
retrieval command M code for each path.
A1
11552 Arbitrary axis switch change command M code

Z

NOTE
To specify the arbitrary axis switch command using a signal, set the
change command M code for each path.
User area (R) address of the internal relay for the command on each
11553
axis
498
B-64647EN/02

[Data type] : 2-word axis
1

NOTE
2
To specify the arbitrary axis switch command using the signal (CSG
(No. 11563#0) = 1), set the user area (R) address of the internal 3
relay for the command on each axis. Use three bytes of the setting
value on each axis.
3
• The setting value must be a multiple of 4 (0, 4, 8, ...).
• The R address area varies depending on the used
PMC or its memory.
5
Be sure to check the PMC specifications and set the

NOTE
area within the valid range.
Example: When the primary PMC memory is used,
6
the R address range is R0 to R7999.
• When this parameter is set to 0, you cannot specify
the arbitrary axis switch with the signal (CSG (No. 7
11563#0) = 1) for this axis.
8
If the address set to this parameter is used for any other
purpose, the machine may behave in an unexpected
A1
manner. Take extra caution to prevent interference in
WARNING
the used internal relay.
A2
Z
User area (R) address of the internal relay for the axis information on
11554
each axis

[Data type] : 2-word axis

NOTE
499
B-64647EN/02
To output the axis information of each axis, set the user area (R)
address of the internal relay. Only the axis set to this parameter is
output. Use three bytes of the setting value on each axis.
1 • The setting value must be a multiple of 4 (4, 8, ...).

• If 0 is set, this function is disabled.
2 • For multi-path control, specify a value that does not
share the data address with other paths.
3

NOTE
• The R address area varies depending on the used
PMC or its memory.
Be sure to check the PMC specifications and set the
area within the valid range.
Example: When the primary PMC memory is used,
3 the R address range is R0 to R7999.
5
If the address set to this parameter is used for any other
6 WARNING
purpose, the machine may behave in an unexpected
manner. Take extra caution to prevent interference in
the used internal relay.
7
8 11555 Program axis name specified for arbitrary axis switch

A1 [Data type] : Byte path
A2 Specify an axis name used when the axis (bit 0 (PAN) of parameter
No. 11564) selected on each path is retrieved.
Z 11556 Program axis name 2 specified for arbitrary axis switch

Specify an axis name used when the axis (bit 0 (PAN) of parameter
The axis name setting varies according to the extended axis name
setting as follows:
• Enable (EEA (No. 1000#0) = 1): Axis name 2 (setting of this
parameter)
500
B-64647EN/02
• Disable (EEA (No. 1000#0) = 0): Axis name subscript
11557 Program axis name 3 specified for arbitrary axis switch

1
Specify an axis name used when the axis (bit 0 (PAN) of parameter
2
When the extended axis name is enabled (EEA (No. 1000#0) = 1)
and the program axis name 2 (No. 11556) is set, this setting is
3
enabled.
3
11560 Identifier of an axis for which arbitrary axis switch is performed

[Data type] : Word axis
6

NOTE
7
8
Set the identifier of an axis for which arbitrary axis switch is
performed.
This is equivalent to address P (Q, R) when a program is specified. A1
11562
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
FAN
#0
A2
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit axis
Z
#1 FAN Specify an axis name after change in arbitrary axis switch.
0: Take over the name set to each axis.
1: Use the name set to the change target axis.

Parameter FAN is disabled when the arbitrary axis
switch retrieval command is specified.
NOTE The name set to each axis continues to be used.
501
B-64647EN/02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11563 PPW RRS FAX WUA NMF CSG
1 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit
2
3 NOTE
3 #0 CSG Specify how to set the arbitrary axis switch command.

0: G code.
1: Signal.
5
Before setting this parameter to 1, set an appropriate
value to parameter No. 11553.
6 If the address set to parameter No. 11553 is used for
WARNING any other purpose, the machine may behave in an
unexpected manner.
7
8 #2 NMF Specify whether or not to use the direct switch mode signal
DASN<G0536.5>.
0: Not use.
A1 #3 WUA
1: Use.
Specify the behavior when the axis cannot be released by the direct
switch mode.
A2 0: Trigger the alarm DS0080 "ILLEGAL COMMAND IN FLEXIBLE
1: Wait until the command is executable.
Z #4 FAX Specify the behavior when the retrieval command is specified for an
axis on its own path in arbitrary axis switch.
1: Ignore the command.
#6 RRS Specify whether or not to reset the axis configuration that was
changed by arbitrary axis switch.
0: Not change.
1: Reset to the default.
#7 PPW Specify the behavior of the PMC window when arbitrary axis switch
or peripheral axis control is executed.
0: Comply with the current path number and axis number.
502
B-64647EN/02
1: Comply with the default (setting of parameter No. 0981) path

number and axis number.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11564 PAN
1
2
 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned 3

NOTE
3
#0 PAN Specify whether to change the name of an axis retrieved on each
path.
0: Not change.
5
1: Rename to the axis name specified on each path. (This setting is
valid for only one axis on each path.) 6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
503
B-64647EN/02
5.18 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY
5.18
5.18 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PRO-

GRAM DISPLAY
1
5.18.1 Parameters of Subprogram Calls
2
5.18.1
(1) Parameter No. 0020 (MDP) to set input/output devices (memory card, I/O
channel = 4)
3
I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for
0020
a foreground input device
3
0021 Foreground output device setting
5 0022 Background input device setting
6 0023 Background output device setting

7 [Data type] : Byte
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and
8 from an external input/output device and the host computer:
Input/output device interface (RS-232C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
A1 Data server interface
Embedded Ethernet interface
USB flash interface
A2 By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can
be controlled separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is
performed using the channel set in parameter No. 0020. When IO4
Z is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input,
foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/
output device to and from which data is to be transferred. See the
table below for these settings.
Table 5.18.1 Correspondence between Settings and Input/Output

Devices
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232C serial port 1
2 RS-232C serial port 2
504
B-64647EN/02
Setting Description
4 Memory card interface of CNC
Memory card/USB interface in the secondary display
unit for Ethernet connection or the shared display unit
5
for Ethernet connection
Data server interface
1
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB flash interface 2
(2) Bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 0138 to set whether to add a path number to the
extensions of files to be punched and read in external device subprogram calls 3
(3) Bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 0138 to set whether to execute external device
subprogram calls from the memory card
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC MDP
5
[Data type] : Bit
6
# 0 MDP Specify whether or not to add a path number to the extensions of
input/output files.
0: Not add.
7
1: Add.
8

If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is
ignored, and a path number is not added to the A1
NOTE extension.
A2
# 7 MNC Specify whether or not to execute DNC operation or external device
subprogram call from the memory card.
0: Not cause. Z
1. Update.
(4) Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 to specify the format of address P with a file
number/program number in external device subprogram calls
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 SBP

505
B-64647EN/02
# 2 SBP Specify the format of address P with a file number/program number

in external device subprogram calls.
0: File number specification
1: Program number specification
1
2 
NOTE
In case of memory card operation, the program number
specification is applied regardless of the setting.
3
(5) Parameter No. 6030 to set the M code to execute external device subprogram
3 calls
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When
0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be
7 used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a
negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198
is used to execute external device subprogram calls.
8
(6) Bit 7 (DPD) of parameter No. 11356 to set whether to display the external
subprogram under execution with analyzed blocks or text
A1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11356 DPD
A2
[Data type] : Bit
Z
# 7 DPD Specify the display format of look-ahead blocks when the DNC or
external subprogram is executed.
0: Analyzed blocks.
1: Input blocks.
506
B-64647EN/02
5.18.2 Parameter of Program Content Display

5.18.2
(1) Bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 to set whether to display the program
under execution with look-ahead blocks or text
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
11350 APD
2
[Data type] : Bit
3

NOTE
3
5
# 1 APD Specify how to display the program under execution.
0: A display containing look-ahead blocks.
1: A text display. 6
7
5.18.3 Parameters of Program Numbers
5.18.3 8
(1) Bit 0 (PGR) of parameter No. 11304 to display program numbers with four or
eight digits A1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 PGR A2
[Data type] : Bit Z

NOTE
# 0 PGR Specify whether or not to switch the screen of the multi-path

simultaneous display group when the path select signal is changed.
0: Not switch.
1: Switch to the display group including the selected path.
507
B-64647EN/02
(2) Bit 0 (PON) of parameter No. 11317 to display program numbers at power-on
with four or eight digits
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 11317 PON
2 [Data type] : Bit
# 0 PON Specify whether or not to enable the program number O8-digit
3 function.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
3
This parameter is set by CNC automatically. Therefore,
5 
NOTE
it is impossible to set by MDI operation. To judge if
program number O8-digit is valid by user application,
see this parameter.
6
7
5.18.4 Parameters of Display during Program Backward by
8 Manual Handle Retrace
5.18.4
A1 (1) Bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308 to show/hide one of blocks already
executed
A2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 FPD

[Data type] : Bit
# 3 FPD Specify whether or not to display blocks already executed on the

program screen and program check screen.
0: Not display.
1: Display.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (APD) of parameter
No. 11350 is 0.
508
B-64647EN/02
(2) Bit 2 (RPD) of parameter No. 11370 to set whether to display the block being
executed at the start of the program or display from the block just before the
block being executed during the execution of the program backward by
manual handle retrace
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1
11370 RPD

[Data type] : Bit
3

NOTE
off before operation is continued. 3
# 2 RPD Specify the display position of the program being executed during
5
the execution of the program backward by manual handle retrace.
0: Display at the start of the program.
1: Display the block first just before the block being executed.
6
7

This parameter is invalid when bit 1 (APD) of parameter
No. 11350 is 0 and bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308
NOTE is 1, or bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 is 1.
8
A1
A2
Z
509
B-64647EN/02
5.19 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING PROGRAM
5.19
5.19 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER

SEARCH IN A MACHINING PRO-
1 GRAM
2 5.19.1 Parameter of Sequence Numbers

5.19.1
3 (1) Bit 1 (SDE) of parameter No. 11353 to set sequence numbers to be displayed
with five or eight digits
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11353 SDE

[Data type] : Bit
6 # 1 SDE Specify the number of digits for sequence numbers on the screen.
0: Five.
1: Eight.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
510
B-64647EN/02
5.20 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP
5.20
5.20 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUM-

BER STOP
1
(1) Parameter to set the program number to stop a sequence number
8341 Program number to compare and stop

2
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: 2-word path
3
This parameter sets the program number, including a sequence
number, subject to sequence number comparison and stop.
3
Parameter No. 8342 is used to set a sequence number subject to
check termination. 5
(2) Parameter to set the sequence number to stop a sequence number
6
8342 Sequence number to compare and stop
[Input type] : Setting input 7

This parameter sets the sequence number subject to sequence 8
number comparison and stop. If the block containing the sequence
number set with this parameter is executed while the program set
with parameter No. 8341 is being executed, a single block stop A1
occurs after the block is executed. At this time, the setting is
automatically set to -1.
A2
• When -1 is set in parameter No. 8342, comparison
and stop is disabled.
• Comparison and stop cannot be performed using a
Z
sequence number contained in a block (such as a
macro statement, M98, and M99) that is processed
only inside the CNC.

NOTE
• When a match is found with the sequence number of
a block (such as an L specification of a canned cycle)
that specifies the number of repeats, operation stops
after executing as many times as the number of
repeats.
• If the sequence number set in parameter No. 8342
appears more than once in the program, operation
stops at the block where the first match is found in the
order of execution.
511
B-64647EN/02
5.21 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
5.21
5.21 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM

MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 3207 VRN

3 [Data type] : Bit
# 5 VRN Specify whether or not to display the variable names of common

3 variables #500 to #549 on the custom macro variable screen.
0: Not display.
1: Display.
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6 3290 KEY MCM MCV

7 [Data type] : Bit
# 2 MCV Specify whether or not to disable setting a macro variable by MDI

8 key input.
0: Enable.
A1 1: Disable.
# 6 MCM Specify a condition to enable setting a custom macro variable by

A2 MDI key input.
0: Enable in any mode.
1: Enable only in the MDI mode.
Z # 7 KEY Specify a memory protection signal used as a memory protection
key.
0: KEY1<Gn046.3>, KEY2<Gn046.4>, KEY3<Gn046.5>, and
KEY4<Gn046.6>.
1: KEY1<Gn046.3> only.
512
B-64647EN/02
5.21 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
1 The functions of the signals depend on whether

KEY=0 or KEY=1.
When KEY = 0:
-KEY1: Enables a tool offset amount, workpiece origin
1
offset amount, and workpiece coordinates shift
amount to be input.
2
-KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and

tool life management data to be input.
-KEY3: Enables program registration and editing. 3
NOTE
-KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to
be input.
When KEY = 1: 3
-KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and
enables PMC data to be input.
-KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
5
2 When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path
1 is followed. 6
7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 F16
8
[Data type] : Bit
A1
# 0 F16 Specify on which the precision of operation is based.
0: New specification.
1: FS16i compatible specification. A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Z
11369 CSD

[Data type] : Bit
# 4 CSD Specify whether or not to display system variables (#1000 to

#8499, #10000 to #89999, #100000 to #199999).
0: Not display.
1: Display.
513
B-64647EN/02
5.22 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
5.22
5.22 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE

COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
1
2 
NOTE
When NC parameter was changed, the machine
collision avoidance function must be ended.
3
3  Required parameters:
The following parameter settings are required to use this function.
If these parameters are not set, they are automatically set when this function is
5 started.
(1) Bit 4 (O3M) of parameter No. 10926: Outputting preview history information
of M, T, and B codes is enabled.
6 (2) Bit 0 (OE0) of parameter No. 10927: The machine collision avoidance
function is used.
(3) Bit 2 (O3T) of parameter No. 10927: The machine collision avoidance
7 function can be ended while the servo axis is moving.
8 10925 Monitor time to read machine collision avoidance function data

A1 [Data type] : Word path
[Valid data range]: 1 to 5000, 0
A2 This parameter monitors a data read interval from the machine collision avoidance
function and checks if interference detection is correctly processed. If data is not
Z read for a period of time greater than the value set in this parameter, it is assumed
that no inference check is performed, and the "machine collision avoidance
function data read stop signal ORS <Fn528.1>" is set to 1. When this parameter is
set to 0, the setting of 600 (msec) is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10926 O3I O3M O3B O3R O3S O3A

# 0 O3A Specify an action when the machine is stopped by the machine

514
B-64647EN/02
0: Issue alarm Nos. 516 and 517.

1: Interlock axes.
# 1 O3S Specify an action at the time of start of automatic operation, single-

block, or next block after skip signal input.
0: Output the preview coordinate value and interlock axes until the
1
preview time passes.
1: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value
is output.
2
# 2 O3R Specify the rapid traverse rate used in preview coordinate value
calculation in rapid traverse (G00) during automatic operation when
3
the rapid traverse time constant is greater than the maximum
preview time (600 msec). 3
0: The specified rate.
1: The specified rate multiplied by the magnification (See the
description of parameter No. 10928). 5
# 3 O3B Specify an action at the time of start of the next block of the
buffering mask block. 6
0: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value
is output.
1: Output the preview coordinate value and interlock axes until the 7
# 4 O3M Specify whether or not to enable outputting preview history

8
information of M, T, and B codes.
0: Disable.
1: Enable (Automatically set).
A1
# 5 O3I Specify an action after the interlock is released if axes are
interlocked by the PMC ladder at the time of start of automatic
A2
operation, single-block, or next block after skip signal input.
0: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value Z
is output.
1: Output the preview coordinate value and interlock axes until the
515
B-64647EN/02
• When parameter O3A is set to 1, if an axis is stopped

by the machine collision avoidance during automatic
operation, all axes related to automatic operation
1 become interlocked. In case of manual operation,
axes are interlocked in the direction to that of the axis
2 
NOTE
stopped by the machine.
• Even in the above interlocked state, axes can be
moved manually in the opposite direction to that of the
axis stopped by the machine.
3 • Even when parameter O3A is set to 1, if an axis is
stopped by the machine collision avoidance during
automatic operation, the interference detection alarm
3 signals +/-OC1 to OC8 <Fn529, Fn530> are set to 1.
5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10927 OMD O3F ORA O3T OE1 OE0
6
7
# 0 OE0 Specify whether or not to use the machine collision avoidance
function.
8 0: Not use.
1: Use (Automatically set).
A1 # 1 OE1 Specify whether or not to obtain the block end point of preview data
obtained with the machine collision avoidance function.
0: Not obtain.
A2 1: Obtain.
# 2 O3T Specify whether the machine collision avoidance function can be

Z ended or not while the servo axis is moving.
0: Cannot be ended.
1: Can be ended (Automatically set).
# 3 ORA Specify whether or not to monitor a read interval of preview position

data from the machine collision avoidance function and output the
"machine collision avoidance function data read stop signal ORS
<Fn528.1>" when any of the interference detection alarm signals
+OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529> and -OC1 to -OC8 <Fn530> is set to 1.
0: Not output.
1: Output.
516
B-64647EN/02
# 4 O3F Specify whether or not to enable speed control in the machine

0: Disable.
1: Enable.
# 7 OMD Specify whether or not to cause a delay in output pulses during 1

manual operation in the machine collision avoidance function.
0: Not cause.
1: Cause.
2
• When parameter OE1 is set to 1, if there are multiple

3
end points in the interpolation cycle, the last end point
will be output as the preview coordinate value.
3

NOTE
• When parameter O3F is set to 1, if the condition
"(Block length / Specified rate) x 50 < Preview
estimated time" is met, the specified rate will be
decelerated to the following specified rate: 5
Rate = Block length x 50 / (Preview estimated time)
6
10928 Time other than time constant included in the maximum preview time
of the machine collision avoidance function
7
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Word system common
8
A1
This parameter sets a period of time required for factors, such as a sampling cycle
on the application, other than time constant included in the maximum preview time
during the execution of the machine collision avoidance function. The setting of
A2
this parameter is used to calculate a preview coordinate value in rapid traverse
when the conditions below are satisfied. When this parameter is set to 0, the
following process is not performed.
Z
The rapid traverse rate used in preview coordinate value calculation is multiplied
by the following magnification when the conditions below are satisfied.
• There is an axis that meets "Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)".
• The axis that meets the above condition is moving in rapid traverse (G00) during
automatic operation.
Rapid traverse rate = Rapid traverse command rate x P1620 + P1621

600 - TAP
517
B-64647EN/02
TAP: Setting value in the parameter

Maximum magnification: 10.0
Even when the fast traverse override is enabled or acceleration/
1 
deceleration before interpolation is used for fast traverse, if the condition
"Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant (P1620 +
NOTE P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)" is met, it is assumed to
2 be multiplied by the above magnification.
3 Number of paths to be checked after the buffering suppression block

10929
of the machine collision avoidance function
3
[Data type] : Byte system common
Number of paths to be checked after the buffering suppression block

6 For 0
For 1 to N
: Follows the setting of bit 3 (O3B) of parameter No. 10926.
: Outputs a preview coordinate value for each of times into which
the preview time is split by this setting value while monitoring the
7 execution status of the machine collision avoidance function.
Example: When this parameter is set to 3, after the buffering suppression block,
8 the machine outputs the position of the below paths 1 to 3 sequentially
while monitoring the execution status of the machine collision
avoidance function and then starts moving the axis of the next block.
A1 Position advanced after preview time Path 3
Start point of next block after
A2 buffering suppression block Path 2
Z Path used for

interference check
Path 1
Actual moving path
Fig. 5.22 Example of the Number of Paths to Be Checked after the Buffering
Suppression Block
518
B-64647EN/02
5.23 PARAMETERS OF THE 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION
5.23
5.23 PARAMETERS OF THE 3D INTER-

FERENCE CHECK FUNCTION
1
5.23.1 General Parameters of the 3D Interference Check
5.23.1
Function 2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10959 TTD 3
[Data type] : Bit system common 3
#0 TTD Specify whether or not to consider the "Tool Mount Position"
information in tool figure dimension data when creating a tool
figure.
5
0: Not consider.
1: Consider.
6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10930 TFU ENO IIA ICN ICV ICT ICD ICE 7
#0 ICE Specify whether or not to enable the 3D interference check
function. A1
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
#1 ICD Specify whether or not to display the 3D interference check function A2
setting screen.
0: Display.
1: Not display. Z
#2 ICT Specify the method to recognize a changed tool by the 3D
interference check function.
0: Tool change notification by the PMC window (Function code:
431).
1: Tool change command by NC program.
#3 ICV Specify the behavior when the interference check valid figure
number is set to "0".
0: Set Figure 1 as a valid figure.
1: Determine that there is no figure.
#4 ICN Specify the behavior when the tool offset number is set to "0" in the
tool change notification method specified in bit 2 (ICT) of parameter
10930.
0: Not change the tool and tool holder figures.
519
B-64647EN/02
1: Exclude the tool from interference check and make the tool
holder figure comply with parameters 10960 to 10963.
#5 IIA Specify the behavior if the tool dimension corresponding to the
specified tool offset number is illegal when bit 2 (ICT) of parameter
10930 is set to "0".
1 0: Trigger the PS492 (3DCHK FIG. ILLEGAL) alarm.
1: Not trigger an alarm and not change the tool and tool holder
figures.
2
 • An illegal figure can be identified by the completion
3 MEMO
code in the PMC window (Function code: 431).
3 #6 ENO Specify the number of interference objects for a single-path system.

0: 3
1: 6
5 #7 TFU Specify whether or not to update the tool figure using the setting
change signal (G519.4).
0. Not update.
6 1. Update.
7 5.23.2 Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check

between Targets
8 5.23.2
Specify whether or not to enable interference check between targets in parameter

Nos. 10931 to 10944.
The parameters corresponding to the combinations of targets for interference
A1 check set here are as shown in the table below:
A2 Table 5.23.2 (a) Parameters Corresponding to Combinations of Targets for

Interference Check (1/2)
TOOL 1 TOOL 2 TOOL 3 TOOL 4 Tool Tool Tool Tool
Z HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
1 2 3 4
TOOL 1 - 10935#2 10938#0 10941#0 10931#0 10935#3 10938#1 10941#1
TOOL 2 - – 10940#0 10943#0 10935#4 10937#2 10940#1 10943#1
TOOL 3 - – – 10943#4 10938#2 10940#2 10940#4 10943#5
TOOL 4 - – – – 10941#2 10943#2 10943#6 10944#0
Tool - – – – – 10935#5 10938#3 10941#3
HOLDER
1
Tool - – – – – – 10940#3 10943#3
HOLDER
2
520
B-64647EN/02

HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
1 2 3 4
Tool - – – – – – – 10943#7
HOLDER
3 1
Tool - – – – – – – –
HOLDER
4 2
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
1
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
3
2
OBJECT
3
- – – – – – – –
3
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
4 5
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
5
OBJECT - – – – – – – – 6
6
Table 5.23.2 (b) Parameters Corresponding to Combinations of Targets for

7
Interference Check (2/2)
OBJECT 1 OBJECT 2 OBJECT 3 OBJECT 4 OBJECT 5 OBJECT 6 8
TOOL 1 10931#1 10931#2 10931#3 10933#0 10933#1 10933#2
TOOL 2
TOOL 3
10935#6
10938#4
10936#0
10938#6
10936#2
10939#0
10936#4
10939#2
10936#6
10939#4
10937#0
10939#6
A1
TOOL 4 10941#4 10941#6 10942#0 10942#2 10942#4 10942#6
Tool 10931#4 10931#5 10931#6 10933#3 10933#4 10933#5 A2
HOLDER 1
Tool 10935#7 10936#1 10936#3 10936#5 10936#7 10937#1
HOLDER 2 Z
Tool 10938#5 10938#7 10939#1 10939#3 10939#5 10939#7
HOLDER 3
Tool 10941#5 10941#7 10942#1 10942#3 10942#5 10942#7
HOLDER 4
OBJECT 1 - 10931#7 10932#0 10933#6 10933#7 10934#0
OBJECT 2 - – 10932#1 10934#1 10934#2 10934#3
OBJECT 3 - – – 10934#4 10934#5 10934#6
OBJECT 4 - – – – 10934#7 10935#0
OBJECT 5 - – – – – 10935#1
OBJECT 6 - – – – – –
521
B-64647EN/02
The following shows the details of each parameter setting:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 10931

2 [Data type] : Bit system common
Specify whether or not to enable interference check between Target 1 and Target
3 2 shown in the table below.
• #0, #7
0: Disable.
3 1: Enable.
• #1 to 6
5 0: Enable.
1: Disable.
6 Table 5.23.2 (c) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10931 Corresponding to the Settings
for Interference Check between Targets
7 Target 1
TOOL 1 TOOL
Target 2
OBJECT 1 OBJECT 2 OBJECT 3
HOLDER 1
8 TOOL 1 - #0 #1 #2 #3
TOOL - – #4 #5 #6
HOLDER 1
A1 OBJECT 1 - – – #7 -
A2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10932

2 shown in the table below.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
522
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.2 (d) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10932 Corresponding to the Settings
Target 1 Target 2
OBJECT 3
OBJECT 1 #0 1
OBJECT 2 #1
2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10933
3
3
• #0 to 5
5
0: Enable.
1: Disable. 6
• #6, #7
0: Disable.
1: Enable. 7
Table 5.23.2 (e) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10933 Corresponding to the Settings
8
Target 1 Target 2
A1
TOOL 1 #0 #1 #2
TOOL
HOLDER 1
#3 #4 #5 A2
OBJECT 1 #6 #7 -
Z
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10934

0: Disable.
1: Enable.
523
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.2 (f) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10934 Corresponding to the Settings
Target 1 Target 2
1 OBJECT 1 - – #0
OBJECT 2 #1 #2 #3
2 OBJECT 3
OBJECT 4
#4
-
#5
#7
#6
-
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10935
5 Specify whether or not to enable interference check between Target 1 and Target
6 • #0, #1
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
7 • #2 to 7
0: Enable.
8 1: Disable.
Table 5.23.2 (g) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10935 Corresponding to the Settings
A1 for Interference Check between Targets
Target 1 Target 2
A2 OBJECT 6 TOOL 2 TOOL HOLDER 2

OBJECT 4 #0 - –
OBJECT 5 #1 - –
Z TOOL 1 - #2 #3
TOOL - #4 #5
HOLDER 1
OBJECT 1 - #6 #7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10936

524
B-64647EN/02
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
Table 5.23.2 (h) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10936 Corresponding to the Settings
1
Target 1 Target 2 2
TOOL 2 TOOL HOLDER 2
OBJECT 2
OBJECT 3
#0
#2
#1
#3
3
OBJECT 4 #4 #5
OBJECT 5 #6 #7 3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5
10937

Specify whether or not to enable interference check between Target 1 and Target 7
• #0, #1
0: Enable.
8
1: Disable.
• #2 A1
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
A2
Table 5.23.2 (i) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10937 Corresponding to the Settings
Z
Target 1 Target 2
OBJECT 6 #0 #1
TOOL 2 - #2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10938

525
B-64647EN/02
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
1 Table 5.23.2 (j) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10938 Corresponding to the Settings
2 Target 1 Target 2
3 TOOL 1
TOOL
#0
#2
#1
#3
HOLDER 1
3 OBJECT 1
OBJECT 2
#4
#6
#5
#7
5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10939
6
7
8 0: Enable.
1: Disable.
A1 Table 5.23.2 (k) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10939 Corresponding to the Settings
A2 Target 1 Target 2
OBJECT 3 #0 #1
Z OBJECT 4 #2 #3
OBJECT 5 #4 #5
OBJECT 6 #6 #7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10940

526
B-64647EN/02
• #0 to 3
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
• #4
0: Disable. 1
1: Enable.
Table 5.23.2 (l) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10940 Corresponding to the Settings 2
Target 1 Target 2 3
TOOL 2 #0 #1
TOOL #2 #3 3
HOLDER 2
TOOL 3 - #4
5
10941
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit system common
7
8
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
A1
Table 5.23.2 (m) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10941 Corresponding to the Settings
for Interference Check between Targets A2
Target 1 Target 2
TOOL 1
TOOL 4
#0
TOOL HOLDER 4
#1
Z
TOOL #2 #3
HOLDER 1
OBJECT 1 #4 #5
OBJECT 2 #6 #7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10942

527
B-64647EN/02
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
1
Table 5.23.2 (n) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10942 Corresponding to the Settings
2 for Interference Check between Targets

Target 1 Target 2
3 OBJECT 3 #0 #1
OBJECT 4 #2 #3
3 OBJECT 5 #4 #5
OBJECT 6 #6 #7
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10943
6
7
8 0: Enable.
1: Disable.
A1 Table 5.23.2 (o) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10943 Corresponding to the Settings
A2 Target 1 Target 2
TOOL 2 #0 #1
Z TOOL #2 #3
HOLDER 2
TOOL 3 #4 #5
TOOL #6 #7
HOLDER 3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10944

528
B-64647EN/02
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
Table 5.23.2 (p) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10944 Corresponding to the Settings
1
Target 1 Target 2 2
TOOL HOLDER 4
TOOL 4 #0
3
5.23.3 Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check 3
between Targets (at Cutting Feed during Automatic
Operation)
5.23.3
Specify whether or not to enable interference check between targets at cutting

5
feed during automatic operation in parameter Nos. 10945 to 10958.
The parameters corresponding to the combinations of targets for interference
check set here are as shown in the table below:
6
Table 5.23.3 (a) Parameters Corresponding to Combinations of Targets for 7
Interference Check (at Cutting Feed during Automatic Operation) (1/2)
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER 8
1 2 3 4
TOOL 1
TOOL 2
-
-
10949#2 10952#0 10955#0 10945#0 10949#3 10952#1 10955#1
– 10954#0 10957#0 10949#4 10951#2 10954#1 10957#1
A1
TOOL 3 - – – 10957#4 10952#2 10954#2 10954#4 10957#5
TOOL 4 - – – – 10955#2 10957#2 10957#6 10958#0 A2
Tool - – – – – 10949#5 10952#3 10955#3
HOLDER
1 Z
Tool - – – – – – 10954#3 10957#3
HOLDER
2
Tool - – – – – – – 10957#7
HOLDER
3
Tool - – – – – – – –
HOLDER
4
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
1
529
B-64647EN/02

HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
1 2 3 4
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
1 2
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
3
2 OBJECT
4
- – – – – – – –
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
3 5
OBJECT - – – – – – – –
6
3
Table 5.23.3 (b) Parameters Corresponding to Combinations of Targets for
5 Interference Check (at Cutting Feed during Automatic Operation) (2/2)
OBJECT 1 OBJECT 2 OBJECT 3 OBJECT 4 OBJECT 5 OBJECT 6
TOOL 1 10945#1 10945#2 10945#3 10947#0 10947#1 10947#2
6 TOOL 2 10949#6 10950#0 10950#2 10950#4 10950#6 10951#0
TOOL 3 10952#4 10952#6 10953#0 10953#2 10953#4 10953#6
7 TOOL 4 10955#4 10955#6 10956#0 10956#2 10956#4 10956#6

TOOL 10945#4 10945#5 10945#6 10947#3 10947#4 10947#5
HOLDER 1
8 TOOL 10949#7 10950#1 10950#3 10950#5 10950#7 10951#1
HOLDER 2
TOOL 10952#5 10952#7 10953#1 10953#3 10953#5 10953#7
A1 HOLDER 3
TOOL 10955#5 10955#7 10956#1 10956#3 10956#5 10956#7
HOLDER 4
A2 OBJECT 1 - 10945#7 10946#0 10947#6 10947#7 10948#0
OBJECT 2 - – 10946#1 10948#1 10948#2 10948#3
Z OBJECT 3 - – – 10948#4 10948#5 10948#6

OBJECT 4 - – – – 10948#7 10949#0
OBJECT 5 - – – – – 10949#1
OBJECT 6 - – – – – –
The following shows the details of each parameter setting:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10945

530
B-64647EN/02
2 shown in the table below at cutting feed during automatic operation.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
1
Table 5.23.3 (c) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10945 Corresponding to Interference
Check Settings between Targets (at Cutting Feed during Automatic Operation)
2
Target 1 Target 2
TOOL HOLDER OBJECT 1 OBJECT 2 OBJECT 3
1 3
TOOL 1 #0 #1 #2 #3
TOOL HOLDER
1
- #4 #5 #6
3
OBJECT 1 - – #7 -
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10946
6
7
0: Enable.
8
1: Disable.
A1
Table 5.23.3 (d) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10946 Corresponding to Interference
Target 1 Target 2 A2
OBJECT 3
OBJECT 1 #0 Z
OBJECT 2 #1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10947

0: Enable.
531
B-64647EN/02
1: Disable.
Table 5.23.3 (e) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10947 Corresponding to Interference

1 Target 1 Target 2
2 TOOL 1
TOOL HOLDER 1
#0
#3
#1
#4
#2
#5
OBJECT 1 #6 #7 -
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 10948

6 2 shown in the table below at cutting feed during automatic operation.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
7
Table 5.23.3 (f) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10948 Corresponding to Interference
8 Target 1 Target 2
A1 OBJECT 1 - – #0
OBJECT 2 #1 #2 #3
A2 OBJECT 3
OBJECT 4
#4
-
#5
#7
#6
-
Z #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10949

0: Enable.
1: Disable.
532
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.3 (g) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10949 Corresponding to Interference

Target 1 Target 2
OBJECT 6 TOOL 2 TOOL HOLDER 2
OBJECT 4 #0 - – 1
OBJECT 5 #1 - –
TOOL 1
TOOL HOLDER 1
-
-
#2
#4
#3
#5
2
OBJECT 1 - #6 #7
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10950 3
0: Enable.
6
1: Disable.
7
Table 5.23.3 (h) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10950 Corresponding to Interference
Target 1 Target 2
8
OBJECT 2 #0 #1 A1
OBJECT 3 #2 #3
OBJECT 4
OBJECT 5
#4
#6
#5
#7
A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Z
10951

0: Enable.
1: Disable.
533
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.3 (i) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10951 Corresponding to Interference

Target 1 Target 2
1 OBJECT 6 #0 #1
TOOL 2 - #2
2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 10952

3
5 0: Enable.
1: Disable.
6 Table 5.23.3 (j) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10952 Corresponding to Interference

7 Target 1 Target 2
8 TOOL 1
TOOL
#0
#2
#1
#3
HOLDER 1
A1 OBJECT 1 #4 #5
OBJECT 2 #6 #7
A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10953
Z
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
534
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.3 (k) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10953 Corresponding to Interference

Target 1 Target 2
OBJECT 3 #0 #1 1
OBJECT 4 #2 #3
OBJECT 5
OBJECT 6
#4
#6
#5
#7
2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3
10954

3
5
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
6
Table 5.23.3 (l) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10954 Corresponding to Interference 7
Target 1
TOOL 3
Target 2
TOOL HOLDER 3
8
TOOL 2 #0 #1
TOOL #2 #3 A1
HOLDER 2
TOOL 3 - #4
A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10955 Z
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
535
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.3 (m) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10955 Corresponding to Interference

Target 1 Target 2
1 TOOL 1 #0 #1
TOOL #2 #3
HOLDER 1
2 OBJECT 1 #4 #5
OBJECT 2 #6 #7
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 10956

6 2 shown in the table below at cutting feed during automatic operation.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
7
Table 5.23.3 (n) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10956 Corresponding to Interference
8 Target 1 Target 2
A1 OBJECT 3 #0 #1
OBJECT 4 #2 #3
OBJECT 5 #4 #5
A2 OBJECT 6 #6 #7
Z #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10957

0: Enable.
1: Disable.
536
B-64647EN/02
Table 5.23.3 (o) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10957 Corresponding to Interference

Target 1 Target 2
TOOL 2 #0 #1 1
TOOL #2 #3
HOLDER 2
TOOL 3 #4 #5 2
TOOL #6 #7
HOLDER 3
3
10958
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit system common
5
2 shown in the table below at cutting feed during automatic operation. 6
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
7
Table 5.23.3 (p) Bit Numbers of Parameter 10958 Corresponding to Interference
Check Settings between Targets (at Cutting Feed during Automatic Operation) 8
Target 1 Target 2
TOOL 4
TOOL HOLDER 4
#0
A1
A2
Z
537
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
538
A
1
APPENDIX 2
3
4
5
A.1
A.2
APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ........................................................... 540
CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE) .... 541
A
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE) ......... 542
A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI.......................................................... 550
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST...................................... 559
A.6 CNCAPPCLIENT FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS................................ 565
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION............................ 572
539
B-64647EN/02
CHAPTER A APPENDIX 
A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID
A.1
A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID

Application identifier IDs specified in the application definition file (apps-
1 general.xml) are as follows.
Table A.1 Application Identifier ID List

2 Identifier ID Application name
MainMenu Home screen
3 DataLog Data Logger Service Program

ResidentApp Maintenance Manager/Calendar Service Program
PC PC Operation
4 ToolManager Tool Manager
CALENDAR Calendar
4 CycleTimeEstimation Cycle Time Estimation

CNCOPERA CNC operation screen
ConversationProgT iCAP T
A OpenCAS Machine Collision Avoidance
DATALOGGER Data Logger
7 Maintenance Maintenance Manager

SERVOVIEWER SERVO Viewer
CNCPower Power Consumption Monitor
8 Manual Manual Viewer
WhiteBoard MEMO
A1 Browser Browser
Setting Setting
SDF Maintenance Display
A2 FileManager File Manager
TroubleShooting Troubleshooting
Z ScrSwitch Service Program for CNC Operation Screen
540
B-64647EN/02
A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
A.2
A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCH-

ING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
Specify the command "open" and the screen ID for subject. 1
Example:
Main screen: <subject>open, Main</subject> 2
Table A.2 CNC Operation Screen Switching ID 3
Screen ID Screen
Main
ProgMgrSld
Main screen in current mode
Program manager slide
4
ToolOfsSld Tool slide
WorkCrdSld Workpiece coordinates slide 4
CstmMcrSld Custom macro slide
SettingSld
UtilitySld
Setting slide
Utility slide
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
541
B-64647EN/02
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
A.3
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCH-

ING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
1 Specify the screen number for subject.
The screen number is used for the C-language executor functions. The
2 relationship between the number and screen is shown in the figure below.
Example:
Current position (absolute coordinates) screen: <subject>0100</subject> or
3 <subject>0x0100</subject>
Current position (relative coordinates) screen: <subject>0200</subject> or
<subject>0x0200</subject>
4
Table A.3 Maintenance Display Switching ID
4 Screen Screen
Number
POSITION
A 0100 Current position (absolute coordinate) screen
0200 Current position (relative coordinate) screen
7 0300 Current position (overall) screen
0400 Handle interruption screen
0600 Operating monitor screen
8 0700 3D Manual Feed Screen
0800 Current position (relative coordinate) screen
A1 3200 C Language Executor application screen 1(Position screen)

3300 C Language Executor application screen 2(Position screen)
A2 3500 C Language Executor application screen 4(Position screen)
Z PROGRAM
0101 Program display screen
0201 Program folder screen
0301 Next block display screen
0401 Program check screen
0601 Machining time display screen
0701 Manual numerical command screen
0801 Program restart screen
0901 Robot connection Robot program select screen
3201 C Language Executor application screen 1(Program screen)
542
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
3601 C Language Executor application screen 5(Program screen) 1
OFFSET
0102 Tool offset screen
0202 Setting screen
2
0302 Workpiece coordinates setting screen
0602 Custom macro screen 3
0702 Pattern menu screen
0802 Software operator's panel screen
0902 Displaying tool life management (list screen)
4
0b02 Y-axis offset screen
0c02 Workpiece coordinate system shift screen 4
0d02 Tool offset/second geometry tool offset screen
0e02 Tool geometry data screen
1102 Precision level selection screen/Machining quality level selection
A
screen
1202
1302
4th/5th axis offset screen
Chopping parameter setting screen
7
1502 Chuck barrier setting screen
1602 Language screen 8
1702 Protection of data at 8levels screen
1802
1a02
Operation confirmation function setting screen
Active fixture offset display screen
A1
1b02 Fixture offset setting screen
1c02 3D interference check screen A2
1d02 Tool geometry size data setting screen
1f02
2402
Workpiece setting error screen
Dynamic tool offset screen
Z
2702 Machine configuration selecting screen
2802 Machining condition selection screen
2902 Eco setting screen
3202 C Language Executor application screen 1(Offset screen)
0112 Tool offset screen (wear)
543
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
0212 Tool offset screen (tool geometry)
0312 Tool offset screen (wear 2)
1 0412 Tool offset screen (tool geometry 2)
0512 Operation level setting screen of the protection of data at 8levels
0612 Password change screen of the protection of data at 8levels
2 0712 Protect level setting screen of the protection of data at 8levels
0812 Operation confirmation function setting screen
3 0912 Tool offset range setting screen
0a12 External workpiece origin offset range setting screen
0b12 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen
4 0c12 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen
0d12 Workpiece shift range setting screen
4 0e12 Tool management magazine screen
0f12 Tool management data screen
1012 Custom macro screen
A 1112 Execution macro variable screen
1212 Conversational macro variable screen
7 1312 Auxiliary macro variable screen
SYSTEM
0103 Parameter screen
8 0203 Diagnosis screen
0303 Servo guide mate screen
A1 0403 System configuration screen

0603 Memory contents display screen
0703 Pitch error compensation screen
A2 0803 Servo parameter setting screen
0903 Spindle setting screen
Z 0b03 PMC diagnosis/maintenance screen

0c03 Ladder diagram monitor and editor screens
0d03 PMC configuration data setting screens
1003 Machining parameter setting screen
1103 ALL IO (RS-232C) screen
1203 ALL IO screen
1303 Operation history screen
1503 Color setting screen
1603 Periodic maintenance screen
1703 Maintenance information screen
1803 Waveform Diagnosis Screen
544
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
1a03 Touch panel calibration screen
1b03 FSSB setting screen
1c03 Menu screen for parameter tuning 1
1d03 Power Mate CNC manager screen
1f03 Embedded Ethernet port screen
2003 PCMCIA Ethernet card screen
2
2103 Ethernet screen
2203 PROFIBUS Master screen 3
2403 Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
2503 M code group setting screen
2603 Learning control for parts cutting screen/Learning control screen/Rigid
4
tapping learning control screen
2703
2903
3D error compensation screen/3D rotary error compensation screen
PROFIBUS Slave screen
4
2a03 DeviceNet Master screen
2b03 FL-net (1st) screen A
2c03 DeviceNet Slave screen
2e03
2f03
Dual Check Safety screen
Real time macro screen
7
3003 High pitch error compensation screen
3103 Customer's board screen 8
3203 C Language Executor application screen 1(System screen)
3303
3403
C Language Executor application screen 2(System screen)
C Language Executor application screen 3(System screen)
A1
3503 C Language Executor application screen 4(System screen)
3603 C Language Executor application screen 5(System screen) A2
3803 CNC ID information screen
3903
3a03
C Language Executor Task execution status monitor screen
Fine torque sensing screen
Z
3b03 Setting screen for the 3D machine position compensation function
3d03 Parameter check sum screen
4003 Reference position setting with mechanical stopper screen
4103 Data modification detection setting screen
4203 CC-Link Remote device screen
4403 Robot connection robot status screen
4503 Robot connection setting screen
4603 Power consumption monitoring screen
0113 Spindle setting screen
545
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
0213 Spindle tuning screen
0313 Spindle monitor screen
1 0413 Amplifier setting screen for iA
0513 FSSB axis setting screen for iA
0613 Amplifier maintenance screen for iA
2 0713 Servo parameter setting screen
0813 Servo motor tuning screen
3 0913 Periodic maintenance status screen
0a13 Periodic maintenance machine menu screen
0b13 Periodic maintenance NC menu screen
4 0c13 Y-time graph wave display screen
0d13 XY graph wave display screen
4 0e13 Circle graph wave display screen
0f13 Fourier graph wave display screen
1013 Bode graph wave display screen
A 1113 Channel setting screen
1213 Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen
7 1313 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen
1413 Operation history screen
1513 Operation history signal selection screen
8 1613 Absolute coordinate screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1713 Machine coordinate screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
A1 1813 Parameter screen of the Power Mate CNC manager

1913 Alarm screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1a13 Diagnosis screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
A2 1b13 System configuration screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1c13 System configuration screen
Z 1d13 Servo information screen

1e13 Spindle information screen
1f13 Parameter check sum information screen
2013 Parameter check sum setting screen
2113 Signal status screen
2213 I/O device monitor screen
2313 PMC alarm screen
2413 Data I/O screen
2513 PMC parameter (timer) screen
2613 PMC parameter (counter) screen
2713 PMC parameter (keep relay) screen
546
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
2813 PMC parameter (data table) screen
2913 Signal trace screen
2a13 Signal trace (parameter setting) screen 1
2b13 Program list screen
2c13 Ladder diagram monitor / editor screens
2d13 Title display/edit screens
2
2e13 Configuration parameter screens
2f13 PMC function setting screens (for general functions, multi-language
message function, selectable I/O Link assignment function, and
3
override function)
3013 PMC status screen 4
3113 System parameter display/edit screens
3213 I/O module display/edit screens
3313 Symbol and comment display/edit screens
4
3413 Message display/edit screens
3513 Online monitor parameter setting screen A
3613 Embedded Ethernet port common screen
3713 Embedded Ethernet port FOCAS2 screen
3813 Embedded Ethernet port FTP transfer screen
7
3913 Embedded Ethernet port PING screen
3a13 Embedded Ethernet port communication state screen 8
3b13 Embedded Ethernet port task state screen
3c13 PCMCIA Ethernet card common screen
3d13 PCMCIA Ethernet card FOCAS2 screen
A1
3e13 PCMCIA Ethernet card FTP transfer screen
3f13 PCMCIA Ethernet card PING screen A2
4013 PCMCIA Ethernet card communication state screen
4113 PCMCIA Ethernet card task state screen
4213 Ethernet common screen
Z
4313 Ethernet FOCAS2 screen
4413 Ethernet Data Server screen
4513 Ethernet PING screen
4613 Ethernet communication state screen
4713 Ethernet task state screen
4813 Ethernet Data Server mode screen
4913 Ethernet Data Server format screen
4e13 PROFIBUS Master top screen
4f13 PROFIBUS Master bus parameter screen
5013 PROFIBUS Master slave table screen
547
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
5113 PROFIBUS Master communication status screen
5213 PROFIBUS Master slave parameter screen
1 5313 PROFIBUS Master module data screen
5413 PROFIBUS Master DI/DO address screen
5513 PROFIBUS Master operation mode screen
2 MESSAGE
0104 Alarm screen
3 0204 Operator message screen
0304 Alarm history screen
0404 Operator message history screen
4 0604 Embedded Ethernet port log screen
0704 PCMCIA Ethernet card log screen
4 0804 Ethernet log screen
0904 FL-net (1st) communication history screen
0b04 System alarm history screen
A 0c04 USB log screen
1004 DeviceNet Master HISTORY screen
7 1104 DeviceNet Slave HISTORY screen
1304 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen
1404 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen
8 1504 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen
3204 C Language Executor application screen 1(Message screen)
A1 3304 C Language Executor application screen 2(Message screen)

A2 3604 C Language Executor application screen 5(Message screen)
0114 Alarm detail screen
Z 0214 All path screen

GRAPHIC
0105 Graphic parameter screen
0205 Tool path graphic screen
0605 Graphic parameter screen of the dynamic graphic
0705 Path graphic screen of the dynamic graphic
0805 Animation graphic screen of the dynamic graphic
0905 Path graphic (tool position) screen of the dynamic graphic
3205 C Language Executor application screen 1(Graphic screen)
548
B-64647EN/02
Screen Screen
Number
CUSTOM 1
0106 Conversational macro 1 screen
2
3206 C Language Executor application screen 1(Custom1 screen)
3306 C Language Executor application screen 2(Custom1 screen) 3
4
CUSTOM2
3207 C Language Executor application screen 1(Custom2 screen) 4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
549
B-64647EN/02
A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI
A.4

 QWERTY Types
1 Table A.4 (a) QWERTY Types

Key Key code
2 !
Q
Shift + 1 (31)
Q (51)
@ Shift + +2 (32)
3 W
#
W (57)
Shift + +3 (33)
E E (45)
4 $
R
Shift + +4 (34)
R (52)
% Shift + +5 (35)
4 T T (54)
& Shift + +7 (37)
Y Y (59)
A * Shift + +8 (38)
U U (55)
7 (
I
Shift + +9 (39)
I (49)
) Shift + +0 (30)
8 O
\
O (4F)
VK_OEM_5 (DC)
P P (50)
A1 `
A
VK_OEM_3 (CO)
A (41)
~ Shift + ` (CO)
A2 S S (53)
_ Shift + - (BD)
D D (44)
Z ; VK_OEM_1 (BA)
F F (46)
: Shift + ; (BA)
G G (47)
" Shift + ' (DE)
H H (48)
' VK_OEM_7 (DE)
J J (4A)
[ VK_OEM_4 (DB)
K K (4B)
] VK_OEM_6 (DD)
L L (4C)
550
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

| Shift + \ (DC)
Z Z (5A)
^ Shift + +6 (36)
X
<
X (58)
Shift + , (BC)
1
C C (43)
>
V
Shift + . (BE)
V (56)
2
/ VK_OEM_2 (BF)
B B (42) 3
? Shift + / (BF)
N N (4E)
None None 4
M M (4D)
=
0
VK_OEM_PLUS (BB)
0 (30) 4
END VK_END (23)
1
{
1 (31)
Shift + [ (DB)
A
2 2 (32)
}
3
Shift + ] (DD)
3 (33)
7
4 4 (34)
5 5 (35) 8
6 6 (36)
HOME
7
VK_HOME (24)
7 (37) A1
8 8 (38)
9 9 (39) A2
+ Shift + = (BB)
- VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
, VK_OEM_COMMA (BC) Z
. VK_OEM_PERIOD (BE)
EOB VK_OEM_1 (BA)
SP VK_SPACE (20)
INPUT VK_RETURN (0D)
CAN VK_BACK (08)
ALTER VK_ADD (6B)
INSERT VK_INSERT (2D)
DELETE VK_DELETE (2E)
→ VK_RIGHT (27)
← VK_LEFT (25)
551
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

↑ VK_UP (26)
↓ VK_DOWN (28)
PAGE↑ VK_PRIOR (21)
1 PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
ABC/abc VK_CAPITAL (14)
2 SHIFT
CTRL
VK_SHIFT (10)
VK_CONTROL (11)
ALT VK_MENU (12)
3 TAB VK_TAB (09)
ESC VK_ESCAPE (1B)
4 HELP
:::
VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
VK_NUMPAD9 (69)
Menu
4 RESET
POS VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
PROG VK_NUMPAD2 (62)
A OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE VK_NUMPAD5 (65)
7 GRAPH VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
CUSTOM VK_NUMPAD7 (67)
None None
8 SYSTEM VK_NUMPAD4 (64)
A1 Table A.4 (b) M-type ONGP Types

Key Key code
A2 (
O
Shift + 9 (39)
O (4F)
) Shift + +0 (30)
Z N N (4E)
E E (45)
G G (47)
C C (43)
P P (50)
U U (55)
X X (58)
V V (56)
Y Y (59)
W W (57)
Z Z (5A)
? Shift + / (BF)
Q Q (51)
552
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

, VK_OEM_COMMA (BC)
I I (49)
A A (41)
J
@
J (4A)
Shift + +2 (32)
1
K K (4B)
_
R
Shift + - (BD)
R (52)
2
# Shift + +3 (33)
M M (4D) 3
= VK_OEM_PLUS (BB)
S S (53)
* Shift + +8 (38) 4
T T (54)
+
L
Shift + = (BB)
L (4C) 4
[ VK_OEM_4 (DB)
F
]
F (46)
VK_OEM_6 (DD)
A
D D (44)
&
H
Shift + +7 (37)
H (48)
7
% Shift + +5 (35)
B B (42) 8
\ VK_OEM_5 (DC)
~ Shift + ` (C0)
$ Shift + +4 (34) A1
! Shift + +1 (31)
SP VK_SPACE (20)
` VK_OEM_3 (C0) A2
/ VK_OEM_2 (BF)
EOB
CAN
VK_OEM_1 (BA)
VK_BACK (08)
Z
^ Shift + +6 (36)
- VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
> Shift + . (BE)
< Shift + , (BC)
0 0 (30)
END VK_END (23)
1 1 (31)
{ Shift + [ (DB)
2 2 (32)
553
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

} Shift + ] (DD)
3 3 (33)
" Shift + ' (DE)
1 4
'
4 (34)
VK_OEM_7 (DE)
5 5 (35)
2 |
6
Shift + \ (DC)
6 (36)
HOME VK_HOME (24)
3 7 7 (37)
; VK_OEM_1 (BA)
8 8 (38)
4 : Shift + ; (BA)
9 9 (39)
4 ALTER
INSERT
VK_ADD (6B)
VK_INSERT (2D)
A INPUT VK_RETURN (0D)
→ VK_RIGHT (27)
7 ←
↑
VK_LEFT (25)
VK_UP (26)
↓ VK_DOWN (28)
8 PAGE↑ VK_PRIOR (21)
PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
A1 TAB
ESC
VK_TAB (09)
VK_ESCAPE (1B)
HELP VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
A2 ABC/abc VK_CAPITAL (14)
SHIFT VK_SHIFT (10)
Z CTRL
ALT
VK_CONTROL (11)
VK_MENU (12)
RESET
POS VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
PROG VK_NUMPAD2 (62)
OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE VK_NUMPAD5 (65)
GRAPH VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
SYSTEM VK_NUMPAD4 (64)
Menu VK_NUMPAD9 (69)
554
B-64647EN/02
Table A.4 (c) T-type ONGP Types

Key Key code
( Shift + 9 (39)
O O (4F)
)
N
Shift + +0 (30)
N (4E)
1
E E (45)
G G (47) 2
Q Q (51)
P P (50)
A A (41) 3
X X (58)
B
Z
B (42)
Z (5A) 4
D D (44)
C
?
C (43)
Shift + / (BF)
4
Y Y (59)
,
U
VK_OEM_COMMA (BC)
U (55)
A
J J (4A)
W W (57) 7
@ Shift + +2 (32)
H H (48)
_ Shift + - (BD) 8
V V (56)
# Shift + +3 (33)
M M (4D) A1
= VK_OEM_PLUS (BB)
S S (53)
* Shift + +8 (38) A2
T T (54)
+
L
Shift + = (BB)
L (4C)
Z
[ VK_OEM_4 (DB)
I I (49)
] VK_OEM_6 (DD)
K K (4B)
& Shift + +7 (37)
R R (52)
% Shift + +5 (35)
F F (46)
\ VK_OEM_5 (DC)
~ Shift + ` (C0)
555
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

$ Shift + +4 (34)
! Shift + +1 (31)
SP VK_SPACE (20)
1 `
/
VK_OEM_3 (C0)
VK_OEM_2 (BF)
EOB VK_OEM_1 (BA)
2 CAN VK_BACK (08)
^ Shift + +6 (36)
3 -
>
VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
Shift + . (BE)
4 <
0
Shift + , (BC)
0 (30)
END VK_END (23)
4 1 1 (31)
{ Shift + [ (DB)
2 2 (32)
A } Shift + ] (DD)
3 3 (33)
" Shift + ' (DE)
7 4 4 (34)
' VK_OEM_7 (DE)
5 5 (35)
8 | Shift + \ (DC)
6 6 (36)
A1 HOME
7
VK_HOME (24)
7 (37)
; VK_OEM_1 (BA)
A2 8
:
8 (38)
Shift + ; (BA)
9 9 (39)
Z ALTER VK_ADD (6B)

INSERT VK_INSERT (2D)
INPUT VK_RETURN (0D)
→ VK_RIGHT (27)
← VK_LEFT (25)
↑ VK_UP (26)
↓ VK_DOWN (28)
PAGE↑ VK_PRIOR (21)
PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
TAB VK_TAB (09)
556
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

ESC VK_ESCAPE (1B)
HELP VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
ABC/abc VK_CAPITAL (14)
SHIFT VK_SHIFT (10) 1
CTRL VK_CONTROL (11)
ALT
RESET
VK_MENU (12)
2
POS VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
PROG VK_NUMPAD2 (62) 3
OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE
GRAPH
VK_NUMPAD5 (65)
VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
4
SYSTEM VK_NUMPAD4 (64) 4
Menu VK_NUMPAD9 (69)
A
 Horizontal soft keys
Table A.4 (d) Horizontal soft keys
7
Key Key code
1st from left VK_F11 (7A)
2nd from left VK_F1 (70) 8
3rd from left VK_F2 (71)
4th from left VK_F3 (72) A1
5th from left VK_F4 (73)
7th from left VK_F6 (75) A2
9th from left VK_F8 (77) Z
12th from left VK_F12 (7B)
 Right Vertical Soft Keys

Table A.4 (e) Right Vertical Soft Keys
Key Key code
1st from bottom VK_F13 (7C)
2nd from bottom VK_F14 (7D)
557
B-64647EN/02
Key Key code

3rd from bottom VK_F15 (7E)
4th from bottom VK_F16 (7F)
5th from bottom VK_F17 (80)
1 6th from bottom VK_F18 (81)
2 8th from bottom

9th from bottom
VK_F20 (83)
VK_F21 (84)
3 11th from bottom VK_F23 (86)
4
 Left Vertical Soft Keys (for 19 Inch Only)
4 Table A.4 (f) Left Vertical Soft Keys (for 19 Inch Only)
Key Key code
1st from bottom Shift + VK_F13 (7C)
A 2nd from bottom Shift + VK_F14 (7D)
3rd from bottom Shift + VK_F15 (7E)
7 4th from bottom Shift + VK_F16 (7F)

5th from bottom Shift + VK_F17 (80)
8 7th from bottom Shift + VK_F19 (82)
A1 9th from bottom Shift + VK_F21 (84)

A2 12th from bottom Shift + VK_F24 (87)
558
B-64647EN/02
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST
A.5
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION

LIST
1
The following table shows RGB values for color definition for the iHMI screen.
 Basic screen
2
5 3
2 4
3
6 4
8 A
7
7
8
1
A1
A2
Z
4
Fig. A.5 (a) Color Definition Targets on the Basic Screen
559
B-64647EN/02
Table A.5 (a) Color Definition Targets on the Basic Screen

Black Navy blue Gray Blue gray
1 Base background RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(75, 85, RGB(58, 76, RGB(7, 9, 57)
color 95) 87)
1 2 Tile color RGB(54, 54,
54)
RGB(196,
216, 235)
RGB(54, 54,
54)
RGB(182,
199, 223)
3 Fixed text color RGB(180, RGB(11, 110, RGB(180, RGB(12, 115,
2 230, 220) 130) 230, 220) 133)
4 Warning text color RGB(248, RGB(229, RGB(248, RGB(235, 97,
141, 3) 134, 27) 159, 3) 0)
3 5 Window title color RGB(255, RGB(255, RGB(255, RGB(255,
255, 255) 255, 255) 255, 255) 255, 255)
4 6 Window frame color RGB(48, 13,

(Second layer) 133)
RGB(48, 13,
133)
RGB(48, 13,
133)
RGB(48, 13,
133)
7 Soft key color RGB(90, 90, RGB(155, RGB(125, RGB(103,
4 (Base/first layer)
8 Soft key color
90)
RGB(40, 40,
170, 185)
RGB(52, 70,
144, 145) 122, 143)
RGB(98, 101, RGB(71, 72,
(Base/second layer) 40) 88) 89 73)
A
 Individual setting screen
7 9 18 10 13
8 11
A1
12
A2
Z
16
14,15 17
Fig. A.5 (b) Color Definition Targets on the Individual Settings Screen
560
B-64647EN/02
Table A.5 (b) Color Definition Targets on the Individual Settings Screen
9 Cursor color RGB(0, 180, RGB(0, 180, RGB(0, 93, RGB(0, 93,
(With focus) 255) 255) 101) 101)
10 Cursor color
(Without focus)
RGB(203,
230, 255)
RGB(203,
230, 255)
RGB(48, 13,
133)
RGB(48, 13,
133)
1
11 Variable text color RGB(245, RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(255, RGB(0, 0, 0)
245, 245) 255, 255) 2
12 Text color for RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0)
Text color
13 Window frame color RGB(0, 93, RGB(0, 93, RGB(0, 93, RGB(0, 93, 3
(First layer) 101) 101) 101) 101)
14 Soft key color
(First layer window/
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101) 4
first layer)
15 Soft key color
(First layer window/
RGB(0, 64,
59)
RGB(0, 64,
59)
RGB(0, 64,
59)
RGB(0, 64,
59) 4
second layer)
16 Soft key text color
(Enabled)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245) A
17 Soft key text color RGB(140, RGB(140, RGB(140, RGB(140,
(Disabled)
18 Selected text color
140, 140)
RGB(0, 0, 0)
140, 140)
RGB(0, 0, 0)
140, 140)
RGB(0, 0, 0)
140, 140)
RGB(0, 0, 0)
7
8
A1
A2
Z
561
B-64647EN/02
 Slide
1
2
3
4
4
19,20
A
Fig. A.5 (c) Color Definition Targets on the Slide
7
Table A.5 (c) Color Definition Targets on the Slide
8 19 Soft key color

Black
RGB(48, 72,
Navy blue
RGB(48, 72,
Gray
RGB(48, 72,
Blue gray
RGB(48, 72,
(Slide/first layer) 179) 179) 179) 179)
A1 20 Soft key color RGB(0, 23,
(Slide/second layer) 133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
A2
Z
562
B-64647EN/02
 Second layer window
1
2
3
4
4
21,22 A
Fig. A.5 (d) Color Definition Targets on the Second Layer Window
7
Table A.5 (d) Color Definition Targets on the Second Layer Window
21 Soft key color

Black
RGB(115, 50,
Navy blue
RGB(115, 50,
Gray
RGB(115, 50,
Blue gray
RGB(115, 50,
8
(Second layer 146) 146) 146) 146)
window/
first layer)
A1
22 Soft key color RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13,
(Second layer
window/
133) 133) 133) 133)
A2
second layer)
563
B-64647EN/02
 Third layer window
23
1
2
3
4
4
A
7
24,25
8 Fig. A.5 (e) Color Definition Targets on the Third Layer Window
A1 Table A.5 (e) Color Definition Targets on the Third Layer Window
A2 23 Window frame color RGB(128,

(Third layer window) 128, 119)
RGB(128,
128, 119)
RGB(128,
128, 119)
RGB(128,
128, 119)
24 Soft key color (Third RGB(128, RGB(128, RGB(128, RGB(128,
Z layer window/first
layer)
128, 119) 128, 119) 128, 119) 128, 119)
25 Soft key color (Third RGB(77, 77, RGB(77, 77, RGB(77, 77, RGB(77, 77,
layer window/ 68) 68) 68) 68)
second layer)
564
B-64647EN/02
A.6 CNCAPPCLIENT FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A.6
A.6 CNCAPPCLIENT FUNCTION SPECIFI-

CATIONS
This section describes the CncAppClient library function specifications. 1
A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications 2

A.6.1
* Use Unicode (UTF-16) for the language code.

3
Table A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications
Item Specification 4
Start client process
Function name BOOL StartAppClient()
Argument
4
Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Description Starts the client process.
To register an application as a client to Application Manager, add this
A
process to when the application starts.
End client process 7
Function name BOOL EndAppClient()
Argument
8
Description Ends the client process.
process to when the application closes.
A1
Register client
Function name BOOL RegisterClient(LPCTSTR appName, UINT msg, HWND winid) A2
Argument LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
UINT msg: Window message used for notification from
Application Manager Z
HWND winid: Application window handle
Description Registers an application as a client to Application Manager.
process after StartAppClient().
When an application registered as a client is inactive (when an
application registered to another iHMI is running), the application is
hidden.
Start application
Function name BOOL ExecuteApp(LPCTSTR appName, LPCTSTR subject)
565
B-64647EN/02
Item Specification
LPCTSTR subject: Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed to the application
1 Return value
Description
Returns TRUE if the application starts up and FALSE if not.
Starts an application with the identifier ID appName. The subject value
is sent to the application.
2 If the return value is FALSE, the application startup may be in the wait
state. If so, do not call other Application Manager functions until the
3 application is started up.

The wait state can be checked with the IsExecutionPending function.
If you start an application by using the ExecuteApp function, the last

4 activated application will be as follows.
Last activated application Display state
4 Home screen Displayed on background

Application registered to the client Hidden
Other application Displayed on background
A Check application startup pending
Function name BOOL IsExecutionPending ()
7 Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the application startup is in the wait state and FALSE if
not.
8 Description Checks if the application startup is in the wait state. Use this function
after the ExecuteApp function.
A1 Check application startup

Function name BOOL IsAppExecuted(LPCTSTR appName)
A2 Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Description Checks if an application with the identifier ID appName is running.
Z Retrieve application window handle

Function name HWND GetAppHwnd(LPCTSTR appName)
Return value Returns the application window handle if the process succeeds and
NULL if it fails.
Description Retrieves the window handle of an application with the identifier ID
appName.
Activate application
Function name BOOL ActivateApp(LPCTSTR appName, bool active)
boot active: Active state
566
B-64647EN/02
Item Specification
Description Activates an application with the identifier ID appName if active is true
and deactivates it if active is false.
Retrieve application subject value
Function name LPCTSTR GetSubject() 1
Argument
Return value Returns the application subject value if the process succeeds and
NULL if it fails. 2
Description Retrieves the application subject value.
Set application subject value
Function name BOOL SetAppSubject(LPCTSTR appName, LPCTSTR subject)
3
LPCTSTR subject: Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed to the application
4
Description Passes the subject value to an application with the identifier ID 4
appName.
Set application display size
Function name BOOL SetAppDisplay(UINT32 inchx10, const POINT* pt)
A
Argument UINT32 inchx10: Value ten times the application display size (select
104, 150, or 190).
const POINT* pt: Application display position (coordinate on the upper
7
left corner).
8
Description Set the application display size. You can apply the settings by saving
the changes (executing SaveApps()) and restarting the application
(executing RestartApps()). A1
Save setting changes
Function name BOOL SaveApps()
Argument A2
Description Saves the setting changes. This applies the changes to setting.xml.
Z
End Application
Function name BOOL QuitApps()
Argument
Description Exits the iHMI application.
Restart application
Function name BOOL RestartApps()
Argument
Description Restarts the iHMI application.
567
B-64647EN/02
Item Specification
Disable application startup
Function name BOOL DisableApp(LPCTSTR appName, BOOL disabled)
1 BOOL disabled: TRUE (Disables application startup), FALSE (Resets
the disabled state)
2 Description Enables/disables application startup.
Obtain application startup disabled state
3 Function name
Argument
BOOL IsAppDisabled(LPCTSTR appName)
LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
Return value Returns TRUE if application startup is disabled and FALSE if it enabled.
4 Description Obtains the application startup disabled state.
Call Home screen
4 Function name
Argument
BOOL GoAppHome()
A Description Calls the Home screen.
Call last screen
7 Function name
Argument
BOOL GoAppBack()
8 Description Calls the last used screen.
Retrieve currently selected display language
A1 Function name
Argument
LPCTSTR GetAppLanguage()
Return value Two-character language code defined in ISO639-1. (en, ja, etc.)
A2 However, a three-character code is used instead only for Simplified
Chinese (chs) and Traditional Chinese (cht).
The language settings are defined in settings.xml.
Z Description Retrieves the display language currently selected.
When the language is changed, a message is sent to show that the
wParam value of the window message specified in the argument of the
RegisterClient function is LANGUAGE_CHANGED.
Set display language
Function name BOOL SetAppLanguage(LPCTSTR language)
Argument Two-character language code defined in ISO639-1. (en, ja, etc.)
However, a three-character code is used instead only for Simplified
Chinese (chs) and Traditional Chinese (cht).
The language settings are defined in settings.xml.
Description Sets the language displayed on iHMI.
568
B-64647EN/02
Item Specification
Retrieve currently selected theme
Function name LPCTSTR GetAppColor()
Argument
Return value Character string representing the theme. (black, navy, gray, blue) 1
Character strings black, navy, gray, and blue correspond to colors
"black", "navy", "gray", and "blue gray" respectively.
Description Retrieves the theme currently selected. 2
When the theme is changed, a message is sent to show that the
wParam value of the window message specified in the argument of the
RegisterClient function is COLOR_CHANGED. 3
Set theme
Function name
Argument
BOOL SetAppColor(LPCTSTR color)
Character string representing the theme. (black, navy, gray, blue)
4
Character strings black, navy, gray, and blue correspond to colors
Return value
"black", "navy", "gray", and "blue gray" respectively.
Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
4
Description Sets the theme for iHMI.
Lock key input A
Function name BOOL SetAppKeyLockBits(UINT32 bits)
Argument Bit string specifying a key to be locked.
Bit0 - 9: VK_NUMPAD0 to VK_NUMPAD9 (corresponding to function 7
keys)
Bit10: VK_MENU (ALT key) + VK_TAB
Applies a lock with bit ON or releases a lock with bit OFF. 8
Description Applies a lock on the specified key input. A value specified by the
argument is reflected immediately. A1
This function is available with iHMI Ver. 4.0 onward.
Retrieve information center display status
Function name BOOL IsInfoCenterVisible()
A2
Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the information center is displayed and FALSE if not. Z
Description Checks if the information center is displayed on an application.
This function is available with iHMI Ver. 7.0 onward.
Record log to operation history
Function name BOOL SendLog(LPCTSTR appName, LPCTSTR logtext)
LPCTSTR logtext: Text to be recorded to the operation history
569
B-64647EN/02
Item Specification
When the temporary buffer inside the operation history is

full, the function returns FALSE, and the argument logtext
1 information may not be recorded to the operation history. In
 such a case, execute the function again. The data will be

successfully recorded.
2 NOTE
For better performance, however, it is recommended that
you should not retry the function but discard the data to be
recorded.
3
Description The argument appName must be text that can be recognized by the
notification source application.
4 The text specified in the argument logtext is recorded to the operation
history.
The format of recorded text is "logtext: appName".
4 Up to 511 characters can be registered to the operation history. If text
contains 512 or more characters, it is truncated to 511 characters.
Record key input/touch input log to operation history
A Function name BOOL DisableInputLog(BOOL disabled)
Argument BOOL disabled: Not record the key input/touch input log (TRUE) /
Record the key input/touch input log (FALSE)
7 Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Description Specify whether or not to prohibit recording the key input/touch input
8 log.
A1
A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message
A.6.2
A2 Table A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message

Message Description
Z APP_ACTIVATED Application becomes active.
APP_DEACTIVATED Application becomes inactive.
APP_SHUTDOWN Application has been exited.
APP_CHANGED Active application has been changed.
APP_SUBJECT_ Subject has been changed.
CHANGED
APP_ACTIVATING Application is attempting to be active.
COMMAND_ Command to Application Manager is completed.
COMPLETED
LANGUAGE_CHANGED Display language has been changed.
COLOR_CHANGED Theme color has been changed.
570
B-64647EN/02
Message Description
INFOCENTER_SHOWN Information center is displayed.
INFOCENTER_HIDDEN Information center is hidden.
STARTUP_FINISHED iHMI startup is finished.
1
2
3
4
4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
571
B-64647EN/02
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION
A.7
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH

FUNCTION
1
A.7.1 PANEL iH
2
A.7.1
The PANEL iH has three memory storages: Main memory, Storage 1, and Storage
2. You can select 2, 4, 8, or 16 GB for a CF (compact flash) card used for Storage
2.
3 Select the size of a CF card to be mounted based on the amount of data that can
be saved in the iHMI basic function applications shown in Table A.7.1.1 (b) and
the amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application shown in Table
4 A.7.1.
4 A.7.1.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions

The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI basic function
A.7.1.1
applications. It may increase or decrease when functions are added in the future.
A
Table A.7.1.1 (a) Memory Usage in the iHMI Basic Function Applications
7 Application
Main memory
1GB
Storage 1
FROM:
Storage 2 (*2)
CF: 2GB CF: 4/8/16 GB
512MB
8 OS+ file system

Home screen
220MB
70MB
120MB
30MB
130MB 140MB
CNC Operation Screen 70MB 100MB 100MB 150MB
A1 Maintenance screen
PC Operation
10MB
10MB
10MB
10MB
Data Logger 20MB 10MB 230MB 650MB
A2 Maintenance Manager
Tool Manager
50MB
30MB
10MB
10MB
130MB
200MB
130MB
350MB
Calendar 20MB 10MB 10MB 20MB
Z Whiteboard
Manual Viewer
30MB
50MB
10MB
20MB
50MB
100MB
100MB
100MB
Browser 30MB 10MB
SERVO Viewer 70MB 15MB 100MB 300MB
Total (*1) 730MB 380MB 1GB 2 GB
*1: You can set which applications are registered with the Home screen and
enabled. Therefore, the actual total usage is the total of applications registered
with the Home screen.
*2: The maximum available capacity of some applications varies depending on the
size of Storage 2. For details, see "Table A.7.1.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can
Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function Applications".
The following table shows the differences in the amount of data that can be saved
in the iHMI basic function applications depending on the size of Storage 2.
572
B-64647EN/02
Table A.7.1.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function
Applications
Storage 2
Application
CF: 2GB CF: 4/8/16 GB 1
CNC Operation Screen Diagnosis data image Diagnosis data image
500 KB x 100 images 500 KB x 200 images
Tool Manager
Data Logger
1000 tools
230MB
2000 tools
650MB
2
(For 4 hours at 1 ms cycle) (For 12 hours at 1 ms cycle)
Calendar 10 MB
(20 records, 5 years)
20 MB
(20 records, 10 years)
3
Whiteboard 50 records 100 records
SERVO Viewer 10 records 30 records
4
A.7.1.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application 4
The machine manufacturers can use the amount of memory shown in Table A.7.1
A.7.1.2
for their own application according to the size of the selected Storage 2.
A
Table A.7.1 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application
Application
Main memory Storage 2 7
1GB CF: 2GB CF: 4GB CF: 8 GB CF: 16GB
MTB application 250MB 500MB 1GB 4GB 10GB
8
A.7.2 For PANEL iH Pro

A1
A.7.2
The PANEL iH Pro has two memory storages: Main memory and storage. You can
select the main memory from the three sizes (2/4/8 GB) and the storage from SSD A2
(three sizes: 16/32/64 GB) or HDD (500 GB only). The storage is normally
partitioned into two areas (Storage 1 and Storage 2).
Select the size of the main memory and storage to be mounted based on the Z
amount of data that can be saved in the iHMI basic function applications shown in
Table A.7.2.1 (b) and the amount of memory that can be used in the MTB
application shown in Table A.7.2.1 (a) and Table A.7.2.1 (b).
573
B-64647EN/02
A.7.2.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions

The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI basic function
A.7.2.1
applications. It may increase or decrease when functions are added in the future.
1 Table A.7.2.1 (a) Memory Usage in the iHMI Basic Function Applications
Storage 2 (*2)
Application Main memory Storage 1 SSD: 32/64
2 SSD: 16GB
GB, HDD
OS+ file system 900MB 11GB 100MB 200MB
Home screen 120MB 30MB
3 CNC Operation Screen 110MB 140MB 100MB 150MB
Maintenance screen 20MB 10MB
PC Operation 30MB 10MB
4 Data Logger 40MB 10MB 230MB 650MB
Maintenance Manager 60MB 10MB 130MB 130MB
Tool Manager 40MB 10MB 200MB 350MB
4 Calendar 40MB 10MB 10MB 20MB
Whiteboard 50MB 10MB 50MB 100MB
Manual Viewer 60MB 20MB 100MB 100MB
A Browser 50MB 10MB
SERVO Viewer 100MB 15MB 100MB 300MB
Machining Simulation 50MB 15MB
7 Total (*1) 1670MB 11.3GB 1GB 2 GB
*1: You can set which applications are registered with the Home screen and
8 enabled. Therefore, the actual total usage is the total of applications registered
with the Home screen.
*2: The maximum available capacity of some applications varies depending on the
A1 size of Storage 2. For details, see "Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can
Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function Applications".
A2 The following table shows the differences in the amount of data that can be saved
in the iHMI basic function applications depending on the storage size.
Z Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function
Applications
Storage 2
Application
SSD (16 GB) SSD: 32/64 GB, HDD
CNC Operation Screen Diagnosis data image Diagnosis data image
500 KB x 100 images 500 KB x 200 images
Tool Manager 1000 tools 2000 tools
Data Logger 230MB 650MB
(For 4 hours at 1 ms cycle) (For 12 hours at 1 ms cycle)
Calendar 10 MB 20 MB
(20 records, 5 years) (20 records, 10 years)
Whiteboard 50 records 100 records
SERVO Viewer 10 records 30 records
574
B-64647EN/02
A.7.2.2 Memory usage in optional functions

The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI optional function
A.7.2.2
applications. The optional functions require 4 GB or larger main memory.
Table A.7.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application 1
Application Main memory Storage 1 Storage 2
Machine Collision 700MB 50MB 200MB
Avoidance 2
Cycle Time Estimation 200MB 50MB 300MB
Interactive 100MB 50MB 300MB
Programming 3
A.7.2.3 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application 4

The machine manufacturers can use the amount of memory shown in Table
A.7.2.1
A.7.2.1 (a) and Table A.7.2.1 (b) for their own application according to the size of
the selected main memory and storage.
4
Table A.7.2.1 (a) Amount of Main Memory That Can Be Used in the MTB A
Application
Application
2GB
Main memory
4GB 8GB
7
MTB application 300 MB 1GB 4GB
8
Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Storage Memory That Can Be Used in the MTB
Application
storage
A1
Application
SSD: 16GB SSD: 32GB SSD: 64GB HDD
MTB application 1GB 10GB 40GB 460GB A2
Z
575
B-64647EN/02
1
2
3
4
4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
576
B-64647EN/02
INDEX 1
A CncAppClient Notification Message ................ 570 2

Adding an Application to the iHMI ................... 360 Comparison between Machine Collision Avoidance
Adding Failure Diagnosis Messages ................. 48 Function and 3D Interference Check
Adding status icons and character string Function ..................................................... 201 3
display .......................................................... 39 Condition to use the machining cycle creation
Adding the shutdown button to the Home screen function ....................................................... 192
(PANEL iH Pro only) .................................... 37 Condition to use the machining simulation 4
Alarm and operator message types that can be function ....................................................... 121
added ........................................................... 48 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE
Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB ENTIRE iHMI ............................................... 22 5
application ........................................ 573, 575 Configuring the individual path settings .......... 232
APPENDIX ...................................................... 539 Copying/moving program folders .................... 173
Application ...................................................... 345 Creating a 3D machine model ......................... 202 6
Application definition file ........................... 22, 92 Creating a New Customized Screen ............... 376
APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ....................... 540 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin) 355
Application Manager ....................................... 363 CREATING A USER APPLICATION .............. 359 7
AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP ........................ 402 Creating different language messages ............. 62
Auxiliary function time setting window .............. 94 Creating failure diagnosis messages ................ 54
Creating model figures .................................... 251 8
B CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES .... 355
Backing up iHMI data ............................ 408, 412 Customizable Applications ................................ 20
Backing Up to External Memory ..................... 403 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC
A1
PICTURE ................................................... 376
C
Calling a specified manual from an external
Customizing display items on the table display
screen .......................................................... 76 A2
application .................................................. 369 Customizing the character strings on the cycle
Changing a Customized Screen ..................... 379 creation screen ........................................... 196
Changing the background of the Home screen 37 Customizing the Home Screen ......................... 37
Z
Changing the path icon ..................................... 45 Customizing the table column size in the table
Changing the text weight in the message display screen .............................................. 81
display .......................................................... 47 Customizing the tool list (tree view) on the tool
Changing the traveling direction guide ............ 109 individual settings screen ............................. 85
Changing to display the first page of soft keys 195
Checking the iHMI version .............................. 406 D
Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ............................ 392
(for PANEL iH Pro only) ............................. 407 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE,
CNC Operation Screen Settings ......................... 4 AND MEMO ................................................ s-1
CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID Description Example of the Vertical Soft Key Setting
(subject VALUE) ........................................ 541 File ............................................................. 389
CncAppClient Function Specifications ............ 565
i-1
B-64647EN/02
Description of the Web browser configuration Environments required to create failure diagnosis
file ...............................................................342 messages ..................................................... 49
Detecting maintenance items from an external External application integration file ................. 324
application ...................................................320
Diagnosable numbers ........................................48 F
1 Disabling the arbitrary axis switch function FANUC PICTURE ............................................. 14
(Manual Guide i) .........................................345 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST 559
2 Disabling the EWF ...........................................413 Folder configuration ........................................ 408
Displaying a specific screen when starting the user Folder configuration for import ........................ 339
application ...................................................368 For PANEL iH ................................................. 572
Displaying custom macro variable numbers and For PANEL iH Pro ........................................... 573
3 values .........................................................115 Functions of the Spindle Rotation
Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status Direction Icon ............................................. 493
Display Area .................................................39
4 Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore
Results ........................................................400
G
General Parameters of the 3D Interference Check
Displaying the soft key to call the cycle input screen Function ..................................................... 519
5 ......................................................................348
Displaying the soft key to call the machining drawing
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ............................. s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION
screen .........................................................347 DEVELOPMENT ......................................... s-4
6 Displaying the soft key to call the machining
simulation screen ........................................349
Guide sizes that can be registered in the
Maintenance Manager ............................... 333
Displaying the soft key to call the NC statement
7 conversion function screen .........................347

Displaying the soft key to call the program restart
H
Hiding the modal G codes ............................... 101
screen .........................................................350 Home Screen Settings ........................................ 3
8 Displaying the startup screen ..........................371 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION .. 362
HOW TO READ THE PARAMETER
E ILLUSTRATION ......................................... 426
A1 Editing Data Items to Be Collected by the Data
Logger Function ..........................................298
HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE ............ 406
Editing Parts Data to Be Managed by the I

Maintenance Manager Function .................304
A2 Editing the Version Information ........................343
iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ........ 20
iHMI AUTOMATIC STARTUP SETTING
Enabling the 3D interference check function ...245 (PANEL iH Pro) ............................................ 16
Z Enabling the EWF ............................................415

Enabling/disabling the conventional screen call
iHMI Hardware Performance Table .................. 15
iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW ................................... 2
function .......................................................346 iHMI Whole Configuration File .......................... 28
Enabling/disabling the cutting condition calculation Importing/exporting setting data for 3D interference
function .......................................................154 check .......................................................... 290
Enabling/disabling the multi-path display INCORPORATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC
function .........................................................99 SYSTEM .................................................... 417
Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function ..97 Installing the iHMI ................................. 409, 414
Enabling/disabling the turning function and milling
function .......................................................144 L
Enabling/disabling the workpiece measurement Limiting display items in the tool catalog data
function .......................................................118 management screen .................................... 73
ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED FOR List of output text data ..................................... 404
iHMI SETUP .................................................12
i-2
B-64647EN/02
Log file ............................................................ 302 Overview of Vertical Soft Key Customization .. 385
Log item configuration file ............................... 298
P
M PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A
Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table .14, 50 MACHINING PROGRAM ........................... 510
Machining simulation function settings ........... 125 Parameter of Program Content Display .......... 507 1
Machining simulation screen ........................... 136 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION
Machining/Measurement Cycle Settings ............. 9 KEYS .......................................................... 435
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID Parameter of Sequence Numbers ................... 510 2
(subject VALUE) ........................................ 542 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS .... 434
Maintenance items display switch configuration file PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF
..................................................................... 308 DIGITS FOR PROGRAM NUMBERS ........ 438 3
Maintenance items protection setting file ........ 312 Parameter to Display Feedrate Information .... 484
MAINTENENCE .............................................. 391 Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate ...... 486
Manual information settings file ...................... 335 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE ........... 439 4
Manual viewer tag list ..................................... 337 PARAMETERS ............................................... 425
Manually setting in the P-CODE variable ........ 182 Parameters of Axis Name Switching ............... 460
MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI .................... 550 Parameters of Display during Program Backward by 5
Memory usage in optional functions ............... 575 Manual Handle Retrace ............................. 508
Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and
Memory usage in the iHMI basic
functions ........................................... 572, 574 Subscripts .................................................. 488 6
Monitoring interference check ......................... 293 Parameters of General Modal Information ...... 476
Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm
N Display ....................................................... 453 7
Naming rules to update a manual file ............. 340 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION
DISPLAY .................................................... 479
NC tool database management ........................ 70
Notes on Using the Japanese/Chinese Input PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM 8
Function ....................................................... 65 DISPLAY .................................................... 504
Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary
O Function) .................................................... 475 A1
Opening the cycle input screen on the cycle Parameters of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary
selection screen by tapping ....................... 193 Function) .................................................... 472
Opening/closing the custom macro variable Parameters of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary A2
slide ............................................................ 114 Function) .................................................... 474
Operating in Screens ...................................... 418 Parameters of Modal F Codes ........................ 468
Outputting the display switch settings of the Parameters of Modal G Codes ........................ 462 Z
maintenance items ..................................... 308 Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes .. 464
Outputting the estimation result to an XML file . 95 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION
Outputting the maintenance items protection DISPLAY .................................................... 462
setting ........................................................ 319 Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M
Overlapping the user application with the iHMI Codes) ........................................................ 471
application .................................................. 364 Parameters of Modal S Codes ........................ 470
OVERVIEW ............................................... 1, 417 Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and
OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER SMAX ......................................................... 467
APPLICATION ........................................... 360 Parameters of Modal T Codes ........................ 469
Overview of Creating an Application ............... 362 Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes ........ 468
Overview of the 3D interference check PARAMETERS OF MULTI-PATH EDIT .......... 432
function ...................................................... 242 Parameters of Program Numbers ................... 507
i-3
B-64647EN/02
Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes 456, 460

Switching ....................................................454 PMC signals used in external application
PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER integration .................................................. 325
STOP ..........................................................511 PREFACE ........................................................ p-1
PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER Preparation ..................................................... 406
1 DISPLAY .....................................................460 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance
PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION function ...................................................... 237
2 DISPLAY .....................................................488
Parameters of Spindle Speed Override ...........495
Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll) 355
Program Storage Files .................................... 355
Parameters of Subprogram Calls ....................504 PROGRAM-RELATED PARAMETERS .......... 497
PARAMETERS OF THE 3D INTERFERENCE Protecting maintenance items ......................... 310
3 CHECK FUNCTION ....................................519
Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed R
Meter ...........................................................486 Reflecting setting data for 3D interference
4 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit ..........484 check .......................................................... 293
Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed .........492 RELATED MANUALS ...................................... p-1
Parameters of the Current Load Ratio .............494 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH
5 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/ FUNCTION ................................................ 572
REMAINING TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............ 411, 414
TILES ..........................................................447 Restoring Data in a Batch ............................... 399
6 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO
VARIABLE LIST SLIDE ..............................512
Restoring Data Individually ............................. 400
PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION S

7 AVOIDANCE FUNCTION ...........................514 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................ s-1
PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING Saving Data in a Batch ................................... 398
SIMULATION FUNCTION ..........................443
Saving Data Individually .................................. 399
8 Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check
between Targets .........................................520
Setting a multi-path system ............................... 93
Setting a shortcut key ....................................... 25
Parameters of the Settings for Interference Check
Setting and operation flow of the 3D interference
A1 between Targets (at Cutting Feed during
Automatic Operation) ..................................529 check function ............................................ 245
Setting combinations of model figures as
Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter ............494
interference check targets .......................... 287
A2 Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter ..........493
PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Setting machine data to be displayed on the base
screen ........................................................ 102
FUNCTION .................................................440
Setting on the Manual Guide iscreen .............. 189
Z Parameters to Align Control Axes to
the Top ............................................. 457, 460
Setting parts placement information ............... 305
Setting program guidance messages ............. 145
Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying
Control Axes .................................... 457, 461 Setting the capacitor capacity again ............... 333
PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE Setting the common items .............................. 206
AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE .436 Setting the cycle input window not to close when
PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF opening a slide ........................................... 194
PROGRAMS ...............................................427 Setting the display items ................................. 247
Parameters to Display Axis Names ...... 447, 460 Setting the displayed contents on the setting
Parameters to Display Coordinate Values .......450 slide ............................................................ 112
Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and Setting the function to call
Subscripts ........................................ 448, 460 the Manual Guide iscreen .......................... 351
Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate Setting the function to highlight a program that is
System (Absolute/Overall) ..........................458 being edited ............................................... 156
i-4
B-64647EN/02
Setting the machine configuration ................... 209 Setting various settings of the machine collision
Setting the maintenance completion notification and avoidance function ..................................... 204
the maintenance completion control .......... 315 Settings for When an Application Is
Setting the memory card slot used for DNC Started/Running ............................................. 4
operation .................................................... 172 Setup for iHMI Functions .................................. 10
Setting the misoperation prevention function .. 160 Setup Overview ................................................... 3 1
Setting the moving axis ................................... 283 Showing/hiding the custom macro variable
Setting the MTB setting file ............................. 345 names ........................................................ 119
Setting the multi-edge tool management Signals available during the execution of the 2
function ........................................................ 92 machine collision avoidance function ......... 240
Setting the multi-path edit paths and order ....... 98 Simultaneous Display with Another
Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path Application .................................................. 381 3
display ........................................................ 100 Standard icons list ........................................... 306
Setting the reuse function and range selection Starting a specific application from the user
function for cycle free figure creation ......... 166 application .................................................. 366 4
Setting the soft keys on the machining drawing STARTING A USER APPLICATION FROM A
screen ........................................................ 153 VERTICAL SOFT KEY ............................... 385
Setting the start page ...................................... 342 Starting an application with a screen specified . 25 5
Setting the string search for programs on the data Starting NCBOOT32 ....................................... 417
server ......................................................... 154 Starting the Backup Screen ............................ 393
Setting the tool slide ........................................ 169 Storage Locations of Applications and Data ....... 2 6
Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode Supported systems ........................................... 93
icon display ................................................ 108 Switching maintenance items display ............. 307
Setting the workpiece coordinates slide .......... 111 7
Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount .. 477 T
Setting to hide the T codes ............................... 91 Tool management function customization ......... 72
SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS ................... 37
8
Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function ...... 92
U
Uninstalling the iHMI ....................................... 414
SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS ................. 19
Setting up M code input function ..................... 149
Updating the coordinate value on the Preset A1
Relative Coordinates window in synchronization
Setting up the 3D interference check function 242
with axis movement .................................... 119
Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen ............. 97
Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH A2
Setting Up the Cycle-related Window ............. 192 ..................................................................... 408
Setting up the fixed sentence function ............ 161 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH
SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT Pro .............................................................. 412 Z
APPLICATION ........................................... 298 User Application .............................................. 361
Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance User application ................................................ 12
Function ..................................................... 202
Using the Conventional Screen Call Function . 344
SETTING UP THE MACHINING
Using the iHMI Library .................................... 362
APPLICATION ............................................. 97
Using the old format tool catalog database ....... 75
Setting Up the Machining Cycle ...................... 174
Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function .......... 335 V
Setting Up the Measurement Cycle ................ 176 Vertical Soft Key Setting File ........................... 386
SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION 70
SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ... 335
Setting Up the Web Browser Function ............ 341
Setting Up Tool Manager .................................. 70
i-5
B-64647EN/02
1
2
A1
A2
i-6
B-64647EN/02
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents of Revision

02 Mar., 2020 • Addition of new functions. 1
01 Aug., 2017
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
r-1
B-64647EN/02
* B - 6 4 6 4 7 E N / 0 2 *

B-64647EN - 02 FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64647EN - 02 FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

< +HMI

© FANUC CORPORATION, 2017

In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or additional information

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

5 • Check that an appropriate feed speed value is specified for the

6 WARNING optimal speed is different depending on the operation. Operation with

A1 some reason, fully understand its function before change. An incorrect

GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC

3 in damage to a tool, machine, or workpiece. In the worst-case scenario,

4 data or a series of related data set by two or more above applications

List Table of Applications and Network Functions

Manual name Specification

2 FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B

2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 2

3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 3

2.3.2 Displaying Icons or Character Strings in the Status Display Area . 39

3 2.3.3.6 Creating different language messages ................................... 62

2.5.1.11 Opening/closing the custom macro variable slide ................. 114

2.5.6.7 Signals available during the execution of the machine collision

2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function ......................................... 341

5.10 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION

5.16.4 Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter ........................................ 494

1 5.18 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY .......... 504

3 5.19 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING

1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW

1 according to the machine.

2 • Home screen settings

3 • Machining/measurement cycle settings

5 CREATING A USER APPLICATION".

7 1.1.1 Storage Locations of Applications and Data

 iHMI application folder

Z  iHMI data folder

1.1.2 Home Screen Settings

 Adding an icon to the Home screen

Work target: Application definition file (apps-general.xml)

Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings-general.xml)

1.1.3 Settings for When an Application Is Started/Running

 Setting a shortcut key

2 Work target: Application definition file (apps-general.xml)

 Settings for when an application is started

4 Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings.xml) (*1)

5  Setting the application display position and size

Work target: iHMI whole configuration file (settings-general.xml) (*2)

A1 Work target: Configuration file (status.xml)

1.1.4 CNC Operation Screen Settings

 Enabling/disabling the multi-path edit function

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

 Setting the multi-path edit paths and order

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt) 7

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon display

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon display

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

3 REF mode base screens.

Work target: Add an image file (png) to the

5  Workpiece coordinates slide settings

7 Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

A1 Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)

Work target: Parameter VRN (No. 3207#5) setting

 Machining simulation function

Work target: MTB configuration file (setting_data.txt)